367
CRITERION-1 1.2.1. Percentage of new Courses introduced of the total number of courses across all Programmes offered during last five years.

CRITERION-1 · CSE UG Syllabus 51 ISE UG Syllabus 97 ME UG Syllabus 115 CV UG Syllabus 176 EVE PG Syllabus 201 ... List: For other Open Electives offered by other Boards, refer the

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    34

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

CRITERION-1

1.2.1. Percentage of new Courses introduced of the total

number of courses across all Programmes offered

during last five years.

AMC ENGINEERING COLLEGE

18th

KM, Bannerghatta Road Bengaluru 560083

INDEX

Name of the Certificate/ diploma introduced in last 5 years

PROGRAMME

CODE CONTENTS

PAGE

NUMBER

ECE UG Syllabus 1

EEE UG Syllabus 26

CSE UG Syllabus 51

ISE UG Syllabus 97

ME UG Syllabus 115

CV UG Syllabus 176

EVE PG Syllabus 201

ECS PG Syllabus 226

EPS PG Syllabus 250

CSE PG Syllabus 274

MMD PG Syllabus 307

MBA PG Syllabus 328

MCA PG Syllabus 353

1

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION B.E Electronics & Communication Engineering / Telecommunication Engineering (Common to Electronics & Communication and Telecommunication Engineering)

III SEMESTER

Sl. No

Subject Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week

Examination Credits

Theory Practical/ Drawing

Duration Theory/ Practical

Marks

I.A. Marks

Total Marks

1 15MAT31 Engineering Mathematics –III* 04 03 80 20 100 4

2 15EC32 Analog Electronics 04 03 80 20 100 4

3 15EC33 Digital Electronics 04 03 80 20 100 4

4 15EC34 Network Analysis 04 03 80 20 100 4

5 15EC35 Electronic Instrumentation 04 03 80 20 100 4

6 15EC36 Engineering Electromagnetics 04 03 80 20 100 4

7 15ECL37 Analog Electronics Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15ECL38 Digital Electronics Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 24 6 24 640 160 800 28

*Additional course for Lateral entry students only: 1

15MATDIP31 Additional Mathematics - I 03 03 80 -- 80 --

2

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION B.E Electronics & Communication Engineering / Telecommunication Engineering (Common to Electronics & Communication and Telecommunication Engineering)

IV SEMESTER

Sl. No

Subject Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week

Examination Credits

Theory Practical

/ Drawing

Duration Theory/ Practical

Marks

I.A. Marks

Total Marks

1 15MAT41 Engineering Mathematics –IV* 04 03 80 20 100 4

2 15EC42 Microprocessor 04 03 80 20 100 4

3 15EC43 Control Systems 04 03 80 20 100 4

4 15EC44 Signals and Systems 04 03 80 20 100 4

5 15EC45 Principles of Communication Systems 04 03 80 20 100 4

6 15EC46 Linear Integrated Circuits 04 03 80 20 100 4

7 15ECL47 Microprocessor Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15ECL48 Linear ICs and Communication Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 24 06 24 640 160 800 28

*Additional course for Lateral entry students only:

1 15MATDIP41 Additional Mathematics - II 03 03 80 -- 80 --

3

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

B.E.: Electronics & Communication Engineering

V SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours

/Week Examination

Credits

Theory Practical

/Drawing Duration

Theory/

Practical

Marks

I.A.

Marks

Total

Marks

1 15ES51 Management and Entrepreneurship Development

04 03 80 20 100 4

2 15EC52 Digital Signal Processing 04 03 80 20 100 4

3 15EC53 Verilog HDL 04 03 80 20 100 4

4 15EC54 Information Theory & Coding 04 03 80 20 100 4

5 15EC55X Professional Elective-1 03 03 80 20 100 3

6 15EC56X Open Elective-1 03 03 80 20 100 3

7 15ECL57 DSP Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15ECL58 HDL Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 22 06 24 640 160 800 26

Professional Elective-1 Open Elective – 1* (List offered by EC/TC Board only)

15EC551 Nanoelectronics 15EC561 Automotive Electronics

15EC552 Switching & Finite Automata Theory 15EC562 Object Oriented Programming Using C++

15EC553 Operating System 15EC563 8051 Microcontroller

15EC554 Electrical Engineering Materials

15EC555 MSP430 Microcontroller

1. Professional Elective: Elective relevant to chosen specialization/ branch. 2. * Open Elective List: For other Open Electives offered by other Boards, refer the Scheme of other Boards or Consolidated list in VTU Website.

4

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION B.E.: Electronics & Communication Engineering

VI SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours

/Week Examination

Credits

Theory Practical/

Drawing Duration

Theory/

Practical

Marks

I.A.

Marks

Total

Marks

1 15EC61 Digital Communication 04 03 80 20 100 4

2 15EC62 ARM Microcontroller & Embedded Systems 04 03 80 20 100 4

3 15EC63 VLSI Design 04 03 80 20 100 4

4 15EC64 Computer Communication Networks 04 03 80 20 100 4

5 15EC65X Professional Elective-2 03 03 80 20 100 3

6 15EC66X Open Elective-2 03 03 80 20 100 3

7 15ECL67 Embedded Controller Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15ECL68 Computer Networks Lab 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 22 6 24 640 160 800 26

Professional Elective-2 Open Elective – 2* (List offered by EC/TC Board only)

15EC651 Cellular Mobile Communication 15EC661 Data Structures Using C++

15EC652 Adaptive Signal Processing 15EC662 Power Electronics

15EC653 Artificial Neural Networks 15EC663 Digital System Design using Verilog

15EC654 Digital Switching Systems

15EC655 Microelectronics

1. Professional Elective: Elective relevant to chosen specialization/branch. 2. * Open Elective List: For other Open Electives offered by other Boards, refer the Scheme of other Boards or Consolidated list in VTU Website.

5

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

B.E.: Electronics & Communication Engineering

VII SEMESTER

Sl. No

Subject Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week

Examination 15EC

Theory Practical/Drawing

Duration I.A.

Marks

Theory/ Practical

Marks

Total Marks

1 15EC71 Microwave and Antennas 04 03 20 80 100 4

2 15EC72 Digital Image Processing 04 03 20 80 100 4

3 15EC73 Power Electronics 04 03 20 80 100 4

4 15XX74X Professional Elective-3 03 03 20 80 100 3

5 15EC75X Professional Elective-4 03 03 20 80 100 3

6 15ECL76 Advanced Communication Lab 1I+2P 03 20 80 100 2

7 15ECL77 VLSI Lab 1I+2P 03 20 80 100 2

8 15ECP78 Project Work Phase–I + Project work Seminar

03 100 - 100 2

TOTAL 18 09 21 240 560 800 24

Professional Elective-3 Professional Elective-4

15EC741 Multimedia Communication 15EC751 DSP Algorithms and Architecture

15EC742 Biomedical Signal Processing 15EC752 IoT and Wireless Sensor Networks

15EC743 Real Time Systems 15EC753 Pattern Recognition

15EC744 Cryptography 15EC754 Advanced Computer Architecture

15EC745 CAD for VLSI 15EC755 Satellite Communication

1. Project Phase –I + Project Work Seminar: Literature Survey, Problem Identification, Objectives and Methodology. Submission of Synopsis and Seminar.

6

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

B.E.: Electronics & Communication Engineering

VIII SEMESTER

Sl. No

Subject Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week

Examination Credits

Theory Practical/Drawing

Duration I.A.

Marks

Theory/ Practical

Marks

Total Marks

1 15EC81 Wireless Cellular and LTE 4G

Broadband

4 - 3 20 80 100 4

2 15EC82 Fiber Optics & Networks 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

3 15EC83X Professional Elective-5 3 - 3 20 80 100 3

4 15EC84 Internship/Professional Practice Industry Oriented 3 50 50 100 2

5 15ECP85 Project Work - 6 3 100 100 200 6

6 15ECS86 Seminar - 4 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 11 10 15 310 390 700 20

Professional Elective -5

15EC831 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems

15EC832 Speech Processing

15EC833 Radar Engineering

15EC834 Machine learning

15EC835 Network and Cyber Security

1. Internship / Professional Practice: To be carried between the (6th and 7th Semester) or (7th and 8th) Semester Vacation period.

7

B.E., III Semester, Electronics & Communication Engineering

/Telecommunication Engineering

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III

B.E., III Semester, Common to all Branches [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

Subject Code 15MAT31 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module)

Credits – 04

Course Objectives: This course will enable students to:

Introduce most commonly used analytical and numerical methods in the different engineering fields.

Learn Fourier series, Fourier transforms and Z-transforms, statistical methods, numerical methods.

Solve algebraic and transcendental equations, vector integration and calculus of variations.

Modules RBT Level

Module-1

Fourier Series: Periodic functions, Dirichlet’s condition, Fourier Series of periodic functions with period 2π and with arbitrary period 2c. Fourier series of even and odd functions. Half range Fourier Series, practical harmonic analysis-Illustrative examples from engineering field.

L1, L2, L4

Module-2

Fourier Transforms: Infinite Fourier transforms, Fourier sine and cosine transforms. Inverse Fourier transform. Z-transform: Difference equations, basic definition, z-transform-definition, Standard z-transforms, Damping rule, Shifting rule, Initial value and final value theorems (without proof) and problems, Inverse z-transform. Applications of z-transforms to solve difference equations.

L2, L3, L4

Module-3

Statistical Methods: Review of measures of central tendency and dispersion. Correlation-Karl Pearson’s coefficient of correlation-problems. Regression analysis- lines of regression (without proof) –Problems Curve Fitting: Curve fitting by the method of least squares- fitting of the curves of the form, y = ax + b, y = ax2 + bx + c and y = aebx. Numerical Methods: Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations by Regula- Falsi Method and Newton-Raphson method.

L3

Module-4

Finite differences: Forward and backward differences, Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulae. Divided differences- Newton’s divided difference formula. Lagrange’s interpolation formula and inverse interpolation formula (all formulae without proof)-Problems. Numerical integration: Simpson’s (1/3)th and (3/8)th rules, Weddle’s rule (without proof )–Problems.

L3

8

Module-5 Vector integration: Line integrals-definition and problems, surface and volume integrals-definition, Green’s theorem in a plane, Stokes and Gauss-divergence theorem(without proof) and problems. Calculus of Variations: Variation of function and Functional, variational problems. Euler’s equation, Geodesics, hanging chain, Problems.

L3, L4

L2, L4

Course outcomes: On completion of this course, students are able to:

Know the use of periodic signals and Fourier series to analyze circuits and system communications.

Explain the general linear system theory for continuous-time signals and digital signal processing using the Fourier Transform and z-transform.

Employ appropriate numerical methods to solve algebraic and

transcendental equations.

Apply Green's Theorem, Divergence Theorem and Stokes' theorem in various applications in the field of electro-magnetic and gravitational fields and fluid flow problems.

Determine the extremals of functionals and solve the simple problems of the calculus of variations.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full Question consisting of 16 marks

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. B.S. Grewal: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 43rd Ed., 2015. 2. E. Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons,10th Ed., 2015.

Reference Books: 1. N.P.Bali and Manish Goyal: A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi

Publishers, 7th Ed., 2010. 2. B.V.Ramana: "Higher Engineering Mathematics" Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006. 3. H. K. Dass and Er. Rajnish Verma: "Higher Engineering Mathematics", S. Chand

publishing, 1st edition, 2011.

Web Link and Video Lectures: 1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineID=111

2. http://www.khanacademy.org/ 3. http://www.class-central.com/subject/math

9

ADDITIONAL MATHEMATICS - I

B.E., III Semester, Common to all Branches (A Bridge course for Lateral Entry students of III Sem. B. E.)

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

Subject Code 15MATDIP31 IA Marks --

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

03 Exam marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

40 (08 Hours per Module)

Credits – 00

Course Objectives: This course will enable students to:

Acquire basic concepts of complex trigonometry, vector algebra, differential & integral calculus and vector differentiation.

Solve first order differential equations.

Modules RBT Level

Module-1

Complex Trigonometry: Complex Numbers: Definitions & properties. Modulus and amplitude of a complex number, Argand’s diagram, De-Moivre’s theorem (without proof). Vector Algebra: Scalar and vectors. Vectors addition and subtraction. Multiplication of vectors (Dot and Cross products). Scalar and vector triple products-simple problems.

L1

Module-2

Differential Calculus: Review of successive differentiation. Formulae for nth derivatives of standard functions- Liebnitz’s theorem (without proof). Polar curves–angle between the radius vector and the tangent pedal equation- Problems. Maclaurin’s series expansions- Illustrative examples. Partial Differentiation : Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions of two variables. Total derivatives-differentiation of composite and implicit function. Application to Jacobians.

L1, L2

Module-3

Integral Calculus: Statement of reduction formulae for sinnx, cosnx, and sinmx cosnx and evaluation of these with standard limits-Examples. Double and triple integrals-Simple examples.

L1, L2

Module-4

Vector Differentiation: Differentiation of vector functions. Velocity and acceleration of a particle moving on a space curve. Scalar and vector point functions. Gradient, Divergence, Curl and Laplacian (Definitions only). Solenoidal and irrotational vector fields-Problems.

L1, L2

Module-5

Ordinary differential equations (ODE’s): Introduction-solutions of first order and first degree differential equations: homogeneous, exact, linear differential equations of order one and equations reducible to above types.

L1, L2

10

Course outcomes: On completion of the course, students are able to:

Understand the fundamental concepts of complex numbers and vector algebra to analyze the problems arising in related area.

Use derivatives and partial derivatives to calculate rates of change of multivariate functions.

Learn techniques of integration including double and triple integrals to find area, volume, mass and moment of inertia of plane and solid region.

Analyze position, velocity and acceleration in two or three dimensions using the calculus of vector valued functions.

Recognize and solve first-order ordinary differential equations occurring in different branches of engineering.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full Question consisting of 16 marks

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Book: B.S. Grewal: Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Ed., 2015.

Reference Books: 1. E. Kreyszig: Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons,

10th Ed., 2015.

2. N.P.Bali and Manish Goyal: Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publishers, 7th Ed., 2007.

11

ANALOG ELECTRONICS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III (EC/TC)

Subject Code 15EC32 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Explain various BJT parameters, connections and configurations.

• Explain BJT Amplifier, Hybrid Equivalent and Hybrid Models.

• Explain construction and characteristics of JFETs and MOSFETs.

• Explain various types of FET biasing, and demonstrate the use of FET amplifiers. • Construct frequency response of BJT and FET amplifiers at various frequencies. • Analyze Power amplifier circuits in different modes of operation. • Construct Feedback and Oscillator circuits using FET.

Modules RBT Level

Module -1

BJT AC Analysis: BJT Transistor Modeling, The re transistor model, Common emitter fixed bias, Voltage divider bias, Emitter follower configuration. Darlington connection-DC bias; The Hybrid equivalent model, Approximate Hybrid Equivalent Circuit- Fixed bias, Voltage divider, Emitter follower configuration; Complete Hybrid equivalent model, Hybrid π Model.

L1, L2,L3

Module -2

Field Effect Transistors: Construction and Characteristics of JFETs, Transfer Characteristics, Depletion type MOSFET, Enhancement type MOSFET. FET Amplifiers: JFET small signal model, Fixed bias configuration, Self bias configuration, Voltage divider configuration, Common Gate configuration. Source-Follower Configuration, Cascade configuration.

L1, L2, L3

Module -3

BJT and JFET Frequency Response: Logarithms, Decibels, Low frequency response – BJT Amplifier with RL, Low frequency response-FET Amplifier, Miller effect capacitance, High frequency response – BJT Amplifier, High frequency response-FET Amplifier, Multistage Frequency Effects.

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

12

Feedback and Oscillator Circuits: Feedback concepts, Feedback connection types, Practical feedback circuits, Oscillator operation, FET Phase shift oscillator, Wien bridge oscillator, Tuned Oscillator circuit, Crystal oscillator, UJT construction, UJT Oscillator.

L1,L2, L3

Module -5

Power Amplifiers: Definition and amplifier types, Series fed class A

amplifier, Transformer coupled class A amplifier, Class B amplifier

operation and circuits, Amplifier distortion, Class C and Class D

amplifiers. Voltage Regulators: Discrete transistor voltage regulation -

Series and Shunt Voltage regulators.

L1, L2, L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Describe the working principle and characteristics of BJT, FET, Single stage, cascaded and feedback amplifiers.

Describe the Phase shift, Wien bridge, tuned and crystal oscillators using BJT/FET/UJT.

Calculate the AC gain and impedance for BJT using re and h parameters models for CE and CC configuration.

Determine the performance characteristics and parameters of BJT and FET amplifier using small signal model.

Determine the parameters which affect the low frequency and high frequency responses of BJT and FET amplifiers and draw the characteristics.

Evaluate the efficiency of Class A and Class B power amplifiers and voltage regulators.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have ten questions. • Each full question consists of 16 marks.

• There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of Three sub questions) from each module.

• Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from

each module.

Text Book:

Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronics devices and Circuit theory”, Pearson, 10th/11th Edition, 2012, ISBN:978-81-317-6459-6.

Reference Books:

1. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits Theory and Application”, 5th Edition ISBN:0198062257

2. Fundamentals of Microelectronics, Behzad Razavi, John Weily ISBN 2013 978-81-265-2307-8

3. J.Millman & C.C.Halkias―Integrated Electronics, 2nd edition, 2010, TMH. ISBN 0-07-462245-5

4. K. A. Navas, “Electronics Lab Manual”, Volume I, PHI, 5th Edition, 2015, ISBN:9788120351424.

13

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III (EC/TC)

Subject Code 15EC33 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Illustrate simplification of Algebraic equations using Karnaugh Maps and Quine- McClusky Techniques.

Design combinational logic circuits.

Design Decoders, Encoders, Digital Multiplexer, Adders, Subtractors and Binary Comparators.

Describe Latches and Flip-flops, Registers and Counters.

Analyze Mealy and Moore Models.

Develop state diagrams Synchronous Sequential Circuits.

Modules

RBT Level

Module – 1

Principles of combination logic: Definition of combinational logic, canonical forms, Generation of switching equations from truth tables, Karnaugh maps-3,4,5 variables, Incompletely specified functions (Don’t care terms) Simplifying Max term equations, Quine-McCluskey minimization technique, Quine-McCluskey using don’t care terms, Reduced prime implicants Tables.(Text 1, Chapter 3)

L1, L2, L3

Module -2

Analysis and design of combinational logic: General approach to combinational logic design, Decoders, BCD decoders, Encoders, digital multiplexers, Using multiplexers as Boolean function generators, Adders and subtractors, Cascading full adders, Look ahead carry, Binary comparators.(Text 1, Chapter 4)

L1, L2, L3

Module -3 Flip-Flops: Basic Bistable elements, Latches, Timing considerations, The master-slave flip-flops (pulse-triggered flip-flops): SR flip-flops,JK flip-flops, Edge triggered flip-flops, Characteristic equations. (Text 2, Chapter 6)

L1,L2

Module -4

Simple Flip-Flops Applications: Registers, binary ripple counters, synchronous binary counters, Counters based on shift registers, Design of a synchronous counters, Design of a synchronous mod-n counter using clocked T , JK , D and SR flip-flops. (Text 2, Chapter 6)

L1,L2, L3

14

Module -5

Sequential Circuit Design: Mealy and Moore models, State machine notation, Synchronous Sequential circuit analysis, Construction of state diagrams, counter design. (Text 1, Chapter 6)

L1, L2, L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Develop simplified switching equation using Karnaugh Maps and Quine-McClusky techniques.

Explain the operation of decoders, encoders, multiplexers, demultiplexers, adders, subtractors and comparators.

Explain the working of Latches and Flip Flops (SR,D,T and JK). Design Synchronous/Asynchronous Counters and Shift registers using Flip Flops.

Develop Mealy/Moore Models and state diagrams for the given clocked sequential

circuits.

Apply the knowledge gained in the design of Counters and Registers.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question consists of 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of Three sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Digital Logic Applications and Design, John M Yarbrough, Thomson Learning,

2001. ISBN 981-240-062-1. 2. Donald D. Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, McGraw Hill, 2002. ISBN 978-0-

07-052906-9. Reference Books: 1. D. P. Kothari and J. S Dhillon, “Digital Circuits and Design”, Pearson, 2016,

ISBN:9789332543539. 2. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, Prentice Hall of India, Third Edition. 3. Charles H Roth, Jr., “Fundamentals of logic design”, Cengage Learning. 4. K. A. Navas, “Electronics Lab Manual”, Volume I, PHI, 5th Edition, 2015, ISBN:

9788120351424.

15

NETWORK ANALYSIS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III (EC/TC)

Subject Code 15EC34 IA Marks 20

Number 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course enables students to:

Describe basic network concepts emphasizing source transformation, source shifting, mesh and nodal techniques to solve for resistance/impedance, voltage, current and power.

Explain network Thevenin’s, Millman’s, Superposition, Reciprocity, Maximum Power transfer and Norton’s Theorems and apply them in solving the problems related to Electrical Circuits.

Explain the behavior of networks subjected to transient conditions.

Use applications of Laplace transforms to network problems.

Describe Series and Parallel Combination of Passive Components as resonating circuits, related parameters and to analyze frequency response.

Study two port network parameters like Z, Y, T and h and their inter-relationships and applications.

Modules

RBT Level

Module -1 Basic Concepts: Practical sources, Source transformations, Network reduction using Star – Delta transformation, Loop and node analysis with linearly dependent and independent sources for DC and AC networks, Concepts of super node and super mesh.

L1, L2,L3,L4

Module -2

Network Theorems: Superposition, Reciprocity, Millman’s theorems, Thevinin’s and Norton’s theorems, Maximum Power transfer theorem.

L1, L2, L3,L4

Module -3

Transient behavior and initial conditions: Behavior of circuit elements under switching condition and their Representation, evaluation of initial and final conditions in RL, RC and RLC circuits for AC and DC excitations. Laplace Transformation & Applications: Solution of networks, step, ramp and impulse responses, waveform Synthesis.

L1, L2, L3,L4

Module -4 Resonant Circuits: Series and parallel resonance, frequency- response of series and Parallel circuits, Q–Factor, Bandwidth.

L1, L2, L3,L4

Module -5

16

Two port network parameters: Definition of Z, Y, h and Transmission parameters, modeling with these parameters, relationship between parameters sets.

L1, L2, L3,L4

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Determine currents and voltages using source transformation/ source shifting/ mesh/ nodal analysis and reduce given network using star-delta transformation/ source transformation/ source shifting.

Solve network problems by applying Superposition/ Reciprocity/ Thevenin’s/ Norton’s/ Maximum Power Transfer/ Millman’s Network Theorems and electrical laws to reduce circuit complexities and to arrive at feasible solutions.

Calculate current and voltages for the given circuit under transient conditions.

Apply Laplace transform to solve the given network.

Evaluate for RLC elements/ frequency response related parameters like resonant frequency, quality factor, half power frequencies, voltage across inductor and capacitor, current through the RLC elements, in resonant circuits

Solve the given network using specified two port network parameter like Z or Y or T or h.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question consists of 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of Three sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. M.E. Van Valkenberg (2000), “Network analysis”, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd

edition, 2000, ISBN: 9780136110958.

2. Roy Choudhury, “Networks and systems”, 2nd edition, New Age International Publications, 2006, ISBN: 9788122427677.

Reference Books: 1. Hayt, Kemmerly and Durbin “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, TMH 7th Edition,

2010. 2. J. David Irwin /R. Mark Nelms, “Basic Engineering Circuit Analysis”, John Wiley,

8thed, 2006. 3. Charles K Alexander and Mathew N O Sadiku, “ Fundamentals of Electric

Circuits”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Ed, 2009.

17

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III (EC/TC)

Subject Code 15EC35 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Define and describe accuracy and precision, types of errors, statistical and probability analysis.

Describe the operation of Ammeters, Voltmeters, Multimeters and develop circuits for multirange Ammeters and Voltmeters.

Describe functional concepts and operation of various Analog and Digital measuring instruments.

Describe basic concepts and operation of Digital Voltmeters and Microprocessor

based instruments.

Describe and discuss functioning and types of Oscilloscopes, Signal generators, AC and DC bridges.

Recognize and describe significance and working of different types of transducers.

Modules

RBT Level

Module -1 Measurement and Error: Definitions, Accuracy, Precision, Resolution and Significant Figures, Types of Errors, Measurement error combinations, Basics of Statistical Analysis. (Text 2)

Ammeters: DC Ammeter, Multirange Ammeter, The Ayrton Shunt or Universal Shunt, Requirements of Shunt, Extending of Ammeter Ranges, RF Ammeter (Thermocouple), Limitations of Thermocouple. (Text 1) Voltmeters and Multimeters: Introduction, Basic Meter as a DC Voltmeter, DC Voltmeter, Multirange Voltmeter, Extending Voltmeter Ranges, Loading, AC Voltmeter using Rectifiers. Transistor Voltmeter, Differential Voltmeter, True RMS Voltmeter, Considerations in Choosing an Analog Voltmeter, Multimeter. (Text 1)

L1, L2, L3

Module -2

18

Digital Voltmeters: Introduction, RAMP technique, Dual Slope

Integrating Type DVM, Integrating Type DVM, Most Commonly used

principles of ADC, Successive Approximations, Continuous Balance

DVM, -Digit, Resolution and Sensitivity of Digital Meters, General

Specifications of DVM, Microprocessor based Ramp type DVM. (Text 1)

Digital Instruments: Introduction, Digital Multimeters, Digital Frequency Meter, Digital Measurement of Time, Universal Counter, Digital Tachometer, Digital pH Meter, Digital Phase Meter, Digital Capacitance Meter, Microprocessor based Instruments. (Text 1)

L1, L2,L3

Module -3

Oscilloscopes: Introduction, Basic principles, CRT features, Block

diagram of Oscilloscope, Simple CRO, Vertical Amplifier, Horizontal Deflecting System, Sweep or Time Base Generator, Storage Oscilloscope, Digital Readout Oscilloscope, Measurement of Frequency by Lissajous Method, Digital Storage Oscilloscope. (Text 1)

Signal Generators: Introduction, Fixed and Variable AF Oscillator, Standard Signal Generator, Laboratory Type Signal Generator, AF sine and Square Wave Generator, Function Generator, Square and Pulse Generator, Sweep Generator. (Text 1)

L1, L2

Module -4

Measuring Instruments: Output Power Meters, Field Strength Meter, Stroboscope, Phase Meter, Vector Impedance Meter, Q Meter, Megger, Analog pH Meter. (Text 1) Bridges: Introduction, Wheatstone’s bridge, Kelvin’s Bridge; AC bridges, Capacitance Comparison Bridge, Inductance Comparison Bridge, Maxwell’s bridge, Wien’s bridge, Wagner’s earth connection. (Text 1)

L1, L2,L3

Module -5

Transducers: Introduction, Electrical transducers, Selecting a transducer, Resistive transducer, Resistive position transducer, Strain gauges, Resistance thermometer, Thermistor, Inductive transducer, Differential output transducers, LVDT, Piezoelectric transducer, Photoelectric transducer, Photovoltaic transducer, Semiconductor photo diode and transistor, Temperature transducers-RTD. (Text 1)

L1, L2, L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Describe instrument measurement errors and calculate them.

Describe the operation of Ammeters, Voltmeters, Multimeters and develop circuits for multirange Ammeters and Voltmeters.

Describe functional concepts and operation of Digital voltmeters and instruments to measure voltage, frequency, time period, phase difference of signals, rotation speed, capacitance and pH of solutions.

Describe functional concepts and operation of various Analog measuring instruments to measure output power, field Strength, impedance, stroboscopic speed, in/out of phase, Q of coils, insulation resistance and pH.

Describe and discuss functioning and types of Oscilloscopes, Signal generators and Transducers.

Utilize AC and DC bridges for passive component and frequency measurements.

19

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question consists of 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of Three sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. H. S. Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2012,

ISBN:9780070702066. 2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, Oxford University

Press PHI 2nd Edition, 2006, ISBN 81-203-2360-2. Reference Books: 1. A. D. Helfrick and W.D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and

Measuring Techniques”, Pearson, 1st Edition, 2015,ISBN:9789332556065. 2. A. K. Sawhney, “Electronics and Electrical Measurements”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons.

ISBN -81-7700-016-0

20

ENGINEERING ELECTROMAGNETICS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – III (EC/TC)

Subject Code 15EC36 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Study the different coordinate systems, Physical signifiance of Divergence, Curl and Gradient.

Understand the applications of Coulomb’s law and Gauss law to different charge distributions and the applications of Laplace’s and Poisson’s Equations to solve real time problems on capacitance of different charge distributions.

Understand the physical significance of Biot-Savart’s, Amperes’s Law and Stokes’ theorem for different current distributions.

Infer the effects of magnetic forces, materials and inductance.

Know the physical interpretation of Maxwell’ equations and applications for Plane waves for their behaviour in different media

Acquire knowledge of Poynting theorem and its application of power flow. Modules

RBT Level

Module - 1

Coulomb’s Law, Electric Field Intensity and Flux density Experimental law of Coulomb, Electric field intensity, Field due to continuous volume charge distribution, Field of a line charge, Electric flux density.

L1, L2, L3

Module -2

Gauss’s law and Divergence Gauss’ law, Divergence. Maxwell’s First equation (Electrostatics), Vector Operator and divergence theorem. Energy, Potential and Conductors Energy expended in moving a point charge in an electric field, The line integral, Definition of potential difference and potential, The potential field of point charge, Current and Current density, Continuity of current.

L1, L2, L3

Module -3

Poisson’s and Laplace’s Equations Derivation of Poisson’s and Laplace’s Equations, Uniqueness theorem, Examples of the solution of Laplace’s equation. Steady Magnetic Field Biot-Savart Law, Ampere’s circuital law, Curl, Stokes’ theorem, Magnetic flux and magnetic flux density, Scalar and Vector Magnetic Potentials.

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

21

Magnetic Forces Force on a moving charge, differential current elements, Force between differential current elements. Magnetic Materials Magnetisation and permeability, Magnetic boundary conditions, Magnetic circuit, Potential Energy and forces on magnetic materials.

L1, L2, L3

Module -5

Time-varying fields and Maxwell’s equations Farday’s law, displacement current, Maxwell’s equations in point form, Maxwell’s equations in integral form. Uniform Plane Wave Wave propagation in free space and good conductors. Poynting’s theorem and wave power, Skin Effect.

L1, L2, L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Evaluate problems on electric field due to point, linear, volume charges by applying conventional methods or by Gauss law.

Determine potential and energy with respect to point charge and capacitance using Laplace equation.

Calculate magnetic field, force, and potential energy with respect to magnetic materials.

Apply Maxwell’s equation for time varying fields, EM waves in free space and conductors.

Evaluate power associated with EM waves using Poynting theorem.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question consisting of 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of Three sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Book: W.H. Hayt and J.A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, 7th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2009, ISBN-978-0-07-061223-5.

Reference Books: 1. 1. John Krauss and Daniel A Fleisch, “ Electromagnetics with applications”, McGraw-

Hill. 2. 2. N. Narayana Rao, “Fundamentals of Electromagnetics for Engineering”, Pearson. 3.

22

ANALOG ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – III (EC/TC)

Laboratory Code 15ECL37 IA

Marks

20

Number of

Lecture

Hours/Week

01Hr Tutorial (Instructions)

+ 02 Hours Laboratory

Exam Marks 80

RBT Level L1, L2, L3 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives: This laboratory course enables students to get practical experience

in design, assembly, testing and evaluation of:

Rectifiers and Voltage Regulators.

BJT characteristics and Amplifiers.

JFET Characteristics and Amplifiers.

MOSFET Characteristics and Amplifiers

Power Amplifiers.

RC-Phase shift, Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal Oscillators.

NOTE: The experiments are to be carried using discrete components only.

Laboratory Experiments:

1. Design and set up the following rectifiers with and without filters and to determine

ripple factor and rectifier efficiency:

(a) Full Wave Rectifier (b) Bridge Rectifier

2. Conduct experiment to test diode clipping (single/double ended) and clamping

circuits (positive/negative).

3. Conduct an experiment on Series Voltage Regulator using Zener diode and power

transistor to determine line and load regulation characteristics.

4. Realize BJT Darlington Emitter follower with and without bootstrapping and

determine the gain, input and output impedances.

5. Design and set up the BJT common emitter amplifier using voltage divider bias with

and without feedback and determine the gain- bandwidth product from its

frequency response.

6. Plot the transfer and drain characteristics of a JFET and calculate its drain

resistance, mutual conductance and amplification factor.

7. Design, setup and plot the frequency response of Common Source JFET/MOSFET

amplifier and obtain the bandwidth.

23

8. Plot the transfer and drain characteristics of n-channel MOSFET and calculate its

parameters, namely; drain resistance, mutual conductance and amplification factor.

9. Set-up and study the working of complementary symmetry class B push pull power

amplifier and calculate the efficiency.

10. Design and set-up the RC-Phase shift Oscillator using FET, and calculate the

frequency of output waveform.

11. Design and set-up the following tuned oscillator circuits using BJT, and determine

the frequency of oscillation.

(a) Hartley Oscillator (b) Colpitts Oscillator

12. Design and set-up the crystal oscillator and determine the frequency of oscillation.

Course Outcomes: On the completion of this laboratory course, the students will be

able to:

Test circuits of rectifiers, clipping circuits, clamping circuits and voltage regulators.

Determine the characteristics of BJT and FET amplifiers and plot its frequency response.

Compute the performance parameters of amplifiers and voltage regulators

Design and test the basic BJT/FET amplifiers, BJT Power amplifier and oscillators.

Conduct of Practical Examination:

All laboratory experiments are to be included for practical examination.

Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot.

Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for

breakup of marks.

Change of experiment is allowed only once and Marks allotted to the procedure

part to be made zero.

24

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – III (EC/TC)

Laboratory Code 15ECL38 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture

Hours/Week

01Hr Tutorial (Instructions) + 02 Hours Laboratory

Exam

Mark

s

50

RBT Level L1, L2, L3 Exam

Hour

s

03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives: This laboratory course enables students to get practical experience in design, realisation and verification of

Demorgan’s Theorem, SOP, POS forms Full/Parallel Adders, Subtractors and Magnitude Comparator Multiplexer using logic gates Demultiplexers and Decoders Flip-Flops, Shift registers and Counters

NOTE:

1. Use discrete components to test and verify the logic gates. The IC umbers given are suggestive. Any equivalent IC can be used.

2. For experiment No. 11 and 12 any open source or licensed simulation tool may be used.

Laboratory Experiments: 1. Verify

(a) Demorgan’s Theorem for 2 variables. (b) The sum-of product and product-of-sum expressions using universal gates.

2. Design and implement (a) Full Adder using basic logic gates. (b) Full subtractor using basic logic gates.

3. Design and implement 4-bit Parallel Adder/ subtractor using IC 7483.

4. Design and Implementation of 4-bit Magnitude Comparator using IC 7485.

5. Realize (a) 4:1 Multiplexer using gates. (b) 3-variable function using IC 74151(8:1MUX).

6. Realize 1:8 Demux and 3:8 Decoder using IC74138.

7. Realize the following flip-flops using NAND Gates. (a) Clocked SR Flip-Flop (b) JK Flip-Flop.

8. Realize the following shift registers using IC7474 (a) SISO (b) SIPO (c) PISO (d)PIPO.

9. Realize the Ring Counter and Johnson Counter using IC7476.

10. Realize the Mod-N Counter using IC7490.

25

11. Simulate Full- Adder using simulation tool.

12. Simulate Mod-8 Synchronous UP/DOWN Counter using simulation tool.

Course Outcomes: On the completion of this laboratory course, the students will be able to:

Demonstrate the truth table of various expressions and combinational circuits

using logic gates.

Design and test various combinational circuits such as adders, subtractors, comparators, multiplexers and demultiplexers.

Construct and test flips-flops, counters and shift registers.

Simulate full adder and up/down counters.

Conduct of Practical Examination:

All laboratory experiments are to be included for practical examination. Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot.

Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for breakup of marks.

Change of experiment is allowed only once and Marks allotted to the procedure part to be made zero.

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

BELAGAVI

Scheme of Teaching and Examination and Syllabus B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

III TO VIII SEMESER (Effective from Academic year 2015-16)

2

CATEGORIZATION FOR THE THINKING PROCESS

3

Bloom’s Revised Taxonomy Levels, Level Definitions and attributes levels

along with action verbs that can be used when developing learning outcomes. Level Level Definitions and attributes Verbs(not comprehensive )

Low

er

ord

er

thin

kin

g s

kil

ls (

LO

TS

)

Remembering

(Knowledge) 𝐿1

Students exhibit memory/rote

memorization of previously learnt

materials by recognition,recalling

facts, terms, basic concepts, and

simple answers.

Able to remember, but not

necessarily fully understanding the material.

Copy, Choose, Define, Discover, Describe,

Duplicate, Enumerate, Find, How, Identify,

Label, List, Locate, Listen, Memorize, Match,

Name, Omit, Quote, Recall, Relate, Reproduce,

Recognize, Select, Show, Spell, Tell, Tabulate,

Who, When, Where etc.

Understanding

(Comprehension) 𝐿2

Students demonstrate understanding

of facts and ideas by interpreting,

exemplifying, classifying, inferring,

summarizing, comparing and

explaining main ideas with own

words.

Ask, Classify, Compare, Contrast, Demonstrate,

Describe, Extend, Differentiate, Distinguish,

Discuss, Express, Explain, Group, Illustrate,

Infer, Interpret, Outline, Paraphrase, Rephrase,

Relate, Show, Summarize, Select, Translate,

Restate etc.

Applying (Application) 𝐿3

Students solve problems in new situations by applying acquired

knowledge, facts, techniques and

rules in a different way.

Calculate, Predict, Apply, Solve, Illustrate, Use, Demonstrate, Determine, Model, Build,

Construct, Develop, Experiment With, Identify,

Make Use Of, Organize, Plan, Select etc.

Hig

her

ord

er t

hin

kin

g s

kil

ls (

HO

TS

)

Analysing

(Analysis) 𝐿4

Students are able to examine and

break information into component

parts by identifying motives, causes

arrangement, logic and semantics.

They can make inferences and find

evidence to support generalization.

Analyse, Assume, Break Down, Classify,

Categorize, Conclusion, Compare, Contrast,

Diagram, Discover, Dissect, Distinguish,

Divide, Examine, Function, Illustrate, Inference,

Inspect, List,Motive, Outline,Relationships,

Simplify, Survey, Take Part In, Test For etc.

Evaluating

(Evaluation) 𝐿5

Students are able to present and

defend opinions by making

judgments about information, validity

of ideas, or quality of work based on

a set of criteria. They can justify a

decision or course of action.

Agree, Appraise, Assess, Award, Build, Create,

Compose, Choose, Compare, Conclude, Criteria,

Criticize, Design, Derive, Develop, Decide,

Deduct, Determine, Disprove, Defend, Estimate,

Formulate, Generate, Invent, Modify, Evaluate,

Explain, Influence, Judge, Interpret, Justify,

Mark, Measure, Perceive, Rate, Prioritize, Recommend, Rule On, Select, Support, Value etc.

Creating

(Synthesis) 𝐿6

Students are able to compile, generate

or view information,ideas or products

together in a different way by

combining elements in a new pattern

or by proposing alternative

solutions. Also, use information to

form a unique product. This requires

creativity and originality.

Assemble, Adapt, Anticipate, Build, Change,

Choose, Combine, Collaborate, Collect, Create,

Compile, Compose, Construct, Delete, Design,

Develop, Discuss, Develop, Devise, Elaborate,

Estimate, Formulate, Happen, Hypothesize,

Imagine, Improve, Invent, Imagine, Intervene,

Make Up, Maximize, Modify, Originate, Plan,

Predict, Propose, Rearrange, Solve, Suppose,

Substitute, Test etc.

Graduate attributes: Graduate attributes are the qualities, skills and understandings a university community agrees its students should develop during their time with the institution. These attributes

include but go beyond the disciplinary expertise or technical knowledge that has traditionally formed the

core of most university courses. They are qualities that also prepare graduates as agents of social good in an unknown future.

Bowden, Hart, King, Trigwell& Watts (2000)

4

Scheme of Teaching and Examination

5

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2015-16

B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) III SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Subject

(Course) Title

Tea

chin

g D

ept.

Teaching Hours

/Week Examination

Cred

its

Th

eory

Pra

ctic

al/

Dra

win

g

Du

rati

on

in

hou

rs

I.A

. M

ark

s

Th

eory

/

Pra

ctic

al

Mark

s

Tota

l

Mark

s

1 15MAT31 Core Subject Engineering Mathematics-III Mathematics

04 --

03 20 80 100 4

2 15EE32 Core Subject Electric Circuit Analysis EEE 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

3 15EE33 Core Subject Transformers and Generators EEE 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

4 15EE34 Core Subject Analog Electronic Circuits EEE 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

5 15EE35 Core Subject Digital System Design EEE 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

6 15EE36 Foundation

Course

Electrical and Electronic

Measurements EEE 04 -- 03 20

80 100 4

7 15EEL37 Laboratory Electrical Machines Laboratory -1

EEE 01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical

03 20 80 100 2

8 15EEL38 Laboratory Electronics Laboratory EEE 01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical

03 20 80 100 2

TOTAL

Theory:24 hours

Practical: 06 hours 24 160 640 800 28

1. Core subject: This is the course, which is to be compulsorily studied by a student as a core requirement to complete the requirement of a programme in a said discipline of study.

2. FoundationCourse: The courses based upon the content that leads to Knowledge enhancement.

6

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2015-16

B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) IV SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Subject

(Course) Title

Tea

chin

g D

ept.

Teaching Hours

/Week Examination

Cred

its

Th

eory

Pra

ctic

al/

Dra

win

g

Du

rati

on

in

hou

rs

I.A

. M

ark

s

Th

eory

/

Pra

ctic

al

Mark

s

Tota

l

Mark

s

1 15MAT41 Core Subject Engineering Mathematics-IV Maths 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

2 15EE42 Core Subject Power Generation and Economics

EEE 04 --

03 20 80 100 4

3 15EE43 Core Subject Transmission and Distribution EEE 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

4 15EE44 Core Subject Electric Motors EEE 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

5 15EE45 Core Subject Electromagnetic Field Theory EEE 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

6 15EE46 Foundation Course

Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs

EEE 04 -- 03 20

80 100 4

7 15EEL47 Laboratory Electrical Machines Laboratory -2

EEE 01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical

03 20 80 100 2

8 15EEL48 Laboratory Op- amp and Linear ICs Laboratory

EEE 01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical

03 20 80 100 2

TOTAL

Theory:24 hours

Practical: 06 hours 24 160 640 800 28

1. Core subject: This is the course, which is to be compulsorily studied by a student as a core requirement to complete the requirement of a programme

in a said discipline of study. 2. Foundation Course:The courses based upon the content that leads to Knowledge enhancement.

7

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2015-16

B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) V SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Subject

(Course) Title

Tea

chin

g

Dep

art

men

t

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cred

its

Th

eory

Pra

ctic

al/

Dra

win

g

Du

rati

on

in

hou

rs

Th

eory

/

Pra

ctic

al

Mark

s

I.A

. M

ark

s

Tota

l

Mark

s

1 15EE51 Core Subject Management and

Entrepreneurship EEE 04

-- 03 80 20 100 4

2 15EE52 Core Subject Microcontroller EEE 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

3 15EE53 Core Subject Power Electronics EEE 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

4 15EE54 Core Subject Signals and Systems EEE 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

5 15EE55X Professional Elective

Professional Elective – I EEE 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

6 15EE56Y Open

Elective Open Elective - I EEE 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

7 15EEL57 Laboratory Microcontroller Laboratory EEE 01-Hour Instruction

02-Hour Practical 03 80 20 100 2

8 15EEL58 Laboratory Power Electronics

Laboratory

EEE 01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL

Theory:22hours

Practical: 06 hours 24 160 640 800 26

Elective

Professional Elective Open Elective***

Offered by the Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

Courses under

Code 15EE55X Title

Courses under

Code 15EE55X Title

15EE551 Introduction to Nuclear Power 15EE561 Electronic Communication systems

15EE552 Electrical Engineering Materials 15EE562 Programmable Logic controllers

15EE553 Estimating and Costing 15EE563 Renewable Energy Systems

15EE554 Special Electrical Machines 15EE564 Business Communication

***Students can select any one of the open electives offered by any Department (Please refer to consolidated list of VTU for open

electives). Selection of an open elective is not allowed provided;

The candidate has pre – requisite knowledge.

The candidate has not studied during I and II year of the programme.

The syllabus content of open elective is similar to that of Departmental core courses or professional electives.

A similar course, under any category, is prescribed in the higher semesters.

Registration to electives shall be documented under the guidance of Programme Coordinator and Adviser. 1. Core subject: This is the course, which is to be compulsorily studied by a student as a core requirement to complete the requirement of a programme in a said discipline of study.

2. Professional Elective: Electives relevant to chosen specialization/ branch.

3. Open Elective: Electives from other technical and/ or emerging subject areas.

8

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2015-16

B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) VI SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Subject

(Course) Title

Tea

chin

g

Dep

art

men

t

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cred

its

Th

eory

Pra

ctic

al/

Dra

win

g

Du

rati

on

in

hou

rs

Th

eory

/

Pra

ctic

al

Mark

s

I.A

. M

ark

s

Tota

l

Mark

s

1 15EE61 Core Subject Control Systems EEE 04 --

03 80 20 100 4

2 15EE62 Core Subject Power System Analysis – 1 EEE 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

3 15EE63 Core Subject Digital Signal Processing EEE 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

4 15EE64 Core Subject Electrical Machine Design EEE 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

5 15EE65X Professional Elective

Professional Elective – II EEE 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

6 15EE66Y Open Elective

Open Elective - II EEE 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

7 15EEL67 Laboratory Control System Laboratory EEE 01-Hour Instruction

02-Hour Practical 03 80 20 100 2

8 15EEL68 Laboratory Digital Signal Processing

Laboratory

EEE 01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL

Theory:22 hours

Practical: 06 hours 24 160 640 800 26

Elective

Professional Elective Open Elective***

Offered by the Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

Courses under

Code 15EE65X Title

Courses under

Code 15EE66Y Title

15EE651 Computer Aided Electrical Drawing 15EE661 Artificial Neural Networks and Fuzzy logic

15EE652 Advanced Power Electronics 15EE662 Sensors and Transducers

15EE653 Energy Audit and Demand side Management

15EE663 Batteries and Fuel Cells for Commercial, Military and Space Applications

15EE654 Solar and Wind Energy 15EE664 Industrial Servo Control Systems ***

Students can select any one of the open electives offered by any Department (Please refer to consolidated list of VTU for open

electives). Selection of an open elective is not allowed provided;

The candidate has pre – requisite knowledge.

The candidate has not studied during I and II year of the programme.

The syllabus content of open elective is similar to that of Departmental core courses or professional electives.

A similar course, under any category, is prescribed in the higher semesters.

Registration to electives shall be documented under the guidance of Programme Coordinator and Adviser. 1. Core subject: This is the course, which is to be compulsorily studied by a student as a core requirement to complete the requirement of a programme in a said discipline of study.

2. Professional Elective: Electives relevant to chosen specialization/ branch.

3. Open Elective: Electives from other technical and/ or emerging subject areas.

9

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2015-16

B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) VII SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Course

Code

Subject

(Course) Title

Tea

chin

g

Dep

art

men

t

Teaching Hours/Week Examination

Cred

its

Th

eory

Pra

ctic

al/

Dra

win

g

Du

rati

on

in

hou

rs

I.A

. M

ark

s

Th

eory

/

Pra

ctic

al

Mark

s

Tota

l

Mark

s

1 15EE71 Core Subject

Power System Analysis - 2 EEE 04 --

03 20 80 100 4

2 15EE72 Core

Subject Power System Protection EEE 04

-- 03 20 80

100 4

3 15EE73 Core Subject

High Voltage Engineering EEE

04 --

03 20 80 100

4

4 15EE74X Professional Elective

Professional Elective – III EEE 04 --

03 20 80 100

3

5 15EE75Y Professional

Elective Professional Elective – IV EEE 04 -- 03 20 80

100 3

6 15EEL76 Laboratory Power system Simulation

Laboratory EEE

01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical

03 20 80 100

2

7 15EEL77 Laboratory Rely and High Voltage Laboratory

EEE 01-Hour Instruction 02-Hour Practical 03 20 80

100 2

8 15EEP78 Project Phase – I + Seminar EEE -- -- 100 -- 100 2

TOTAL

Theory:24 hours

Practical: 06 hours 21 240 560 800 24

Elective

Professional Elective – III Professional Elective – IV

Courses under

Code 15EE74X Title Courses under

Code 15EE75Y Title

15EE741 Advanced Control Systems 15EE751 FACTs and HVDC Transmission

15EE742 Utilization of Electrical Power 15EE752 Testing and Commissioning of Power System

Apparatus

15EE743 Carbon Capture and Storage 15EE753 Spacecraft Power Technologies

15EE744 Power System Planning 15EE754 Industrial Heating

1. Core subject: This is the course, which is to be compulsorily studied by a student as a core requirement to complete the requirement of a

programme in a said discipline of study.

2. Professional Elective: Elective relevant to chosen specialization/ branch.

3. Project Phase –I + Seminar: Literature Survey, Problem Identification, objectives and Methodology. Submission of synopsis and

seminar. 4. Internship / Professional Practice: To be carried between the VI and VIIsemester vacation or VII and VIII semester vacation period.

10

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2015-16

B.E. ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) VIII SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Course

Code

Subject

(Course) Title

Tea

chin

g

Dep

art

men

t

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cred

its

Th

eory

Pra

ctic

al/

Dra

win

g

Du

rati

on

in

hou

rs

I.A

. M

ark

s

Th

eory

/

Pra

ctic

al

Mark

s

Tota

l

Mark

s

1 15EE81 Core Subject Power System Operation and

Control EEE 04

-- 03 20 80 100 4

2 15EE82 Core Subject Industrial Drives and

Applications EEE 04

-- 03 20 80 100 4

3 15EE83X Professional Elective

Professional Elective – V EEE

03 --

03 20 80 100 3

4 15EE84 Core Subject Internship / Professional

Practice

EEE Industry Oriented 03 50 50 100 2

5 15EEP85 Core Subject Project Work Phase -II EEE -- 06 03 100 100 200 6

6 15EES86 Core Subject Seminar EEE -- 04 -- 100 -- 100 1

TOTAL

Theory:11 hours

Practical: 10 hours 15 310 390 700 20

Professional Elective – V

Courses under

Code 15EE83X Title

15EE831 Smart Grid

15EE832 Operation and Maintenance of Solar Electric Systems

15EE833 Integration of Distributed Generation

15EE834 Power System in Emergencies

1. Core subject: This is the course, which is to be compulsorily studied by a student as a core requirement to complete the requirement of a programme

in a said discipline of study.

2. Professional Elective: Elective relevant to chosen specialization/ branch.

3. Internship / Professional Practice: To be carried between the VI and VIIsemester vacation or VII and VIII semester vacation period.

11

III SEMESTER DETAILED SYLLABUS

12

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS –III (Core Course)

Subject Code 15MAT31 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives:

The objectives of this course is to introduce students to the mostly used analytical and numerical

methods in the different engineering fields by making them to learn Fourier series, Fourier

transforms and Z-transforms, statistical methods , numerical methods to solve algebraic and

transcendental equations, vector integration and calculus of variations. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Fourier Series: Periodic functions, Dirichlet’s condition, Fourier Series of periodic functions

with period 2π and with arbitrary period 2c. Fourier series of even and odd functions. Half range

Fourier Series, practical harmonic analysis-Illustrative examples from engineering field. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L4 – Analysing.

Module-2

Fourier Transforms: Infinite Fourier transforms, Fourier sine and cosine transforms. Inverse

Fourier transform.

Z-transform: Difference equations, basic definition, z-transform-definition, Standard z-

transforms, Damping rule, Shifting rule, Initial value and final value theorems (without proof)

and problems, Inverse z-transform. Applications of z-transforms to solve difference equations. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Statistical Methods: Review of measures of central tendency and dispersion. Correlation-Karl

Pearson’s coefficient of correlation-problems. Regression analysis- lines of regression (without proof) –problems Curve Fitting: Curve fitting by the method of least squares- fitting of the curves

of the form,𝑦 = 𝑎𝑥 + 𝑏, 𝑦 = 𝑎𝑥2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑦 = 𝑎𝑒𝑏𝑥 . Numerical Methods: Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations by Regula-

Falsi Method and Newton-Raphson method. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying.

Module-4 Finite differences: Forward and backward differences, Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulae. Divided differences- Newton’s divided difference formula. Lagrange’s interpolation formula and inverse interpolation formula (all formulae without proof)-Problems.

Numerical integration: Simpson’s (1/3)thand (3/8)th rules, Weddle’s rule (without proof ) –Problems. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying.

Module-5 Vector integration: Line integrals-definition and problems, surface and volume integrals-

definition, Green’s theorem in a plane, Stokes and Gauss-divergence theorem(without proof)

and problems.

Calculus of Variations: Variation of function and Functional, variational problems. Euler’s equation, Geodesics, hanging chain, problems. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

L2 – Understanding, L4 – Analysing.

13

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III 15MAT31 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS –III (Core Subject) (continued)

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Know the use of periodic signals and Fourier series to analyze circuits and system

communications.

Explain the general linear system theory for continuous-time signals and digital signal

processing using the Fourier Transform and z-transform.

Employ appropriate numerical methods to solve algebraic and transcendental equations.

Apply Green's Theorem, Divergence Theorem and Stokes' theorem in various applications in the

field of electro-magnetic and gravitational fields and fluid flow problems.

Determine the extremals of functional and solve the simple problems of the calculus of

variations. ∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Life-Long Learning, Accomplishment of Complex Problems.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten full questions carrying equal marks. Each full question consisting of

16 marks.

There will be two full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub question covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer five full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books

1 Higher Engineering Mathematics B.S. Grewal Khanna Publishers 43rd Edition, 2015

2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics E. Kreyszig John Wiley & Sons 10thEdition, 2015

Reference books

3 A Text Book of Engineering

Mathematics N.P.Bali and

Manish Goyal Laxmi Publishers 7th Edition, 2010

4 Higher Engineering Mathematics B.V.Ramana Tata McGraw-Hill 2006

5 Higher Engineering Mathematics H. K.DassEr.

RajnishVerma S.Chand First Edition,2011

Web links and Video Lectures:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineID=111

2. http://wwww.khanacademy.org/

3. http://www.class-central.com/subject/math

14

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS (Core Subject)

Subject Code 15EE32 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: To familiarize the basic laws, source transformations, theorems and the methods of analysing

electrical circuits.

To explain the concept of coupling in electric circuits and resonance.

To familiarize the analysis of three-phase circuits, two port networks and networks with non-sinusoidal

inputs.

To analyze the transient response of circuits with dc and sinusoidal ac input.

To impart basic knowledge on network analysis using Laplace transforms. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Basic Concepts: Active and passive elements, Concept of ideal and practical sources. Source

transformation and Source shifting, Concept of Super Mesh and Super node analysis. Analysis of

networks by (i) Network reduction method including star – delta transformation, (ii) Mesh and Node

voltage methods for ac and dc circuits with independent and dependent sources. Equilibrium

equations using KCL and KVL, Duality.

Resonant Circuits: Analysis of simple series RLC and parallel RLC circuits under resonances.

Resonant frequency, Bandwidth and Quality factor at resonance. Practical RL-RC circuits.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-2

Network Theorems: Analysis of networks, with and without dependent ac and dc sources by

Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems. Analysis of ac and dc circuits for maximum power transfer to resistive and complex loads. Application of Millman’s theorem and Super Position theorem to multisource networks. Reciprocity theorem and its application. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Transient Analysis: Review of ordinary linear non homogeneous first and second order differential

equations with constant coefficients. Transient analysis of ac and dc circuits by classical method.

Transient analysis of dc and ac circuits. Behaviour of circuit elements under switching action (𝑡 = 0 and 𝑡 = ∞). Evaluation of initial conditions. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing, L5 – Evaluating.

Module-4

Laplace Transformation: Laplace transformation (LT), LT of Impulse, Step, Ramp, Sinusoidal signals and shifted functions. Waveform synthesis. Initial and Final value theorems. Laplace

Transform of network and time domain solution for RL, RC and RLC networks for ac and dc

excitations. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-5

Unbalanced Three phase systems: Analysis of three phase systems, calculation of real and reactive

powers.

Two Port networks: Definition, Open circuit impedance, Short circuit admittance and Transmission

parameters and their evaluation for simple circuits. Network functions of one port and two port

10

15

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III 15EE32 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS (Core Course) (continued)

Module-5(continued) Teaching

Hours Two Port networks (continued): networks, properties of poles and zeros of network functions.

Complex Wave analysis: Analysis of simple circuits with non-sinusoidal excitation. ∎

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

• Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering to the analysis and design of electrical circuits.

• Identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems in the area circuits and systems.

• Analyze the solution and infer the authenticity of it.

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge, Problem analysis.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each

module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Engineering Circuit Analysis William H Hayt et al McGraw Hill

8th Edition,2014

2 Engineering Circuit Analysis J David Irwin et al Wiley India 10th Edition,2014

3 Fundamentals of Electric Circuits Charles K Alexander

Matthew N O Sadiku

McGraw Hill 5th Edition,2013

4 Network Analysis M.E. Vanvalkenburg Pearson 3rd Edition,2014

5 Electric Circuits MahmoodNahvi McGraw Hill 5th Edition,2009

6 Introduction to Electric Circuits Richard C Dorf and James A Svoboda

Wiley 9th Edition,2015

7 Circuit Analysis; Theory and Practice Allan H Robbins Wilhelm C Miller

Cengage 5th Edition,2013

16

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SEMESTER - III

TRANSFORMERS AND GENERATORS (Core Course)

Subject Code 15EE33 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: To understand the concepts of transformers and their analysis.

To suggest a suitable three phase transformer connection for a particular operation.

To understand the concepts of generator and to evaluate their performance.

To explain the requirement for the parallel operation of transformers and synchronous generators.∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Single phase Transformers: Review of Principle of operation, constructional details of shell type

and core type single-phase transformers, EMF equation, losses and commercial efficiency,

conditions for maximum efficiency (No question shall be set from the review portion). Salient

features of ideal transformer, operation of practical transformer under no - load and on - load with

phasor diagrams. Equivalent circuit, Open circuit and Short circuit tests, calculation of equivalent

circuit parameters and predetermination of efficiency- commercial and all-day. Voltage regulation and its significance.

Three-phase Transformers: Introduction, Constructional features of three-phase transformers.

Choice between single unit three-phase transformer and a bank of three single-phase transformers.

Transformer connection for three phase operation – star/star, delta/delta, star/delta, zigzag/star and

V/V, choice of connection. Phase conversion - Scott connection for three-phase to two-phase

conversion. Labelling of three-phase transformer terminals, vector groups. Equivalent circuit of three

phase transformers. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-2

Parallel Operation of Transformers: Necessity of Parallel operation, conditions for parallel

operation – Single phase and three phase. Load sharing in case of similar and dissimilar transformers. Autotransformers and Tap changing transformers: Introduction to auto transformer - copper

economy, equivalent circuit, three phase auto connection and voltage regulation. Voltage regulation

by tap changing – off circuit and on load.

Tertiary winding Transformers: Necessity of tertiary winding, equivalent circuit and voltage

regulation, tertiary winding in star/star transformers, rating of tertiary winding.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Transformers (continuation): Cause and effects of harmonics, Current inrush in transformers, noise

in transformers. Objects of testing transformers, polarity test, Sumpner’s test. Direct current Generator – Review of construction, types, armature windings, relation between no

load and terminal voltage (No question shall be set from the review portion). Armature reaction,

Commutation and associated problems, no load and full load characteristics. Reasons for reduced

dependency on dc generators.

Synchronous generators- Review of construction and operation of salient & non-salient pole

synchronous generators (No question shall be set from the review portion). Armature windings,

winding factors, emf equation. Harmonics – causes, reduction and elimination. Armature reaction,

Synchronous reactance, Equivalent circuit.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing, L5 – Evaluating.

Module-4 Synchronous generators (continuation): Generator load characteristic. Voltage regulation,

excitation control for constant terminal voltage. Generator input and output. Parallel operation of 10

17

Text/Reference Books

1 Electric Machines D. P. Kothari, et al McGraw Hill 4th Edition, 2011

2 Performance and Design of A.C.

Machines

M. G. Say CBS

Publishers

3rd Edition, 2002

3 Principles of Electric Machines and

power Electronics

P.C.Sen Wiley 2nd Edition, 2013

4 Electric Machines MulukuntlaS.Sarma,at el

Cengage 1st Edition, 2009

5 Electrical Machines, Drives and Power

systems

Theodore Wildi Pearson 6th Edition, 2014

6 Electrical Machines M.V. Deshpande PHI Learning 1st Edition, 2013

7 Electrical Machines AbhijitChakrabarti et al McGraw Hill 1st Edition, 2015

8 A Textbook of Electrical Machines K.R.SiddapuraD.B.Raval Vikas 1st Edition, 2014

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III 15EE33 TRANSFORMERS AND GENERATORS (Core Course) (continued)

Module-4(continued) Teaching

Hours Synchronous generators(continuation): generators and load sharing. Synchronous generator on

infinite bus-bars – General load diagram, Electrical load diagram, mechanical load diagram, O – curves and V – curves. Power angle characteristic and synchronizing power.

Synchronous generators(continuation): Effects of saliency, two-reaction theory, Direct and

Quadrature reactance, power angle diagram, reluctance power, slip test. ∎

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-5 Synchronous generators(continuation): Open circuit and short circuit characteristics, Assessment

of reactance- short circuit ratio, synchronous reactance, adjusted synchronous reactance and Potier

reactance. Voltage regulation by EMF, MMF, ZPF and ASA methods.

Performance of synchronous generators: Capability curve for large turbo generators and salient

pole generators. Starting, synchronizing and control. Hunting and dampers. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the construction and operation and performance of transformers.

Explain different connections for the three phase operations, their advantages and applications.

Explain the construction and operation of Synchronous machines and evaluate the regulation of

synchronous machines by different methods.

Analyze the operation of the synchronous machine connected to infinite machine.

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge, Problem analysis.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each

module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.∎

18

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING (EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III

ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS (Core Course)

Subject Code 15EE34 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: Provide the knowledge for the analysis of diode and transistor circuits.

Develop skills to design the electronic circuits like amplifiers and oscillators.

Highlight the importance of FET and MOSFET.∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Diode Circuits: Review of diodes as rectifiers (No question shall be set from review portion). Diode

clipping and clamping circuits.

Transistor biasing and stabilization: Operating point, analysis and design of fixed bias circuit, self-

bias circuit, Emitter stabilized bias circuit, voltage divider bias circuit, stability factor of different

biasing circuits. Problems.

Transistor switching circuits: Transistor switching circuits,PNP transistors, thermal compensation

techniques. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

Module-2

Transistor at low frequencies: BJT transistor modelling, CE fixed bias configuration, voltage

divider bias, emitter follower, CB configuration, collector feedback configuration, analysis using h –

parameter model, relation between h – parameters model of CE, CC and CB modes, Millers theorem

and its dual.

Transistor frequency response: General frequency considerations, low frequency response, Miller

effect capacitance, high frequency response, multistage frequency effects. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing, L5 – Evaluating.

Module-3 Multistage amplifiers: Cascade and cascode connections, Darlington circuits, analysis and design.

Feedback amplifiers: Feedback concept, different types, practical feedback circuits, analysis and

design of feedback circuits. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-4 Power amplifiers: Amplifier types, analysis and design of different power amplifiers, distortion in

power amplifiers.

Oscillators: Principle of operation, analysis and derivation of frequency of oscillation of phase shift

oscillator, Wien bridge oscillator, RF and crystal oscillator and frequency stability. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-5

FETs: Construction, working andcharacteristics of JFET and MOSFET. Biasing of JFET and

MOSFET, JFET and MOSFET amplifiers, analysis and design. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

19

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III 15EE34 ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS (Core Subject) (continued)

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Utilize the characteristics of transistor for different applications.

Design and analyze biasing circuits for transistor.

Design, analyze and test transistor circuitry as amplifiers and oscillators.

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Modern tool usage,Ethics.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each

module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Electronic Devices and Circuit

Theory

Robert L Boylestad

Louis Nashelsky

Pearson 11th Edition, 2015

2 Integrated Electronics, Analysis and

Digital Circuits and Systems

Jacob Millman et al McGraw Hill 2nd Edition, 2009

3 Electronic Devices and Circuits David A Bell Oxford

University Press

5th Edition, 2008

4 Microelectronics Circuits

Analysis and Design

Muhammad Rashid Cengage Learning 2nd Edition, 2014

5 A Text Book of Electrical

Technology, Electronic Devices

and Circuits

B.L. Theraja,

A.K. Theraja,

S. Chand

Reprint, 2013

6 Electronic Devices and Circuits Anil K. Maini

VashaAgarval

Wiley 1st Edition, 2009

7 Electronic Devices and Circuits S.Salivahanan

N.Suresh

McGraw Hill 3rd Edition, 2013

8 Fundamentals of Analog Circuits Thomas L Floyd Pearson 2nd Edition, 2012

20

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN(Core Course)

Subject Code 15EE35 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: To impart the knowledge of combinational circuit design.

To impart the knowledge of Sequential circuit design.

To provide the basic knowledge about VHDL & its use.∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours

Principles of combinational logic: Definition of combinational, canonical forms, Generation of

switching equations from truth tables, Karnaugh maps-3, 4 and 5 variables. Incompletely specified

functions (Don’t care terms). Simplifying max - term equations. Quine -McClusky minimization technique, Quine - McClusky using don’t care terms, Reduced Prime Implicant tables, Map entered variables. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

Module-2

Analysis and design of Combinational Logic: General approach, Decoders-BCD decoders,

Encoders. Digital multiplexers-using multiplexers as Boolean function generators. Adders and

Subtractors-Cascading full adders, Look ahead carry, Binary comparators. Design methods of

building blocks of combinational logics.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Sequential Circuits: Basic Bistable element, Latches, SR latch, application of SR latch, A Switch

debouncer, The SR latch, The gated SR latch. The gated D Latch, The Master-Slave Flip-Flops

(Pulse-Triggered Flip-Flops): The master-slave SR Flip-Flops, The master-slave JK Flip-Flop, Edge Triggered Flip-flop: The Positive Edge-Triggered D Flip-Flop, Negative-Edge Triggered D Flip-

Flop. Characteristic equations, Registers, Counters-Binary Ripple Counter, Synchronous Binary

counters, Counters based on Shift Registers, Design of a Synchronous counters, Design of a

Synchronous Mod-6 counters using clocked JK Flip-Flops Design of a Synchronous Mod-6 counter

using clocked D, T, or SR Flip-Flops. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-4

Sequential Design: Introduction, Mealy and Moore models, State machine notation, synchronous

sequential circuit analysis and design. Construction of state Diagrams, Counters Design. ∎ 10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-5

HDL: Introduction, A brief history of HDL, Structure of HDL Module, Operators, Data types,

Types of Descriptions, Simulation and synthesis, Brief comparison of VHDL and Verilog.

Data-Flow Descriptions: Highlights of Data flow descriptions, Structure of data-flow description,

Data type-vectors. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

21

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III 15EE35 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN (Core Course) (continued)

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Design and analyze combinational & sequential circuits

Design circuits like adder, sub tractor, code converter etc.

Understand counters and sequence generators.

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge,Problem Analysis,Modern tool usage,Ethics.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each

module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Digital Logic Applications and

Design

John M Yarbrough CengageLearn

ing

2011

2 Digital Principles and Design Donald D Givone McGraw Hill 1st Edition, 2002

3 Logic and computer design

Fundamentals

M. Morries Mano and

Charles Kime

Pearson

Learning

4th Edition, 2014

4 Fundamentals of logic design Charles H Roth, JR and

Larry L. Kinney

Cengage

Learning

6th Edition, 2013

5 Fundamentals of Digital Circuits A. Anand Kumar PHI 3rd Edition, 2014

6 Digital Logic Design and VHDL A.A.Phadke, S.M.Deokar Wiley India 1st Edition, 2009

7 Digital Circuits and Design D.P.KothariJ.S.Dhillon Pearson First Print 2015

8 HDL Programming (VHDL and

Verilog)

Nazeih M. Botros Cengage

Learning

1st Edition, 2011

9 Circuit Design and Simulation with

VHDL

Volnei A Pedroni PHI 2nd Edition,

22

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS (Foundation Course)

Subject Code 15EE36 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: To understand the concept of units and dimensions.

To measure resistance, inductance, capacitance by use of different bridges.

To study the construction and working of various meters used for measurement.

To have the working knowledge of electronic instruments and display devices.∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Units and Dimensions: Review of fundamental and derived units. SI units (No question shall be set

from the review portion). Dimensional equations, problems.

Measurement of Resistance: Wheatstone’s bridge, sensitivity, limitations. Kelvin’s double bridge. Earth resistance measurement by fall of potential method and by using Megger.

Measurement of Inductance and Capacitance: Sources and detectors, Maxwell’s inductance bridge, Maxwell’s inductance and capacitance bridge, Hay’s bridge, Anderson’s bridge, Desauty’s bridge, Schering bridge. Shielding of bridges. Problems. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

Module-2

Measurement of Power, Energy, Power factor and Frequency: Review ofDynamometer

wattmeter construction and operation (No question shall be set from the review portions), Torque

expression, Errors and minimization, UPF and LPF wattmeters. Measurement of real and reactive

power in 3 phase circuits. Review of Induction type energy meter construction and operation (No

question shall be set from the review portions)]. Errors, adjustments and calibration of single and

three phase energy meters, Problems. Construction and operation of single-phase and three phase

dynamometer type power factor meter. Weston frequency meter and phase sequence indicator. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3

Extension of Instrument Ranges: Desirable features of ammeters and voltmeters.Shunts and

multipliers. Construction and theory of instrument transformers, Desirable characterises, Errors of

CT and PT. Turns compensation, Illustrative examples, Silsbee’s method of testing CT. Magnetic measurements: Introduction, measurement of flux/ flux density, magnetising force and

leakage factor. Hopkinson permeameter. Measurement of iron loss by wattmeter method. A brief

discussion on measurement of air gap flux and field strength.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-4

Electronic and digital Instruments: Introduction. Essentials of electronic instruments, Advantages

of electronic instruments. True rms reading voltmeter. Electronic multimeters. Digital voltmeters

(DVM) - Ramp type DVM, Integrating type DVM, Continuous – balance DVM and Successive -

approximation DVM. Q meter. Principle of working of electronic energy meter (block diagram

treatment), extra features offered by present day meters and their significance in billing.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding.

23

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SEMESTER - III

15EE36 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS (Foundation Course) (continued)

Module-5 Teaching

Hours Display Devices: Introduction, character formats, segment displays, Dot matrix displays, Bar graph

displays. Cathode ray tubes, Light emitting diodes, Liquid crystal displays, Nixes, Incandescent, Fluorescent, Liquid vapour and Visual displays. Display multiplexing and zero suppression.

Recording Devices: Introduction, Strip chart recorders, Galvanometer recorders, Null balance

recorders, Potentiometer type recorders, Bridge type recorders, LVDT type recorders, Circular chart

and 𝑥𝑦 recorders. Magnetic tape recorders, Direct recording, Frequency modulation recording, Pulse

duration modulation recording, Digital tape recording, Ultraviolet recorders. Biomedical recorders,

Electro Cardio Graph (ECG),Electroencephalograph, Electromyograph. Noise in reproduction. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding.

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the importance of units and dimensions.

Measure resistance, inductance and capacitance by different methods.

Explain the working of various meters used for measurement of power and energy.

Explain the working of different electronic instruments and display devices.

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each

module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Electrical and electronic Measurements and

Instrumentation

A.K. Sawhney DhanpatRai and

Co

10th Edition

2 A Course in Electronics and Electrical

Measurements and Instrumentation

J. B. Gupta Katson Books 2013 Edition

3 Electrical and electronic Measurements and

Instrumentation

Er.R.K. Rajput S Chand 5th Edition, 2012

4 Electrical Measuring Instruments and

Measurements

S.C. Bhargava BS Publications 2013

5 Modern Electronic Instrumentation and

Measuring Techniques

Cooper D and

A.D. Heifrick

Pearson First Edition, 2015

6 Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements

David A Bell Oxford University

3rd Edition, 2013

7 Electronic Instrumentation H.S.Kalsi McGraw Hill 3rd Edition,2010

24

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING(EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III

ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY - 1

Subject Code 15EEL37 IA Marks 20

Number ofPracticalHours/Week 03 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of PracticalHours 42 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 02

Course objectives: Conducting of different tests on transformers and synchronous machines and evaluation of their

performance.

Verify the parallel operation of two single phase transformers.

Study the connection of single phase transformers for three phase operation and phase conversion.

Study of synchronous generator connected to infinite bus. ∎

Sl.NO

Experiments

1 Open Circuit and Short circuit tests on single phase step up or step down transformer and

predetermination of

(i) Efficiency and regulation (ii) Calculation of parameters of equivalent circuit.

2 Sumpner’s test on similar transformers and determination of combined and individual transformer

efficiency.

3 Parallel operation of two dissimilar single-phase transformers of different kVA and determination of load sharing and analytical verification given the Short circuit test data.

4 Polarity test and connection of 3 single-phase transformers in star – delta and determination of efficiency

and regulation under balanced resistive load.

5 Comparison of performance of 3 single-phase transformers in delta – delta and V – V (open delta)

connection under load.

6 Scott connection with balanced and unbalanced loads.

7 Separation of hysteresis and eddy current losses in single phase transformer.

8 Voltage regulation of an alternator by EMF and MMF methods.

9 Voltage regulation of an alternator by ZPF method.

10 Slip test – Measurement of direct and quadrature axis reactance and predetermination of regulation of salient pole synchronous machines.

11 Performance of synchronous generator connected to infinite bus, under constant power and variable

excitation & vice - versa.

12 Power angle curve of synchronous generator.

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing, L5 – Evaluating, L6 – Creating

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Conduct different tests on transformers and synchronous generators and evaluate their performance.

Connect and operate two single phase transformers of different KVA rating in parallel.

Connect single phase transformers for three phase operation and phase conversion.

Assess the performance of synchronous generator connected to infinite bus.

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge,Problem Analysis, Individual and Team work,Communication.

Conduct of Practical Examination: 1. All laboratory experiments are to be included for practical examination.

2. Breakup of marks and the instructions printed on the cover page of answer script to be strictly adhered by the

examiners.

3. Students can pick one experiment from the questions lot prepared by the examiners.

4. Change of experiment is allowed only once and 15% Marks allotted to the procedure part to be made zero.∎

25

**** END ****

B.E ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING (EEE)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - III

ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

Subject Code 15EEL38 IA Marks 20

Number ofPracticalHours/Week 03 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of PracticalHours 42 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 02

Course objectives: To design and test half wave and full wave rectifier circuits.

To design and test different amplifier and oscillator circuits using BJT.

To study the simplification of Boolean expressions using logic gates.

To realize different Adders and Subtractors circuits.

To design and test counters and sequence generators.∎

Sl.

No

Experiments

1 Design and Testing of Full wave – centre tapped transformer type and Bridge type rectifier circuits with

and without Capacitor filter. Determination of ripple factor, regulation and efficiency.

2 Static Transistor characteristics for CE, CB and CC modes and determination of h parameters.

3 Frequency response of single stage BJT and FET RC coupled amplifier and determination of half power

points, bandwidth, input and output impedances.

4 Design and testing of BJT - RC phase shift oscillator for given frequency of oscillation.

5 Determination of gain, input and output impedance of BJT Darlington emitter follower with and without

bootstrapping.

6 Simplification, realization of Boolean expressions using logic gates/Universal gates.

7 Realization of half/Full adder and Half/Full Subtractors using logic gates.

8 Realization of parallel adder/Subtractors using 7483 chip- BCD to Excess-3 code conversion and Vice -

Versa.

9 Realization of Binary to Gray code conversion and vice versa.

10 Design and testing Ring counter/Johnson counter.

11 Design and testing of Sequence generator.

12 Realization of 3 bit counters as a sequential circuit and MOD – N counter design using 7476, 7490, 74192,

74193. Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing, L5 – Evaluating, L6 – Creating

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Design and test different diode circuits.

Design and test amplifier and oscillator circuits and analyse their performance.

Use universal gates and ICs for code conversion and arithmetic operations.

Design and verify on of different counters.

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA) Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Individual and Team work, Communication.

Conduct of Practical Examination: 1. All laboratory experiments are to be included for practical examination.

2. Breakup of marks and the instructions printed on the cover page of answer script to be strictly adhered by the

examiners.

3. Students can pick one experiment from the questions lot prepared by the examiners.

4. Change of experiment is allowed only once and 15% Marks allotted to the procedure part to be made zero.∎

1

B.E. Computer Science & Engineering/ B.E. Information Science & Engineering III SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours

/Week Examination

Credits

Theory Practical/

Drawing

Duration Theory/

Practical

Marks

I.A.

Marks

Total Marks

1 15MAT31 Engineering Mathematics - III 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

2 15CS32 Analog and Digital Electronics 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

3 15CS33 Data Structures and Applications 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

4 15CS34 Computer Organization 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

5 15CS35 Unix and Shell Programming 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

6 15CS36 Discrete Mathematical structures 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

7 15CSL37 Analog and Digital Electronics Laboratory -- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15CSL38 Data Structures Laboratory -- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 24 6 24 640 160 800 28

Note : I Stands for Instruction Hours and P for practical Hours

2

B.E. Computer Science & Engineering/ B.E. Information Science & Engineering

IV SEMESTER

Sl. No

Subject Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credits

Theory Practical/

Drawing Duration

Theory/

Practica

l Marks

I.A. Marks Total Marks

1 15MAT41 Engineering Mathematics - IV 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

2 15CS 42 Software Engineering 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

3 15CS43 Design and Analysis of Algorithms 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

4 15CS 44 Microprocessors and microcontrollers 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

5 15CS45 Object Oriented Programming with

JAVA

04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

6 15CS46 Data communications 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

7 15CSL47 Design and Analysis of Algorithm

Laboratory

-- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15CSL48 Microprocessors Laboratory

-- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 24 06 24 640 160 800 28

Note : I Stands for Instruction Hours and P for practical Hours

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-IV

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15MAT41 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Formulate, solve and analyze engineering problems.

• Apply numerical methods to solve ordinary differential equations.

• Apply finite difference method to solve partial differential equations.

• Perform complex analysis.

• Interpret use of sampling theory.

• Apply joint probability distribution and stochastic process.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Numerical Methods: Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations of first order

and first degree, Picard’s method, Taylor’s series method, modified Euler’s method,

Runge-Kutta method of fourth order. Milne’s and Adams-Bashforth predictor and

corrector methods (No derivations of formulae). Numerical solution of simultaneous first

order ordinary differential equations, Picard’s method, Runge-Kutta method of fourth

order

10 Hours

Module 2

Numerical Methods: Numerical solution of second order ordinary differential equations,

Picard’s method, Runge-Kutta method and Milne’s method. Special Functions: Bessel’s

functions- basic properties, recurrence relations, orthogonality and generating functions.

Legendre’s functions - Legendre’s polynomial, Rodrigue’s formula, problems.

10 Hours

Module 3

Complex Variables: Function of a complex variable, limits, continuity, differentiability,.

Analytic functions-Cauchy-Riemann equations in Cartesian and polar forms. Properties

and construction of analytic functions. Complex line integrals-Cauchy’s theorem and

Cauchy’s integral formula, Residue, poles, Cauchy’s Residue theorem with proof and

problems. Transformations: Conformal transformations, discussion of

transformations: = , = , = + (/) and bilinear transformations.

10 Hours

Module 4

Probability Distributions: Random variables (discrete and continuous), probability

functions. Poisson distributions, geometric distribution, uniform distribution, exponential

and normal distributions, Problems. Joint probability distribution: Joint Probability

distribution for two variables, expectation, covariance, correlation coefficient.

10 Hours

Module 5

Sampling Theory: Sampling, Sampling distributions, standard error, test of hypothesis

for means and proportions, confidence limits for means, student’s t-distribution, Chi-

square distribution as a test of goodness of fit. Stochastic process: Stochastic process,

probability vector, stochastic matrices, fixed points, regular stochastic matrices, Markov

chains, higher transition probability.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Use appropriate numerical methods to solve first and second order ordinary differential

equations.

• Use Bessel's and Legendre's function which often arises when a problem possesses axial and

spherical symmetry, such as in quantum mechanics, electromagnetic theory, hydrodynamics

and heat conduction.

• State and prove Cauchy’s theorem and its consequences including Cauchy's integral formula.

• Compute residues and apply the residue theorem to evaluate integrals.

• Analyze, interpret, and evaluate scientific hypotheses and theories using rigorous statistical

methods.

Graduate Attributes

• Engineering Knowledge

• Problem Analysis

• Life-Long Learning

• Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

There will be 2 questions from each module.

Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. B.V.Ramana "Higher Engineering Mathematics" Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.

2. B. S. Grewal,” Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna publishers, 42nd edition, 2013.

Reference Books:

1. N P Bali and Manish Goyal, "A text book of Engineering mathematics" , Laxmi

publications, latest edition.

2. Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics " - 9th edition, Wiley, 2013.

3. H. K Dass and Er. RajnishVerma, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", S. Chand, 1st ed,

2011.

SOFTWARE ENGINEERING [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15CS42 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Outline software engineering principles and activities involved in building large software

programs.

• Identify ethical and professional issues and explain why they are of concern to software

engineers.

• Describe the process of requirements gathering, requirements classification, requirements

specification and requirements validation.

• Differentiate system models, use UML diagrams and apply design patterns.

• Discuss the distinctions between validation testing and defect testing.

• Recognize the importance of software maintenance and describe the intricacies involved in

software evolution.

• Apply estimation techniques, schedule project activities and compute pricing.

• Identify software quality parameters and quantify software using measurements and metrics.

• List software quality standards and outline the practices involved.

• Recognize the need for agile software development, describe agile methods, apply agile

practices and plan for agility.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction: Software Crisis, Need for Software Engineering. Professional Software

Development, Software Engineering Ethics. Case Studies.

Software Processes: Models: Waterfall Model (Sec 2.1.1), Incremental Model (Sec

2.1.2) and Spiral Model (Sec 2.1.3). Process activities.

Requirements Engineering: Requirements Engineering Processes (Chap 4).

Requirements Elicitation and Analysis (Sec 4.5). Functional and non-functional

requirements (Sec 4.1). The software Requirements Document (Sec 4.2). Requirements

Specification (Sec 4.3). Requirements validation (Sec 4.6). Requirements Management

(Sec 4.7).

12 Hours

Module 2

System Models: Context models (Sec 5.1). Interaction models (Sec 5.2). Structural

models (Sec 5.3). Behavioral models (Sec 5.4). Model-driven engineering (Sec 5.5).

Design and Implementation: Introduction to RUP (Sec 2.4), Design Principles (Chap

17). Object-oriented design using the UML (Sec 7.1). Design patterns (Sec 7.2).

Implementation issues (Sec 7.3). Open source development (Sec 7.4).

11 Hours

Module 3

Software Testing: Development testing (Sec 8.1), Test-driven development (Sec 8.2),

Release testing (Sec 8.3), User testing (Sec 8.4). Test Automation (Page no 42, 70,212,

231,444,695).

Software Evolution: Evolution processes (Sec 9.1). Program evolution dynamics (Sec

9 Hours

9.2). Software maintenance (Sec 9.3). Legacy system management (Sec 9.4).

Module 4

Project Planning: Software pricing (Sec 23.1). Plan-driven development (Sec 23.2).

Project scheduling (Sec 23.3): Estimation techniques (Sec 23.5). Quality management:

Software quality (Sec 24.1). Reviews and inspections (Sec 24.3). Software measurement

and metrics (Sec 24.4). Software standards (Sec 24.2)

10 Hours

Module 5

Agile Software Development: Coping with Change (Sec 2.3), The Agile Manifesto:

Values and Principles. Agile methods: SCRUM (Ref “The SCRUM Primer, Ver 2.0”)

and Extreme Programming (Sec 3.3). Plan-driven and agile development (Sec 3.2). Agile

project management (Sec 3.4), Scaling agile methods (Sec 3.5):

8 Hours

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Design a software system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic

constraints.

• Assess professional and ethical responsibility

• Function on multi-disciplinary teams

• Use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering practice

• Analyze, design, implement, verify, validate, implement, apply, and maintain software

systems or parts of software systems.

Graduate Attributes

• Project Management and Finance

• Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems

• Modern Tool Usage

• Ethics

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

There will be 2 questions from each module.

Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Ian Sommerville: Software Engineering, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.

(Listed topics only from Chapters 1,2,3,4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 23, and 24)

2. The SCRUM Primer, Ver 2.0, http://www.goodagile.com/scrumprimer/scrumprimer20.pdf

Reference Books:

1. Roger S. Pressman: Software Engineering-A Practitioners approach, 7th Edition, Tata

McGraw Hill.

2. Pankaj Jalote: An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Wiley India

Web Reference for eBooks on Agile:

1. http://agilemanifesto.org/

2. http://www.jamesshore.com/Agile-Book/

DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15CS43 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Explain various computational problem solving techniques.

• Apply appropriate method to solve a given problem.

• Describe various methods of algorithm analysis.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction: What is an Algorithm? (T2:1.1), Algorithm Specification (T2:1.2),

Analysis Framework (T1:2.1), Performance Analysis: Space complexity, Time

complexity (T2:1.3). Asymptotic Notations: Big-Oh notation (O), Omega notation (Ω),

Theta notation (Θ), and Little-oh notation (o), Mathematical analysis of Non-Recursive

and recursive Algorithms with Examples (T1:2.2, 2.3, 2.4). Important Problem Types:

Sorting, Searching, String processing, Graph Problems, Combinatorial Problems.

Fundamental Data Structures: Stacks, Queues, Graphs, Trees, Sets and Dictionaries.

(T1:1.3,1.4)

10 Hours

Module 2

Divide and Conquer: General method, Binary search, Recurrence equation for divide

and conquer, Finding the maximum and minimum (T2:3.1, 3.3, 3.4), Merge sort, Quick

sort (T1:4.1, 4.2), Strassen’s matrix multiplication (T2:3.8), Advantages and

Disadvantages of divide and conquer. Decrease and Conquer Approach: Topological

Sort. (T1:5.3)

10 Hours

Module 3

Greedy Method: General method, Coin Change Problem, Knapsack Problem, Job

sequencing with deadlines (T2:4.1, 4.3, 4.5). Minimum cost spanning trees: Prim’s

Algorithm, Kruskal’s Algorithm (T1:9.1, 9.2). Single source shortest paths: Dijkstra's

Algorithm (T1:9.3). Optimal Tree problem: Huffman Trees and Codes (T1:9.4).

Transform and Conquer Approach: Heaps and Heap Sort (T1:6.4).

10 Hours

Module 4

Dynamic Programming: General method with Examples, Multistage Graphs (T2:5.1,

5.2). Transitive Closure: Warshall’s Algorithm, All Pairs Shortest Paths: Floyd's

Algorithm, Optimal Binary Search Trees, Knapsack problem ((T1:8.2, 8.3, 8.4),

Bellman-Ford Algorithm (T2:5.4), Travelling Sales Person problem (T2:5.9), Reliability

design (T2:5.8).

10 Hours

Module 5

Backtracking: General method (T2:7.1), N-Queens problem (T1:12.1), Sum of subsets

problem (T1:12.1), Graph coloring (T2:7.4), Hamiltonian cycles (T2:7.5). Branch and

Bound: Assignment Problem, Travelling Sales Person problem (T1:12.2), 0/1

Knapsack problem (T2:8.2, T1:12.2): LC Branch and Bound solution (T2:8.2), FIFO

Branch and Bound solution (T2:8.2). NP-Complete and NP-Hard problems: Basic

10 Hours

concepts, non-deterministic algorithms, P, NP, NP-Complete, and NP-Hard classes

(T2:11.1).

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to

• Describe computational solution to well known problems like searching, sorting etc.

• Estimate the computational complexity of different algorithms.

• Devise an algorithm using appropriate design strategies for problem solving.

Graduate Attributes

• Engineering Knowledge

• Problem Analysis

• Design/Development of Solutions

• Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems

• Life-Long Learning

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

There will be 2 questions from each module.

Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

T1. Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms, Anany Levitin:, 2rd Edition, 2009.

Pearson.

T2. Computer Algorithms/C++, Ellis Horowitz, Satraj Sahni and Rajasekaran, 2nd Edition, 2014,

Universities Press

Reference Books:

1. Introduction to Algorithms, Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronal L. Rivest,

Clifford Stein, 3rd Edition, PHI

2. Design and Analysis of Algorithms , S. Sridhar, Oxford (Higher Education)

MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15CS44 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Make familiar with importance and applications of microprocessors and microcontrollers

• Expose architecture of 8086 microprocessor and ARM processor

• Familiarize instruction set of ARM processor

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

The x86 microprocessor: Brief history of the x86 family, Inside the 8088/86,

Introduction to assembly programming, Introduction to Program Segments, The Stack,

Flag register, x86 Addressing Modes. Assembly language programming: Directives &

a Sample Program, Assemble, Link & Run a program, More Sample programs, Control

Transfer Instructions, Data Types and Data Definition, Full Segment Definition,

Flowcharts and Pseudo code.

Text book 1: Ch 1: 1.1 to 1.7, Ch 2: 2.1 to 2.7

10 Hours

Module 2

x86: Instructions sets description, Arithmetic and logic instructions and programs:

Unsigned Addition and Subtraction, Unsigned Multiplication and Division, Logic

Instructions, BCD and ASCII conversion, Rotate Instructions. INT 21H and INT 10H

Programming : Bios INT 10H Programming , DOS Interrupt 21H. 8088/86 Interrupts,

x86 PC and Interrupt Assignment.

Text book 1: Ch 3: 3.1 to 3.5, Ch 4: 4.1 , 4.2 Chapter 14: 14.1 and 14.2

10 Hours

Module 3

Signed Numbers and Strings: Signed number Arithmetic Operations, String operations.

Memory and Memory interfacing: Memory address decoding, data integrity in RAM

and ROM, 16-bit memory interfacing. 8255 I/O programming: I/O addresses MAP of

x86 PC’s, programming and interfacing the 8255.

Text book 1: Ch 6: 6.1, 6.2. Ch 10: 10.2, 10.4, 10.5. Ch 11: 11.1 to 11.4

10 Hours

Module 4

Microprocessors versus Microcontrollers, ARM Embedded Systems :The RISC design

philosophy, The ARM Design Philosophy, Embedded System Hardware, Embedded

System Software, ARM Processor Fundamentals : Registers , Current Program Status

Register , Pipeline, Exceptions, Interrupts, and the Vector Table , Core Extensions

Text book 2:Ch 1:1.1 to 1.4, Ch 2:2.1 to 2.5

10 Hours

Module 5

Introduction to the ARM Instruction Set : Data Processing Instructions , Branch

Instructions, Software Interrupt Instructions, Program Status Register Instructions,

Coprocessor Instructions, Loading Constants, Simple programming exercises.

Text book 2: Ch 3:3.1 to 3.6 ( Excluding 3.5.2)

10 Hours

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to

• Differentiate between microprocessors and microcontrollers

• Design and develop assembly language code to solve problems

• Gain the knowledge for interfacing various devices to x86 family and ARM processor

• Demonstrate design of interrupt routines for interfacing devices

Graduate Attributes

• Engineering Knowledge

• Problem Analysis

• Design/Development of Solutions

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

There will be 2 questions from each module.

Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Danny Causey, The x86 PC Assembly

Language Design and Interfacing, 5th Edition, Pearson, 2013.

2. ARM system developers guide, Andrew N Sloss, Dominic Symes and Chris Wright,

Elsevier,Morgan Kaufman publishers, 2008.

Reference Books:

1. Douglas V. Hall: Microprocessors and Interfacing, Revised 2nd Edition, TMH, 2006.

2. K. Udaya Kumar & B.S. Umashankar : Advanced Microprocessors & IBM-PC Assembly

Language Programming, TMH 2003.

3. Ayala : The 8086 Microprocessor: programming and interfacing - 1st edition, Cengage

Learning

4. The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3, by Joseph Yiu, 2nd Edition , Newnes, 2009

5. The Insider’s Guide to the ARM7 based microcontrollers, Hitex Ltd.,1st edition, 2005

6. ARM System-on-Chip Architecture, Steve Furber, Second Edition, Pearson, 2015

7. Architecture, Programming and Interfacing of Low power Processors- ARM7, Cortex-M and

MSP430, Lyla B Das Cengage Learning, 1st Edition

OBJECT ORIENTED CONCEPTS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15CS45 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Learn fundamental features of object oriented language and JAVA

• Set up Java JDK environment to create, debug and run simple Java programs.

• Create multi-threaded programs and event handling mechanisms.

• Introduce event driven Graphical User Interface (GUI) programming using applets and

swings. Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction to Object Oriented Concepts:

A Review of structures, Procedure–Oriented Programming system, Object Oriented

Programming System, Comparison of Object Oriented Language with C, Console I/O,

variables and reference variables, Function Prototyping, Function Overloading. Class

and Objects: Introduction, member functions and data, objects and functions, objects and

arrays, Namespaces, Nested classes, Constructors, Destructors.

Text book 1: Ch 1: 1.1 to 1.9 Ch 2: 2.1 to 2.6 Ch 4: 4.1 to 4.2

10 Hours

Module 2

Introduction to Java: Java’s magic: the Byte code; Java Development Kit (JDK); the

Java Buzzwords, Object-oriented programming; Simple Java programs. Data types,

variables and arrays, Operators, Control Statements.

Text book 2: Ch:1 Ch: 2 Ch:3 Ch:4 Ch:5

10 Hours

Module 3

Classes, Inheritance, Exceptions, Packages and Interfaces: Classes: Classes

fundamentals; Declaring objects; Constructors, this keyword, garbage collection.

Inheritance: inheritance basics, using super, creating multi level hierarchy, method

overriding. Exception handling: Exception handling in Java. Packages, Access

Protection, Importing Packages, Interfaces.

Text book 2: Ch:6 Ch: 8 Ch:9 Ch:10

10 Hours

Module 4

Multi Threaded Programming, Event Handling: Multi Threaded Programming: What

are threads? How to make the classes threadable ; Extending threads; Implementing

runnable; Synchronization; Changing state of the thread; Bounded buffer problems, read-

write problem, producer consumer problems. Event Handling: Two event handling

mechanisms; The delegation event model; Event classes; Sources of events; Event

listener interfaces; Using the delegation event model; Adapter classes; Inner classes.

Text book 2: Ch 11: Ch: 22

10 Hours

Module 5

The Applet Class: Introduction, Two types of Applets; Applet basics; Applet

Architecture; An Applet skeleton; Simple Applet display methods; Requesting repainting;

10 Hours

Using the Status Window; The HTML APPLET tag; Passing parameters to Applets;

getDocumentbase() and getCodebase(); ApletContext and showDocument(); The

AudioClip Interface; The AppletStub Interface;Output to the Console. Swings: Swings:

The origins of Swing; Two key Swing features; Components and Containers; The Swing

Packages; A simple Swing Application; Create a Swing Applet; Jlabel and ImageIcon;

JTextField;The Swing Buttons; JTabbedpane; JScrollPane; JList; JComboBox; JTable.

Text book 2: Ch 21: Ch: 29 Ch: 30

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to

• Explain the object-oriented concepts and JAVA.

• Develop computer programs to solve real world problems in Java.

• Develop simple GUI interfaces for a computer program to interact with users, and to

understand the event-based GUI handling principles using Applets and swings.

Graduate Attributes

• Programming Knowledge

• Design/Development of Solutions

• Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems

• Life-Long Learning

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

There will be 2 questions from each module.

Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Sourav Sahay, Object Oriented Programming with C++ , Oxford University Press,2006

(Chapters 1, 2, 4)

2. Herbert Schildt, Java The Complete Reference, 7th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.

(Chapters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9,10, 11, 21, 22, 29, 30)

Reference Book:

1. Mahesh Bhave and Sunil Patekar, "Programming with Java", First Edition, Pearson

Education,2008, ISBN:9788131720806

2. Herbert Schildt, The Complete Reference C++, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

3. Stanley B.Lippmann, Josee Lajore, C++ Primer, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.

4. Rajkumar Buyya,S Thamarasi selvi, xingchen chu, Object oriented Programming with java,

Tata McGraw Hill education private limited.

5. Richard A Johnson, Introduction to Java Programming and OOAD, CENGAGE Learning.

6. E Balagurusamy,Programming with Java A primer, Tata McGraw Hill companies.

Note: Every institute shall organize a bridge organize on C++ either in the vacation or in the

beginning of even semester.

DATA COMMUNICATION [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15CS46 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Comprehend the transmission technique of digital data between two or more computers and a

computer network that allows computers to exchange data.

• Explain with the basics of data communication and various types of computer networks;

• Illustrate TCP/IP protocol suite and switching criteria.

• Demonstrate Medium Access Control protocols for reliable and noisy channels.

• Expose wireless and wired LANs along with IP version.

Contents Teaching

Hours

Module 1

Introduction: Data Communications, Networks, Network Types, Internet History,

Standards and Administration, Networks Models: Protocol Layering, TCP/IP Protocol

suite, The OSI model, Introduction to Physical Layer-1: Data and Signals, Digital

Signals, Transmission Impairment, Data Rate limits, Performance, Digital Transmission:

Digital to digital conversion (Only Line coding: Polar, Bipolar and Manchester coding).

10 Hours

Module 2

Physical Layer-2: Analog to digital conversion (only PCM), Transmission Modes,

Analog Transmission: Digital to analog conversion, Bandwidth Utilization:

Multiplexing and Spread Spectrum, Switching: Introduction, Circuit Switched Networks

and Packet switching.

10 Hours

Module 3

Error Detection and Correction: Introduction, Block coding, Cyclic codes, Checksum,

Forward error correction, Data link control: DLC services, Data link layer protocols,

HDLC, and Point to Point protocol (Framing, Transition phases only).

10 Hours

Module 4

Media Access control: Random Access, Controlled Access and Channelization,

Wired LANs Ethernet: Ethernet Protocol, Standard Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit

Ethernet and 10 Gigabit Ethernet, Wireless LANs: Introduction, IEEE 802.11 Project

and Bluetooth.

10 Hours

Module 5

Other wireless Networks: WIMAX, Cellular Telephony, Satellite networks, Network

layer Protocols : Internet Protocol, ICMPv4,Mobile IP, Next generation IP: IPv6

addressing, The IPv6 Protocol, The ICMPv6 Protocol and Transition from IPv4 to IPv6.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to

• Illustrate basic computer network technology.

• Identify the different types of network topologies and protocols.

• Enumerate the layers of the OSI model and TCP/IP functions of each layer.

• Make out the different types of network devices and their functions within a network

• Demonstrate the skills of subnetting and routing mechanisms.

Graduate Attributes

1. Engineering Knowledge

2. Design Development of solution(Partly)

3. Modern Tool Usage

4. Problem Analysis

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

There will be 2 questions from each module.

Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Book:

Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking 5E, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,

2013. (Chapters 1.1 to 1.5, 2.1 to 2.3, 3.1, 3.3 to 3.6, 4.1 to 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8.1 to 8.3, 10.1 to 10.5,

11.1 to 11.4, 12.1 to 12.3, 13.1 to 13.5, 15.1 to 15.3, 16.1 to 16.3, 19.1 to 19.3, 22.1 to 22.4)

Reference Books:

1. Alberto Leon-Garcia and Indra Widjaja: Communication Networks - Fundamental Concepts

and Key architectures, 2nd Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, 2004.

2. William Stallings: Data and Computer Communication, 8th Edition, Pearson Education,

2007.

3. Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S. Davie: Computer Networks – A Systems Approach, 4th

Edition, Elsevier, 2007.

4. Nader F. Mir: Computer and Communication Networks, Pearson Education, 2007

DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHM LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV Subject Code 15CSL47 IA Marks 20 Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01 I + 02 P Exam Marks 80 Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Design and implement various algorithms in JAVA • Employ various design strategies for problem solving. • Measure and compare the performance of different algorithms.

Description

Design, develop, and implement the specified algorithms for the following problems using Java language under LINUX /Windows environment.Netbeans/Eclipse IDE tool can be used for development and demonstration. Experiments

1 A

Create a Java class called Studentwith the following details as variables within it. (i) USN (ii) Name (iii) Branch (iv) Phone

Write a Java program to create nStudent objects and print the USN, Name, Branch, and Phoneof these objects with suitable headings.

B Write a Java program to implement the Stack using arrays. Write Push(), Pop(), and Display() methods to demonstrate its working.

2 A Design a superclass called Staff with details as StaffId, Name, Phone, Salary. Extend this class by writing three subclasses namely Teaching (domain, publications), Technical (skills), and Contract (period). Write a Java program to read and display at least 3 staff objects of all three categories.

B Write a Java class called Customer to store their name and date_of_birth. The date_of_birth format should be dd/mm/yyyy. Write methods to read customer data as <name, dd/mm/yyyy> and display as <name, dd, mm, yyyy> using StringTokenizer class considering the delimiter character as “/”.

3 A Write a Java program to read two integers a andb. Compute a/b and print, when b is not zero. Raise an exception when b is equal to zero.

B Write a Java program that implements a multi-thread application that has three threads. First thread generates a random integer for every 1 second; second thread computes the square of the number andprints; third thread will print the value of cube of the number.

4 Sort a given set of n integer elements using Quick Sort method and compute its time complexity. Run the program for varied values of n> 5000 and record the time taken to sort. Plot a graph of the time taken versus non graph sheet. The elements can be read from a file or can be generated using the random number generator. Demonstrate using Java how the divide-and-conquer method works along with its time complexity analysis: worst case, average case and best case.

5 Sort a given set of n integer elements using Merge Sort method and compute its time complexity. Run the program for varied values of n> 5000, and record the time taken to sort. Plot a graph of the time taken versus non graph sheet. The elements can be read from a file or can be generated using the random number generator. Demonstrate using Java how the divide-and-conquer method works along with its time complexity analysis: worst case, average case and best case.

6 Implement in Java, the 0/1 Knapsack problem using (a) Dynamic Programming method (b) Greedy method.

7 From a given vertex in a weighted connected graph, find shortest paths to other vertices using Dijkstra's algorithm. Write the program in Java.

8 Find Minimum Cost Spanning Tree of a given connected undirected graph using Kruskal'salgorithm. Use Union-Find algorithms in your program.

9 Find Minimum Cost Spanning Tree of a given connected undirected graph using Prim's algorithm.

10 Write Java programs to (a) Implement All-Pairs Shortest Paths problem using Floyd's algorithm. (b) Implement Travelling Sales Person problem using Dynamic programming.

11 Design and implement in Java to find a subset of a given set S = Sl, S2,.....,Sn of n positive integers whose SUM is equal to a given positive integer d. For example, if S =1, 2, 5, 6, 8 and d= 9, there are two solutions 1,2,6and 1,8. Display a suitable message, if the given problem instance doesn't have a solution.

12 Design and implement in Java to find all Hamiltonian Cycles in a connected undirected Graph G of n vertices using backtracking principle.

Course Outcomes: The students should be able to:

• Design algorithms using appropriate design techniques (brute-force, greedy, dynamic programming, etc.)

• Implement a variety of algorithms such assorting, graph related, combinatorial, etc., in a high level language.

• Analyze and compare the performance of algorithms using language features. • Apply and implement learned algorithm design techniques and data structuresto solve real-

world problems. Graduate Attributes

• Engineering Knowledge • Problem Analysis • Modern Tool Usage • Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems • Design/Development of Solutions

Conduction of Practical Examination:

All laboratory experiments (Twelve problems) are to be included for practical examination. Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot. To generate the data set use random number generator function. Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for breakup of marks Marks distribution: Procedure + Conduction + Viva: 20 + 50 + 10 (80). Change of

experiment is allowed only once and marks allotted to the procedure

MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15CSL48 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01 I + 02 P Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• To provide practical exposure to the students on microprocessors, design and coding

knowledge on 80x86 family/ARM. To give the knowledge and practical exposure on

connectivity and execute of interfacing devices with 8086/ARM kit like LED displays,

Keyboards, DAC/ADC, and various other devices.

Description

Demonstration and Explanation hardware components and Faculty in-charge should explain 8086

architecture, pin diagram in one slot. The second slot, the Faculty in-charge should explain instruction

set types/category etc. Students have to prepare a write-up on the same and include it in the Lab

record and to be evaluated.

Laboratory Session-1: Write-up on Microprocessors, 8086 Functional block diagram, Pin diagram and

description. The same information is also taught in theory class; this helps the students to understand

better.

Laboratory Session-2: Write-up on Instruction group, Timing diagrams, etc. The same information is

also taught in theory class; this helps the students to understand better.

Note: These TWO Laboratory sessions are used to fill the gap between theory classes and practical

sessions. Both sessions are evaluated as lab experiments for 20 marks.

Experiments

• Develop and execute the following programs using 8086 Assembly Language. Any suitable

assembler like MASM/TASM/8086 kit or any equivalent software may be used.

• Program should have suitable comments.

• The board layout and the circuit diagram of the interface are to be provided to the student

during the examination.

• Software Required: Open source ARM Development platform, KEIL IDE and Proteus for

simulation

SOFTWARE PROGRAMS: PART A

1. Design and develop an assembly language program to search a key element “X” in a list of ‘n’

16-bit numbers. Adopt Binary search algorithm in your program for searching.

2. Design and develop an assembly program to sort a given set of ‘n’ 16-bit numbers in

ascending order. Adopt Bubble Sort algorithm to sort given elements.

3. Develop an assembly language program to reverse a given string and verify whether it is a

palindrome or not. Display the appropriate message.

4. Develop an assembly language program to compute nCr using recursive procedure. Assume

that ‘n’ and ‘r’ are non-negative integers.

5. Design and develop an assembly language program to read the current time and Date from the

system and display it in the standard format on the screen.

6. To write and simulate ARM assembly language programs for data transfer, arithmetic and

logical operations (Demonstrate with the help of a suitable program).

7. To write and simulate C Programs for ARM microprocessor using KEIL (Demonstrate with

the help of a suitable program)

Note : To use KEIL one may refer the book: Insider’s Guide to the ARM7 based

microcontrollers, Hitex Ltd.,1st edition, 2005

HARDWARE PROGRAMS: PART B

8. a. Design and develop an assembly program to demonstrate BCD Up-Down Counter (00-99)

on the Logic Controller Interface.

b. Design and develop an assembly program to read the status of two 8-bit inputs (X & Y)

from the Logic Controller Interface and display X*Y.

9. Design and develop an assembly program to display messages “FIRE” and “HELP”

alternately with flickering effects on a 7-segment display interface for a suitable period of

time. Ensure a flashing rate that makes it easy to read both the messages (Examiner does not

specify these delay values nor is it necessary for the student to compute these values).

10. Design and develop an assembly program to drive a Stepper Motor interface and rotate the

motor in specified direction (clockwise or counter-clockwise) by N steps (Direction and N

are specified by the examiner). Introduce suitable delay between successive steps. (Any

arbitrary value for the delay may be assumed by the student).

11. Design and develop an assembly language program to

a. Generate the Sine Wave using DAC interface (The output of the DAC is to be

displayed on the CRO).

b. Generate a Half Rectified Sine waveform using the DAC interface. (The output of

the DAC is to be displayed on the CRO).

12. To interface LCD with ARM processor-- ARM7TDMI/LPC2148. Write and execute

programs in C language for displaying text messages and numbers on LCD

13. To interface Stepper motor with ARM processor-- ARM7TDMI/LPC2148. Write a program

to rotate stepper motor

Study Experiments:

1. Interfacing of temperature sensor with ARM freedom board (or any other ARM

microprocessor board) and display temperature on LCD

2. To design ARM cortex based automatic number plate recognition system

3. To design ARM based power saving system

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to

• Learn 80x86 instruction sets and gins the knowledge of how assembly language works.

• Design and implement programs written in 80x86 assembly language

• Know functioning of hardware devices and interfacing them to x86 family

• Choose processors for various kinds of applications.

Graduate Attributes

• Engineering Knowledge

• Problem Analysis

• Modern Tool Usage

• Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems

• Design/Development of Solutions

Conduction of Practical Examination:

• All laboratory experiments (all 7 + 6 nos) are to be included for practical examination.

• Students are allowed to pick one experiment from each of the lot.

• Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for breakup of

marks

• PART –A: Procedure + Conduction + Viva: 10 + 25 +05 (40)

• PART –B: Procedure + Conduction + Viva: 10 + 25 +05 (40)

• Change of experiment is allowed only once and marks allotted to the procedure part to be

made zero.

1

B.E. Computer Science & Engineering

V SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours

/Week Examination

Credits

Theory Practical/

Drawing

Duration Theory/

Practical

Marks

I.A.

Marks

Total Marks

1 15CS51 Management and Entrepreneurship for IT Industry 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

2 15CS52 Computer Networks 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

3 15CS53 Database Management System 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

4 15CS54 Automata theory and Computability 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

5 15CS55x Professional Elective 1 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

6 15CS56x Open Elective 1 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

7 15CSL57 Computer Network Laboratory -- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15CSL58 DBMS Laboratory with mini project -- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 22 6 24 640 160 800 26

Professional Elective 1

15CS551 Object Oriented Modeling and Design 15CS552 Introduction to Software Testing 15CS553 Advanced JAVA and J2EE 15CS554 Advanced Algorithms

1. Professional Elective: Electives relevant to chosen specialization / branch

2. Open Elective: Electives from other technical and/or emerging subject areas (Announced separately)

2

B.E. Computer Science & Engineering

VI SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours

/Week Examination

Credits

Theory Practical/

Drawing

Duration Theory/

Practical

Marks

I.A.

Marks

Total Marks

1 15CS61 Cryptography, Network Security and Cyber Law 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

2 15CS62 Computer Graphics and Visualization 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

3 15CS63 System Software and Compiler Design 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

4 15CS64 Operating Systems 04 -- 03 80 20 100 4

5 15CS65x Professional Elective 2 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

6 15CS66x Open Elective 2 03 -- 03 80 20 100 3

7 15CSL67 System Software and Operating System Laboratory

-- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

8 15CSL68 Computer Graphics Laboratory with mini project -- 1I+2P 03 80 20 100 2

TOTAL 22 6 24 640 160 800 26

Professional Elective 2

15CS651 Data Mining and Data Warehousing 15CS652 Software Architecture and Design Patterns 15CS653 Operations research 15CS654 Distributed Computing system

1. Professional Elective: Electives relevant to choosen specialization / branch

2. Open Elective: Electives from other technical and/or emerging subject areas (Announced separately)

1

B.E. Computer Science & Engineering VII SEMESTER

Sl. No

Subject Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week

Examination Credits

Theory Practical/ Drawing

Duration I.A. Marks Theory/ Practical Marks

Total Marks

1 15CS71 Web Technology and its applications 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

2 15CS72 Advanced Computer Architectures 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

3 15CS73 Machine Learning 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

4 15CS74x Professional Elective 3 03 -- 03 20 80 100 3

5 15CS75x Professional Elective 4 03 -- 03 20 80 100 3

6 15CSL76 Machine Learning Laboratory -- 1I+2P 03 20 80 100 2

7 15CSL77 Web Technology Laboratory with mini project -- 1I+2P 03 20 80 100 2

8 15CSP78 Project Phase 1 + Seminar -- -- -- 100 -- 100 2

TOTAL 18 6 21 240 560 800 24

Professional Elective 3 Professional Elective 4 15CS741 Natural Language Processing 15CS751 Soft and Evolutionary Computing 15CS742 Cloud Computing and its Applications 15CS752 Computer Vision and Robotics 15CS743 Information and Network Security 15CS753 Digital Image Processing 15CS744 Unix System Programming 15CS754 Storage Area Networks

1. Professional Elective: Electives relevant to choosen specialization / branch

2. Project Phase 1 + Seminar : Literature Survey, Problem Identification, Objectives and Methodology, Submission of Synopsis and Seminar

2

B.E. Computer Science & Engineering VIII SEMESTER

Sl. No

Subject Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week

Examination Credits

Theory Practical/ Drawing

Duration I.A. Marks Theory/ Practical Marks

Total Marks

1 15CS81 Internet of Things and Applications 4 -- 3 20 80 100 4

2 15CS82 Big Data Analytics 4 -- 3 20 80 100 4

3 15CS83x Professional Elective 5 3 -- 3 20 80 100 3

4 15CS84 Internship / Professional Practice Industry Oriented 3 50 50 100 2

5 15CSP85 Project work phase II -- 6 3 100 100 200 5

6 15CSS86 Seminar -- 4 -- 100 -- 100 2

TOTAL 11 10 15 310 390 700 20

Professional Elective 5 15CS831 High Performance Computing 15CS832 User Interface Design 15CS833 Network management 15CS834 System Modeling and Simulation

1. Professional Elective: Electives relevant to chosen specialization / branch

2. Internship / Professional Practice: To be carried out between 6th and 7th semester vacation or 7th and 8th semester vacation period

1 | P a g e

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER – III Subject Code 15MAT31 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to • Comprehend and use of analytical and numerical methods in different engineering fields • Apprehend and apply Fourier Series • Realize and use of Fourier transforms and Z-Transforms • Use of statistical methods in curve fitting applications • Use of numerical methods to solve algebraic and transcendental equations, vector integration and

calculus of variation

Module -1 Teaching

Hours

Fourier Series: Periodic functions, Dirichlet’s condition, Fourier Series of Periodic functions with period 2π and with arbitrary period 2c, Fourier series of even and odd functions, Half range Fourier Series, practical Harmonic analysis. Complex Fourier series

10Hours

Module -2

Fourier Transforms: Infinite Fourier transforms, Fourier Sine and Cosine transforms, Inverse transform. Z-transform: Difference equations, basic definition, z-transform - definition, Standard z-transforms, Damping rule, Shifting rule, Initial value and final value theorems (without proof) and problems, Inverse z-transform. Applications of z-transforms to solve difference equations.

10 Hours

Module – 3

Statistical Methods: Correlation and rank Correlation coefficients, Regression and Regression coefficients, lines of regression - problems Curve fitting: Curve fitting by the method of least squares, Fitting of the curves of the form, = + , = + +

, = , = . Numerical Methods: Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations by: Regular-falsi method, Secant method, Newton - Raphson method and Graphical method.

10 Hours

Module-4

Finite differences: Forward and backward differences, Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulae. Divided differences-Newton’s divided difference formula. Lagrange’s interpolation formula and inverse interpolation formula. Central Difference-Stirling’s and Bessel’s formulae (all formulae without proof)-Problems. Numerical

integration: Simpson’s 1/3, 3/8 rule, Weddle’s rule (without proof ) -Problems

10 Hours

2 | P a g e

Module-5

Vector integration: Line integrals-definition and problems, surface and volume integrals-definition, Green’s theorem in a plane, Stokes and Gauss-divergence theorem (without proof) and problems. Calculus of Variations: Variation of function and Functional, variational problems, Euler’s equation, Geodesics, minimal surface of revolution, hanging chain, problems

10 Hours

Course outcomes:

After Studying this course, students will be able to

• Use of periodic signals and Fourier series to analyze circuits • Explain the general linear system theory for continuous-time signals and systems using the Fourier

Transform • Analyze discrete-time systems using convolution and the z-transform • Use appropriate numerical methods to solve algebraic and transcendental equations and also to calculate a

definite integral • Use curl and divergence of a vector function in three dimensions, as well as apply the Green's Theorem,

Divergence Theorem and Stokes' theorem in various applications • Solve the simple problem of the calculus of variations

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Problem Analysis 3. Life-Long Learning 4. Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. B. S. Grewal," Higher Engineering Mathematics", Khanna publishers, 42nd edition, 2013. 2. B.V. Ramana "Higher Engineering Mathematics" Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.

Reference Books:

1. N. P. Bali and Manish Goyal, "A text book of Engineering mathematics" , Laxmi publications, latest edition.

2. Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics " - 9th edition, Wiley. 3. H. K Dass and Er. Rajnish Verma ,"Higher Engineering Mathematics", S. Chand, 1st ed.

3 | P a g e

ANALOG AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016) SEMESTER - III

Subject Code 15CS32 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable the students to

• Recall and Recognize construction and characteristics of JFETs and MOSFETs and differentiate with BJT

• Evolve and Analyze Operational Amplifier circuits and their applications • Describe, Illustrate and Analyze Combinational Logic circuits, Simplification of Algebraic Equations

using Karnaugh Maps and Quine McClusky Techniques. • Describe and Design Decoders, Encoders, Digital multiplexers, Adders and Subtractors, Binary

comparators, Latches and Master-Slave Flip-Flops. • Describe, Design and Analyze Synchronous and Asynchronous Sequential • Explain and design registers and Counters, A/D and D/A converters.

Module -1 Teaching

Hours

Field Effect Transistors: Junction Field Effect Transistors, MOSFETs, Differences between JFETs and MOSFETs, Biasing MOSFETs, FET Applications, CMOS Devices. Wave-Shaping Circuits: Integrated Circuit(IC) Multivibrators. Introduction to

Operational Amplifier: Ideal v/s practical Opamp, Performance Parameters, Operational

Amplifier Application Circuits:Peak Detector Circuit, Comparator, Active Filters, Non-Linear Amplifier, Relaxation Oscillator, Current-To-Voltage Converter, Voltage-To-Current Converter. Text book 1:- Ch5: 5.2, 5.3, 5.5, 5.8, 5.9, 5.1.Ch13: 13.10.Ch 16: 16.3, 16.4. Ch 17: 7.12,

17.14, 17.15, 17.18, 17.19, 17.20, 17.21.)

10 Hours

Module -2

The Basic Gates: Review of Basic Logic gates, Positive and Negative Logic, Introduction to HDL. Combinational Logic Circuits: Sum-of-Products Method, Truth Table to Karnaugh Map, Pairs Quads, and Octets, Karnaugh Simplifications, Don’t-care Conditions, Product-of-sums Method, Product-of-sums simplifications, Simplification by Quine-McClusky Method, Hazards and Hazard covers, HDL Implementation Models. Text book 2:- Ch2: 2.4, 2.5. Ch3: 3.2 to 3.11.

10 Hours

Module – 3

4 | P a g e

Data-Processing Circuits: Multiplexers, Demultiplexers, 1-of-16 Decoder, BCD to Decimal Decoders, Seven Segment Decoders, Encoders, Exclusive-OR Gates, Parity Generators and Checkers, Magnitude Comparator, Programmable Array Logic, Programmable Logic Arrays, HDL Implementation of Data Processing Circuits. Arithmetic Building Blocks, Arithmetic Logic Unit Flip- Flops: RS Flip-Flops, Gated Flip-Flops, Edge-triggered RS FLIP-FLOP, Edge-triggered D FLIP-FLOPs, Edge-triggered JK FLIP-FLOPs. Text book 2:- Ch 4:- 4.1 to 4.9, 4.11, 4.12, 4.14.Ch6:-6.7, 6.10.Ch8:- 8.1 to 8.5.

10 Hours

Module-4

Flip- Flops: FLIP-FLOP Timing, JK Master-slave FLIP-FLOP, Switch Contact Bounce Circuits, Various Representation of FLIP-FLOPs, HDL Implementation of FLIP-FLOP. Registers: Types of Registers, Serial In - Serial Out, Serial In - Parallel out, Parallel In - Serial Out, Parallel In - Parallel Out, Universal Shift Register, Applications of Shift Registers, Register implementation in HDL. Counters: Asynchronous Counters, Decoding Gates, Synchronous Counters, Changing the Counter Modulus. (Text book 2:- Ch 8: 8.6, 8.8, 8.9, 8.10, 8.13. Ch 9: 9.1 to 9.8. Ch 10: 10.1 to 10.4)

10 Hours

Module-5

Counters: Decade Counters, Presettable Counters, Counter Design as a Synthesis problem, A Digital Clock, Counter Design using HDL. D/A Conversion and A/D Conversion:

Variable, Resistor Networks, Binary Ladders, D/A Converters, D/A Accuracy and Resolution, A/D Converter-Simultaneous Conversion, A/D Converter-Counter Method, Continuous A/D Conversion, A/D Techniques, Dual-slope A/D Conversion, A/D Accuracy and Resolution. Text book 2:- Ch 10: 10.5 to 10.9. Ch 12: 12.1 to 12.10

10 Hours

Course outcomes: After Studying this course, students will be able to

• Explain the operation of JFETs and MOSFETs , Operational Amplifier circuits and their application • Explain Combinational Logic, Simplification Techniques using Karnaugh Maps, Quine McClusky

technique. • Demonstrate Operation of Decoders, Encoders, Multiplexers, Adders and Subtractors, working of

Latches, Flip-Flops, Designing Registers, Counters, A/D and D/A Converters • Design of Counters, Registers and A/D & D/A converters

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Design/Development of Solutions(partly) 3. Modern Tool Usage 4. Problem Analysis

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

5 | P a g e

1. Anil K Maini, Varsha Agarwal: Electronic Devices and Circuits, Wiley, 2012. 2. Donald P Leach, Albert Paul Malvino & Goutam Saha: Digital Principles and Applications, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015

Reference Books:

1. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic: Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design with VHDL, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.

2. R D Sudhaker Samuel: Illustrative Approach to Logic Design, Sanguine-Pearson, 2010. 3. M Morris Mano: Digital Logic and Computer Design, 10th Edition, Pearson, 2008.

6 | P a g e

DATA STRUCTURES AND APPLICATIONS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER - III Subject Code 15CS33 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS - 04

Course objectives: This course will enable the students to

• Explain fundamentals of data structures and their applications essential for programming/problem solving

• Illustrate linear representation of data structures: Stack, Queues, Lists • Illustrate linear representation of data structures: Trees, Graphs • Demonstrate sorting and searching algorithms • Find suitable data structure during application development/Problem Solving

Module -1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction: Data Structures, Classifications (Primitive & Non Primitive), Data structure Operations, Review of Arrays, Structures, Self-Referential Structures, and Unions. Pointers and Dynamic Memory Allocation Functions. Representation of Linear Arrays in Memory, Dynamically allocated arrays, Array Operations: Traversing, inserting, deleting, searching, and sorting. Multidimensional Arrays, Polynomials and Sparse Matrices. Strings: Basic Terminology, Storing, Operations and Pattern Matching algorithms. Programming Examples. Text 1: Ch 1: 1.2, Ch2: 2.2 -2.7

Text 2: Ch 1: 1.1 -1.4, Ch 3: 3.1-3.3,3.5,3.7, Ch 4: 4.1-4.9,4.14

Ref 3: Ch 1: 1.4

10 Hours

Module -2

Stacks and Queues

Stacks: Definition, Stack Operations, Array Representation of Stacks, Stacks using Dynamic Arrays, Stack Applications: Polish notation, Infix to postfix conversion, evaluation of postfix expression, Recursion - Factorial, GCD, Fibonacci Sequence, Tower of Hanoi, Ackerman's function. Queues: Definition, Array Representation, Queue Operations, Circular Queues, Circular queues using Dynamic arrays, Dequeues, Priority Queues, A Mazing Problem. Multiple Stacks and Queues. Programming Examples. Text 1: Ch3: 3.1 -3.7

Text 2: Ch6: 6.1 -6.3, 6.5, 6.7-6.10, 6.12, 6.13

10 Hours

Module – 3

7 | P a g e

Linked Lists: Definition, Representation of linked lists in Memory, Memory allocation; Garbage Collection. Linked list operations: Traversing, Searching, Insertion, and Deletion. Doubly Linked lists, Circular linked lists, and header linked lists. Linked Stacks and Queues. Applications of Linked lists – Polynomials, Sparse matrix representation. Programming Examples Text 1: Ch4: 4.1 -4.8 except 4.6

Text 2: Ch5: 5.1 – 5.10

10 Hours

Module-4

Trees: Terminology, Binary Trees, Properties of Binary trees, Array and linked Representation of Binary Trees, Binary Tree Traversals - Inorder, postorder, preorder; Additional Binary tree operations. Threaded binary trees, Binary Search Trees – Definition, Insertion, Deletion, Traversal, Searching, Application of Trees-Evaluation of Expression, Programming Examples Text 1: Ch5: 5.1 –5.5, 5.7

Text 2: Ch7: 7.1 – 7.9

10 Hours

Module-5

Graphs: Definitions, Terminologies, Matrix and Adjacency List Representation Of Graphs, Elementary Graph operations, Traversal methods: Breadth First Search and Depth First Search. Sorting and Searching: Insertion Sort, Radix sort, Address Calculation Sort. Hashing: Hash Table organizations, Hashing Functions, Static and Dynamic Hashing. Files and Their Organization: Data Hierarchy, File Attributes, Text Files and Binary Files, Basic File Operations, File Organizations and Indexing Text 1: Ch6: 6.1 –6.2, Ch 7:7.2, Ch 8:8.1-8.3

Text 2: Ch8: 8.1 – 8.7, Ch 9:9.1-9.3,9.7,9.9

Reference 2: Ch 16: 16.1 - 16.7

10

Hours

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Use different types of data structures, operations and algorithms • Apply searching and sorting operations on files • Use stack, Queue, Lists, Trees and Graphs in problem solving • Implement all data structures in a high-level language for problem solving.

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Design/Development of Solutions 3. Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems 4. Problem Analysis for suitability of data structures.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

8 | P a g e

Text Books:

1. Fundamentals of Data Structures in C - Ellis Horowitz and Sartaj Sahni, 2nd edition, Universities Press,2014

2. Data Structures - Seymour Lipschutz, Schaum's Outlines, Revised 1st edition, McGraw Hill, 2014

Reference Books:

1. Data Structures: A Pseudo-code approach with C –Gilberg & Forouzan, 2nd edition, Cengage Learning,2014

2. Data Structures using C, , Reema Thareja, 3rd edition Oxford press, 2012 3. An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications- Jean-Paul Tremblay & Paul G. Sorenson, 2nd

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2013 4. Data Structures using C - A M Tenenbaum, PHI, 1989 5. Data Structures and Program Design in C - Robert Kruse, 2nd edition, PHI, 1996

9 | P a g e

COMPUTER ORGANIZATION [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER - III Subject Code 15CS34 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives:

This course will enable the students to

• Explain the basic sub systems of a computer, their organization, structure and operation. • Illustrate the concept of programs as sequences of machine instructions. • Demonstrate different ways of communicating with I/O devices and standard I/O interfaces. • Describe memory hierarchy and concept of virtual memory. • Describe arithmetic and logical operations with integer and floating-point operands. • Illustrate organization of a simple processor, pipelined processor and other computing systems.

Module -1 Teaching

Hours

Basic Structure of Computers: Basic Operational Concepts, Bus Structures, Performance – Processor Clock, Basic Performance Equation, Clock Rate, Performance Measurement. Machine Instructions and Programs: Memory Location and Addresses, Memory Operations, Instructions and Instruction Sequencing, Addressing Modes, Assembly Language, Basic Input and Output Operations, Stacks and Queues, Subroutines, Additional Instructions, Encoding of Machine Instructions

10Hours

Module -2

Input/Output Organization: Accessing I/O Devices, Interrupts – Interrupt Hardware, Enabling and Disabling Interrupts, Handling Multiple Devices, Controlling Device Requests, Exceptions, Direct Memory Access, Buses Interface Circuits, Standard I/O Interfaces – PCI Bus, SCSI Bus, USB.

10 Hours

Module – 3

Memory System: Basic Concepts, Semiconductor RAM Memories, Read Only Memories, Speed, Size, and Cost, Cache Memories – Mapping Functions, Replacement Algorithms, Performance Considerations, Virtual Memories, Secondary Storage.

10 Hours

Module-4

Arithmetic: Numbers, Arithmetic Operations and Characters, Addition and Subtraction of Signed Numbers, Design of Fast Adders, Multiplication of Positive Numbers, Signed Operand Multiplication, Fast Multiplication, Integer Division, Floating-point Numbers and Operations.

10 Hours

Module-5

10 | P a g e

Basic Processing Unit: Some Fundamental Concepts, Execution of a Complete Instruction, Multiple Bus Organization, Hard-wired Control, Micro programmed Control. Pipelining, Embedded Systems and Large Computer Systems: Basic Concepts of pipelining, Examples of Embedded Systems, Processor chips for embedded applications, Simple Microcontroller, The structure of General-Purpose Multiprocessors.

10

Hours

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to: • Explain the basic organization of a computer system. • Demonstrate functioning of different sub systems, such as processor, Input/output,and memory. • Illustrate hardwired control and micro programmed control. pipelining, embedded and other computing

systems. • Design and analyse simple arithmetic and logical units.

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Problem Analysis 3. Life-Long Learning

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic, Safwat Zaky: Computer Organization, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. (Listed topics only from Chapters 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and12)

Reference Books:

1. William Stallings: Computer Organization & Architecture, 9th Edition, Pearson, 2015.

11 | P a g e

UNIX AND SHELL PROGRAMMING [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER – III Subject Code 15CS35 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable the students to

• Illustrate the UNIX system architecture and use of basic Commands. • Use of editors and networking commands. • Demonstrate writing shell scripts.

• Categorize, compare and make use of UNIX system calls. Module -1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction, Brief history. Unix Components/Architecture. Features of Unix. The UNIX Environment and UNIX Structure, Posix and Single Unix specification. The login prompt. General features of Unix commands/ command structure. Command arguments and options. Understanding of some basic commands such as echo, printf, ls, who, date, passwd, cal, Combining commands. Meaning of Internal and external commands. The type command: knowing the type of a command and locating it. The man command knowing more about Unix commands and using Unix online manual pages. The man with keyword option and whatis. The more command and using it with other commands. Knowing the user terminal, displaying its characteristics and setting characteristics. Managing the non-uniform behaviour of terminals and keyboards. The root login. Becoming the super user: su command. The /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow files. Commands to add, modify and delete users.

Topics from chapter 2 , 3 and 15 of text book 1,chapter 1 from text book 2

.

10Hours

Module -2

Unix files. Naming files. Basic file types/categories. Organization of files. Hidden files. Standard directories. Parent child relationship. The home directory and the HOME variable. Reaching required files- the PATH variable, manipulating the PATH, Relative and absolute pathnames. Directory commands – pwd, cd, mkdir, rmdir commands. The dot (.) and double dots (..) notations to represent present and parent directories and their usage in relative path names. File related commands – cat, mv, rm, cp, wc and od commands. File attributes and permissions and knowing them. The ls command with options. Changing file permissions: the relative and absolute permissions changing methods. Recursively changing file permissions. Directory permissions. Topics from chapters 4, 5 and 6 of text book 1

10Hours

12 | P a g e

Module – 3

The vi editor. Basics. The .exrc file. Different ways of invoking and quitting vi. Different modes of vi. Input mode commands. Command mode commands. The ex mode commands. Illustrative examples Navigation commands. Repeat command. Pattern searching. The search and replace command. The set, map and abbr commands. Simple examples using these commands.

The shells interpretive cycle. Wild cards and file name generation. Removing the special meanings of wild cards. Three standard files and redirection. Connecting commands: Pipe. Splitting the output: tee. Command substitution. Basic and Extended regular expressions. The grep, egrep. Typical examples involving different regular expressions. Topics from chapters 7, 8 and 13 of text book 1. Topics from chapter 2 and 9 ,10 of

text book 2

10Hours

Module-4

Shell programming. Ordinary and environment variables. The .profile. Read and readonly commands. Command line arguments. exit and exit status of a command. Logical operators for conditional execution. The test command and its shortcut. The if, while, for and case control statements. The set and shift commands and handling positional parameters. The here ( << ) document and trap command. Simple shell program examples. File inodes and the inode structure. File links – hard and soft links. Filters. Head and tail commands. Cut and paste commands. The sort command and its usage with different options. The umask and default file permissions. Two special files /dev/null and /dev/tty.

Topics from chapter 11, 12, 14 of text book 1,chapter 17 from text book2

.

10Hours

Module-5

Meaning of a process. Mechanism of process creation. Parent and child process. The ps command with its options. Executing a command at a specified point of time: at command. Executing a command periodically: cron command and the crontab file.. Signals. The nice and nohup commands. Background processes. The bg and fg command. The kill command. The find command with illustrative example. Structure of a perl script. Running a perl script. Variables and operators. String handling functions. Default variables - $_ and $. – representing the current line and current line number. The range operator. Chop() and chomp() functions. Lists and arrays. The @- variable. The splice operator, push(), pop(), split() and join(). File handles and handling file – using open(), close() and die () functions.. Associative arrays – keys and value functions. Overview of decision making loop control structures – the foreach. Regular expressions – simple and multiple search patterns. The match and substitute operators. Defining and using subroutines. Topics from chapter 9 and 19 of text book 1. Topics from chapter 11 of reference

book 1

10Hours

Course outcomes:

13 | P a g e

After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Explain UNIX system and use different commands. • Write Shell scripts for certain functions on different subsystems. • Demonstrate use of editors and Perl script writing

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Environment and Sustainability 3. Design/Development of Solutions

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Sumitabha Das., Unix Concepts and Applications., 4th Edition., Tata McGraw Hill 2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Richard F. Gilberg : UNIX and Shell Programming- Cengage Learning – India

Edition. 2009. Reference Books:

1. M.G. Venkatesh Murthy: UNIX & Shell Programming, Pearson Education. 2. Richard Blum , Christine Bresnahan : Linux Command Line and Shell Scripting Bible, 2ndEdition ,

Wiley,2014.

14 | P a g e

DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER – III Subject Code 15CS36 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable the students to

• Provide theoretical foundations of computer science to perceive other courses in the programme.

• Illustrate applications of discrete structures: logic, relations, functions, set theory and counting.

• Describe different mathematical proof techniques,

• Illustrate the use of graph theory in computer science.

Module -1 Teaching

Hours

Fundamentals of Logic: Basic Connectives and Truth Tables, Logic Equivalence – The Laws of Logic, Logical Implication – Rules of Inference. Fundamentals of Logic contd.: The Use of Quantifiers, Quantifiers, Definitions and the Proofs of Theorems,

10Hours

Module -2

Properties of the Integers: Mathematical Induction, The Well Ordering Principle – Mathematical Induction, Recursive Definitions. Principles of Counting. Fundamental

Principles of Counting: The Rules of Sum and Product, Permutations, Combinations – The Binomial Theorem, Combinations with Repetition,.

10 Hours

Module – 3

Relations and Functions: Cartesian Products and Relations, Functions – Plain and One-to-One, Onto Functions. The Pigeon-hole Principle, Function Composition and Inverse Functions. Properties of Relations, Computer Recognition – Zero-One Matrices and Directed Graphs, Partial Orders – Hasse Diagrams, Equivalence Relations and Partitions.

10 Hours

Module-4

The Principle of Inclusion and Exclusion: The Principle of Inclusion and Exclusion, Generalizations of the Principle, Derangements – Nothing is in its Right Place, Rook Polynomials. Recurrence Relations: First Order Linear Recurrence Relation, The Second Order Linear Homogeneous Recurrence Relation with Constant Coefficients,

10 Hours

Module-5

Introduction to Graph Theory: Definitions and Examples, Sub graphs, Complements, and Graph Isomorphism, Vertex Degree, Euler Trails and Circuits , Trees: Definitions, Properties, and Examples, Routed Trees, Trees and Sorting, Weighted Trees and Prefix Codes

10

Hours

15 | P a g e

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to: • Use propositional and predicate logic in knowledge representation and truth verification. • Demonstrate the application of discrete structures in different fields of computer science. • Solve problems using recurrence relations and generating functions. • Application of different mathematical proofs techniques in proving theorems in the courses. • Compare graphs, trees and their applications.

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Problem Analysis 3. Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems 4. Design/Development of Solutions.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Ralph P. Grimaldi: Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics, , 5th Edition, Pearson Education. 2004. (Chapter 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, Appendix 3, Chapter 2, Chapter 4.1, 4.2, Chapter 5.1 to 5.6, Chapter 7.1 to 7.4, Chapter 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.5 to 16.9, and Chapter 14.1, 14.2, 14.3). Reference Books:

1. Basavaraj S Anami and Venakanna S Madalli: Discrete Mathematics – A Concept based approach, Universities Press, 2016

2. Kenneth H. Rosen: Discrete Mathematics and its Applications, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007. 3. Jayant Ganguly: A Treatise on Discrete Mathematical Structures, Sanguine-Pearson, 2010. 4. D.S. Malik and M.K. Sen: Discrete Mathematical Structures: Theory and Applications, Thomson,

2004. 5. Thomas Koshy: Discrete Mathematics with Applications, Elsevier, 2005, Reprint 2008.

16 | P a g e

ANALOG AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER - III Laboratory Code 15CSL37 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01I + 02P Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives: This laboratory course enable students to get practical experience in design, assembly and evaluation/testing of

• Analog components and circuits including Operational Amplifier, Timer, etc. • Combinational logic circuits. • Flip - Flops and their operations • Counters and registers using flip-flops. • Synchronous and Asynchronous sequential circuits. • A/D and D/A converters

Descriptions (if any)

Any simulation package like MultiSim / P-spice /Equivalent software may be used. Faculty-in-charge should demonstrate and explain the required hardware components and their functional Block diagrams, timing diagrams etc. Students have to prepare a write-up on the same and include it in the Lab record and to be evaluated.

Laboratory Session-1: Write-upon analog components; functional block diagram, Pin diagram (if any), waveforms and description. The same information is also taught in theory class; this helps the students to understand better.

Laboratory Session-2: Write-upon Logic design components, pin diagram (if any), Timing diagrams, etc. The same information is also taught in theory class; this helps the students to understand better.

Note: These TWO Laboratory sessions are used to fill the gap between theory classes and practical sessions. Both sessions are to be evaluated for 20 marks as lab experiments.

17 | P a g e

Laboratory Experiments:

1. a) Design and construct a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp for given UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working.

b) Design and implement a Schmitt trigger using Op-Amp using a simulation package for two sets of UTP and LTP values and demonstrate its working.

2. a) Design and construct a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation oscillator) for given frequency and demonstrate its working.

b) Design and implement a rectangular waveform generator (Op-Amp relaxation oscillator) using a simulation package and demonstrate the change in frequency when all resistor values are doubled.

3. Design and implement an Astable multivibrator circuit using 555 timer for a given frequency and duty cycle.

NOTE: hardware and software results need to be compared

Continued:

4. Design and implement Half adder, Full Adder, Half Subtractor, Full Subtractor using basic gates.

5. a) Given a 4-variable logic expression, simplify it using Entered Variable Map and realize the simplified logic expression using 8:1 multiplexer IC.

b) Design and develop the Verilog /VHDL code for an 8:1 multiplexer. Simulate and verify its working.

6. a) Design and implement code converter I)Binary to Gray (II) Gray to Binary Code using basic gates.

7. Design and verify the Truth Table of 3-bit Parity Generator and 4-bit Parity Checker using basic Logic Gates with an even parity bit.

8. a) Realize a J-K Master / Slave Flip-Flop using NAND gates and verify its truth table.

b) Design and develop the Verilog / VHDL code for D Flip-Flop with positive-edge triggering. Simulate and verify it’s working.

9. a) Design and implement a mod-n (n<8) synchronous up counter using J-K Flip- Flop ICs and demonstrate its working.

b) Design and develop the Verilog / VHDL code for mod-8 up counter. Simulate and verify it’s working.

10. Design and implement an asynchronous counter using decade counter IC to count up from 0 to n (n<=9) and demonstrate on 7-segment display (using IC- 7447).

11. Generate a Ramp output waveform using DAC0800 (Inputs are given to DAC through IC74393 dual 4-bit binary counter). Study experiment

18 | P a g e

12. To study 4-bitALU using IC-74181.

Course outcomes: On the completion of this laboratory course, the students will be able to:

• Use various Electronic Devices like Cathode ray Oscilloscope, Signal generators, Digital Trainer Kit, Multimeters and components like Resistors, Capacitors, Op amp and Integrated Circuit.

• Design and demonstrate various combinational logic circuits. • Design and demonstrate various types of counters and Registers using Flip-flops • Use simulation package to design circuits. • Understand the working and implementation of ALU.

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Problem Analysis 3. Design/Development of Solutions 4. Modern Tool Usage

Conduction of Practical Examination:

1 . All laboratory experiments (1 to 11 nos) are to be included for practical examination. 2 . Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot. 3 . Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script. 4 . Marks distribution:

a ) For questions having part a only- Procedure + Conduction + Viva:20 + 50 +10

=80 Marks b ) For questions having part a and b

Part a- Procedure + Conduction + Viva:10 + 35 +05= 50 Marks Part b- Procedure + Conduction + Viva:10 + 15 +05= 30 Marks

5 . Change of experiment is allowed only once and marks allotted to the procedure

part to be made zero.

19 | P a g e

DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER - III Laboratory Code 15CSL38 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01I + 02P Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS - 02

Course objectives: This laboratory course enable students to get practical experience in design, develop, implement, analyze and evaluation/testing of • Asymptotic performance of algorithms. • Linear data structures and their applications such as stacks, queues and lists

• Non-Linear data structures and their applications such as trees and graphs

• Sorting and searching algorithms

Descriptions (if any)

Implement all the experiments in C Language under Linux / Windows environment.

Laboratory Experiments:

1. Design, Develop and Implement a menu driven Program in C for the following Array operations

a. Creating an Array of N Integer Elements b. Display of Array Elements with Suitable Headings c. Inserting an Element (ELEM) at a given valid Position (POS) d. Deleting an Element at a given valid Position(POS) e. Exit.

Support the program with functions for each of the above operations. 2. Design, Develop and Implement a Program in C for the following operationson

Strings a. Read a main String (STR), a Pattern String (PAT) and a Replace String

(REP) b. Perform Pattern Matching Operation: Find and Replace all occurrences of

PAT in STR with REP if PAT exists in STR. Report suitable messages in case PAT does not exist in STR

Support the program with functions for each of the above operations. Don't use Built-in functions. 3. Design, Develop and Implement a menu driven Program in C for the following

operations on STACK of Integers (Array Implementation of Stack with maximum size MAX)

a. Push an Element on to Stack b. Pop an Element from Stack c. Demonstrate how Stack can be used to check Palindrome

d. Demonstrate Overflow and Underflow situations on Stack e. Display the status of Stack

20 | P a g e

f. Exit Support the program with appropriate functions for each of the above operations

4. Design, Develop and Implement a Program in C for converting an Infix Expression to Postfix Expression. Program should support for both parenthesized and free parenthesized expressions with the operators: +, -, *, /, %(Remainder),

^(Power) and alphanumeric operands.

5. Design, Develop and Implement a Program in C for the following Stack Applications

a. Evaluation of Suffix expression with single digit operands and operators: +, -, *, /, %, ^

b. Solving Tower of Hanoi problem with n disks

6. Design, Develop and Implement a menu driven Program in C for the following operations on Circular QUEUE of Characters (Array Implementation of Queue with maximum size MAX)

a. Insert an Element on to Circular QUEUE b. Delete an Element from Circular QUEUE c. Demonstrate Overflow and Underflow situations on Circular QUEUE d. Display the status of Circular QUEUE e. Exit

Support the program with appropriate functions for each of the above operations

Continued:

7. Design, Develop and Implement a menu driven Program in C for the following operations on Singly Linked List (SLL) of Student Data with the fields: USN,

Name, Branch, Sem, PhNo a. Create a SLL of N Students Data by using front insertion. b. Display the status of SLL and count the number of nodes in it c. Perform Insertion / Deletion at End of SLL d. Perform Insertion / Deletion at Front of SLL(Demonstration of stack) e. Exit

8. Design, Develop and Implement a menu driven Program in C for the following

operations on Doubly Linked List (DLL) of Employee Data with the fields: SSN,

Name, Dept, Designation, Sal, PhNo a. Create a DLL of N Employees Data by using end insertion. b. Display the status of DLL and count the number of nodes in it c. Perform Insertion and Deletion at End of DLL d. Perform Insertion and Deletion at Front of DLL e. Demonstrate how this DLL can be used as Double Ended Queue f. Exit

21 | P a g e

9. Design, Develop and Implement a Program in C for the following operationson

Singly Circular Linked List (SCLL) with header nodes a. Represent and Evaluate a Polynomial P(x,y,z) = 6x

2y

2z-4yz

5+3x

3yz+2xy

5z-

2xyz3

b. Find the sum of two polynomials POLY1(x,y,z) and POLY2(x,y,z) and store the result in POLYSUM(x,y,z)

Support the program with appropriate functions for each of the above operations 10. Design, Develop and Implement a menu driven Program in C for the following

operations on Binary Search Tree (BST) of Integers a. Create a BST of N Integers: 6, 9, 5, 2, 8, 15, 24, 14, 7, 8, 5, 2 b. Traverse the BST in Inorder, Preorder and Post Order c. Search the BST for a given element (KEY) and report the appropriate message e. Exit

11. Design, Develop and Implement a Program in C for the following operations on

Graph(G) of Cities a. Create a Graph of N cities using Adjacency Matrix. b. Print all the nodes reachable from a given starting node in a digraph using

DFS/BFS method

12. Given a File of N employee records with a set K of Keys(4-digit) which uniquely determine the records in file F. Assume that file F is maintained in memory by a Hash Table(HT) of m memory locations with L as the set of memory addresses (2-digit) of locations in HT. Let the keys in K and addresses in L are Integers. Design and develop a Program in C that uses Hash function H: K →→→→L as H(K)=K mod m (remainder method), and implement hashing technique to map a given key K to the address space L. Resolve the collision (if any) using linear probing.

Course outcomes: On the completion of this laboratory course, the students will be able to:

• Analyze and Compare various linear and non-linear data structures • Code, debug and demonstrate the working nature of different types of data structures and

their applications • Implement, analyze and evaluate the searching and sorting algorithms • Choose the appropriate data structure for solving real world problems

Graduate Attributes (as per NBA) 1. Engineering Knowledge 2. Problem Analysis 3. Design/Development of Solutions 4. Modern Tool Usage

Conduction of Practical Examination: 1. All laboratory experiments (TWELVE nos) are to be included for practical examination. 2. Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot. 3. Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script 4. Marks distribution: Procedure + Conduction + Viva:20 + 50 +10 (80)

5. Change of experiment is allowed only once and marks allotted to the procedure part

to be made zero.

ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-IV

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – IV

Subject Code 15MAT41 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

• Formulate, solve and analyze engineering problems.

• Apply numerical methods to solve ordinary differential equations.

• Apply finite difference method to solve partial differential equations.

• Perform complex analysis.

• Interpret use of sampling theory.

• Apply joint probability distribution and stochastic process.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Numerical Methods: Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations of first order

and first degree, Picard’s method, Taylor’s series method, modified Euler’s method,

Runge-Kutta method of fourth order. Milne’s and Adams-Bashforth predictor and

corrector methods (No derivations of formulae). Numerical solution of simultaneous first

order ordinary differential equations, Picard’s method, Runge-Kutta method of fourth

order

10 Hours

Module 2

Numerical Methods: Numerical solution of second order ordinary differential equations,

Picard’s method, Runge-Kutta method and Milne’s method. Special Functions: Bessel’s

functions- basic properties, recurrence relations, orthogonality and generating functions.

Legendre’s functions - Legendre’s polynomial, Rodrigue’s formula, problems.

10 Hours

Module 3

Complex Variables: Function of a complex variable, limits, continuity, differentiability,.

Analytic functions-Cauchy-Riemann equations in Cartesian and polar forms. Properties

and construction of analytic functions. Complex line integrals-Cauchy’s theorem and

Cauchy’s integral formula, Residue, poles, Cauchy’s Residue theorem with proof and

problems. Transformations: Conformal transformations, discussion of

transformations: = , = , = + (/) and bilinear transformations.

10 Hours

Module 4

Probability Distributions: Random variables (discrete and continuous), probability

functions. Poisson distributions, geometric distribution, uniform distribution, exponential

and normal distributions, Problems. Joint probability distribution: Joint Probability

distribution for two variables, expectation, covariance, correlation coefficient.

10 Hours

Module 5

Sampling Theory: Sampling, Sampling distributions, standard error, test of hypothesis

for means and proportions, confidence limits for means, student’s t-distribution, Chi-

square distribution as a test of goodness of fit. Stochastic process: Stochastic process,

probability vector, stochastic matrices, fixed points, regular stochastic matrices, Markov

chains, higher transition probability.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Use appropriate numerical methods to solve first and second order ordinary differential

equations.

• Use Bessel's and Legendre's function which often arises when a problem possesses axial and

spherical symmetry, such as in quantum mechanics, electromagnetic theory, hydrodynamics

and heat conduction.

• State and prove Cauchy’s theorem and its consequences including Cauchy's integral formula.

• Compute residues and apply the residue theorem to evaluate integrals.

• Analyze, interpret, and evaluate scientific hypotheses and theories using rigorous statistical

methods.

Graduate Attributes

• Engineering Knowledge

• Problem Analysis

• Life-Long Learning

• Conduct Investigations of Complex Problems

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have ten questions.

There will be 2 questions from each module.

Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. B.V.Ramana "Higher Engineering Mathematics" Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006.

2. B. S. Grewal,” Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna publishers, 42nd

edition, 2013.

Reference Books:

1. N P Bali and Manish Goyal, "A text book of Engineering mathematics" , Laxmi

publications, latest edition.

2. Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics " - 9th edition, Wiley, 2013.

3. H. K Dass and Er. RajnishVerma, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", S. Chand, 1st ed,

2011.

1

COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2015 -2016)

SEMESTER - I/II

Laboratory Code 15CPL 16 / 15CPL26 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01Hr Tutorial (Instructions)

+ 02 Hours Laboratory

Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 48 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS - 02

Course objectives: To provide basic principles C programming language. To provide design & develop of C

programming skills. To provide practical exposures like designing flowcharts, algorithms, how to debug

programs etc.

Descriptions (if any):

Demonstration of Personal Computer and its Accessories: Demonstration and

Explanation on Disassembly and Assembly of a Personal Computer by the faculty-in-charge. Students

have to prepare a write-up on the same and include it in the Lab record and evaluated.

Laboratory Session-1: Write-up on Functional block diagram of Computer, CPU, Buses, Mother Board,

Chip sets, Operating System & types of OS, Basics of Networking & Topology and NIC.

Laboratory Session-2: Write-up on RAM, SDRAM, FLASH memory, Hard disks, Optical media, CD-

ROM/R/RW, DVDs, Flash drives, Keyboard, Mouse, Printers and Plotters. Introduction to flowchart,

algorithm and pseudo code.

Note: These TWO Laboratory sessions are used to fill the gap between theory classes and practical

sessions. Both sessions are to be evaluated as lab experiments.

2

Laboratory Experiments:

Implement the following programs with WINDOWS / LINUX platform using appropriate C compiler.

1. Design and develop a flowchart or an algorithm that takes three coefficients (a, b, and c) of

a Quadratic equation (ax2+bx+c=0) as input and compute all possible roots. Implement a C

program for the developed flowchart/algorithm and execute the same to output the possible

roots for a given set of coefficients with appropriate messages.

2. Design and develop an algorithm to find the reverse of an integer number NUM and check

whether it is PALINDROME or NOT. Implement a C program for the developed

algorithm that takes an integer number as input and output the reverse of the same with

suitable messages. Ex: Num: 2014, Reverse: 4102, Not a Palindrome

3.

3a. Design and develop a flowchart to find the square root of a given number N.

Implement a C program for the same and execute for all possible inputs with appropriate

messages. Note: Don’t use library function sqrt(n).

3b. Design and develop a C program to read a year as an input and find whether it is leap year

or not. Also consider end of the centuries.

4. Design and develop an algorithm to evaluate polynomial f(x) = a4x

4 + a

3x

3 + a

2x

2 + a

1x +

a0, for a given value of x and its coefficients using Horner’s method. Implement a C

program for the same and execute the program with different set of values of coefficients and x.

5. Draw the flowchart and Write a C Program to compute Sin(x) using Taylor series approximation

given by Sin(x) = x - (x3/3!) + (x

5/5!) - (x

7/7!) + …….

Compare your result with the built- in Library function. Print both the results with appropriate

messages.

6. Develop an algorithm, implement and execute a C program that reads N integer numbers

and arrange them in ascending order using Bubble Sort.

7. Develop, implement and execute a C program that reads two matrices A (m x n ) and

B (p x q ) and Compute product of matrices A and B. Read matrix A and matrix B in row

major order and in column major order respectively. Print both the input matrices and

resultant matrix with suitable headings and output should be in matrix format only.

Program must check the compatibility of orders of the matrices for multiplication. Report

appropriate message in case of incompatibility.

8. Develop, implement and execute a C program to search a Name in a list of names using Binary

searching Technique.

9. Write and execute a C program that

3

i. Implements string copy operation STRCOPY(str1,str2) that copies a string str1 to

another string str2 without using library function.

ii. Read a sentence and print frequency of vowels and total count of consonants.

10. a. Design and develop a C function RightShift(x ,n) that takes two integers x and n

as input and returns value of the integer x rotated to the right by n positions. Assume the

integers are unsigned. Write a C program that invokes this function with different values

for x and n and tabulate the results with suitable headings.

b. Design and develop a C function isprime(num) that accepts an integer argument and

returns 1 if the argument is prime, a 0 otherwise. Write a C program that invokes this

function to generate prime numbers between the given range.

11. Draw the flowchart and write a recursive C function to find the factorial of a number, n!, defined

by fact(n)=1, if n=0. Otherwise fact(n)=n*fact(n-1). Using this function, write a C program to

compute the binomial coefficient nCr. Tabulate the results for different values of n and r with

suitable messages.

12. Given two university information files “studentname.txt” and “usn.txt” that contains

students Name and USN respectively. Write a C program to create a new file called

“output.txt” and copy the content of files “studentname.txt” and “usn.txt” into output file

in the sequence shown below . Display the contents of output file “output.txt” on to the

screen.

Student Name USN

Name 1 USN1

Name 2 USN2

…. ….

…. ….

13. Write a C program to maintain a record of n student details using an array of structures with

four fields (Roll number, Name, Marks, and Grade). Assume appropriate data type for each

field. Print the marks of the student, given the student name as input.

14. Write a C program using pointers to compute the sum, mean and standard deviation of all

elements stored in an array of n real numbers.

Course outcomes:

• Gaining Knowledge on various parts of a computer.

• Able to draw flowcharts and write algorithms

• Able design and development of C problem solving skills.

• Able design and develop modular programming skills.

• Able to trace and debug a program

Heading

4

Conduction of Practical Examination:

1 . All laboratory experiments ( nos ) are to be included for practical examination.

2 . Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot.

3 . Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for breakup of

marks

4 . Change of experiment is allowed only once and 15% Marks allotted to the procedure part to

be made zero.

CONSTITUTION OF INDIA, PROFESSIONAL ETHICS & HUMAN RIGHTS

Subject Code 15CPH18/15CPH28 IA Marks 10

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 02 Exam Marks 40

Total Number of Lecture Hours 25 Exam Hours 02

Course objectives:

1. To provide basic information about Indian constitution.

2. To identify individual role and ethical responsibility towards society.

3. To understand human rights and its implications

Module 1

Introduction to the Constitution of India, The Making of the Constitution and Salient features of

the Constitution. 2 Hours

Preamble to the Indian Constitution Fundamental Rights & its limitations. 3 Hours

Module 2

Directive Principles of State Policy & Relevance of Directive Principles State Policy

Fundamental Duties. 2 Hours

Union Executives – President, Prime Minister Parliament Supreme Court of India. 3 Hours

Module 3

State Executives – Governor Chief Minister, State Legislature High Court of State. 2 Hours

Electoral Process in India, Amendment Procedures, 42nd

, 44th, 74th, 76th, 86th &91st

Amendments. 3 Hours

Module 4

Special Provision for SC & ST Special Provision for Women, Children & Backward Classes

Emergency Provisions. Human Rights –Meaning and Definitions, Legislation Specific Themes in

Human Rights- Working of National Human Rights Commission in India 3 Hours

Powers and functions of Municipalities, Panchyats and Co - Operative Societies. 2 Hours

Module 5

Scope & Aims of Engineering Ethics, Responsibility of Engineers Impediments to

Responsibility. 2 Hours

Risks, Safety and liability of Engineers, Honesty, Integrity & Reliability in Engineering.

3 Hours

Course outcomes:

After study of the course, the students are able to

• Have general knowledge and legal literacy and thereby to take up competitive

examinations

• Understand state and central policies, fundamental duties

• Understand Electoral Process, special provisions

• Understand powers and functions of Municipalities, Panchayats and Co-operative

Societies, and

• Understand Engineering ethics and responsibilities of Engineers.

• Have an awareness about basic human rights in India

Text Books:

1. Durga Das Basu: “Introduction to the Constitution on India”, (Students Edn.) Prentice

–Hall EEE, 19th / 20th Edn., 2001

2. Charles E. Haries, Michael S Pritchard and Michael J. Robins “Engineering Ethics”

Thompson Asia, 2003-08-05.

Reference Books:

1. M.V.Pylee, “An Introduction to Constitution of India”, Vikas Publishing, 2002.

2. M.Govindarajan, S.Natarajan, V.S.Senthilkumar, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice –Hall

of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2004

3. Brij Kishore Sharma,“Introduction to the Constitution of India”, PHI Learning Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

4. Latest Publications of Indian Institute of Human Rights, New Delhi.

* * * * * *

!"#$##

%&' ($( # )

*%&+%

(%$,)

-. ) /

!0*%&+%

(%

.(% 1

"2#!-

! %3 4 )3405 35335 &%035

30333%6303300435

0

• 07 !3058

• 37 093358

• 9%070358

• :08

• ,!3057*3 08

!"#" "

!"; #3%3623*3 <%3

0 308 "3 0; #3%36

3%36 4)35 3 03 00 3 5 $ 50

08 %3 0 30 %35 00

08 #3 0 0; #3%3= 3%3 3

4)35 50 06 33 ( %35 50

08 333 00; 00 333 006

3%0&08

#" " #3%36 03 6

3 3 &8 00 306

%366053635360

$

030 083%364)35303>3

6*)00&8+%&;#3%36

3%36 4)35 3 03 + 3? 3 +3

&8

%; #3%36 3&43 3330 00 3

%0 006 03 7 358 3%36 4)35 7

0330.53%0004(?-008

&

%

; #3%36 00 36

503 8 9 35 3;

3 6 3% 06 3% 3

%6 3% % @ (6 3%6 3 %8

! 323006 30 3 :35

34 03 3 8 3 30; #353 35

3A350335= 035B03A33

!33358 3 0 3 3

%38

% #3%36 !3050 38

0035; #3%36 30 5335:0A36

3 30 3 058 9 30%335

3%0%33633303

7 00= (6 % 7 435 4 035 &=

&536 0006 %% 7 435

538 0035 *)0 ,C 3

%380 0035; #3%36

33 &43 0035 3 0 0 0356 0

0 035 7 3%% %&0 :3

% 48

$

'

% "

%; #3%36 036 0 0% 5 3

3 0 0%6 33 0 0% %0 %35

&& 06 3%0 &08 )35; #3%36

0%A0)35630&9!

6 3 06 3 3 3 3%&8

B0330)3)353363)3)35

5364007&08

" #3%36 %0A3 3 336

0 00 3%3 3 4)358 253 :D 00;

%06307835735:D008

:%3 0 5 03; E33 & 6

%3 03 A3 3356 35 03%3

3<%378

$

(

) "!

#3%36 0A3; 3 3 3336

30A3 03)3530

0 3 .08 0%0 45 0; 3%&

5345563%0&08B0 33

% !5;9 30%335!590.&06 30%0

6 0%0 6 &335 7 03)35 3

5%08 533 !58 %% 03;

0036 30 356 0 7 0 8

36 3 03 : 0. 506

:0%3 3 0&38 0; #3%36

36 3 03 03 %&&8

; #3%36 36 3 03

. 38 :0 ; #3%36 36

3 03 F08 3%35 0;

#3%36 3 3%3 3 :0 303 3

033%3503038

$

*

+ " !

+ " #3%3, &0 %&0 4

357 33030%5 36

353356&03%0?6?3

5082332?6 ?23?263%0&0

3 ?28 45 3; :6 3 0%5

383354& 3.35

8 2033 4 & 7 0

03088

#3%36 A 338

3& % 0506 36 5

333 7 0 % 333 8 *3

0 0 &3 33 %&6 33 46 %0036

363367338

$

!

?303%6%3400)34053;

• 00 3 333 008 00 7 3 &

3%0008

• % 7 3 0 3 30 38

3 % 0 0 3

36 46 6 8 & 0035 3 0 0

0358

• :%373%3353%0A3%33

035308E0A3035 3%%0

358

• "03 3330 0 & 0 %

038

• 0%&0=4533033463

• ?435363033308

- ...

• !<%34003<%38

• %00G%3335)

• !400 && %00 <%34!/!! 0 %&<%3

%08

• %00<%3400%&<%33500%3

%08

• ! %3 400 34 * %00 <%36 035 3 %00

<%3%08

/# 1

8 88H :)6 "8D3%506 )% 7 :% #3586

2!" 0 36 %& :%&036

3508

8 "8D8B5 7 8*33 86 2 !"36 # F

#3330:%&035(%:+8*4208

18 :88H3 7 3 H3862 !"36 23 "

:%&036*4208

0# 1

8 ?8B8:03362 !"36! B4(00%3:8

+8*42069%"38

8 B88?A3788 3%06 2 !"4! 4..

!36"%&03568

18 2+" !"36,0#3:8+8*42083

38

-8 D8"8B4)6 *8D8D433 7 H886 2) "! 36

,03+8

8 8B893386 2 36 ! B4 (00 :%&035

:8+8*4208

Functional English

Introduction Importance of Languages

Grammer Parts of Speech, Usage of Preposition and

Article, Punctuation

5 Hours

Tenses & Degrees

of Comparison

3 Hours

Transformation of

Sentences

Active-Passive, Affirmative-Negative,

Exclamatory-Assertive, Interrogative-

Assertive, Kinds of sentences

5 Hours

Direct-Indirect

Speech

5 Hours

Vocabulary Usage Homonyms, Correcting Spelling, One-word

equivalents

7 Hours

Precis Writing 3 Hours

Essay/Report

Writing

5 Hours

Letter Writing Personal, Official, Applications 5 Hours

Idioms & Phrases Meaning & Usage in sentences 5 Hours

Comprehension Of an unseen passage 2 Hours

Elaboration Expansion of ideas, proverbs 2 Hours

Presentation Preparation of materials and presentation –

step

3 Hours

Suggested Text Books: 1) SLN Sharma & K Shankaranarayana “Basic Grammar”,

Navakarnataka Publications.

2) Jones “New International Business English”, published by

Cambridge University Press.

Reference Books:

1) G. Sankaran, “English Rank Scorer”, Addone Publishing group,

Thiruvanantapuram, Kerala

2) Wren & Martin “English Grammar”.

3) John Seely, “Oxford Guide to Speaking and Writing”, 2000

Kannada Kali

Lesson 1 : Introducing each other – 1.

Personal Pronouns, Possessive forms, Interrogative words.

Lesson 2 : Introducing each other – 2.

Personal Pronouns, Possessive forms, Yes/No Type

Interrogation

Lesson 3 : About Ramanaya.

Possessive forms of nons, dubitive question, Relative nouns

Lesson 4 : Enquiring about a room for rent.

Qualitative and quantitative adjectives.

Lesson 5 : Enquiring about the college.

Predicative forms, locative case.

Lesson 6 : In a hotel

Dative case defective verbs.

Lesson 7 : Vegetable market.

Numeral, plurals.

Lesson 8 : Planning for a picnic.

Imperative, Permissive, hortative.

Lesson 9 : Conversation between Doctor and the patient.

Verb- iru, negation – illa, non – past tense.

Lesson 10: Doctors advise to Patient.

Potential forms, no – past continuous.

Lesson 11: Discussing about a film.

Past tense, negation.

Lesson 12: About Brindavan Garden.

Past tense negation.

Lesson 13: About routine activities of a student.

Verbal Participle, reflexive form, negation.

Lesson 14: Telephone conversation.

Past and present perfect past continuous and their negation.

Lesson 15: About Halebid, Belur.

Relative participle, negation.

Lesson 16: Discussing about examination and future plan.

Simple conditional and negative

Lesson 17: Karnataka (Lesson for reading)

Lesson 18: Kannada Bhaashe (Lesson for reading)

Lesson 19: Mana taruva Sangati alla (Lesson for reading)

Lesson 20: bEku bEDagaLu (lesson for reading)

!" !" !" !" # $$%# $$%# $$%# $$%

&!' %&!' %&!' %&!' %

(((( &)"*+&,+&)"*+&,+&)"*+&,+&)"*+&,+-./-./-./-./0 0 0 0 12 12 12 12

3333 450678 9:450678 9:450678 9:450678 9:0;<0=0;<0=0;<0=0;<0=

>>>> 8 $8+8 $8+8 $8+8 $8+ !?!?!?!?= = = = & +&&& +&&& +&&& +&&

4 4 4 4+ %+ %+ %+ %

@@@@ A"-B.A"-B.A"-B.A"-B./"CD E:F/"CD E:F/"CD E:F/"CD E:FGH$:% GH$:% GH$:% GH$:%

IIII %J%J%J%J----!)!)!)!)

KKKK &LM&LM&LM&LM&$NO&$NO&$NO&$NO

PPPP +;Q#R+;Q#R+;Q#R+;Q#R+&+&+&+&4;",%4;",%4;",%4;",%

SSSS ####TU" =TU" =TU" =TU" =0*0*0*0*:F:F:F:F) 0V'W0V'W0V'W0V'W

XTXTXTXT

+ YZ+"?B 5+ YZ+"?B 5+ YZ+"?B 5+ YZ+"?B 5

.R.R.R.R" T[.+" T[.+" T[.+" T[.+

(((( $,/"C$,/"C$,/"C$,/"C +<&7 +<&7 +<&7 +<&7

3333 \; XN"?B\; XN"?B\; XN"?B\; XN"?B

>>>> ']NU!&0 ']NU!&0 ']NU!&0 ']NU!&00*W0*W0*W0*W:F"*:F"*:F"*:F"*

@@@@ D E.D E.D E.D E../< 7D E;"$%%./< 7D E;"$%%./< 7D E;"$%%./< 7D E;"$%%

IIII &+^&+^&+^&+^ D 0D 0D 0D 0

METAL CASTING AND WELDING

B.E, III/IV Semester, Mechanical Engineering[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

Course Code 17ME35 A /45A CIE Marks 40

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 SEE Marks 60

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50(10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

Credits – 04

Course Objectives:

To provide detailed information about the moulding processes.

To provide knowledge of various casting process in manufacturing.

To impart knowledge of various joining process used in manufacturing.

To provide adequate knowledge of quality test methods conducted on welded and casted components.

Module - 1

INTRODUCTION & BASIC MATERIALS USED IN FOUNDRY

Introduction: Definition, Classification of manufacturing processes. Metals cast in the foundry-classification, factors that determine the selection of

a casting alloy.

Introduction to casting process & steps involved. Patterns: Definition, classification, materials used for pattern, various pattern allowances and their

importance.Sand molding: Types of base sand, requirement of base sand. Binder, Additives definition, need and types

Preparation of sand molds: Molding machines- Jolt type, squeeze type and Sand slinger. Study of important molding process: Green sand, core

sand, dry sand, sweep mold, CO2 mold, shell mold, investment mold, plaster mold, cement bonded mold. Cores: Definition, need, types. Method of

making cores, concept of gating (top, bottom, parting line, horn gate) and rise ring (open, blind) Functions and types

Module - 2

MELTING & METAL MOLD CASTING METHODS

Melting furnaces: Classification of furnaces, Gas fired pit furnace, Resistance furnace, Coreless induction furnace, electric arc furnace,

1

constructional features & working principle of cupola furnace.Casting using metal molds: Gravity die casting, pressure die casting, centrifugal casting, squeeze casting, slush casting, thixocasting, andcontinuous casting processes

Module - 3

SOLIDIFICATION & NON FERROUS FOUNDRY PRACTICE

2

Solidification: Definition, Nucleation, solidification variables, Directional solidification-need and methods. Degasification in liquid metals-Sources

of gas, degasification methods.

Fettling and cleaning of castings: Basic steps involved. Sand Casting defects- causes, features and remedies. Advantages & limitations of casting

process

Nonferrous foundry practice: Aluminum castings - Advantages, limitations, melting of aluminum using lift-out type crucible furnace. Hardeners

used, drossing, gas absorption, fluxing and flushing, grain refining, pouring temperature. Stir casting set up, procedure, uses, advantages and

limitations.

Module - 4

WELDING PROCESS

Welding process: Definition, Principles, Classification, Application, Advantages & limitations of welding. Arc welding: Principle, Metal arc

welding (MAW), Flux Shielded Metal Arc Welding (FSMAW), Inert Gas Welding (TIG & MIG) Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) and Atomic

Hydrogen Welding (AHW).Special type of welding: Resistance welding principles, Seam welding, Butt welding, Spot welding and Projection welding. Friction welding,Explosive welding, Thermit welding, Laser welding and electron beam welding.

Module - 5

SOLDERING , BRAZING AND METALLURGICAL ASPECTS IN WELDING

Structure of welds, Formation of different zones during welding, Heat Affected Zone (HAZ), Parameters affecting HAZ. Effect of carbon content on

structure and properties of steel, Shrinkage in welds& Residual stresses, Concept of electrodes, filler rod and fluxes. Welding defects- Detection,

causes & remedy.

Soldering, brazing, gas welding: Soldering, Brazing, Gas Welding: Principle, oxy-Acetylene welding, oxy-hydrogen welding, air-acetylene

welding, Gas cutting, powder cutting.

Inspection methods: Methods used for inspection of casting and welding. Visual, magnetic particle, fluorescent particle, ultrasonic. Radiography,

eddy current, holography methods of inspection.

Course outcomes:

Describe the casting process, preparation of Green, Core, dry sand molds and Sweep, Shell, Investment and plaster molds.

Explain the Pattern, Core, Gating, Riser system and Jolt, Squeeze, Sand Slinger Molding Machines.

Compare the Gas fired pit, Resistance, Coreless, Electrical and Cupola Metal Furnaces.

Compare the Gravity, Pressure die, Centrifugal, Squeeze, slush and Continuous Metal mold castings.

Explain the Solidification process and Casting of Non-Ferrous Metals.

Describe the Metal Arc, TIG, MIG, Submerged and Atomic Hydrogen Welding processes used in manufacturing.

Explain the Resistance spot, Seam, Butt, Projection, Friction, Explosive, Thermit, Laser and Electron Beam Special type of welding

3

process used in manufacturing.

Describe the Metallurgical aspects in Welding and inspection methods for the quality assurance of components made of casting and

joining process.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. “Manufacturing Process-I”, Dr.K.Radhakrishna, Sapna Book House,5th Revised Edition 2009.2. “Manufacturing & Technology”: Foundry Forming and Welding,P.N.Rao, 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

4

REFERENCE BOOKS1. “Process and Materials of Manufacturing”, Roy A Lindberg, 4th Ed.Pearson Edu. 2006.

2. “Manufacturing Technology”, SeropeKalpakjian, Steuen. R. Sechmid,Pearson Education Asia, 5th Ed. 2006.

3. “Principles of metal casting”, Rechard W. Heine, Carl R. LoperJr., Philip C. Rosenthal, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited

Ed.1976.

MACHINE TOOLS AND OPERATIONS

B.E, III/IV Semester, Mechanical Engineering [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

Course Code 17ME35 B / 45B CIE Marks 40

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 SEE Marks 60

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50(10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

Credits – 04

Course Objectives:

To introduce students to different machine tools in order to produce components having different shapes and sizes.

To enrich the knowledge pertaining to relative motion and mechanics required for various machine tools.

To develop the knowledge on mechanics of machining process and effect of various parameters on economics of machining.

Module - 1

MACHINE TOOLS

Introduction, Classification, construction and specifications of lathe, drilling machine, milling machine, boring machine, broaching machine, shaping

machine, planning machine, grinding machine [Simple sketches showing major parts of the machines]

Module - 2

MACHINING PROCESSES

Introduction, Types of motions in machining, turning and Boring, Shaping, Planning and Slotting, Thread cutting, Drilling and reaming, Milling,

Broaching, Gear cutting and Grinding, Machining parameters and related quantities.

5

[Sketches pertaining to relative motions between tool and work piece only]

Module - 3

CUTTING TOOL MATERIALS, GEOMETRY AND SURFACE FINISH

Introduction, desirable Properties and Characteristics of cutting tool materials, cutting tool geometry, cutting fluids and its applications, surface

finish, effect of machining parameters on surface finish.Machining equations for cutting operations: Turning, Shaping, Planing, slab milling, cylindrical grinding and internal grinding, Numerical

6

Problems

Module - 4

MECHANICS OF MACHINING PROCESSES

Introduction, Chip formation, Orthogonal cutting, Merchants model for orthogonal cutting, Oblique cutting, Mechanics of turning process,

Mechanics of drilling process, Mechanics of milling process, Numerical problems.

Module - 5

TOOL WEAR, TOOL LIFE: Introduction, tool wear mechanism, tool wear equations, tool life equations, effect of process parameters on tool life,

machinability, Numerical problemsECONOMICS OF MACHNING PROCESSES: Introduction, choice of feed, choice of cutting speed, tool life for minimum cost and minimumproduction time, machining at maximum efficiency, Numerical problems

Course outcomes:

Explain the construction & specification of various machine tools.

Describe various machining processes pertaining to relative motions between tool & work piece.

Discuss different cutting tool materials, tool nomenclature & surface finish.

Apply mechanics of machining process to evaluate machining time.

Analyze tool wear mechanisms and equations to enhance tool life and minimize machining cost.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Fundamentals of metal cutting and Machine Tools, B.L. Juneja, G.S. Sekhon and Nitin Seth, New Age International Publishers 2 nd Edition, 20032. All about Machine Tools, Heinrich Gerling, New Age International Publishers revised 2nd Edition, 2006

REFERENCE BOOKS1. Fundamental of Machining and Machine Tools, Geoffrey Boothroyd and Winston A. Knight, CRC Taylor& Francis, Third Edition.

2. Metal cutting principles, Milton C. Shaw, Oxford University Press, Second Edition,2005.

7

REFRIGERATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING

(Professional Elective-I)

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME551

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Pre-requisites: Basic and Applied Thermodynamics

Course objectives

1. Study the basic definition, ASHRAE Nomenclature FOR refrigerating systems

2. Understand the working principles and applications of different types of refrigeration

systems

3. Study the working of air conditioning systems and their applications

4. Identify the performance parameters and their relations of an air conditioning system

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Illustrate the principles, nomenclature and applications of refrigeration systems.

2. Explain vapour compression refrigeration system and identify methods forperformance improvement

3. Study the working principles of air, vapour absorption, thermoelectric and steam-jet andthermo-acoustic refrigeration systems

4. Estimate the performance of air-conditioning systems using the principles of

psychometry.

5. Compute and Interpret cooling and heating loads in an air-conditioning system

6. Identify suitable refrigerant for various refrigerating systems

8

Module – I

Introduction to Refrigeration –Basic Definitions, ASHRAE Nomenclature, Air

Refrigeration Cycles-reversed Carnot cycle, Bell-Coleman cycle analysis, Air Refrigeration

systems-merits and demerits and applications: Aircraft refrigeration cycles, Joule Thompson

coefficient and Inversion Temperature, Linde, Claude and Stirling cycles for liquefaction of

air.

Industrial Refrigeration- Chemical and process industries, Dairy plants, Petroleumrefineries, Food processing and food chain, Miscellaneous 8 Hours

Module – II

Vapour Compression Refrigeration System(VCRS): Comparison of Vapour CompressionCycle and Gas cycle, Vapour Compression Refrigeration system Working and analysis,Limitations, Superheat horn and throttling loss for various refrigerants, efficiency,Modifications to standard cycle

– liquid-suction heat exchangers, Grindlay cycle and Lorenz cycle, Optimum suction

condition for optimum COP – Ewing’s construction and Gosney’s method. Actual cycles with

pressure drops,

Complete Vapour Compression Refrigeration System, Multi-Pressure, Multi-evaporatorsystems or Compound Vapour Compression Refrigeration Systems – Methods like Flash Gasremoval, Flash

inter cooling and water Inter cooling.

Module – III

Vapour Absorption Refrigeration Systems: Absorbent – Refrigerant combinations, Water-

Ammonia Systems, Practical problems, Lithium- Bromide System, Contrast between the two

systems, Modified Version of Aqua-Ammonia System with Rectifier and Analyzer

Assembly. Practical problems – crystallization and air leakage, Commercial systems

Other types of Refrigeration systems: Brief Discussion on (i) Steam-Jet refrigerationsystem and (ii) Thermoelectric refrigeration, pulse tube refrigeration, thermo acousticrefrigeration systems8 Hours

Module – IV

9

Refrigerants: Primary and secondary refrigerants, Designation of Refrigerants, Desirableproperties of refrigerants including solubility in water and lubricating oil, materialcompatibility, toxicity, flammability, leak detection, cost, environment and performanceissues Thermodynamic properties of refrigerants, Synthetic and natural refrigerants,Comparison between different refrigerants vis a vis applications, Special issues and practicalimplications Refrigerant mixtures – zeotropic and azeotropicmixtures

Refrigeration systems Equipment: Compressors, Condensers, Expansion Devices and

Evaporators,

A brief look at other components of the system. 8 Hours

Module – V

Air-Conditioning: Introduction to Air-Conditioning, Basic Definition, Classification, powerrating, ASHRAE Nomenclature pertaining to Air-Conditioning, Applications of Air-Conditioning, Mathematical Analysis of Air-Conditioning Loads, Related Aspects, DifferentAir-Conditioning Systems-Central – Station Air-Conditioning System, Unitary Air-Conditioning System, Window Air-Conditioner and Packaged Air-Conditioner, Componentsrelated to Air-Conditioning Systems.

Transport air conditioning Systems: Air conditioning systems for automobiles (cars, buses

etc.),

Air conditioning systems for trains, Air conditioning systems for ships. 8

Hours

TEXT BOOKS

2. Roy J. Dossat, Principles of Refrigeration, Wiley Limited

3. Arora C.P., Refrigeration and Air-conditioning, Tata Mc Graw –Hill, New Delhi, 2nd

Edition, 2001.

4. Stoecker W.F., and Jones J.W., Refrigeration and Air-conditioning, Mc Graw - Hill, New Delhi 2nd edition, 1982.

REFERENCE BOOKS

10

1. Dossat, Principles of Refrigeration Pearson-2006.

2. McQuistion, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Wiley Students edition,5th

edition

2000.

· PITA, Air conditioning 4rth edition, pearson-2005

· Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning' by Manohar prasad

5. S C Arora& S Domkundwar, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Dhanpat Rai

Publication

6. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105128/#

Data Book:

1. Shan K. Wang, Handbook of Air Conditioning and Refrigeration, 2/e, 2001 McGraw-Hill Education

2. Mathur M.L. & Mehta ,Refrigerant and Psychrometric Properties (Tables & Charts) SI Units, F.S., Jain Brothers,2008

E- Learning

VTU, E- learning, MOOCS, Open courseware

THEORY OF ELASTICITY

(Professional Elective-I)

11

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME552

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives

1. To gain knowledge of stresses and strains in 3D and their relations and thermal stresses.

2. To understand the 2D analysis of elastic structural members.

3. To gain knowledge of thermal stresses and stability of columns

4. To analysis elastic members for the stresses and strains induced under direct loading conditions.

5. To analyse the axisymmetric and torsional members.

6. To analyse the thermal stresses induced in disks and cylinders.

7. To analyse the stability of columns

Course outcomes

At the end of course student able to:

1. Describe the state of stress and strain in 2D and 3D elastic members subjected to direct loads and thermal loads.

2. Analyse the structural members: beam, rotating disks, columns

3. Analyse the torsional rigidity of circular and non-circular sections.

4. Analyse the stability of columns

Module – 1

Analysis of Stress: Definition and notation of stress, equations of equilibrium in differentialform, stress components on an arbitrary plane, equality of cross shear, stress invariants,

12

principal stresses, octahedral stress, planes of maximum shear, stress transformation, planestate of stress,

Numerical problems 8

Hours

Module - 2

Analysis of Strain: Displacement field, strains in term of displacement field, infinitesimalstrain at a point, engineering shear strains, strain invariants, principal strains, octahedralstrains, plane

state of strain, compatibility equations, strain transformation, Numerical Problems. 8

Hours

Module – 3

Two-Dimensional classical elasticity Problems: Cartesian co-ordinates - Relation betweenplane stress and plane strain, stress functions for plane stress and plane strain state, Airy’s

stress functions, Investigation of Airy’s stress function for simple beams, bending of a narrowcantilever beam of rectangular cross section under edge load. Bending of simply supportedbeam under UDL. General equations in polar coordinates, stress distribution symmetricalabout an axis, Thick wall cylinder subjected to internal and external pressures, NumericalProblems.

10 Hours

Module – 4

Axisymmetric and Torsion problems: Stresses in rotating discs of uniform thickness andcylinders. Torsion of circular, elliptical and triangular bars, Prandtl’s membrane analogy,torsion of thin walled thin tubes, torsion of thin walled multiple cell closed sections.Numerical Problems 8 Hours

Module -5

Thermal stress and Elastic stability: Thermo elastic stress strain relations, equations ofequilibrium, thermal stresses in thin circular discs and in long circular cylinders. Euler’scolumn buckling load: clamped-free, clamped-hinged, clamped-clamped and pin-ended,Numerical Problems 8 Hours

13

Text Books:

1. Theory of Elasticity, S. P. Timoshenko and J. N Goodier, Mc. Graw, Hill International, 3rd

Ed., 2010.

2. Theory of Elasticity, Dr. Sadhu Singh, Khanna Publications, 2004.

References Books:

1. Advanced Mechanics of solids, L. S. Srinath, Tata Mc. Graw Hill, 2009.

2. Theory of Elastic stability, Stephen P. Timoshenko, Mc Graw Hill, 2nd

Ed, 2014.

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

(Professional Elective-I)

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME553

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Objectives:

1. To develop a meaningful understanding of HRM theory, functions and practices.

2. To apply HRM concepts and skills across various types of organizations.

Course Outcomes

On completion of the course the student will be able to

14

1. Understand the importance, functions and principles Human Resource Management and process of Job analysis

2. Summarize the objectives of Human Resource planning, Recruitment and selection process

3. Understand the process involved in Placement, Training and development activities.

4. Understand the characteristics of an effective appraisal system and compensation planning.

5. Understand the issues related to employee welfare, grievances and discipline.

Module – 1

Human Resource Management

Introduction, meaning, nature, scope of HRM. Importance and Evolution of theconcept of HRM. Major functions of HRM, Principles of HRM, Organization ofPersonnel department, Role of HR Manager.

Job Analysis: Meaning, process of job analysis, methods of collecting job analysis

data,

Job Description and Specification, Role Analysis. 08 hours

Module – 2

Human Resource Planning: Objectives, Importance and process of Human Resourceplanning, Effective HRP

Recruitment: Definition, Constraints and Challenges, Sources and Methods ofRecruitment, New Approaches to recruitment.

Selection: Definition and Process of Selection. 08 hours

Module – 3

Placement: Meaning, Induction/Orientation, Internal Mobility, Transfer, Promotion,Demotion and Employee Separation.

Training and development: Training v/s development, Training v/s Education,Systematic Approach to Training, Training Methods, Executive Development,

15

Methods and Development of Management Development, Career and SuccessionPlanning.

08 hours

Module – 4

Performance Appraisal: Concept of Performance Appraisal, the Performance Appraisal process, Methods of Performance Appraisal, Essential Characteristic of an Effective Appraisal System.

Compensation: Objectives of Compensation Planning, Job Evaluation,

Compensation Pay Structure in India, Wage and Salary Administration,

Factors Influencing Compensation Levels, Executive Compensation.

09 hours

Module – 5

Employee Welfare: Introduction, Types of Welfare Facilities and Statutory Provisions. Employee Grievances: Employee Grievance procedure, Grievances management in Indian Industry.

Discipline: Meaning, approaches to discipline, essential of a good disciplinary

system, managing difficult employees. 09 hours

TEXT BOOKS

1. Human Resource Management- Rao V.S.P, Excel books, 2010

2. Human Resource Management- Cynthia D. Fisher, 3/e, AIPD, Chennai

3. Human Resource Management: A South Asian Perspective, Snell, Bohlander

&Vohra, 16th

Rep., Cengage Learning, 2012

4. Human Resource Management- Lawrence S Kleeman, Biztantra, 20125. Human Resource Management- Aswathappa K, HPH

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Human Resource Management- John M. Ivancevich, 10/e, McGraw Hill.

2. Human Resource Management in Practice- Srinivas R. Kandulla, PHI

3. Human Resource Management- Luis R Gomez-Mejia, David B. Balkin, Robert L Cardy, 6/e, PHI, 2010

16

NON TRADITIONAL MACHINING

(Professional Elective-I)

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME554

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course Outcomes

On completion of the course, the students will be able to

1. Understand the compare traditional and non-traditional machining process and recognize the need for Non-traditional machining process.

2. Understand the constructional features, performance parameters, process characteristics, applications, advantages and limitations of USM, AJM and WJM.

3. Identify the need of Chemical and electro-chemical machining process along with theconstructional features, process parameters, process characteristics, applications,advantages and limitations.

4. Understand the constructional feature of the equipment, process parameters, process characteristics, applications, advantages and limitations EDM & PAM.

5. Understand the LBM equipment, LBM parameters, and characteristics. EBM equipmentand mechanism of metal removal, applications, advantages and limitations LBM & EBM.

MODULE 1

17

INTRODUCTION

Introduction to Non-traditional machining, Need for Non-traditional machining process,Comparison between traditional and non-traditional machining, general classification Non-traditional machining processes, classification based on nature of energy employed inmachining, selection of non-traditional machining processes, Specific advantages, limitations

and applications of non-traditional machining processes. 08 hours

MODULE 2

Ultrasonic Machining (USM): Introduction, Equipment and material

process, Effect of

process parameters: Effect of amplitude and frequency, Effect of abrasive grain diameter,effect of slurry, tool & work material. Process characteristics: Material removal rate, toolwear, accuracy, surface finish, applications, advantages & limitations of USM.

Abrasive Jet Machining (AJM): Introduction, Equipment and process of material removal,process variables: carrier gas, type of abrasive, work material, stand-off distance(SOD).Process characteristics-Material removal rate, Nozzle wear, accuracy & surface finish.Applications, advantages & limitations of AJM.

Water Jet Machining (WJM): Equipment & process, Operation, applications, advantages

and limitations of WJM. 08 hours

MODULE 3

ELECTROCHEMICAL MACHINING (ECM)

Introduction, Principle of electro chemical machining: ECM equipment, elements of ECMoperation, Chemistry of ECM. ECM Process characteristics: Material removal rate, accuracy,surface finish.

Process parameters: Current density, Tool feed rate, Gap between tool & work piece, velocityof electrolyte flow, type of electrolyte, its concentration temperature, and choice of electrolytes. ECM Tooling: ECM tooling technique & example, Tool & insulation materials. Applications ECM: Electrochemical grinding and electrochemical honing process.

Advantages, disadvantages and application of ECG, ECH.

CHEMICAL MACHINING (CHM)

18

Elements of the process: Resists (maskants), Etchants. Types of chemical machining process-chemical blanking process, chemical milling process.

Process characteristics of CHM: material removal rate, accuracy, surface finish, advantages,

limitations and applications of chemical machining process. 10 hours

MODULE 4

ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE MACHINING (EDM)

Introduction, mechanism of metal removal, EDM equipment: spark erosion generator(relaxation type), dielectric medium-its functions & desirable properties, electrode feedcontrol system. Flushing types; pressure flushing, suction flushing, side flushing, pulsedflushing. EDM process parameters: Spark frequency, current & spark gap, surface finish,Heat Affected Zone. Advantages, limitations & applications of EDM, Electrical dischargegrinding, Traveling wire EDM.

PLASMA ARC MACHINING (PAM)

Introduction, non-thermal generation of plasma, equipment mechanism of metal removal,Plasma torch, process parameters, process characteristics. Safety precautions. Safety

precautions, applications, advantages and limitations. 08 hours

MODULE 5

LASER BEAM MACHINING (LBM)

Introduction, generation of LASER, Equipment and mechanism of metal removal, LBMparameters and characteristics, Applications, Advantages & limitations.

ELECTRON BEAM MACHINING (EBM)

Introduction, Principle, equipment and mechanism of metal removal, applications,

advantages and limitations. 08 hours

19

Text Books:

1. Modern Machining Process by P.C Pandey and H S Shah, McGraw Hill Education India Pvt. Ltd. 2000

2. Production technology, HMT, McGraw Hill Education India Pvt. Ltd. 2001

Reference Books

1. New Technology, Dr. Amitabha Bhattacharyya, The Institute of Engineers (India), 2000

2. Modern Machining process, Aditya, 2002.

OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

(OPEN ELECTIVE – I)

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME561

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

COURSE OBJECTIVES

Course Objective:

The general objectives of the course is to

1. Introduce the fundamental concepts of Optimization Techniques;

2. Make the learners aware of the importance of optimizations in real scenarios;

20

3. Provide the concepts of various classical and modern methods of for constrained and unconstrained problems in both single and multivariable.

COURSE OUTCOMES

Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to

1. Understand the overview of optimization techniques, concepts of design space, constraint surfaces and objective function.

2. Review differential calculus in finding the maxima and minima of functions of several variables.

3. Formulate real-life problems with Linear Programming.

4. Solve the Linear Programming models using graphical and simplex methods.

5. Formulate real-life transportation, assignment and travelling salesman problems to find the optimum solution using transportation algorithms

6. Analyze the Queuing model for effective customer satisfaction

7. Apply dynamic programming to optimize multi stage decision problems.

8. Determine the level of inventory that a business must maintain to ensure smooth operation.

9. Construct precedence diagram for series of activities in a huge project to find outprobability of expected completion time using PERT-CPM networks. Also reduce theduration of project by method of crashing.

MODULE I

Introduction to Classical Optimization Techniques

Statement of an Optimization problem – design vector – design constraints – constraint

surface – objective function – objective function surfaces – classification of Optimization

problems.

Classical Optimization Techniques

Single variable Optimization, Multi variable Optimization with and without constraints,Multivariable Optimization with equality constraints - solution by method of Lagrangemultipliers, Multivariable Optimization with inequality constraints - Kuhn – Tucker

conditions. (8Hours)

MODULE II

Linear Programming

21

Various definitions, statements of basic theorems and properties, Advantages, Limitationsand Application areas of Linear Programming, Graphical method of Linear Programmingproblem.

Simplex Method – Phase I and Phase II of the Simplex Method, The Revised

Simplex

method, Primal and Dual Simplex Method, Big – M method. (10Hours)

MODULE III

Transportation Problem

Finding initial basic feasible solution by north – west corner rule, least cost method and

Vogel’s approximation method – testing for optimality of balanced transportation problems.

(Including assignment and travelling salesman problems) (No degeneracy problems)

Queuing

Queuing Models : Essential features of queuing systems, operating characteristics of queuing

system, probability distribution in queuing systems, classification of queuing models,

solution of queuing M/M/1 : /FCFS, M/M/1 : N/FCFS, M/M/C : /FCFS, M/M/C :

N/FCFS.

(8 Hours)

MODULE IV

Dynamic Programming

22

Dynamic programming multistage decision processes – types – concept of sub optimization

and the principle of optimality – computational procedure in dynamic programming –

examples illustrating the calculus method of solution - examples illustrating the tabular

method of solution.

Integer Programming

Pure and mixed integer programming problems, Solution of Integer programming problems –

Gomory’s all integer cutting plane method and mixed integer method, branch and bound

method, Zero-one programming. (8 Hours)

MODULE V

Simulation Modeling

Introduction, Definition and types, Limitations, Various phases of modeling, Monte Carlomethod, Applications, advantages and limitations of simulation

Inventory Models

Role of demand in the development of inventory models, objectives, inventory costs, quantitydiscount, Economic Order Quantity (EOQ), EOQ when stock replenishment is notinstantaneous, Economic lot size when shortages are allowed, economic lot size withdifferent rate of demand in different cycles (Instantaneous replenishment). (No Dynamic

EOQ Models) (8 Hours)

TEXT BOOKS

· Engineering optimization: Theory and practice”-by S.S.Rao, New Age International

(P) Limited.

· Operations Research: An Introduction" by H A Taha, 5th Edition, Macmillan, New York.

· Operations Research by NVR Naidu, G Rajendra, T Krishna Rao, I K International Publishing house, New Delhi.

REFERENCE BOOKS

23

· Optimization Methods in Operations Research and systems Analysis” – by K.V.

Mittal and C. Mohan, New Age, International (P) Limited, Publishers

· Operations Research – by S.D.Sharma, Kedarnath Ramanath & Co

· Linear programming, G. Hadley, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.· Industrial Engineering and Production Management, M. Mahajan, Dhanpat Rai & co

24

ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT

(OPEN ELECTIVE – I)

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME562

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course Objectives

· Understand energy scenario, energy sources and their utilization

· Learn about methods of energy storage, energy management and economic analysis

· Have proper awareness about environment and eco system.

· Understand the environment pollution along with social issues and acts.

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Summarize the basic concepts of energy, its distribution and general Scenario.

2. Explain different energy storage systems, energy management, audit and economic analysis.

3. Summarize the environment eco system and its need for awareness.

4. Identify the various types of environment pollution and their effects.

5. Discuss the social issues of the environment with associated acts.

Module – I

Basic Introduction to Energy: Energy and power, forms of energy, primary energy sources,

energy flows, world energy production and consumption, Key energy trends in India: Demand,

Electricity, Access to modern energy, Energy production and trade, Factors affecting India’s

energy development: Economy and demographics Policy and institutional framework, Energy

prices and affordability, Social and environmental aspects, Investment. 8 Hours

25

Module – II

Energy storage systems: Thermal energy storage methods, Energy saving, Thermal energystorage systems

Energy Management: Principles of Energy Management, Energy demand estimation, Energypricing

Energy Audit: Purpose, Methodology with respect to process Industries, Characteristic method

employed in Certain Energy Intensive Industries

Economic Analysis: Scope, Characterization of an Investment Project

10 Hours

Module – III

Environment: Introduction, Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies- Definition, scope and importance, Need for public awareness.

Ecosystem: Concept, Energy flow, Structure and function of an ecosystem. Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids, Forest ecosystem, Grassland ecosystem, Desert ecosystem and

Aquatic ecosystems, Ecological succession. 8 Hours

Module – IV

Environmental Pollution: Definition, Cause, effects and control measures of - Air pollution,Water pollution, Soil pollution, Marine pollution, Noise pollution, Thermal pollution and Nuclearhazards , Solid waste Management, Disaster management Role of an individual in

prevention of pollution, Pollution case studies. 8 Hours

Module – V

Social Issues and the Environment: Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layerdepletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust. Case Studies. Wasteland reclamation, Consumerismand waste products, Environment Protection Act, Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act,Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act, Wildlife Protection Act, Forest Conservation

Act, Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation. 8 Hours

26

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Textbook for Environmental Studies For Undergraduate Courses of all Branches of HigherEducation by University grant commission and Bharathi Vidyapeeth Institute ofenvironment education and Research ,Pune

2. De, B. K., Energy Management audit & Conservation, 2nd Edition, Vrinda Publication, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Turner, W. C., Doty, S. and Truner, W. C., Energy Management Hand book, 7th edition, Fairmont Press, 2009.

2. Murphy, W. R., Energy Management, Elsevier, 2007.

3. Smith, C. B., Energy Management Principles, Pergamum, 2007

4. Environment pollution control Engineering by C S rao, New Age Inytermnational, 2006,

reprint 2015, 2nd

edition

5. Environmental studies, by Benny Joseph, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008, 2nd

edition.

E- Learning

1. India Energy Outlook 2015(www.iea.org/.../IndiaEnergyOutlook_WEO2015.pdf)2. Open courseware

AUTOMATION AND ROBOTICS

(OPEN ELECTIVE – I)

27

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME563

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course Outcomes

On completion of the course student will be able to

· Classify various types of automation & manufacturing systems

· Discuss different robot configurations, motions, drive systems and its performance parameters.

· Describe the basic concepts of control systems, feedback components, actuators and powertransmission systems used in robots.

· Explain the working of transducers, sensors and machine vision systems.

· Discuss the future capabilities of sensors, mobility systems and Artificial Intelligence in the field of robotics.

Module - 1

Automation

History of Automation, Reasons for automation, Disadvantages of automation, Automationsystems, Types of automation – Fixed, Programmable and Flexible automation, Automationstrategies

Automated Manufacturing Systems: Components, classification and overview of manufacturingSystems, Flexible Manufacturing Systems (FMS), Types of FMS, Applications and benefits ofFMS. 08 Hour

Module - 2

Robotics

28

Definition of Robot, History of robotics, Robotics market and the future prospects, RobotAnatomy, Robot configurations: Polar, Cartesian, cylindrical and Jointed-arm configuration.

Robot motions, Joints, Work volume, Robot drive systems, Precision of movement – Spatial

resolution, Accuracy, Repeatability, End effectors – Tools and grippers.

08 Hours

Module - 3

Controllers and Actuators

Basic Control System concepts and Models, Transfer functions, Block diagrams, characteristicequation, Types of Controllers: on-off, Proportional, Integral, Differential, P-I, P-D, P-I-Dcontrollers. Control system and analysis.

Robot actuation and feedback components

Position sensors – Potentiometers, resolvers, encoders, velocity sensors. Actuators - Pneumatic

and Hydraulic Actuators, Electric Motors, Stepper motors, Servomotors, Power

Transmission systems.

09 Hours

Module - 4

Robot Sensors and Machine vision system

Sensors in Robotics - Tactile sensors, Proximity and Range sensors, use of sensors in robotics.

Machine Vision System: Introduction to Machine vision, the sensing and digitizing function inMachine vision, Image processing and analysis, Training and Vision systems. 08 Hours

Module - 5

29

Robots Technology of the future: Robot Intelligence, Advanced Sensor capabilities,Telepresence and related technologies, Mechanical design features, Mobility, locomotion andnavigation, the universal hand, system integration and networking.

Artificial Intelligence: Goals of AI research, AI techniques – Knowledge representation, Problem

representation and problem solving, LISP programming, AI and Robotics, LISP in

the factory. 09 Hours

Text Books

1. Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated Manufacturing M.P. Groover, Pearson Education.5th edition, 2009

2. Industrial Robotics, Technology, Programming and Applications by M.P. Groover, Weiss, Nagel, McGraw Hill International, 2nd edition, 2012.

Reference Books

1. Robotics, control vision and intelligence-Fu, Lee and Gonzalez. McGraw Hill International, 2nd edition, 2007. .

2. Robotic Engineering - An Integrated approach, Klafter, Chmielewski and Negin, PHI, 1st edition, 2009.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

(OPEN ELECTIVE – I)

30

[AS PER CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME]

SEMESTER – V

Subject Code 15ME564

Teaching Hours / Week IA Marks 20

Lecture Tutorial Practical Exam Marks 80

03 00 00 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course Outcomes

On completion of the course the student will be able to

2. Understand the selection, prioritization and initiation of individual projects and strategic role of project management.

3. Understand the work breakdown structure by integrating it with organization.

4. Understand the scheduling and uncertainty in projects.

5. Students will be able to understand risk management planning using project quality tools.

6. Understand the activities like purchasing, acquisitions, contracting, partnering and collaborations related to performing projects.

7. Determine project progress and results through balanced scorecard approach

8. Draw the network diagram to calculate the duration of the project and reduce it using crashing.

MODULE – 1

Introduction: Definition of project, characteristics of projects, understand projects, types of projects, scalability of project tools, project roles

31

Project Selection And Prioritization – Strategic planning process, Strategic analysis, strategic

objectives, portfolio alignment – identifying potential projects, methods of selecting projects,

financial mode / scoring models to select projects, prioritizing projects, securing and

negotiating projects. 08 Hours

MODULE – 2

Planning Projects: Defining the project scope, Project scope checklist, Project priorities, WorkBreakdown Structure (WBS), Integrating WBS with organisation, coding the WBS for theinformation system.

Scheduling Projects: Purpose of a project schedule, historical development, how projectschedules are limited and created, develop project schedules, uncertainty in project schedules,

Gantt chart. 08 Hours

MODULE – 3

Resourcing Projects: Abilities needed when resourcing projects, estimate resource needs,creating staffing management plant, project team composition issues, Budgeting Projects: Costplanning, cost estimating, cost budgeting, establishing cost control.

Project Risk Planning: Risk Management Planning, risk identification, risk analysis, riskresponse planning, Project Quality Planning and Project Kickoff: Development of qualityconcepts, project quality management plan, project quality tools, kickoff project, baseline andcommunicate project management plan, using Microsoft Project for project baselines.

08 Hours

MODULE – 4

Performing Projects: Project supply chain management: - Plan purchasing and acquisitions, plancontracting, contact types, project partnering and collaborations, project supply chainmanagement.

32

Project Progress and Results: Project Balanced Scorecard Approach, Internal project,

customer, financial issues, Finishing the project: Terminate project early, finish projects on

time, secure customer feedback and approval, knowledge management, perform

administrative and contract closure. 08 Hours

MODULE - 5

Network Analysis

Introduction, network construction - rules, Fulkerson’s rule for numbering the events, AON and

AOA diagrams; Critical path method (CPM) to find the expected completion time of a project,

floats; PERT for finding expected duration of an activity and project, determining the probability

of completing a project, predicting the completion time of project; crashing of

simple projects. 10 Hours

TEXT BOOKS

· Project Management, Timothy J Kloppenborg, Cengage Learning, Edition 2009.

· Project Management, A systems approach to planning scheduling and controlling by Harold kerzner, CBS publication.

· Project Management by S Choudhury, Mc Graw Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2016

REFERENCE BOOKS

· Project Management, Pennington Lawrence, Mc Graw hill

· Project Management, A Moder Joseph and Phillips New Yark Van Nostrand, Reinhold.· Project Management, Bhavesh M. Patal, Vikas publishing House,

Computational Fluid Dynamics

Course Code Credits L-T-P

Assessment

Exam duration

SEE CIA

Computational Fluid Dynamics 15ME651 03 3-0-0 80 20 3Hrs

33

Pre-requisites: Fluid Mechanics, Vector Calculus, Linear Algebra.

Course learning objectives:

Study the governing equations of fluid dynamics

Learn how to formulate and solve Euler’s equation of motion.

Become skilled at Representation of Functions on Computer

Solve computational problems related to fluid flows

Module – I

Introduction to CFD and Governing Equations

Need of CFD as tool, role in R&D, continuum, material or substantial derivative or total

derivative, gradient, divergence and curl operators, Linearity, Principle of Superposition.Derivation of Navier-Stokes equations in control volume (integral form) and partial differentialform, Euler equations (governing inviscid equations). Mathematical classification of PDE(Hyperbolic, Parabolic, Elliptic). Method of characteristics, Introduction to Riemann Problem

and Solution Techniques. 9 Hours

Module – II

One-dimensional Euler's equation

Conservative, Non conservative form and primitive variable forms of Governing equations.

Flux Jacobian, Is there a systematic way to diagonalise 'A'. Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors ofFlux Jacobian. Decoupling of Governing equations, introduction of characteristic variables.Relation between the two non-conservative forms. Conditions for genuinely nonlinearcharacteristics of the flux Jacobian.

Introduction to Turbulence Modeling: Derivation of RANS equations and k-epsilon model.

8 Hours

Module – III

Representation of Functions on Computer

34

Need for representation of functions, Box Function, Hat Function, Representation of sinx usinghat functions: Aliasing, high frequency, low frequency. Representation error as a global error.Derivatives of hat functions, Haar functions, Machine Epsilon. Using Taylor series for

representation of Derivatives. 7 Hours

Module – IV

Finite difference method – Applied to Linear Convection equation, Laplace Eq uations,

Convection Diffusion equations, Burgers equations, modified equations • Explicit methods andImplicit methods – as applied to applied to linear convection equation, Laplace equations,

convection-diffusion equation FTCS,FTFS,FTBS,CTCS Jacobi Method, Gauss-Siedel,

Successive Over Relaxation Method, TDMA.• VonNauman n stability (linear stability)analysis.

Upwind Method in Finite Difference method. 8 Hours

Module – V

Finite volume method

Finite volume method. Finding the flux at interface.

Central schemes - Lax-Friedrichs Method, Lax-Wendroff Method, Two-Step Lax-Wendroff

Method and Mac Cormack Method

Upwind Method in Finite Volume methods - Flux Splitting Method Steger and Warming,

vanLeer, Roe's Method and finding Roe's Averages. 8 Hours

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to:

Understand mathematical characteristics of partial differential equations.

Explain how to classify and computationally solve Euler and Navier-Stokes equations.

Make use of the concepts like accuracy, stability, consistency of numerical methods for thegoverning equations.

Identify and implement numerical techniques for space and time integration of partial differential equations.

Conduct numerical experiments and carry out data analysis.

Acquire basic skills on programming of numerical methods used to solve the Governing equations.

Text Books

35

6. T.j.chung, Computational Fluid Dynamics, , Cambridge University Press

7. Ghoshdastidar, Computational fluid dynamics and heat transfer, Cengage learning, 2017.

8. Charles Hirsch, Numerical Computation of Internal and External Flows: The Fundamentalsof Computational Fluid Dynamics – Vol 1 & Vol 2, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2007

3. Pletcher, r. H., Tannehill, j. C., Anderson, d., Computational fluid mechanics and heat transfer, 3rd ed., Crc press, 2011, ISBN 9781591690375.

4. Moin, p., Fundamentals of engineering numerical analysis, 2nd ed., Cambridge university press, 2010, ISBN 9780521805261 (e- book available).

5. Ferziger, j. H., Numerical methods for engineering application, 2nd ed., Wiley, 1998.

6. Ferziger, j. H., Peric, m., Computational methods for fluid dynamics, 3rd ed., Springer, 2002.

7. Leveque, r., Numerical methods for conservation laws, lectures in mathematics, eth Zurich, birkhauser,199

8. Riemann Solvers and Numerical methods for Fluid Dynamics – A

9. Practical Introduction- Eleuterio F Toro, Springer Publications.

MOOCs:

6. Introduction to CFD by Prof M. Ramakrishna, Aerospace Engineering, IIT Madras.

7. Computational fluid dynamics by Prof Suman Chakraborty, Mechanical Engineering, IIT Kharagpur

3. Hirsch, c., Numerical computation of internal and external flows, 2nd ed., Butterworth-Heinemann, 2007, ISBN 9780750665940 (e-book available).

Scheme of Examination:

Two question to be set from each module. Students have to answer five full questions, choosing at least one full question from each module.

MECHANICS OF COMPOSITE MATERIALS

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment

Exam Duration

SEE CIA

Mechanics of Composite15ME652 03 3-0-0 80 20 3 Hrs

Materials

36

Course objectives:

The course is intended to provide basic understanding of Composite Materials to engineering

students with following aspects:

To acquire basic understanding of composites and its manufacturing

To develop an understanding of the linear elastic analysis of composite materials, which

include concepts such as anisotropic material behavior and the analysis of laminated plates.

Provides a methodology for stress analysis and progressive failure analysis of laminated

composite structures for aerospace, automobile, marine and other engineering applications

The students will undertake a design project involving application of fiber reinforced laminates.

MODULE -1

Introduction to composite materials: Definition and classification of composite materials:

Polymer Matrix Composites, Metal Matrix Composites, Ceramic Matrix Composites, Carbon-

Carbon Composites. Reinforcements and Matrix Materials.

Manufacturing Techniques of Composites:

Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Processing: Layup and curing, fabricating process, open and

closed mould process, Hand layup techniques; structural laminate bag molding, production

procedures for bag molding; filament winding, pultrusion, pulforming, thermo-forming, injection

molding, blow molding.

Fabrication Process for Metal Matrix Composites (MMC’s): Powder metallurgy technique,

liquid metallurgy technique and secondary processing, special fabrication techniques. 10 Hrs

MODULE -2

Micromechanics of Composites: Density, Mechanical Properties; Prediction of Elastic

Constants, Micromechanical Approach, Halpin-Tsai Equations, Transverse Stresses. Thermal

37

Properties; Expression for Thermal Expansion Coefficients of Composites, Expression for Thermal

Conductivity of Composites, Hygral and Thermal Stresses. Mechanics of Load Transfer from

Matrix to Fiber; Fiber elastic-Matrix Elastic, Fiber Elastic-Matrix Plastic. Load transfer in

Particulate Composites. Numerical Problems. 10 Hrs

MODULE -3

Macromechanics of Composites: Elastic Constants of an Isotropic Material, Elastic Constants of

a Lamina, Relationship between Engineering Constants and Reduced Stiffnesses and

Compliances, Variation of Lamina Properties with Orientation, Analysis of Laminated,

Composites, Stresses and Strains in Laminate Composites, Inter-laminar Stresses and Edge

Effects. Numerical Problems. 10 Hrs

MODULE -4

Monotonic Strength, Fracture, Fatigue and Creep: Tensile and Compressive strength of

Unidirectional Fiber Composites. Fracture Modes in Composites; Single and Multiple Fracture,

Debonding, Fiber Pullout and Delamination Fracture. Strength of an Orthotropic Lamina; Maximum

Stress Theory, Maximum Strain Criterion, Tsai-Hill Criterion, Quadratic Interaction Criterion,

Comparison of Failure Theories. Fatigue; S-N Curves, Fatigue Crack Propagation Tests, Damage

Mechanics of Fatigue, Thermal Fatigue. Creep behavior of Composites. 10 Hrs

MODULE -5

Failure Analysis and Design of Laminates: Special cases of Laminates; Symmetric Laminates,

Cross-ply laminates, Angle ply Laminates, Antisymmetric Laminates, Balanced Laminate. Failure

Criterion for a Laminate. Design of a Laminated Composite. Numerical Problems.

10 Hrs

Course outcomes:

On completion of this subject students will be able to:

3. To identify the properties of fiber and matrix materials used in commercial composites, as

well as some common manufacturing techniques.

4. To predict the failure strength of a laminated composite plate

5. Understand the linear elasticity with emphasis on the difference between isotropic and anisotropic material behaviour.

38

6. Acquire the knowledge for the analysis, design, optimization and test simulation of advanced composite structures and Components.

TEXT BOOKS:

3. Autar K. Kaw, Mechanics of Composite materials, CRC Taylor & Francis, 2nd

Ed, 20054. Composite Material Science and Engineering, Krishan K. Chawla, Springer, 3e, 2012

5. Robert M. Jones, Mechanics of Composite Materials, Taylor & Francis, 1999.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1.Madhijit Mukhopadhay, Mechanics of Composite Materials & Structures, Universities Press,

2004

9. Michael W, Hyer, Stress analysis of fiber Reinforced Composite Materials, Mc-Graw Hill International, 2009

10. Fibre Reinforced Composites, P.C. Mallik, Marcel Decker, 1993

11. Hand Book of Composites, P.C. Mallik, Marcel Decker, 1993

E- Learning

VTU, E- learning

Scheme of Examination:

Two question to be set from each module. Students have to answer five full questions, choosing at least one full question from each module.

METAL FORMING

39

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment

Exam Duration

SEE CIA

Metal Forming 15ME653 3 3-0-0 80 20 3 Hrs

Course objectives:

The course is intended to provide basic understanding of Metal Forming with following aspects:

To acquaint with the basic knowledge on fundamentals of metal forming processes

To study various metal forming processes

Understanding plastic deformation during forming processes

MODULE -1

Introduction to Metal Forming: Classification of metal forming processes, advantages and

limitations, stress-strain relations in elastic and plastic deformation. Concepts of true stress, true

strain, triaxial & biaxial stresses. Determination of flow stress, principal stresses, yield criteria and

their significance, Tresca & Von-Mises yield criteria, concepts of plane stress & plane strain.

Deformation mechanisms, Hot and Cold working processes and its effect on mechanical

properties. 10 Hrs

MODULE -2

Effects of Parameters: Metallurgical aspects of metal forming, slip, twinning

mechanics of plastic deformation, Effects of Temperature, strain rate, friction and

lubrication, hydrostatic pressure in metalworking, Deformation zone geometry,

workability of materials, Residual stresses in wrought products.

Forging: Classification of forging processes. Forging machines equipment.

Expressions for forging pressures & load in open die forging and closed die forging

by slab analysis, concepts and factors affecting it. Die-design parameters. Material

flow lines in forging, forging defects, residual stresses in forging. Simple problems.

10 Hrs

40

MODULE -3

Rolling: Classification of rolling processes. Types of rolling mills, expression for rolling

load. Roll separating force. Frictional losses in bearing, power required in rolling, effects of

front & back tensions, friction, friction hill. Maximum possible reduction. Defects in rolled

products. Rolling variables. Simple problems.

Drawing: Drawing equipment & dies, expression for drawing load by slab analysis,

power requirement. Redundant work and its estimation, optimal cone angle & dead zone

formation, drawing variables, Tube drawing, classification of tube drawing. Simple

problems. 10 Hrs

MODULE -4

Extrusion: Types of extrusion processes, extrusion equipment & dies, deformation, lubrication

& defects in extrusion. Extrusion dies, extrusion of seamless tubes. Extrusion variables. Simple problems.

Sheet Metal Forming: Forming methods, dies & punches, progressive die, compound die,

combination die. Rubber forming. Open back inclinable press (OBI press), piercing, blanking,

bending, deep drawing, LDR in drawing, Forming limit criterion, defects of drawn products,

stretch forming. Roll bending & contouring. Simple problems. 10 Hrs

MODULE -5

High Energy Rate Forming Methods & Powder Metallurgy: High Energy Rate Forming

Methods: Principles, advantages and applications, explosive forming, electro hydraulic forming,

Electromagnetic forming.

Powder Metallurgy: Basic steps in Powder metallurgy brief description of methods of

production of metal powders, conditioning and blending powders, compaction and sintering

application of powder metallurgy components, advantages and limitations. 10 Hrs

41

Course outcomes:

On completion of this subject, students will be:

1. Able to understand the concept of different metal forming process.

2. Able to approach metal forming processes both analytically and numerically

3. Able to design metal forming processes

4. Able to develop approaches and solutions to analyze metal forming processes and the

associated problems and flaws.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mechanical metallurgy (SI Units), G.E.Dieter, McGraw hill Pub-2001.

2. Production Technology (Manufacturing process, technology and Automation), R.K Jain, Khanna Publishers-2004.

3. Manufacturing Science, Amithab Gosh & A.K.Malik, East-West press 2001.

4. Production Technology Vol-II by O. P. Khanna & Lal, Dhanpat Rai Publications-2012.

5. A Course in Workshop Technology Vol: 1, Manufacturing Process, B.S Raghuwanshi,

Published by Dhanpat Rai & Co (P) Ltd.-2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Materials & Process in Manufacturing – E.Paul, Degr amo, J.T.Black, Ranold,

A.K.Prentice-hall of India 2002

2. Elements of Workshop Technology Vol:1, S.K.Hajra Choudhury, Media Promoters &

Publishers Pvt Ltd.-2008.

3. Fundamentals of Manufacturing Processes by Lal G K , Narosa

4. Textbook of Production Engineering by P. C. Sharma, S Chand & Company Ltd.

E- Learning

VTU, E- learning

Scheme of Examination:

Two question to be set from each module. Students have to answer five full questions, choosing

at least one full question from each module.

42

AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment Exam

SEE CIA duration

Automobile 15ME655 3 3-0-0 80 20 3 Hrs

Course learning objectives: The student will be able to learn

The layout and arrangement of principal parts of an automobile

The working of transmission and brake systems

The operation and working of steering and suspension systems

To know the Injection system and its advancements

To know the automobile emissions and its effects on environment

MODULE 1

ENGINE COMPONENTS AND IT’S PRINCIPLE PARTS : Spark Ignition (SI) &

Compression Ignition (CI) engines, cylinder – arran gements and their relatives merits, Liners,

Piston, connecting rod, crankshaft, valves, valve actuating mechanisms, valve and port timing

diagrams, Types of combustion chambers for S.I.Engine and C.I.Engines, methods of a Swirl

generation, choice of materials for different engine components, engine positioning. Concept of

HCCI engines, hybrid engines, twin spark engine, electric car.

COOLING AND LUBRICATION: cooling requirements, types of cooling- thermo siphon

system, forced circulation water cooling system, water pump, Radiator, thermostat valves.

Significance of lubrication, splash and forced feed system.

10 Hours

MODULE 2

TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS: Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes- manual and

automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over drive, transfer box, fluid flywheel, torque converter,

propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints ,Differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss Drive and

Torque Tube Drive.

BRAKES: Types of brakes, mechanical compressed air, vacuum and hydraulic braking systems,

construction and working of master and wheel cylinder, brake shoe arrangements, Disk brakes,

43

drum brakes, Antilock –Braking systems, purpose and operation of antilock-braking system,

ABS Hydraulic Unit, Rear-wheel antilock & Numerical 08 Hours

MODULE 3

STEERING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: Steering geometry and types of steering gear

box-Power Steering, Types of Front Axle, Suspension, Torsion bar suspension systems, leaf

spring, coil spring, independent suspension for front wheel and rear wheel, Air suspension

system.

IGNITION SYSTEM: Battery Ignition system, Magneto Ignition system, electronic Ignition

system.

08 Hours

MODULE 4

SUPERCHARGERS AND TURBOCHARGERS: Naturally aspirated engines, Forced

Induction, Types of superchargers, Turbocharger construction and operation, Intercooler,

Turbocharger lag.

FUELS, FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEMS FOR SI AND CI ENGINES: Conventional fuels,

alternative fuels, normal and abnormal combustion, cetane and octane numbers, Fuel mixture

requirements for SI engines, types of carburetors, C.D.& C.C. carburetors, multi point and single

point fuel injection systems, fuel transfer pumps, Fuel filters, fuel injection pumps and injectors.

Electronic Injection system, Common Rail Direct Injection System.

08 Hours

MODULE 5

AUTOMOTIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS: Different air pollutants, formation of

photochemical smog and causes. Automotive emission controls, Controlling crankcase emissions,

Controlling evaporative emissions, Cleaning the exhaust gas, Controlling the air-fuel mixture,

Controlling the combustion process, Exhaust gas recirculation, Treating the exhaust gas, Air-

injection system, Air-aspirator system, Catalytic converter.

EMISSION STANDARDS: Euro I, II, III and IV norms, Bharat Stage II, III, IV norms. Motor

Vehicle Act

08 Hours

44

Course Outcomes: Student will be able

To identify the different parts of an automobile and it’s working

To understand the working of transmission and braking systems

To comprehend the working of steering and suspension systems

To learn various types of fuels and injection systems

To know the cause of automobile emissions ,its effects on environment and methods to reduce the emissions.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Automobile engineering, Kirpal Singh, Vol I and II (12th

Edition) Standard Publishers 2011

2. Automotive Mechanics, S. Srinivasan, (2nd

Edition) Tata McGraw Hill 2003.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Automotive mechanics, William H Crouse & Donald L Anglin (10th

Edition) Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2007

2. Automotive mechanics: Principles and Practices, Joseph Heitner, D Van Nostrand Company, Inc

3. Fundamentals of Automobile Engineering, K.K.Ramalingam, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd.

4. Automobile Engineering, R. B. Gupta, Satya Prakashan, ( 4th

Edition) 1984.

45

Energy Auditing

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment Exam

SEE CIA Duration

Energy Auditing 15ME661 03 3-0-0 80 20 3Hrs

Course learning objectives is to

Understand energy scenario and general aspects of energy audit.

Learn about methods and concept of of energy audit

Understand the energy utilization pattern including wastage and its management

Module – I

General Aspects: Review of energy scenario in India, General Philosophy and need of Energy

Audit and Management, Basic elements and measurements - Mass and energy balances – Scope of

energy auditing industries - Evaluation of energy conserving opportunities, Energy performance

contracts, Fuel and Energy substitution, Need for Energy Policy for Industries,

National & State level energy Policies

8 Hours

Module – II

Energy Audit Concepts: Need of Energy audit - Types of energy audit – En ergy management

(audit) approach - understanding energy costs - Bench marking – Energy performance - Matching

energy use to requirement - Maximizing system efficiencies - Optimizing the input energy

requirements - Duties and responsibilities of energy auditors - Energy audit instruments -

Procedures and Techniques.

8 Hours

Module – III

Principles and Objectives of Energy Management: Design of Energy Management Programmes

- Development of energy management systems – Importance - Indian need of Energy Management

- Duties of Energy Manager - Preparation and presentation of energy audit reports - Monitoring

and targeting, some case study and potential energy savings.

8 Hours

46

Module – IV

Thermal Energy Management: Energy conservation in boilers - steam turbines and industrial

heating systems - Application of FBC - Cogeneration and waste heat recovery - Thermal insulation

- Heat exchangers and heat pumps – HVC i ndustries-Building Energy Management.

8 Hours

Module – V

Electrical Energy Management: Supply side Methods to minimize supply-demand gap -

Renovation and modernization of power plants - Reactive power management – HVDC - FACTS -

Demand side - Conservation in motors - Pumps and fan systems – Energy efficient motors.

8 Hours

Note: A case study involving energy audit may be taken up with suggestion for energy

improvements as a part of assignment.

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to:

Understand the basic concepts of energy audit and energy management

Explain different types of energy audit, maximizing and optimizing system efficiency.

Summarize energy management systems, prepare and present energy audit report

Identify energy saving potential of thermal and electrical systems

Discuss Energy audit instruments, Procedures and Techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Murphy, W. R., Energy Management, Elsevier, 2007.

2. Smith, C. B., Energy Management Principles, Pergamum, 2007

47

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Turner, W. C., Doty, S. and Truner, W. C., Energy Management Hand book, 7th edition,

Fairmont Press, 2009.

2. De, B. K., Energy Management audit & Conservation, 2nd Edition, Vrinda Publication, 2010.

3. Energy Management Handbook – W.C. Turner (John Wile y and Sons, A Wiley Interscience publication)

4. Industrial Energy Management and Utilisation –L.C. Witte, P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown (Hemisphere Publication, Washington, 1988)

5. Industrial Energy Conservation Manuals, MIT Press, Mass, 1982

6. Energy Conservation guide book Patrick/Patrick/Fardo (Prentice hall1993)

E- Learning

https://beeindia.gov.in/content/energy-auditors

Scheme of Examination: Two question to be set from each module. Students have to answer five

full questions, choosing at least one full question from each module.

48

INDUSTRIAL SAFETY

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment Exam

SEE CIA Duration

INDUSTRIAL15ME662 03 3-0-0 80 20 3 Hrs

SAFETY

Prerequisites:

Elements of Mechanical Engineering

Electrical Engineering

Elements of Civil Engineering

Engineering Chemistry lab

Workshop Practice

Other labs of various courses

Overview:

Accidents lead to human tragedy, economical loss to individual, company and the nation.

Safe acts lead to increase in productivity. The present course highlights the importance ofgeneral safety and its prevention, extended to mechanical, electrical sand chemical safety.

The Industrial safety course helps in motivating the staff and students to understand thereason for fire , its prevention. Controlling of fire by various means are highlighted.

Importance of chemical safety, labeling of chemicals, hand signals during forkliftoperations in industrial and aerodromes will help in to understand and apply the

techniques in practical field. A visit to campus, various labs, workshops, local industriesand fire stations helps in analyzing the importance of safety and corrective measures

through case studies.

MODULE-1 : INTRODUCTION TO SAFETY

Terms used: accident, safety, hazard, safe, safety devices, safety guard, security,

precaution, caution, appliance, slip, trip, fall.

49

Ladders and scaffolding. Unsafe acts, reason for accidents, MSDS (material safety datasheet), OSHA, WHO.

Lockout and tag out procedures. Safe material handling and storage.

Case studies: Student should identify the unsafe acts near their surroundings like

housekeeping,

lab layouts, road safety, campus layout, safety signs. 12 hours

MODULE-2 : FIRE SAFETY

Introduction, Class A, B, C, D and E fire. Fire triangle, Fire extinguishers, Fire hazard and

analysis, prevention of fire. Fire protection and loss prevention, steps after occurrence of fire. Portable fire extinguishers. Fire detection, fire alarm and fire fighting systems. Safety

sign boards, instruction on portable fire extinguishers.

Case studies: demonstration of fire extinguishers, visit to local fire fighting stations. Visit to

fire accident sites to analyze the cause of fire and its prevention for future. 10 hours

MODULE-3 : MECHANICAL SAFETY

PPE, safety guards, Safety while working with machine tools like lathe, drill press, power

and band saws, grinding machines. Safety during welding, forging and pressing. Safetywhile handling Material, compressed gas cylinders, corrosive substance, waste drum andcontainers. Case studies: Visit to machine shop, workshops, foundry lab and localindustries to record the practical observation and report the same with relevant figures andcomments.

12 hours

MODULE-4 : ELECTRICAL SAFETY

Introduction to electrical safety, Electric hazards, effect of electric current on human body, causesof electrical accidents, prevention of electric accidents, PPE used .

Electric shock. Primary and secondary electric shocks, AC and DC current shocks.

Safety precautions against shocks. Safety precautions in small and residential building

intallations.Safety procedures in electric plant.

Case studies: To visit electrical sub stations, local distribution systems, observe and share the

experience and report.

12 hours

MODULE-5: CHEMICAL SAFETY AND OTHER SAFETY CHECKS

50

Introduction to Chemical safety, Labeling of chemicals, acid hoods. Handling of acids, eyewashers and showers. Safety thinking, accident investigation, safety policy of the company,

safety, loss prevention and control, check list for LPG installations, safety precautions usingCNG, fire prevention and safety audit, confined space entry, risk assessment. Case studies: To

visit chemical laboratory of the college and other chemical industries like LPG , CNG facilitiesand report. 10 houes

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, student is able to:

1- Understand the basic safety terms.

2- Identify the hazards around the work environment and industries.

3- Use the safe measures while performing work in and around the work area of the available

laboratories.

4- Able to recognize the sign boards and its application.

5- Able to demonstrate the portable extinguishers used for different class of fires.

6- Able to write the case studies by sharing experience of the employees working inhousekeeping, laboratories like workshops, electrical labs, machine shops, electronics and

computer laboratories.

7- Able to understand and report the case studies from various references (text books, news

report, journals, visiting industries like power stations, manufacturing and maintenance).

Text Books:

1- Industrial Safety and Management by L M Deshmukh by McGraw Hill Education (India)

private Limited, ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061768-1, ISBN-10: 0-07-061768-6

2- Electrical Safety, fire safety and safety management by S.Rao, R K Jain and Saluja.

Khanna Publishers, ISBN: 978-81-7409-306-6

Reference books:

1- Chemical process Industrial safety by K S N Raju by McGraw Hill Education (India)

private Limited, ISBN-13: 978-93-329-0278-7, ISBN-10:93-329-0278-X

2- Industrial Safety and Management by L M Deshmukh. McGraw Hill Education (India)

private Limited, ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061768-1, ISBN-10: 0-07-061768-6

51

3- Environmental engineering by Gerard Kiely by McGraw Hill Education (India) private Limited, ISBN-13: 978-0-07-063429-9

VISITS:

1- To visit respective Institution: stores, office, housekeeping area, laboratories.

2- To visit local industries, workshops, district fire fighting system facility and local

electrical power

Maintenance Engineering

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment

Exam Duration

SEE CIA

Maintenance15ME663 3 3-0-0 80 20 3 Hrs

Engineering

Course objectives:

The course is intended to provide basic concepts of maintenance engineering to engineering students with following aspects:

To acquire basic understanding of Maintenance systems

To develop an understanding of the principles of Preventive Maintenance & Predictive Maintenance

Provides a methodology for reliability & probability concepts applied to maintenance engineering

The students will concepts and procedures for Condition Monitoring inMechanical and Electrical systems along with the analysis and processingtechniques for machine fault identification

MODULE -1

52

Maintenance systems: Maintenance objectives and scopes; Maintenance

strategies & organizations; Maintenance works; life cycle costs Preventive

Maintenance: Principles of preventive maintenance, procedures & selection;

Preventive Maintenance planning, scheduling and control; Forms & resources;

Maintenance work measurement; Modeling and analysis techniques in PM and

inspections; Predictive maintenance.

Computerized Maintenance Management systems: Benefits and

applications; Work order systems & plant registers; Maintenance reports,

analysis and monitoring; Introduction to commercial packages Equipment

maintenance: Installation, commissioning and testing of plant equipment,

checking for alignment, lubrication and lubrication schedule; maintenance of

typical rotating and process equipment systems like turbines, pumps and fans,

centrifuges, heat exchangers, boilers and pressure vessels etc.

10 hrs

MODULE -2

Reliability & probability Concepts: Basic concepts of probability theory and

distributions, definition of reliability, failure probability, reliability and hazardrate function, MTBF and MTTR, System reliability , series and parallel system,redundancy.

10 hrs

MODULE -3

Reliability Centered Maintenance: principles of RCM, Benefits of RCM,

application of RCM Step-by-step procedure in conducting RCM analysis. ThePlant Register. Functions and Failures. Failure mode and effect analysis(FMEA). Failure consequences. Maintenance and decision making. Acturialanalysis and Failure data. Perspective loops. Default action. The RCM Decisiondiagram. The nature of Failure

and Technical history. 10 hrs

MODULE -4

Total Productive Maintenance: Goals of TPM and methodology, TPM

improvement plan & procedures. The modern role of care and asset managementthrough TPM The use of TPM concepts consisting of Pareto ABC analysis, Fishbonediagrams, OEE and 5S. Fault analysis.

10 hrs

53

MODULE -5

Condition Monitoring:

Measurable phenomena from different Plant Items:

Measurable phenomena associated with degradation from a range of plant itemsincluding motors/generators, transformers, cables, bushings, connectors, capacitorsand circuit breakers.

Fault diagnosis of Rotational Machines:

Unbalance, shaft and coupling misalignments, bent shafts, gear and bearing wear, oilwhirls and shaft eccentricity.

Measurement Strategies and Techniques:

A wide range of strategies and associated technologies will be discussed includinglight emission (photo multipliers, fiber optic techniques etc.), heat emissions (IR,cameras, direct temperature measurement, etc.), electrical charges (tan d, electricalparticle discharge, etc.), force, power and vibration.

Data Processing and Analysis:

For each of the approaches, options with respect to data processing and analysis will

be discussed including digital signal processing and computational techniques. Closeattention will be paid through examples of the cost benefits and the reliability whichcan be placed on data with respect to formulating a view on the condition of a giveitem of plant.

10 hrs

Course outcomes:

On completion of this subject students will be able to:

1. Understand maintenance objectives and evaluate various maintenance strategies forprocess plant application, Develop necessary planning and scheduling and control ofpreventive maintenance activities.

2. Evaluate reliability of a simple plant component and system.

3. Understand and apply the advanced concepts such as RCM and advantages for a company employing them

54

4. Understand and apply the advanced concepts such as TPM and advantages for a company employing

5. Apply the principles of condition monitoring systems.

6. Apply the mechanical condition monitoring techniques and analyze the data used in condition monitoring

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Practical machinery Vibration Analysis & Predictive Maintenance, C. Scheffer and P.Girdhar,, IDC technologies, 2004.

2. Introduction to Machinery Analysis and Monitoring, John S. Mitchell, PennWellBooks, 1993.

3. Machinery Vibration, Measurement and Analysis, Victor Wowk, Mc Craw Hill,1991

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Handbook of Condition Monitoring, B.K.N. Rao,1996

2. Reliability Engineering, Srinath L S,

3. Maintenance Replacement and Reliability, Jardine AKS,

4. Practical reliability engineering, Oconnor, Patrick D T

5. , Reliability and Maintainability Engineering, Charles E Ebeling

6. Introduction to Reliability Engineering Lewis E,

E- Learning

VTU, E- learning

Scheme of Examination:

Two question to be set from each module. Students have to answer five full questions,choosing at least one full question from each module.

55

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment Exam

SEE CIA Duration

Total Quality15ME664 03 3-0-0 80 20 3Hrs

Management

COURSE LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

This course enables students to

1. Understand various approaches to TQM

2. Understand the characteristics of quality leader and his role.

3. Develop feedback and suggestion systems for quality management.

4. Enhance the knowledge in Tools and Techniques of quality management

Module - 1

Principles and Practice: Definition, basic approach, gurus of TQM, TQM Framework, awareness, defining quality, historical review, obstacles, benefits of TQM.

Quality Management Systems: Introduction, benefits of ISO registration, ISO 9000

series of standards, ISO 9001 requirements.

08

Hours

Module - 2

Leadership: Definition, characteristics of quality leaders, leadership concept, characteristics

of effective people, ethics, the Deming philosophy, role of TQM leaders, implementation, core

values, concepts and framework, strategic planning communication, decision making,

08Hour

56

Module - 3

Customer Satisfaction and Customer Involvement:

Customer Satisfaction: customer and customer perception of quality, feedback, using customer complaints, service quality, translating needs into requirements, customer retention,casestudies.

Employee Involvement – Motivation, employee surveys , empowerment, teams, suggestion

system, recognition and reward, gain sharing, performance appraisal, unions and employee

involvement, case studies. 08 Hours

Module - 4

Continuous Process Improvement: process, the Juran trilogy, improvement strategies,

types of problems, the PDSA Cycle, problem-solving methods, Kaizen, reengineering, sixsigma, case studies.

Statistical Process Control : Pareto diagram, process flow diagram, cause and effect

diagram, check sheets, histograms, statistical fundamentals, Control charts, state of control,

out of control process, control charts for variables, control charts for attributes, scatter

diagrams, case studies

Module - 5

Tools and Techniques: Benching marking, information technology, quality management

systems, environmental management system, and quality function deployment, quality bydesign, failure mode and effect analysis, product liability, total productive maintenance.

08

Hours

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Student will be able to

1. Explain the various approaches of TQMInfer the customer perception of quality

2. Analyze customer needs and perceptions to design feedback systems.

3. Apply statistical tools for continuous improvement of systems

4. Apply the tools and technique for effective implementation of TQM.

57

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Total Quality Management: Dale H. Besterfield, Publisher -Pearson EducationIndia, ISBN: 8129702606, Edition 03.

2. Total Quality Management for Engineers: M. Zairi, ISBN:1855730243, Publisher: Wood head Publishing

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Managing for Quality and Performance Excellence by James R.Evans and

Williuam M Lindsay, 9th

edition, Publisher Cengage Learning.

2 A New American TQM, four revolutions in management, Shoji Shiba, Alan Graham, David Walden, Productivity press, Oregon, 1990

3. Organizational Excellence through TQM, H. Lal, New age Publications, 2008

Reference Books:

1. Engineering Optimization Methods and Applications, A Ravindran, K, M.Ragsdell,

Willey India Private Limited,2nd

Edition,2006.

2. : Introduction to Operations Research- Concepts and Cases, F.S. Hillier. G.J. Lieberman, 9th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill. 2010.

Scheme of Examination:

Two question to be set from each module. Students have to answer five full questions, choosing at least one full question from each module.

58

DESIGN OF THERMAL EQUIPMENTS

Course Code Credits L-T-PAssessment

Exam Duration

SEE CIA

Design of thermal15ME741 03 3-0-0 80 20 3 Hrs

Equipments

Course objectives :

2. To understand types of heat exchanger

3. To study the design shell and tube heat exchanger

4. To study types and design of steam heat condenser and compact heat exchanger

5. To comprehend and design air cooled heat exchanger

6. To understand and to design air cooled heat exchanger, furnaces

Module I

Introduction To Heat Exchanger Design: Types of heat exchangers and their applications.Flow arrangements and temperature distributions in transfer type of heat exchangers. Overall

heat transfer coefficient;- Clean overall heat transfer coefficient, dirt factor dirt overall heattransfer coefficient, dirt factors for various process services.

Double Pipe Heat Exchangers: Film coefficients for tubes and annuli, equivalent diameter of

annuli, fouling factors, caloric or average fluid temperature, true temperature difference; Design

calculation of double pipe heat exchanger, double pipe exchangers in series-parallel

arrangements.

59

Module II

Shell and tube heat exchangers - tube layouts, baffle spacing, classification of shell and tube

exchangers, Design calculation of shell and tube heat exchangers, flow assignments: tube side

flow area calculations; viscosity correction factor, shell side equivalent diameter, calculation of

shell side heat transfer coefficient, evaluation for wall temperature, evaluation of overall heat

transfer coefficient, Calculation of surface area. Calculations of tube side and shell side pressure

drops.

Module III

Steam Condensers: Specifications of other details as per TEMA standards. Flow arrangement

for increased heat recovery: - lack of heat recovery in 1-2 exchangers true temperaturedifference in a 2-4 exchanger. Calculation procedure for steam condensers.

Compact Heat Exchangers: Introduction; definition of Geometric Terms: plate fin surface

geometries and surface performance data; correlation of heat transfer and friction data;

Goodness factor comparisons; specification of rating and sizing problems; calculation procedure

for a rating problem.

Module IV

Air-Cooled Heat Exchangers: Air as coolant for industrial processes; custom-built units; fin-

tube systems for air coolers; fin-tube bundles; thermal rating; tube side flow arrangements;

cooling air supply by fans; cooling air supply in natural draft towers.

Furnaces And Combustion Chambers: Introduction; process heaters and boiler; heat transfer

in furnaces: - Heat source; Heat sink; refractory surfaces; heat transfer to the sink; Design

methods: - Method of Lobo and Evans:Method of Wilson, Lobo and Hottel; The Orrok-Hudson

equation;Wallenberg simplified method.

Module V

Heat pipes - types and applications, operating principles, working fluids, wick structures, control

techniques, pressure balance, maximum capillary pressure, liquid and vapor pressure drops,

effective thermal conductivity of wick structures, capillary limitation on heat transport capability,

sonic, entrainment, and boiling limitations, determination of operating conditions; Heat pipe

design – fluid selection, wick selection, material selection, preliminary design considerations,

heat pipe design procedure, determination of heat pipe diameter, design of heat pipe containers,

wick design, entertainment and boiling limitations, design problems

60

Course outcomes:

1. To have complete knowledge of heat exchanger and its appplications

2. To be able to design shell and tube heat exchanger

3. To be able to select and design of steam heat condenser and compact heat exchanger

condenser and heat pipes for various application

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Process Heat Transfer: Donald Q. Kern, Tata McGraw –Hill Edition (1997)

2. Compact Heat Exchangers: W. M. Kays & A. L. London, Mcgraw –Hill co. (1997)

3. Heat Pipe Theory and Practice Chi, S. W., - A Source Book, McGraw-Hill, 1976

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Heat Transfer – A Basic Approach: Necati Ozsisik, McGraw – Hill International edition (1985).2. Heat Exchanger Design Hand Book: Volumes 2 and 3, edited by Ernst U schlunder. et. al Hemisphere

Publishing Co. (1983)

3. Heat exchanger- Kokac Thermal- hydraulic and design analysis.

4. Heat Pipes Dunn, P. D. and Reay, D. A., , Fourth Edition, Pergamon Press, 1994

61

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI

Constitution of India, Professional Ethics and Human Rights (CPH) (Common to all branches)

[As per Outcome Based Education(OBE) and Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2018-19)

Course Code : 17CPH39/49 SEE Marks: 30

Contact Hours/Week : 01 hr Theory /week CIE Marks: 20

Total Hours : 15 Exam: 02 hr

Semester : III / IV Credit: 1

Course Learning Objectives: This course (17CPH39/49) will enable the students

• To assimilate and get familiarized with basic information about Indian constitution and provide

overall legal literacy to the young technograts to manage complex societal issues in the present

scenario.

• To identify their individual roles and ethical responsibilities towards society.

• To understand engineering ethics & responsibilities, through the learning of these topics students

will be able to understand human rights/ values and its implications in their life.

MODULE- I

Introduction and Basic Information about Indian Constitution

• The Necessity of the Constitution, The Societies before and after the Constitution adoption.

• Introduction to the Indian constitution, The making of the Constitution, The Role of the

Constituent Assembly - Preamble and Salient features of the Constitution of India.

Fundamental Rights and its Restriction and limitations in different Complex Situations.

• Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP) & it’s present relevance in our society with

examples. Fundamental Duties and its Scope and significance in Nation building.

(Duration: 03 Hours & RBT Levels: L1, L2 & L3 )

MODULE- II

Union Excutive and State Excutive

• Parliamentary System, Federal System, Centre-State Relations.

• Union Executive – President, Prime Minister, Union Cabinet, Parliament - LS and RS,

Parliamentary Committees, Important Parliamentary Terminologies. Supreme Court of

India, Judicial Reviews and Judicial Activism.

• State Executives – Governor , Chief Minister, State Cabinet, State Legislature, High Court

and Subordinate Courts, Special Provisions (Article 370.371,371J) for some States.

(Duration: 03 Hours & RBT Levels: L1, L2 & L3)

1

MODULE-III

Elections, Amendments and Emergency Provisions

• Elections, Electoral Process, and Election Commission of India, Election Laws.

• Amendments - Methods in Constitutional Amendments (How and Why) and Important

Constitutional Amendments. Amendments – 7,9,10,12,42,44, 61, 73,74, ,75, 86, and

91,94,95,100,101,118 and some important Case Studies. Recent Amendments with

explanation. Important Judgements with Explanation and its impact on society (from the list

of Supreme Court Judgements).

• Emergency Provisions, types of Emergencies and it’s consequences.

(Duration: 03 Hours & RBT Levels: L1, L2 & L3)

Module- IV

Constitutional Provisions/ Local Administration/ Human Rights

• Special Constitutional Provisions for SC & ST, OBC, Special Provision for Women,

Children & Backward Classes.

• Local Administration : Powers and functions of Municipalities and Panchyats System. Co –

Operative Societies and Constitutional and Non-constitutional Bodies.

• Human Rights/values – Meaning and Definitions, Legislative Specific Themes in Human

Rights and Functions/ Roles of National Human Rights Commission of India. Human Rights

(Amendment Act)2006.

(Duration: 03 Hours & RBT Levels: L1, L2 & L3)

MODULE- V

Professional / Engineering Ethics

• Scope & Aims of Engineering & Professional Ethics - Business Ethics, Corporate Ethics,

Personal Ethics. Engineering and Professionalism, Positive and Negative Faces of

Engineering Ethics, Code of Ethics as defined in the website of Institution of Engineers

(India) : Profession, Professionalism, Professional Responsibility. Clash of Ethics,

Conflicts of Interest.

Responsibilities in Engineering

• Responsibilities in Engineering and Engineering Standards, the impediments to

Responsibility.Trust and Reliability in Engineering, IPRs (Intellectual Property Rights),

• Risks, Safety and liability in Engineering.

(Duration: 03 Hours & RBT Levels: L1, L2 & L3)

2

Course Outcomes: On completion of this course, students will be able to,

CO1: Have general knowledge and legal literacy about Indian Constitution and there by it helps

to take up competitive examinations & to manage/face complex societal issues in society.

CO2: Understand state and central policies( Union and State Excutive), fundamental Rights &

their duties.

CO3: Understand Electoral Process, Amendments and special provisions in Constitution.

CO4: Understand powers and functions of Municipalities, Panchayats and Co-operative

Societies, with Human Rights and NHRC.

CO5: Understand Engineering & Professional ethics and responsibilities of Engineers.

Question paper pattern for SEE and CIE.

• The SEE question paper will be set for 30 marks and the pattern of the question paper

will be objective type (MCQ).

• For the award of 20 CIE marks, refer the University Scheme and Syllabus book.

Text Books

1) Durga Das Basu (DD Basu): “Introduction to the Constitution on India”, (Students Edition.)

Prentice –Hall EEE, 19th / 20th Edn., (Latest Edition) or 2008.

2) Shubham Singles, Charles E. Haries, and Et al : “Constitution of India and Professional Ethics” by

Cengage Learning India Private Limited, Latest Edition – 2018.

Reference Books

1. M.Govindarajan, S.Natarajan, V.S.Senthilkumar, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice –Hall of India

Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2004

2. M.V.Pylee, “An Introduction to Constitution of India”, Vikas Publishing, 2002.

3. Latest Publications of NHRC - Indian Institute of Human Rights, New Delhi.

Web Links and Video Lectures

www.unacademy.com/lesson/future-perfect-tense/YQ9NSNQZ

https://successesacademy

3

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELGAUM

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

CIVIL ENGINEERING BOARD

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

General Notes:

1. The teaching learning process should be as per the Choice Based Credit System

2. All Civil Engineering Departments should have a “CIVIL ENGINEERING MUSEUM” with

collections related to civil engineering like models, charts, material samples, fixtures and fittings

etc. which assist effective teaching learning process.

3. The teaching learning process may be planned to develop capabilities, competencies and skills

required for career development based on course beginning and course end surveys.

4. Course objectives, course outcomes and program objectives given under each course are broad

and indicative.

5. The course coordinator/teacher/instructors are informed to deliberate in the faculty meeting with

module coordinator, program coordinator along with the stake holders to develop the respective

course plans.

6. The department advisory board may make suitable changes to the course objectives, course

outcomes and program objectives according to their finalized course plans.

7. The faculty should complement the teaching with case studies and field visits wherever required.

8. One faculty development program to be conducted to compliment teaching learning process by

the department in a year

4

Course Title: STRENGTH OF MATERIALS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – III

Subject Code 15CV32 I.A. Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam. Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam. Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students;

1. To understand the basic concepts of the stresses and strains for different materials and strength of structural elements.

2. To know the development of internal forces and resistance mechanism for one dimensional and two dimensional structural elements.

3. To analyse and understand different internal forces and stresses induced due to representative loads on structural elements.

4. To analyse and understand principal stresses due to the combination of two dimensional stresses on an element and failure mechanisms in materials.

5. To evaluate the behavior of torsional members, columns and struts. Revised

Modules Teaching Bloom’s

Hours Taxonomy

(RBT) Level

Module -1:

Simple Stresses and Strain: 10 Hours L2,L3

Introduction, Definition and concept and of stress

and strain. Hooke’s law, Stress-Strain diagrams for

ferrous and non-ferrous materials, factor of safety,

Elongation of tapering bars of circular and

rectangular cross sections, Elongation due to self-

weight.

Saint Venant’s principle, Compound bars,

Temperature stresses, Compound section subjected

to temperature stresses, state of simple shear,

Elastic constants and their relationship.

Module -2:

Compound Stresses: 5 Hours L2,L4

Introduction, state of stress at a point, General two

dimensional stress system, Principal stresses and

principal planes. Mohr’s circle of stresses

Thin and Thick Cylinders:

Introduction, Thin cylinders subjected to internal 5 Hours L2,L4

pressure; Hoop stresses, Longitudinal stress and

change in volume. Thick cylinders subjected to

both internal and external pressure; Lame’s

equation, radial and hoop stress distribution.

Module-3:

1

5

Shear Force and Bending Moment in Beams: 10 Hours L2,L4

Introduction to types of beams, supports and

loadings. Definition of bending moment and shear

force, Sign conventions, relationship between load

intensity, bending moment and shear force. Shear

force and bending moment diagrams for statically

determinate beams subjected to points load,

uniformly distributed loads, uniformly varying

loads, couple and their combinations.

Module -4:

Bending and Shear Stresses in Beams: 6 Hours L2.L4

Introduction, pure bending theory, Assumptions,

derivation of bending equation, modulus of

rupture, section modulus, flexural rigidity.

Expression for transverse shear stress in beams,

Bending and shear stress distribution diagrams for

circular, rectangular, ‘I’, and ‘T’ sections.

Shear centre(only concept)

Columns and Struts: 4 Hours L2,L4

Introduction, short and long columns. Euler’s

theory; Assumptions, Derivation for Euler’s

Buckling load for different end conditions,

Limitations of Euler’s theory. Rankine-Gordon’s

formula for columns.

Module -5:

Torsion in Circular Shaft: 7 Hours L2,L4

Introduction, pure torsion, Assumptions, derivation

of torsion equation for circular shafts, torsional

rigidity and polar modulus Power transmitted by a

shaft, combined bending and torsion.

Theories of Failure:

Introduction, maximum principal stress theory 3 Hours L1,L2

(Rankine’s theory), Maximum shearing stress

theory (Tresca’s theory), Strain energy theory

(Beltrami and Haigh), and maximum strain theory

(St. Venant’s theory).

2

6

Course outcomes:

After studying this course, students will be able;

1. To evaluate the strength of various structural elements internal forces such as compression, tension, shear, bending and torsion.

2. To suggest suitable material from among the available in the field of construction and manufacturing.

3. To evaluate the behavior and strength of structural elements under the action of compound stresses and thus understand failure concepts.

4. To understand the basic concept of analysis and design of members subjected to torsion.

5. To understand the basic concept of analysis and design of structural elements such as columns and struts.

Program Objectives (as per NBA)

o Engineering Knowledge. o Problem Analysis. o Interpretation of data.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have Ten questions, each full question carrying 16 marks.

• There will be two full questions (with a maximum three sub divisions, if necessary) from each module.

• Each full question shall cover the topics under a module.

• The students shall answer Five full questions selecting one full question from each module.

• If more than one question is answered in modules, best answer will be considered for the award of marks limiting one full question answer in each module.

Text Books:

1. B.S. Basavarajaiah, P.Mahadevappa “Strength of Materials” in SI Units,

University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 3rd

Edition, 2010 2. Ferdinand P. Beer, E. Russell Johnston and Jr.John T. DeWolf “Mechanics of

Materials”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Third Edition, SI Units

Reference Books:

1. D.H. Young, S.P. Timoshenko “ Elements of Strength of Materials” East West

Press Pvt. Ltd., 5th

Edition (Reprint 2014) 2. R K Bansal, “A Textbook of Strength of Materials”, 4th Edition, Laxmi

Publications, 2010 3. S.S. Rattan “ Strength of Materials” McGraw Hill Education (India)

Pvt. Ltd., 2nd

Edition (Sixth reprint 2013)

4. Vazirani, V N, Ratwani M M. and S K Duggal "Analysis of Structures Vol. I",

17th

Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.

3

7

Course Title: FLUIDS MECHANICS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III

Subject Code 15CV33 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives:

The objectives of this course is to make students to learn:

1. The Fundamental properties of fluids and its applications. 2. Hydrostatic laws and application to practical problem solving 3. Principles of Kinematics and Hydro-Dynamics for practical applications 4. Basic design of pipes and pipe networks considering flow, pressure and its

losses. 5. The basic flow rate measurements

Revised

Modules Teaching Bloom’s

Hours Taxonomy

(RBT)

Level

Module -1

Fluids & Their Properties: 5 Hours L2,L3

Concept of fluid, Systems of units. Properties of

fluid; Mass density, Specific weight, Specific

gravity, Specific volume, Viscosity, Cohesion,

Adhesion, Surface tension& Capillarity. Fluid as a

continuum, Newton’s law of viscosity (theory &

problems).Capillary rise in a vertical tube and

between two plane surfaces (theory & problems).

vapor pressure of liquid, compressibility and bulk

modulus, capillarity, surface tension, pressure

inside a water droplet, pressure inside a soap

bubble and liquid jet. Numerical problems

Fluid Pressure and Its Measurements:

5 Hours L2,L3

Definition of pressure, Pressure at a point,

Pascal’s law, Variation of pressure with depth.

Types of pressure. Measurement of pressure using

simple, differential & inclined manometers (theory

& problems). Introduction to Mechanical and

electronic pressure measuring devices.

4

8

Module -2

Hydrostatic forces on Surfaces : 3 Hours L2,L4

Definition, Total pressure, centre of pressure, total

pressure on horizontal, vertical and inclined plane

surface, total pressure on curved surfaces, water

pressure on gravity dams, Lock gates. Numerical

Problems.

Fundamentals of fluid flow (Kinematics):

Introduction. Methods of describing fluid motion. 7 Hours L2,L4

Velocity and Total acceleration of a fluid particle.

Types of fluid flow, Description of flow pattern.

Basic principles of fluid flow, three-dimensional

continuity equation in Cartesian coordinate

system. Derivation for Rotational and irroational

motion. Potential function, stream function,

orthogonality of streamlines and equipotential

lines. Numerical problems on Stream function and

velocity potential.

Introduction to flow net.

Module -3

Fluid Dynamics: 10 Hours L2,L4

Introduction. Forces acting on fluid in motion.

Euler’s equation of motion along a streamline and

Bernoulli’s equation. Assumptions and limitations

of Bernoulli’s equation. Modified Bernoulli’s

equation. Problems on applications of Bernoulli’s

equation (with and without losses).

Vortex motion; forced vortex, free vortex, problems

Momentum equation problems on pipe bends.

Applications:

Introduction. Venturimeter, Orificemeter, Pitot

tube. Numerical Problems

Module -4

Orifice and Mouthpiece: 3 Hours L1,L2

Introduction, classification, flow through orifice,

hydraulic coefficients, Numerical problems.

Mouthpiece, classification, Borda’s Mouthpiece

(No problems).

Notches and Weirs:

Introduction. Classification, discharge over 7 Hours L2,L4

rectangular, triangular, trapezoidal notches,

Cippoletti notch, broad crested weirs. Numerical

problems. Ventilation of weirs, submerged weirs.

5

9

Module -5

Flow through Pipes: 7 Hours L2,L4

Introduction. Major and minor losses in pipe flow.

Darcy-Weisbach equation for head loss due to

friction in a pipe. Pipes in series, pipes in parallel,

equivalent pipe-problems. Minor losses in pipe

flow, equation for head loss due to sudden

expansion. Numerical problems.

Hydraulic gradient line, energy gradient line.

Pipe Networks, Hardy Cross method, Numerical

problems.

Surge Analysis in Pipes:

3 Hours L2,L4

Water hammer in pipes, equations for pressure

rise due to gradual valve closure and sudden

closure for rigid and elastic pipes. Problems

Course outcomes:

After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Possess a sound knowledge of fundamental properties of fluids and fluid continuum

2. Compute and solve problems on hydrostatics, including practical applications

3. Apply principles of mathematics to represent kinematic concepts related to fluid flow

4. Apply fundamental laws of fluid mechanics and the Bernoulli’s principle for practical applications

5. Compute the discharge through pipes and over notches and weirs

Program Objectives (as per NBA)

o Engineering Knowledge. o Problem Analysis. o Interpretation of data.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have Ten questions, each full question carrying 16 marks.

• There will be two full questions (with a maximum Three sub divisions, if necessary) from each module.

• Each full question shall cover the topics under a module.

• The students shall answer Five full questions selecting one full question from each module.

• If more than one question is answered in modules, best answer will be

considered for the award of marks limiting one full question answer in each module.

6

10

Text Books:

1. P N Modi and S M Seth, “Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, including

Hydraulic Machines”, 20th

edition, 2015, Standard Book House, New Delhi

2. R.K. Bansal, “A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi

3. S K SOM and G Biswas, “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill,New Delhi

Reference Books:

1. Victor L Streeter, Benjamin Wylie E and Keith W Bedford, “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd., New Delhi, 2008(Ed)

2. K Subramanya, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Co. Ltd. 3. K Subramanya, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines-problems and

solutions”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. 4. J. F. Douglas, J. M. Gasoriek, John Swaffield, Lynne Jack, “Fluid Mechanics”,

Pearson, Fifth Edition 5. Mohd.Kaleem Khan, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”, Oxford University

Press

7

11

Course Title: BASIC SURVEYING

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III

Subject Code 15CV34 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives:

This course will enable students to;

1. Understand the basic principles of Surveying 2. Learn Linear and Angular measurements to arrive at solutions to basic surveying

problems. 3. Employ conventional surveying data capturing techniques and process the data for

computations. 4. Analyze the obtained spatial data to compute areas and volumes and draw contours

to represent 3D data on plane figures.

Revised

Modules Teaching Bloom’s

Hours Taxonomy

(RBT) Level

Module -1

Introduction: 6 Hours L1, L2

Definition of surveying, Objectives and importance of

surveying. Classification of surveys. Principles of

surveying. Units of measurements, Surveying

measurements and errors, types of errors, precision

and accuracy. Classification of maps, map scale,

conventional symbols, topographic maps, map

layout, Survey of India Map numbering systems.

Measurement of Horizontal Distances:

Measuring tape and types. Measurement using 4 Hours L1, L2

tapes, Taping on level ground and sloping ground.

Errors and corrections in tape measurements,

ranging of lines, direct and indirect methods of

ranging, Electronic distance measurement, basic

principle. Booking of tape survey work, Field book,

entries, Conventional symbols, Obstacles in tape

survey, Numerical problems.

8

12

Module -2

Measurement of Directions and Angles: 5 Hours L2,L3

Compass survey:

Basic definitions; meridians, bearings, magnetic and

True bearings. Prismatic and surveyor’s compasses,

temporary adjustments, declination. Quadrantal

bearings, whole circle bearings, local attraction and

related problems

Theodolite Survey and Instrument Adjustment: 5 Hours L2,L3

Theodolite and types, Fundamental axes and parts of

Transit theodolite, uses of theodolite, Temporary

adjustments of transit theodolite, measurement of

horizontal and vertical angles, step by step procedure

for obtaining permanent adjustment of Transit

theodolite

Module -3

Traversing: 5 Hours L1, L2

Traverse Survey and Computations: Latitudes and

departures, rectangular coordinates, Traverse

adjustments, Bowditch rule and transit rule,

Numerical Problems

5 Hours L1, L2

Tacheometry:

basic principle, types of tacheometry, distance

equation for horizontal and inclined line of sight in

fixed hair method, problems

Module -4

Leveling: 10Hours L3,L4

Basic terms and definitions, Methods of leveling,

Dumpy level, auto level, digital and laser levels.

Curvature and refraction corrections. Booking and

reduction of levels.

Differential leveling, profile leveling, fly leveling, check

leveling, reciprocal leveling, trigonometric leveling

(heights and distances-single plane and double plane

methods.

Module -5:

Areas and Volumes: 8Hours L2,L3

Measurement of area – by dividing the area into

geometrical figures, area from offsets, mid ordinate

rule, trapezoidal and Simpson’s one third rule, area

from co-ordinates, introduction to planimeter, digital

planimeter. Measurement of volumes-trapezoidal and

prismoidal formula.

Contouring 2 Hours L2,L3

Contours, Methods of contouring, Interpolation of

contours, contour gradient, characteristics of

contours and uses.

9

13

Course outcomes:

After a successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Posses a sound knowledge of fundamental principles Geodetics[L1][PO1]

2. Measurement of vertical and horizontal plane, linear and angular dimensions to arrive at solutions to basic surveying problems.[L2][L3][PO3]

3. Capture geodetic data to process and perform analysis for survey problems

[L4][PO2]

4. Analyse the obtained spatial data and compute areas and volumes. Represent 3D data on plane figures as contours [L4] [PO2]

Program Objectives (as per NBA) o

Engineering Knowledge. o Problem Analysis.

o Interpretation of data.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have Ten questions, each full question carrying 16 marks.

• There will be two full questions (with a maximum Three sub divisions, if necessary) from each module.

• Each full question shall cover the topics under a module.

• The students shall answer Five full questions selecting one full question from each module.

• If more than one question is answered in modules, best answer will be considered for the award of marks limiting one full question answer in each module.

Text Books:

1. B.C. Punmia, “Surveying Vol.1”, Laxmi Publications pvt. Ltd., New Delhi – 2009.

2. Kanetkar T P and S V Kulkarni , Surveying and Leveling Part I, Pune Vidyarthi Griha Prakashan, 1988

Reference Books:

1. S.K. Duggal, “Surveying Vol.1”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi. – 2009.

2. K.R. Arora, “Surveying Vol. 1” Standard Book House, New Delhi. – 2010

3. R Subramanian, Surveying and Leveling, Second edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi

4. A. Bannister, S. Raymond , R. Baker, “Surveying”, Pearson, 7th

ed., New Delhi

10

14

Course Title: ENGINEERING GEOLOGY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – III

Subject Code 15CV35 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives:

This course will enable students;

1. To understand the internal structure and composition of the earth.

2. To comprehend the properties, occurrence and uses of minerals in various industries.

3. To learn about geo-morphological agents such as river, wind, sea waves, and their implications in implementing civil engineering projects.

4. To gain knowledge about the structures of the rocks and their considerations in the selection of site for dams, tunnels, bridges and highways.

5. To learn the application of Topographic maps, remote sensing and GIS in Civil engineering practices and natural resource management.

Revised

Modules Teaching Bloom’s

Hours Taxonomy

(RBT) Level

Module -1

Introduction: 10 Hours L1,L2

Application of Earth Science in Civil Engineering

Practices, Understanding the earth, internal

structure and composition.

Mineralogy:

Mineral properties, composition and their use in the

manufacture of construction materials - Quartz

Group (Glass); Feldspar Group (Ceramic wares and

Flooring tiles); Kaolin (Paper, paint and textile);

Asbestos (AC sheets); Carbonate Group ( Cement) ;

Gypsum (POP, gypsum sheets, cement); Mica Group

(Electrical industries); Ore minerals - Iron ores

(Steel); Chromite (Alloy); Bauxite (aluminum);

Chalcopyrite (copper)

11

15

Module -2

Petrology: 10 Hours L2,L3

Formation, Classification and Engineering

Properties. Rock as construction material, concrete

aggregate, railway ballast, roofing, flooring, cladding

and foundation. Deformation of rocks, Development

of Joints, Folds, Faults and Unconformities. Their

impact in the selection of sites for Dams, Reservoirs,

Tunnels, Highways and Bridges, Rock Quality

Determination (RQD), Rock Structure Rating (RSR),:

Igneous Rocks - Granite, Gabbro, Dolerite, Basalt;

Sedimentary rocks - Sandstone, Shale, Limestone,

Laterite; Metamorphic rocks - Gneiss, Quartzite,

Slate, Charnockite: Decorative stones - Porphyries,

Marble and Quartzite.

Module -3

Geomorphology and Seismology: 12 Hours L2, L3, L5

Landforms – Classification, Rock weathering, types

and its effects on Civil Engineering Projects. Study of

Geo-morphological aspects in the selection of sites for

Dams, Reservoirs, Tunnels, Highways and Bridges.

Watershed management, Floods and their control,

River valley, Drainage pattern – parameters and

development; Coastlines and their engineering

considerations.

Earthquake - Causes and Effects,, Seismic waves,

Engineering problems related to Earthquakes,

Earthquake intensity, Richter Scale, Seismograph,

Seismic zones- World and India, Tsunami – causes

and effects. Early warning system. Reservoir Induced

Seismicity; Landslides – causes and their control.

Module -4

Hydrogeology: 8 Hours L4,L5

Hydrological cycle, Occurrence of Groundwater in

different terrains -Weathered, Hard and Stratified

rocks; Determination of Quality aspects - SAR, RSC

and TH of Groundwater. Groundwater Pollution,

Groundwater Exploration- Electrical Resistivity and

Seismic methods, Resistivity curves, Water Bearing

Formations, Aquifer types and parameters -

Porosity, Specific yield and retention, Permeability,

Transmissibility and Storage Coefficient. Springs and

Artesian Wells, Artificial Recharging of Groundwater,

Sea water intrusion and remedies.

12

16

Module -5:

Geodesy: 10 Hours L2,L3, L5

Study of Topographic maps and Contour maps;

Remote Sensing – Concept, Application and its

Limitations; Geographic Information System (GIS)

and Global Positioning System (GPS) – Concept and

their use resource mapping. LANDSAT Imagery –

Definition and its use. Impact of Mining, Quarrying

and Reservoirs on Environment. Natural Disasters

and their mitigation.

Course outcomes:

After a successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Students will able to apply the knowledge of geology and its role in Civil Engineering

2. Students will effectively utilize earth’s materials such as mineral, rocks and water in civil engineering practices.

3. Analyze the natural disasters and their mitigation.

4. Assess various structural features and geological tools in ground water exploration,

Natural resource estimation and solving civil engineering problems.

5. Apply and asses use of building materials in construction and asses their properties

Program Objectives (as per NBA)

o Engineering Knowledge. o Problem Analysis.

o Interpretation of data.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have Ten questions, each full question carrying 16 marks.

• There will be two full questions (with a maximum Three sub divisions, if necessary) from each module.

• Each full question shall cover the topics under a module.

• The students shall answer Five full questions selecting one full question from each module.

• If more than one question is answered in modules, best answer will be considered for the award of marks limiting one full question answer in each module.

Text Books:

1. P.K. Mukerjee, “A Text Book of Geology”, World Press Pvt., Ltd. Kolkatta. 2. Parbin Singh, “Text Book of Engineering and General Geology”, Published by S.K.

Kataria and Sons, New Dehli

13

17

Reference Books:

1. Earthquake Tips - Learning Earthquake Design and Construction - C V R Murthy Published by National Information Centre of Earthquake Engineering, Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur.

2. Dimitri P Krynine and William R Judd, “Principles of Engineering Geology and Geotechnics”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi.

3. K V G K Gokhale, “Principles of Engineering Geology”, BS Publications, Hyderabad.

4. M Anji Reddy, “Text book of Remote Sensing and Geographical Information System”, BS Publications, Hyderabad.

5. Ground water Assessment, development and Management by K.R. Karanth, Tata Mc Graw Hills

6. K. Todd, “Groundwater Hydrology”, Tata Mac Grow Hill, New Delhi. 7. D. Venkata Reddy, “Engineering Geology”, New Age International Publications, New

Delhi. 8. S.K Duggal, H.K Pandey and N Rawal, “Engineering Geology”, McGraw Hill

Education (India) Pvt, Ltd. New Delhi. 9. M.P Billings, “Structural Geology”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. 10. K. S. Valdiya, “ Environmental Geology”,, Tata Mc Grew Hills. 11. M. B. Ramachandra Rao, “Outlines of Geophysical Prospecting- A Manual for

Geologists”, Prasaranga, University of Mysore, Myso

14

18

Course Title: Building Materials and Construction

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III

Subject Code 15CV36 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives:

This course will develop a student;

1. In recognizing the good materials to be used for the construction work 2. In investigation of soil condition, Deciding and design of suitable

foundation for different structures 3. In supervision of different types of masonry 4. In selection of materials, design and supervision of suitable type of floor and

roof. 5. To gain knowledge about doors, windows, plastering, painting, damp

proofing, scaffolding, shoring, underpinning and to take suitable engineering measures.

Revised

Modules Teaching Bloom’s

Hours Taxonomy

(RBT) Level

Module -1

Building Materials: 10 Hours L1 L2

Stone as building material; Requirement of good

building stones, Dressing of stones, Deterioration

and Preservation of stone work.

Bricks; Classification, Manufacturing of clay

bricks, Requirement of good bricks. Field and

laboratory tests on bricks; compressive strength,

water absorption, efflorescence, dimension and

warpage.

Cement Concrete blocks, Stabilized Mud Blocks,

Sizes, requirement of good blocks. Mortar: types

and requirements. Timber as construction

material

Fine aggregate: Natural and manufactured: Sieve

analysis, zoning, specify gravity, bulking,

moisture content, deleterious materials.

Coarse aggregate: Natural and manufactured:

Importance of size, shape and texture. Grading of

aggregates, Sieve analysis, specific gravity,

Flakiness and elongation index, crushing, impact

and abrasion tests.

Module -2

15

19

Foundation: 10Hours L1,L2

Preliminary investigation of soil, safe bearing

capacity of soil, Function and requirements of

good foundation , types of foundation ,

introduction to spread, combined , strap, mat and

pile foundation

Masonry:

Definition and terms used in masonry. Brick

masonry, characteristics and requirements of

good brick masonry, Bonds in brick work, Header,

Stretcher, English, Flemish bond,

Stone masonry, Requirements of good stone

masonry, Classification, characteristics of

different stone masonry, Joints in stone masonry.

Types of walls; load bearing, partition walls,

cavitywalls

Module -3

Lintels and Arches: 10 hours L3

Definition, function and classification of lintels,

Balconies, chejja and canopy. Arches; Elements

and Stability of an Arch.

Floors and roofs:

Floors; Requirement of good floor, Components of

ground floor, Selection of flooring material, Laying

of Concrete, Mosaic, Marble, Granite, Tile flooring,

Cladding of tiles.

Roof;-Requirement of good roof, Types of roof,

Elements of a pitched roof, Trussed roof, King

post Truss, Queen Post Truss, Steel Truss,

Different roofing materials, R.C.C.Roof.

Module -4:

Doors, Windows and Ventilators: 10 Hours L2 L3 L5

Location of doors and windows, technical terms,

Materials for doors and windows, Paneled door,

Flush door, Collapsible door, Rolling shutter, PVC

Door, Paneled and glazed Window, Bay Window,

French window. Ventilators.

Sizes as per IS recommendations

Stairs: Definitions, technical terms and types of

stairs, Requirements of good stairs. Geometrical

design of RCC doglegged and open-well stairs.

Formwork: Introduction to form work,

scaffolding, shoring, under pinning.

Module -5

Plastering and Pointing : purpose, materials and 10 Hours L4 L5

methods of plastering and pointing, defects in

plastering-Stucco plastering, lathe plastering

Damp proofing- causes, effects and methods.

Paints- Purpose, types, ingredients and defects,

16

20

Preparation and applications of paints to new and old plastered surfaces, wooden and steel surfaces.

Course outcomes:

After a successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Select suitable materials for buildings and adopt suitable construction techniques.

2. Adopt suitable repair and maintenance work to enhance durability of buildings.

Program Objectives (as per NBA) o Engineering Knowledge. o Problem Analysis.

o Interpretation of data.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have Ten questions, each full question carrying 16 marks.

• There will be two full questions (with a maximum Three sub divisions, if necessary) from each module.

• Each full question shall cover the topics under a module.

• The students shall answer Five full questions selecting one full question from each module.

• If more than one question is answered in modules, best answer will be considered for the award of marks limiting one full question answer in each module.

Text Books:

1. Sushil Kumar “Building Materials and construction”, 20th edition, reprint 2015, Standard Publishers

2. Dr. B.C.Punmia, Ashok kumar Jain, Arun Kumar Jain, “Building Construction, Laxmi Publications (P) ltd., New Delhi.

3. Rangawala S. C. “Engineering Materials”, Charter Publishing House, Anand, India.

Reference Books:

1. S.K.Duggal, “Building Materials”, (Fourth Edition)New Age International (P) Limited, 2016

2. National Building Code(NBC) of India 3. P C Vergese, “Buliding Materials”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd 4. Building Materials and Components, CBRI, 1990, India 5. Jagadish.K.S, “Alternative Building Materials Technology”, New Age

International, 2007. 6. M. S. Shetty, “Concrete Technology”, S. Chand & Co. New Delhi.

17

21

Course Title: BUILDING MATERIALS TESTING LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III

Subject Code 15CVL37 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 42 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives:

The objectives of this course is to make students to learn:

1. Ability to apply knowledge of mathematics and engineering in calculating the mechanical properties of structural materials.

2. Ability to function on multi-disciplinary teams in the area of materials testing.

3. Ability to use the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for engineering.

4. Understanding of professional and ethical responsibility in the areas of material testing.

5. 5. Ability to communicate effectively the mechanical properties of materials.

Revised

Modules Teaching Bloom’s

Hours Taxonomy

(RBT) Level

1. Tension test on mild steel and HYSD bars. 03 Hours L2, L3, L5

2. Compression test on mild steel, cast iron and 03 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

wood.

3. Torsion test on mild steel circular sections. 03 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

4. Bending Test on Wood Under two point loading 03 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

5. Shear Test on Mild steel- single and double shear 03 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

6. Impact test on Mild Steel (Charpy & Izod) 03 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

7. Hardness tests on ferrous and non-ferrous metals 06 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

– Brinell’s, Rockwell and Vicker’s

8. Tests on Bricks and Tiles 03 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

9. Tests on Fine aggregates – Moisture content, 06 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

Specific gravity, Bulk density, Sieve analysis and

Bulking

10. Tests on Coarse aggregates – Absorption, 06 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

Moisture content, specific gravity, Bulk density

and Sieve analysis

11. Demonstration of Strain gauges and Strain 03 Hours L1, L2, L3, L5

indicators

NOTE: All tests to be carried out as per relevant latest

BIS Codes

18

22

Course outcomes:

After successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:

1. Reproduce the basic knowledge of mathematics and engineering in finding the strength in tension, compression, shear and torsion.

2. Identify, formulate and solve engineering problems of structural elements

subjected to flexure. 3. Evaluate the impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be aware of

contemporary issues regarding failure of structures due to unsuitable materials.

Program Objectives (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge. 2. Evaluation of mechanical properties of structural materials. 3. Interpretation of test results.

Question paper pattern:

• Group experiments - Tension test, compression test, torsion test and bending test.

• Individual Experiments - Remaining tests.

• Two questions are to be set - One from group experiments and the other as individual experiment.

• Instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for split up of marks to be strictly followed.

• All exercises are to be included for practical examination.

Reference Books:

1. Davis, Troxell and Hawk, “Testing of Engineering Materials”, International Student Edition – McGraw Hill Book Co. New Delhi.

2. M L Gambhir and Neha Jamwal, “Building and construction materials-Testing

and quality control”, McGraw Hill education(India)Pvt. Ltd., 2014 3. Fenner, “ Mechanical Testing of Materials”, George Newnes Ltd. London. 4. Holes K A, “Experimental Strength of Materials”, English Universities Press Ltd.

London. 5. Suryanarayana A K, “Testing of Metallic Materials”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.

New Delhi. 6. Kukreja C B, Kishore K. and Ravi Chawla “Material Testing Laboratory Manual”,

Standard Publishers & Distributors 1996. 7. Relevant IS Codes

19

23

Course Title: BASIC SURVEYING PRACTICE

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – III

Subject Code 15CVL38 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 42 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

The objectives of this course is to make students to learn:

1. Apply the basic principles of engineering surveying and measurements 2. Follow effectively field procedures required for a professional surveyor 3. Use techniques, skills and conventional surveying instruments necessary for

engineering practice..

Revised

Modules Teaching Bloom’s

Hours Taxonomy

(RBT)

Level

1. a) Measurements of distances using tape along with 03 L3, L4

horizontal planes and slopes, direct ranging.

b) Setting out perpendiculars. Use of cross staff,

optical square.

2. Obstacles in chaining and ranging – Chaining but not 03 L3

ranging, ranging but not chaining, both ranging and

chaining.

3. Measurements of bearings / directions using prismatic 03 L3

compass, setting of geometrical figures using prismatic

compass.

4. Measurement of bearings of sides of a closed traverse 03 L3

and adjustment of closing error by Bowditch method.

5. Determination of distance between two inaccessible 03 L4

points using compass and accessories

6. Determination of reduced levels of points using dumpy 03 L4

level/auto level (simple leveling)

7. Determination of reduced levels of points using dumpy 03 L4

level/auto level (differential leveling and inverted

leveling)

8. To determine the difference in elevation between two 03 L4

points using Reciprocal leveling and to determine the

collimation error

9. To conduct profile leveling, cross sectioning and block 03 L3

leveling. Plotting profile and cross sectioning in excel.

Block contour on graph paper to scale

10. Measurement of horizontal angle by repetition and 03 L4

reiteration methods and Measurement of vertical

angles using theodolite.

20

24

11. Determination of horizontal distance and vertical 03 L4

height to a base inaccessible object using theodolite by

single plane and double plane method.

12. To determine distance and elevation using 03 L3

tachometric surveying with horizontal and inclined

line of sight.

13. Closed traverse surveying using Theodolite and 03 L3

applying corrections for error of closure by transit

rule.

14. Demonstration of Minor instruments like 03 L3

Clinometer, Ceylon Ghat tracer, Box sextant, Hand

level, Planimeter, nautical sextant and Pentagraph.

Course outcomes:

After a successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Apply the basic principles of engineering surveying and for linear and angular measurements.

2. comprehend effectively field procedures required for a professional surveyor.

3. Use techniques, skills and conventional surveying instruments necessary for engineering practice.[L3,L4][PO5]

Program Objectives (as per NBA)

1. Engineering Knowledge. 2. Problem Analysis. 3. Interpretation of data.

Question paper pattern:

• All are individual experiments.

• Instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for split up of marks to be strictly followed.

• All exercises are to be included for practical examination.

Text Books:

1. B.C. Punmia, “Surveying Vol.1”, Laxmi Publications pvt. Ltd., New Delhi – 2009.

2. Kanetkar T P and S V Kulkarni , Surveying and Levelling Part I, Pune

VidyarthiGrihaPrakashan, 1988

Reference Books:

1. S.K. Duggal, “Surveying Vol.1”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi. –

2009.

2. K.R. Arora, “Surveying Vol. 1” Standard Book House, New Delhi. – 2010

21

25

1

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

M.Tech in VLSI DESIGN AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

I SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Credit Theory

Practical/Fi

eld Work/

Assignment

Dura

tion

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16ELD11 Advanced Engineering Mathematics 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

2 16EVE12 Digital VLSI Design 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

3 16EVE13 Advanced Embedded System 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

4 16EVE14 Low Power VLSI Design 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

5 16EXX15X Elective-1 3 - 3 20 80 100 3

6 16EVEL16 VLSI and ES Lab -1

3 3 20 80 100 2

7 16EVE17 Seminar on advanced topics from refereed

journals

- 3 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 19 6 18 220 480 700 22

Elective -1

16 EVE151 Digital System Design Using Verilog

16 EVE152 Nanoelectronics

16 EVE153 ASIC Design

16 ELD154 Advanced Computer Architecture

2

M.Tech in VLSI DESIGN AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

II SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credit

Theory

Practical/Fi

eld Work/

Assignment

Dura

tion

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks Total

Marks

1 16EVE21

Design of Analog and Mixed mode VLSI

Circuits 4 - 3 20 80 100

4

2 16EVE22 VLSI Testing 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

3 16EVE23 Advances in VLSI Design 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

4 16EVE24 Real Time Operating System 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

5 16EXX25X Elective –2 3 - 3 20 80 100 3

6 16EVEL26 VLSI and ES Lab -2 3 3 20 80 100 2

7 16EVE27 Seminar on Advanced topics from

refereed journals

- 3 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 19 6 18 220 480 700 22

Elective -2

16EVE251 System Verilog

16EVE252 VLSI Design for Signal processing

16ELD253 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems

16EVE254 SoC Design

3

M.Tech in VLSI DESIGN AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

III SEMESTER: Internship

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credit

Theory

Practical/Fi

eld Work/

Assignment

Dura

tion

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16EVE31 Seminar / Presentation on Internship (After

8 weeks from the date of commencement)

- - - 25 - 25

20 2 16EVE32 Report on Internship - - - 25 - 25

3 16EVE33 Evaluation and Viva-Voce of Internship - - - - 50 50

4 16EVE34 Evaluation of Project phase -1 - - - 50 - 50 1

TOTAL - - - 100 50 150 21

4

M.Tech. in VLSI DESIGN AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

IV SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credit

Theory

Practical/Fi

eld Work/

Assignment

Dura

tion

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16ELD41 Synthesis and Optimization of Digital

Circuits

4 - 3 20 80 100 4

2 16EXX42X Elective-3 3 - 3 20 80 100 3

3 16EVE43 Evaluation of Project phase -2 - - - 50 - 50 3

4 16EVE44 Evaluation of Project and Viva-Voce - - - - 100+100 200 10

TOTAL - - 6 90 360 450 20

Elective -3

16EVE421 CMOS RF Circuit Design

16ECS422 Advances in Image Processing

16EVE423 High Speed VLSI Design

16ELD424 Reconfigurable Computing

Note:

1. Project Phase-1: 6-week duration shall be carried out between 2nd

and 3rd

Semester vacation. Candidates in consultation with the guide shall carry out literature survey/ visit

industries to finalize the topic of Project.

2. Project Phase-2: 16-week duration during 4th

semester. Evaluation shall be done by the committee constituted comprising of HoD as Chairman, Guide and Senior faculty of the

department.

3. Project Evaluation: Evaluation shall be taken up at the end of 4th

semester. Project work evaluation and Viva-Voce examination shall be conducted.

a. Internal Examiner shall carry out the evaluation for 100 marks.

b. External Examiner shall carry out the evaluation for 100 marks.

c .The average of marks allotted by the internal and external examiner shall be the final marks of the project evaluation.

d. Viva-Voce examination of Project work shall be conducted jointly by Internal and External examiner for 100 marks.

5

M.Tech-VLSI & ES-2016-FIRST SEMESTER SYLLABUS

ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16ELD11 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Acquaint with principles of linear algebra, calculus of variations, probability

theory and random process. Apply the knowledge of linear algebra, calculus of variations, probability theory

and random process in the applications of electronics and communication engineering sciences.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Linear Algebra-I Introduction to vector spaces and sub-spaces, definitions, illustrative examples and simple problems. Linearly independent and dependent vectors-definition and problems. Basis vectors, dimension of a vector space. Linear transformations- definition, properties and problems. Rank-Nullity theorem(without proof). Matrix form of linear transformations-Illustrative examples.(Text 1 & Ref. 1)

L1,L2

Module -2

Linear Algebra-II Computation of Eigen values and Eigen vectors of real symmetric matrices-Given‘s method. Orthogonal vectors and orthogonal bases. Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process. QR decomposition, singular value decomposition, least square approximations.(Text 1 & Ref. 1)

L1,L2

Module -3

Calculus of Variations Concept of functional-Eulers equation. functional dependent on first and higher order derivatives, functional on several dependent variables. Isoperimetric problems-variation problems with moving boundaries.(Text 2 & Ref. 2)

L1,L2

Module -4

6

Probability Theory Review of basic probability theory. Definitions of random variables and probability distributions, probability mass and density functions, expectation, moments, central moments, characteristic functions, probability generating and moment generating functions-illustrations. Binomial, Poisson, Exponential, Gaussian and Rayleigh distributions-examples.(Text 3 & Ref. 3)

L1,L2

Module -5

Joint probability distributions Definition and properties of CDF, PDF, PMF, conditional distributions. Expectation, covariance and correlation. Independent random variables. Statement of central limit theorem-Illustrative examples. Random process- Classification, stationary and ergodic random process. Auto correlation function-properties, Gaussian random process.(Text 3 & Ref. 3)

L1,L2

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Understand vector spaces, basis, linear transformations and the process of obtaining matrix of linear transformations arising in magnification and rotation of images.

Apply the techniques of QR and singular value decomposition for data compression, least square approximation in solving inconsistent linear systems.

Utilize the concepts of functionals and their variations in the applications of communication systems, decision theory, synthesis and optimization of digital circuits.

Learn the idea of random variables (discrete/continuous) and probability distributions in analyzing the probability models arising in control systems and system communications.

Apply the idea of joint probability distributions and the role of parameter-dependent

random variables in random process.

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks. · Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module · The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from

each module.

7

Text Books:

1. David C.Lay, Steven R.Lay and J.J.McDonald: Linear Algebra and its Applications, 5th Edition, Pearson Education Ltd., 2015.

2. E. Kreyszig, ―Advanced Engineering Mathematics‖, 10th edition, Wiley, 2015. 3. Scott L.Miller, Donald G. Childers: ―Probability and Random Process with

application to Signal Processing‖, Elsevier Academic Press, 2nd Edition,2013.

Reference books: 1. Richard Bronson: ―Schaum‘s Outlines of Theory and Problems of Matrix

Operations‖, McGraw-Hill, 1988. 2. Elsgolts, L.: ‖Differential Equations and Calculus of Variations‖, MIR Publications,

3rd Edition, 1977. 3. T.Veerarajan: ―Probability, Statistics and Random Process―, 3rd Edition, Tata

McGraw Hill Co.,2008. Web links:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineId=111 2. http://www.class-central.com/subject/math(MOOCs) 3. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/ 4. www.wolfram.com

8

DIGITAL VLSI DESIGN [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER –I

Subject Code 16EVE12 IA Marks 20

Number 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture

50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Explain VLSI Design Methodologies

Learn Static and Dynamic operation principles, analysis and design of

inverter circuit.

Infer state of the art Semiconductors Memory circuits.

Outline the comprehensive coverage of Methodologies and Design practice

that are used to reduce the Power Dissipation of large scale digital circuits.

Illustrate VLSI and ASIC design.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s Taxono

my (RBT) Level

Module -1 MOS Transistor: The Metal Oxide Semiconductor (MOS) Structure,

The MOS System under External Bias, Structure and Operation of

MOS Transistor, MOSFET Current-Voltage Characteristics, MOSFET

Scaling and Small-Geometry Effects.

MOS Inverters-Static Characteristics: Introduction, Resistive-Load

Inverter, Inverters with n_Type MOSFET Load.

L1, L2

Module -2

MOS Inverters-Static Characteristics: CMOS Inverter. MOS Inverters: Switching Characteristics and Interconnect Effects: Introduction, Delay-Time Definition, Calculation of Delay Times, Inverter Design with Delay Constraints, Estimation of Interconnect Parasitics, Calculation of Interconnect Delay, Switching Power Dissipation of CMOS Inverters.

L2, L3

Module -3

9

Semiconductor Memories: Introduction, Dynamic Random Access

Memory (DRAM), Static Random Access Memory (SRAM), Nonvolatile

Memory, Flash Memory, Ferroelectric Random Access Memory

(FRAM).

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

Dynamic Logic Circuits: Introduction, Basic Principles of Pass

Transistor Circuits, Voltage Bootstrapping, Synchronous Dynamic

Circuit Techniques, Dynamic CMOS Circuit Techniques, High

Performance Dynamic CMOS Circuits.

BiCMOS Logic Circuits: Introduction, Bipolar Junction Transistor

(BJT): Structure and Operation, Dynamic Behavior of BJTs, Basic

BiCMOS Circuits: Static Behavior, Switching Delay in BiCMOS Logic

Circuits, BiCMOS Applications.

L1,L2, L3

Module -5

Chip Input and Output (I/O) Circuits: Introduction, ESD

Protection, Input Circuits, Output Circuits and L(di/dt) Noise, On-

Chip Clock Generation and Distribution, Latch-Up and Its

Prevention.

Design for Manufacturability: Introduction, Process Variations,

Basic Concepts and Definitions, Design of Experiments and

Performance Modeling.

L2, L3

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

1. Analyse issues of On-chip interconnect Modelling and Interconnect delay

calculation.

2. Analyse the Switching Characteristics in Digital Integrated Circuits.

3. Use the Dynamic Logic circuits in state-of-the-art VLSI chips.

4. Study critical issues such as ESD protection, Clock distribution, Clock

buffering, and Latch phenomenon

5. Use Bipolar and Bi-CMOS circuits in very high speed design.

Question Paper Pattern · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

· Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions.

· There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

· The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Book: Sung Mo Kang & Yosuf Leblebici, ―CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits: Analysis and Design‖, Tata McGraw-Hill, Third Edition.

10

Reference Books: 1. Neil Weste and K. Eshragian, ―Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System

Perspective‖, Second Edition, Pearson Education (Asia) Pvt. Ltd. 2000. 2. Wayne, Wolf, ―Modern VLSI Design: System on Silicon‖ Prentice Hall

PTR/Pearson Education, Second Edition, 1998. 3. Douglas A Pucknell & Kamran Eshragian, ―Basic VLSI Design‖ PHI 3rd

Edition (original Edition – 1994).

11

ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEM [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16EVE13 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Understand the basic hardware components and their selection method based on the

characteristics and attributes of an embedded system.

Describe the hardware software co-design and firmware design approaches

Explain the architectural features of ARM CORTEX M3, a 32 bit microcontroller

including memory map, interrupts and exceptions.

Program ARM CORTEX M3 using the various instructions, for different applications.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1

Embedded System: Embedded vs General computing system, classification, application and purpose of ES. Core of an Embedded System, Memory, Sensors, Actuators, LED, Opto coupler, Communication Interface, Reset circuits, RTC, WDT, Characteristics and Quality Attributes of Embedded Systems (Text 1: Selected Topics from Ch -1, 2, 3).

L1, L2, L3

Module -2

Hardware Software Co-Design, embedded firmware design approaches, computational models, embedded firmware development languages, Integration and testing of Embedded Hardware and firmware, Components in embedded system development environment (IDE), Files generated during compilation, simulators, emulators and debugging (Text 1: Selected Topics From Ch-7, 9, 12, 13).

L1, L2, L3

12

Module -3

ARM-32 bit Microcontroller: Thumb-2 technology and applications of ARM, Architecture of ARM Cortex M3, Various Units in the architecture, General Purpose Registers, Special Registers, exceptions, interrupts, stack operation, reset sequence (Text 2: Ch 1, 2, 3)

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

Instruction Sets: Assembly basics, Instruction list and description, useful instructions, Memory Systems, Memory maps, Cortex M3 implementation overview, pipeline and bus interface (Text 2: Ch-4, 5, 6)

L1, L2, L3

Module -5

Exceptions, Nested Vector interrupt controller design, Systick Timer, Cortex-M3 Programming using assembly and C language, CMSIS (Text 2: Ch-7, 8, 10)

L1, L2, L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Understand the basic hardware components and their selection method based on the

characteristics and attributes of an embedded system.

Explain the hardware software co-design and firmware design approaches.

Acquire the knowledge of the architectural features of ARM CORTEX M3, a 32 bit

microcontroller including memory map, interrupts and exceptions.

Apply the knowledge gained for Programming ARM CORTEX M3 for different

applications.

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

· Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

· The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. K. V. Shibu, "Introduction to embedded systems", TMH education Pvt. Ltd. 2009. 2. Joseph Yiu, ―The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3‖, 2ndedn, Newnes,

(Elsevier), 2010.

Reference Book: James K. Peckol, "Embedded systems- A contemporary design tool", John Wiley, 2008.

13

LOW POWER VLSI DESIGN [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER –I

Subject Code 16EVE14 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Know the basics and advanced techniques in low power design which is a hot topic in today’s market where the power plays a major role.

Describe the various power reduction and the power estimation methods. Explain power dissipation at all layers of design hierarchy from technology, circuit,

logic, architecture and system Apply State-of-the art approaches to power estimation and reduction. Practice the low power techniques using current generation design style and

process technology

Modules

Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy (RBT) Module -1

Introduction: Need for low power VLSI chips, charging and discharging capacitance, short

circuit current in CMOS leakage current, static current, basic principles of low power

design, low power figure of merits.

Simulation power analysis: SPICE circuit simulation, discrete transistor modeling and

analysis, gate level logic simulation, architecture level analysis, data correlation analysis in

DSP systems, Monte Carlo simulation. (Text 1)

L1, L2

Module -2

Probabilistic power analysis: Random logic signals, probability & frequency, probabilistic

power analysis techniques, signal entropy.

Circuit: Transistor and gate sizing, equivalent pin ordering, network restructuring and

reorganization, special latches and flip flops, low power digital cell library, adjustable

device threshold voltage. (Text 1)

L1, L2, L3

Module -3

Logic: Gate reorganization, signal gating, logic encoding, state machine encoding, pre-

computation logic (Text 1).

Low power Clock Distribution: Power dissipation in clock distribution, single driver Vs

distributed buffers, Zero skew Vs tolerable skew, chip & package co design of clock

network (Text 2).

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

14

Low power Architecture & Systems: Power & performance management, switching

activity reduction, parallel architecture with voltage reduction, flow graph transformation

(Text 1).

Low power arithmetic components: Introduction, circuit design style, adders,

multipliers, division (Text 2).

L1- L4

Module -5 Low power memory design: Introduction, sources and reductions of power dissipation in

memory subsystem, sources of power dissipation in DRAM and SRAM (Text 2).

Algorithm & Architectural Level Methodologies: Introduction, design flow,

Algorithmic level analysis & optimization, Architectural level estimation & synthesis

(Text 2).

Advanced Techniques: Adiabatic computation, pass transistor, Asynchronous circuits

(Text 1).

L1-L4

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Identify the sources of power dissipation in CMOS circuits.

Perform power analysis using simulation based approaches and probabilistic analysis.

Use optimization and trade-off techniques that involve power dissipation of digital circuits.

Make the power design a reality by making power dimension an integral part of the design process

Use practical low power design techniques and their analysis at various levels of design abstraction and

analyse how these are being captured in the latest design automation environments.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions.

There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

· The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Gary K. Yeap, “Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design”, Kluwer Academic, 1998. 2. Jan M.Rabaey, Massoud Pedram, “Low Power Design Methodologies”, Kluwer Academic, 2010.

Reference Books:

1. Kaushik Roy, Sharat Prasad, “Low-Power CMOS VLSI Circuit Design” Wiley, 2000

2. A.P.Chandrasekaran and R.W.Broadersen, “Low power digital CMOS design”, Kluwer Academic,1995.

3. A Bellamour and M I Elmasri, “ Low power VLSI CMOS circuit design”, Kluwer Academic,1995.

15

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN USING VERILOG [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16EVE151 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

40 (08 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Understand the concepts of Verilog Language

Design the digital systems as an activity in a larger systems design context.

Study the design and operation of semiconductor memories frequently used in application specific digital system.

Inspect how effectively IC‘s are embedded in package and assembled in PCB‘s for different application

Design and diagnosis of processors and I/O controllers they can be used in embedded systems

Modules

Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy (RBT) Level Module -1

Introduction and Methodology: Digital Systems and Embedded Systems, Binary representation and Circuit Elements, Real-World Circuits, Models, Design Methodology.

L1, L2

Module -2

Number Basics: Unsigned and Signed Integers, Fixed and Floating-point Numbers. Sequential Basics: Storage elements, Counters, Sequential Data paths and Control, Clocked Synchronous Timing Methodology.

L1, L2

Module -3

Memories: Concepts, Memory Types, Error Detection and Correction. Implementation Fabrics: ICs, PLDs, Packaging and Circuit Boards, Interconnection and Signal Integrity.

L1, L2

Module -4

Processor Basics: Embedded Computer Organization, Instruction and Data, Interfacing with memory. I/O interfacing: I/O devices, I/O controllers, Parallel Buses, Serial Transmission, I/O software.

L2, L3

Module -5

16

Accelerators: Concepts, case study, Verification of accelerators. Design Methodology: Design flow, Design optimization, Design for test.

L2, L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Design embedded systems, using small microcontrollers, larger CPUs/DSPs, or hard or soft processor cores.

Design the combinational circuits using discrete gates and programmable logic devices.

Describe Verilog model for sequential circuits and test pattern generation

Explore the different types of semiconductor memories and their usage for specific chip design

Synthesis different types of processor and I/O controllers that are used in embedded system design

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks. · Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the

module · The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question

from each module.

Text Book: Peter J. Ashenden, ―Digital Design: An Embedded Systems Approach Using VERILOG‖, Elesvier, 2010.

Reference Book: Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, Second Edition by Samir Palnitkar.

17

NANOELECTRONICS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)

scheme] SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16EVE152 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

03 Exam Marks

80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

40 (08 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Enhance basic engineering science and technological knowledge of nanoelectronics.

Explain basics of top-down and bottom-up fabrication process, devices and systems.

Describe technologies involved in modern day electronic devices.

Appreciate the complexities in scaling down the electronic devices in the future.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Introduction: Overview of nanoscience and engineering. Development milestones in microfabrication and electronic industry. Moores‘ law and continued miniaturization, Classification of Nanostructures, Electronic properties of atoms and solids: Isolated atom, Bonding between atoms, Giant molecular solids, Free electron models and energy bands, crystalline solids, Periodicity of crystal lattices, Electronic conduction, effects of nanometer length scale, Fabrication methods: Top down processes, Bottom up processes methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials, ordering of nanosystems (Text 1).

L1, L2

Module -2

Characterization: Classification, Microscopic techniques, Field ion microscopy, scanning probe techniques, diffraction techniques: bulk and surface diffraction techniques (Text1).

L1,L2,L3

Module -3

18

Characterization: spectroscopy techniques: photon, radiofrequency, electron, surface analysis and dept profiling: electron, mass, Ion beam, Reflectrometry, Techniques for property measurement: mechanical, electron, magnetic, thermal properties. Inorganic semiconductor nanostructures: overview of semiconductor physics. Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures: quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots, super-lattices, band offsets, electronic density of states (Text1).

L1-L3

Module -4

Fabrication techniques: requirements of ideal semiconductor, epitaxial growth of quantum wells, lithography and etching, cleaved-edge over growth, growth of vicinal substrates, strain induced dots and wires, electrostatically induced dots and wires, Quantum well width fluctuations, thermally annealed quantum

wells, semiconductor nanocrystals, collidal quantum dots, self-assembly techniques. Physical processes: modulation doping, quantum hall effect, resonant tunneling, charging effects, ballistic carrier transport, Inter band absorption, intra band absorption, Light emission processes, phonon bottleneck, quantum confined stark effect, nonlinear effects, coherence and dephasing, characterization of semiconductor nanostructures: optical electrical and structural (Text1).

L1-L3

Module -5

Methods of measuring properties: atomic, crystollography, microscopy, spectroscopy (Text 2). Applications: Injection lasers, quantum cascade lasers, single-photon sources, biological tagging, optical memories, coulomb blockade devices, photonic structures, QWIP‘s, NEMS, MEMS (Text 1).

L1-L3

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Know the principles behind Nanoscience engineering and Nanoelectronics.

Apply the knowledge to prepare and characterize nanomaterials.

Know the effect of particles size on mechanical, thermal, optical and electrical properties of nanomaterials.

Design the process flow required to fabricate state of the art transistor technology.

Analyze the requirements for new materials and device structure in the future technologies.

Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions.

There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

19

Text Books: 1. Ed Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, ―Nanoscale Science and

Technology‖, John Wiley, 2007. 2. Charles P Poole, Jr, Frank J Owens, ―Introduction to Nanotechnology‖,

John Wiley, Copyright 2006, Reprint 2011. Reference Book: Ed William A Goddard III, Donald W Brenner, Sergey E. Lyshevski, Gerald J Iafrate, ―Hand Book of Nanoscience Engineering and Technology‖, CRC press, 2003.

20

ASIC DESIGN [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16EVE153 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80 Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Explain ASIC methodologies and programmable logic cells to implement a function on IC.

Analyse back-end physical design flow, including partitioning, floor-planning, placement, and routing.

Gain sufficient theoretical knowledge for carrying out FPGA and ASIC designs.

Design CAD algorithms and explain how these concepts interact in ASIC design.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT)Level

Module -1 Introduction to ASICs, Full custom, Semi-custom and Programmable ASICs, ASIC Design flow, ASIC cell libraries. CMOS Logic: Datapath Logic Cells: Data Path Elements, Adders: Carry skip, Carry bypass, Carry save, Carry select, Conditional sum, Multiplier (Booth encoding), Data path Operators, I/O cells.

L1,L2

Module -2

ASIC Library Design: Logical effort: Predicting Delay, Logical area and logical efficiency, Logical paths, Multi stage cells, Optimum delay and number of stages. Programmable ASIC Logic Cells: MUX as Boolean function generators, Actel ACT: ACT 1, ACT 2 and ACT 3 Logic Modules, Xilinx LCA: XC3000 CLB, Altera FLEX and MAX.

L1-L3

Module -3 Programmable ASIC I/O Cells: Xilinx and Altera I/O Block. Low-level design entry: Schematic entry: Hierarchical design, Netlist screener. ASIC Construction: Physical Design, CAD Tools. Partitioning: Goals and objectives, Constructive Partitioning, Iterative Partitioning Improvement, KL, FM and Look Ahead algorithms.

L1-L4

Module -4 Floor planning and placement: Goals and objectives, Floor planning tools, Channel definition, I/O and Power planning and Clock planning. Placement: Goals and Objectives, Min-cut Placement algorithm, Iterative Placement Improvement, Physical Design Flow.

L1-L3

21

Module -5

Routing: Global Routing: Goals and objectives, Global Routing Methods, Back-annotation. Detailed Routing: Goals and objectives, Measurement of Channel Density, Left-Edge and Area-Routing Algorithms. Special Routing, Circuit extraction and DRC.

L1-L3

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

Describe the concepts of ASIC design methodology, data path elements, logical effort and FPGA architectures.

Analyze the design of FPGAs and ASICs suitable for specific tasks, perform design entry and explain the physical design flow.

Design data path elements for ASIC cell libraries and compute optimum path delay.

Create floor plan including partition and routing with the use of CAD algorithms. Question paper pattern:

The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions.

There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Book: Michael John Sebastian Smith, ―Application - Specific Integrated Circuits‖ Addison-Wesley Professional; 2005.

Reference Books: 1. Neil H.E. Weste, David Harris, and Ayan Banerjee, ―CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits

and Systems Perspective‖, 3rd edition, Addison Wesley/ Pearson education, 2011. 2. Vikram Arkalgud Chandrasetty, ―VLSI Design: A Practical Guide for FPGA and ASIC

Implementations‖, Springer, 2011, ISBN: 978-1-4614-1119-2. 3. Rakesh Chadha, Bhasker J., ―An ASIC Low Power Primer‖, Springer, ISBN: 978-1-

4614-4270-7.

22

ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16ELD154 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to: Understand the basic concepts for parallel processing Analyze program partitioning and flow mechanisms Apply pipelining concept for the performance evaluation Learn the advanced processor architectures for suitable applications

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1

Parallel Computer Models: Classification of parallel computers, Multiprocessors and multicomputers, Multivector and SIMD computers. Program and Network Properties, Conditions of parallelism, Data and resource Dependences, Hardware and software parallelism. (Text 1)

L2, L3, L4

Module -2

Program partitioning and scheduling, Grain Size and latency, Program flow mechanisms, Control flow versus data flow, Data flow Architecture, Demand driven mechanisms, Comparisons of flow mechanisms, Principles of Scalable Performance, Performance Metrics and Measures, Parallel Processing Applications, Speedup Performance Laws, Scalability Analysis and Approaches. (Text 1)

L2, L3, L4

Module -3

Advanced Processors: Advanced processor technology, Instruction-set Architectures, CISC Scalar Processors, RISC Scalar Processors, Superscalar Processors, VLIW Architectures, Pipelining, Linear pipeline processor, nonlinear pipeline processor, Instruction pipeline design. (Text 1)

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

Mechanisms for instruction pipelining, Dynamic instruction scheduling, Branch Handling techniques, branch prediction, Arithmetic Pipeline Design, Computer arithmetic principles, Static Arithmetic pipeline, Multifunctional arithmetic pipelines. (Text 1)

L2, L3, L4

Module -5

23

Multithread and Dataflow Architecture: Principles of Multithreading, Scalable and Multithreaded Architecture, Dataflow Architecture, Symmetric shared memory architecture, distributed shared memory architecture. (Text 1 & 2)

L1, L2, L3

Course outcomes: At the end of this course, the students will be able to: Understand the basic concepts for parallel processing Analyze program partitioning and flow mechanisms Apply pipelining concept for the performance evaluation Learn the advanced processor architectures for suitable applications

Question paper pattern:

· The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

· Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the

module

· The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Kai Hwang, ―Advanced computer architecture‖, TMH. 2007. 2. Kai Hwang and Zu, ―Scalable Parallel Computers Architecture‖, MGH, 2008.

Reference Books:

1. M.J. Flynn, ―Computer Architecture, Pipelined and Parallel Processor Design‖, Narosa Publishing, 2002.

2. D.A.Patterson, J.L.Hennessy, ―Computer Architecture: A quantitative approach‖, Morgan Kauffmann feb,2002.

24

VLSI and ES LAB - 1

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Laboratory Code 16EVEL16 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture

Hours/Week

01Hr Tutorial (Instructions) + 02 Hours Laboratory

Exam

Marks

80

Exam

Hours

03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

Learn Verilog Code Programming for the design of digital circuits

Use FPGA/CPLD board and Logic Analyzer or Chipscope to verify the results

Learn Assembly language programming for different applications using ARM- Cortex M3 Kit and Keil uVision- 4 tool.

Learn C language programming for different applications using ARM- Cortex M3 Kit and Keil uVision-4 tool.

Laboratory Experiments:

Revised

Bloom’s Taxonomy

1) Digital Design Experiments: Using Verilog code and any Compiler. Download code to FPGA/CPLD board and verify the output using Logic Analyzer or Chipscope a) Design and verify an 8 to 3 programmable priority encoder b) Design and verify 3-bit Arbitrary Counter and repeat the

given sequence c) Design and Verify BCD adder and subtractor d) Design and verify a sequential block to generate a sequence

(say 11101) using appropriate FSM. e) Design and verify 8 bit Ripple carry adder and Carry skip

adder. f) Design and verify a Linear feedback shift register based on a

given polynomial expression g) Design and verify the following 8 bit multipliers. Also report

on area delay trade-off i) Serial Multiplier ii) Parallel Multiplier

h) Design and verify a parameterized FIFO i) Design and verify register file which has 32-entry 3-ports

having explicit address decoder. The ports are dedicated for read and write and will take one clock cycle for read or write operation

L2,L3,L4

25

2) ARM Cortex M3 Programs: (Programming to be done using Keil uVision 4 and download the program on to a M3 evaluation board such as NXP LPC1768 or ATMEL ATSAM3U) a) Write an Assembly language program to calculate the sum

and display the result for the addition of first ten numbers. SUM = 10+9+8+.........+1

b) Write a Assembly language program to link multiple object files and link them together

c) Write an Assembly language program to store data in RAM d) Write a C program to Output the ―Hello World‖ message

using UART e) Write a C program to Design a Stopwatch using interrupts

L2,L3,L4

Course outcomes: On the completion of this laboratory course, the students will be able to:

Develop Verilog Code for the design of digital circuits

Use FPGA/CPLD board and Logic Analyzer or Chipscope to verify the results

Develop Assembly language programs for different applications using ARM- Cortex M3 Kit and Keil uVision-4 tool.

Develop C language programs for different applications using ARM-Cortex M3 Kit and Keil uVision-4 tool Conduct of Practical Examination:

All laboratory experiments are to be included for practical examination. For examination, two questions using different tool to be set. Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot.

Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for breakup of marks.

Change of experiment is allowed only once and Marks allotted to the procedure part to be made zero.

1

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION 2016-17

M.Tech. in Communication Systems, Digital Communication & Networking, Digital Communication Engineering, Digital Electronics & Communication

Systems, Digital Electronics & Communication

(Common to all 5 Programmes)

I SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credit

Theory

Practical/Fi

eld Work/

Assignment

Dura

tion

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16ELD11 Advanced Engineering Mathematics 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

2 16ECS12 Antenna Theory and Design 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

3 16EVE13 Advanced Embedded System

4 - 3 20 80 100 4

4 16ECS14 Advanced Digital Communication 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

5 16EXX15X Elective-1 3 - 3 20 80 100 3

6 16ECSL16 Advanced Communication Lab 3 3 20 80 100 2

7 16ECS17 Seminar on advanced topics from

refereed journals - 3 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 19 6 18 220 480 700 22

Elective-1

16ECS151 Advanced Computer Networks 16EVE152 Nanoelectronics 16ECS153 Optical Communication and Networking 16ECS154 Simulation, Modelling and Analysis

2

M.Tech. in Communication Systems, Digital Communication & Networking, Digital Communication Engineering, Digital Electronics & Communication

Systems, Digital Electronics & Communication

(Common to all 5 Programmes)

II SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credit

Theory

Practical/Field

Work/

Assignment

Duratio

n

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16ECS21 Advanced DSP

4 - 3 20 80 100 4

2 16ECS22 Error Control Coding

4 - 3 20 80 100 4

3 16ECS23 Wireless Communication 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

4 16ECS24 RF and Microwave Circuit Design 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

5 16EXX25X Elective-2 3 - 3 20 80 100 3

6 16ECSL26 Advanced DSP Lab 3 3 20 80 100 2

7 16ECS27 Seminar on advanced topics from refereed journals

- 3 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 19 6 18 220 480 700 22

Elective-2

16ELD251 Automotive Electronics 16ECS252 Multimedia Over Communication links 16ELD253 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 16ECS254 Cryptography and Network Security

3

M.Tech. in Communication Systems, Digital Communication & Networking, Digital Communication Engineering, Digital Electronics & Communication

Systems, Digital Electronics & Communication

(Common to all 5 Programmes)

III SEMESTER: Internship

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credit

Theory

Practical/Fi

eld Work/

Assignment

Dura

tion

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16ECS31 Seminar / Presentation on Internship (After 8 weeks from the date of commencement)

- - - 25 - 25

20 2 16ECS32 Report on Internship - - - 25 - 25

3 16ECS33 Evaluation and Viva-Voce of Internship - - - - 50 50

4 16ECS34 Evaluation of Project phase -1 - - - 50 - 50 1

TOTAL - - - 100 50 150 21

4

M.Tech. in Communication Systems, Digital Communication & Networking, Digital Communication Engineering, Digital Electronics & Communication

Systems, Digital Electronics & Communication

(Common to all 5 Programmes)

IV SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination Credit

Theory

Practical/Fi

eld Work/

Assignment

Dura

tion

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16ECS41 Wireless Broadband LTE 4G 4 - 3 20 80 100 4

2 16EXX42X Elective-3 3 - 3 20 80 100 3

3 16ECS43 Evaluation of Project phase -2 - - - 50 - 50 3

4 16ECS44 Evaluation of Project and Viva-Voce - - - - 100+100 200 10

TOTAL - - 6 90 360 450 20

Elective-3

16EVE421 CMOS RF Circuit Design 16ECS422 Advances in Image Processing 16ECS423 Communication System Design using DSP Algorithms 16ECS424 Real Time Systems

Note:

1. Project Phase-1: 6-week duration shall be carried out between 2nd and 3rd Semester vacation. Candidates in consultation with the guide shall carry out literature survey/ visit industries to finalize the topic of Project. 2. Project Phase-2: 16-week duration during 4th semester. Evaluation shall be done by the committee constituted comprising of HoD as Chairman, Guide and Senior faculty of the department. 3. Project Evaluation: Evaluation shall be taken up at the end of 4thsemester. Project work evaluation and Viva-Voce examination shall be conducted. a. Internal Examiner shall carry out the evaluation for 100 marks.

b. External Examiner shall carry out the evaluation for 100 marks. c .The average of marks allotted by the internal and external examiner shall be the final marks of the project evaluation. d. Viva-Voce examination of Project work shall be conducted jointly by Internal and External examiner for 100 marks.

5

M.Tech-Commn Stream-2016-FIRST SEMESTER SYLLABUS

ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16ELD11 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Acquaint with principles of linear algebra, calculus of variations, probability theory

and random process. • Apply the knowledge of linear algebra, calculus of variations, probability theory and

random process in the applications of electronics and communication engineering sciences.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Linear Algebra-I Introduction to vector spaces and sub-spaces, definitions, illustrative examples and simple problems. Linearly independent and dependent vectors-definition and problems. Basis vectors, dimension of a vector space. Linear transformations- definition, properties and problems. Rank-Nullity theorem(without proof). Matrix form of linear transformations-Illustrative examples.(Text 1 & Ref. 1)

L1,L2

Module -2

Linear Algebra-II Computation of Eigen values and Eigen vectors of real symmetric matrices-Given’s method. Orthogonal vectors and orthogonal bases. Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process. QR decomposition, singular value decomposition, least square approximations.(Text 1 & Ref. 1)

L1,L2

Module -3

Calculus of Variations Concept of functional-Eulers equation. functional dependent on first and higher order derivatives, functional on several dependent variables. Isoperimetric problems-variation problems with moving boundaries.(Text 2 & Ref. 2)

L1,L2

Module -4

6

Probability Theory Review of basic probability theory. Definitions of random variables and probability distributions, probability mass and density functions, expectation, moments, central moments, characteristic functions, probability generating and moment generating functions-illustrations. Binomial, Poisson, Exponential, Gaussian and Rayleigh distributions-examples.(Text 3 & Ref. 3)

L1,L2

Module -5

Joint probability distributions Definition and properties of CDF, PDF, PMF, conditional distributions. Expectation, covariance and correlation. Independent random variables. Statement of central limit theorem-Illustrative examples. Random process- Classification, stationary and ergodic random process. Auto correlation function-properties, Gaussian random process.(Text 3 & Ref. 3)

L1,L2

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Understand vector spaces, basis, linear transformations and the process of obtaining matrix of linear transformations arising in magnification and rotation of images.

• Apply the techniques of QR and singular value decomposition for data compression, least square approximation in solving inconsistent linear systems.

• Utilize the concepts of functionals and their variations in the applications of communication systems, decision theory, synthesis and optimization of digital circuits.

• Learn the idea of random variables (discrete/continuous) and probability distributions in analyzing the probability models arising in control systems and system communications.

• Apply the idea of joint probability distributions and the role of parameter-dependent

random variables in random process.

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks. · Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module · The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from

each module.

7

Text Books: 1. David C.Lay, Steven R.Lay and J.J.McDonald: Linear Algebra and its Applications,

5th Edition, Pearson Education Ltd., 2015. 2. E. Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10th edition, Wiley, 2015. 3. Scott L.Miller, Donald G.Childers: “Probability and Random Process with application to

Signal Processing”, Elsevier Academic Press, 2ndEdition,2013.

Reference books: 1. Richard Bronson: “Schaum’s Outlines of Theory and Problems of Matrix Operations”,

McGraw-Hill, 1988. 2. Elsgolts L.: ”Differential Equations and Calculus of Variations”, MIR Publications, 3rd

Edition, 1977. 3. T.Veerarajan: “Probability, Statistics and Random Process“, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw

Hill Co.,2008. Web links:

1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineId=111 2. http://www.class-central.com/subject/math(MOOCs) 3. http://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/ 4. www.wolfram.com

8

ANTENNA THEORY AND DESIGN

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16ECS12 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module) Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Introduce and discuss different types of Antennas, various terminologies,

excitations.

• Study different types of Arrays, Pattern-multiplication, Feeding techniques.

• Calculate gain of aperture antennas, Reflector antennas and analyze general feed

model.

• Define, describe, and illustrate principle behind antenna synthesis.

• Introduction of Method of moments, Pocklington’s integral equation, Source modeling.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Antenna Fundamentals and Definitions: Radiation Mechanisms, Overview, EM Fundamentals, Solution of Maxwell's Equations for Radiation Problems, Ideal Dipole, Radiation patterns, Directivity and Gain, Antenna impedance, Radiation efficiency, Antenna polarization.

L1,L2

Module -2

Arrays: Array factor for linear arrays, Uniformly excited equally spaced linear arrays, Pattern multiplication, Directivity of linear arrays, Non-uniformly excited equally spaced linear arrays, Mutual coupling. Antenna Synthesis: Formulation of the synthesis problem, Synthesis principles, Line sources shaped beam synthesis, Linear array shaped beam synthesis, Fourier series, Woodward - Lawson sampling method,

Comparison of shaped beam synthesis methods, low side lobe narrow main beam synthesis methods, Dolph Chebyshev linear array, Taylor line source method.

L1,L2,L3, L4

Module -3

Resonant Antennas: Wires and Patches, Dipole antenna, Yagi-Uda antennas, Micro-strip antenna.

Broadband antennas: Traveling wave antennas Helical antennas, Biconical antennas, Sleeve antennas, and Principles of frequency independent antennas, Spiral antennas, and Log - periodic antennas.

L1,L2,L3, L4

9

Module -4

Aperture antennas: Techniques for evaluating gain, Reflector antennas- Parabolic reflector antenna principles, Axi-symmetric parabolic reflector antenna, Offset parabolic reflectors, Dual reflector antennas, Gain calculations for reflector antennas, Feed antennas for reflectors, Field representations, Matching the feed to the reflector, General feed model, Feed antennas used in practice.

L1,L2,L3, L4

Module -5

CEM for antennas: The method of moments: Introduction of the methods moments, Pocklington's integral equation, Integral equation and Kirchhoff’s networking equations, Source modeling weighted residual formulations and computational consideration, Calculation of antenna and scatter characteristics.

L1,L2

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Classify different types of antennas

• Define and illustrate various types of array antennas

• Design antennas like Yagi-Uda, Helical antennas and other broad band antennas

• Describe different antenna synthesis methods

• Apply methods like MOM

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks. · Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the

module. · The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from

each module.

Text Book: Stutzman and Thiele, “Antenna Theory and Design”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley, 2010.

Reference Books: 1. C. A. Balanis, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, John Wiley, 2nd Edition 2007. 2. J. D. Krauss, “Antennas and Wave Propagation”, McGraw Hill TMH, 4th Edition,

2010. 3. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidanada, “Antennas and propagation”, Pearson Education, 2015.

10

ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEM [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16EVE13 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 (10 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Understand the basic hardware components and their selection method based on the

characteristics and attributes of an embedded system.

• Describe the hardware software co-design and firmware design approaches

• Explain the architectural features of ARM CORTEX M3, a 32 bit microcontroller

including memory map, interrupts and exceptions.

• Program ARM CORTEX M3 using the various instructions, for different applications.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1

Embedded System: Embedded vs General computing system, classification, application and purpose of ES. Core of an Embedded System, Memory, Sensors, Actuators, LED, Opto coupler, Communication Interface, Reset circuits, RTC, WDT, Characteristics and Quality Attributes of Embedded Systems (Text 1: Selected Topics from Ch -1, 2, 3).

L1, L2, L3

Module -2

Hardware Software Co-Design, embedded firmware design approaches, computational models, embedded firmware development languages, Integration and testing of Embedded Hardware and firmware, Components in embedded system development environment (IDE), Files generated during compilation, simulators, emulators and debugging (Text 1: Selected Topics From Ch-7, 9, 12, 13).

L1, L2, L3

11

Module -3

ARM-32 bit Microcontroller: Thumb-2 technology and applications of ARM, Architecture of ARM Cortex M3, Various Units in the architecture, General Purpose Registers, Special Registers, exceptions, interrupts, stack operation, reset sequence (Text 2: Ch 1, 2, 3)

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

Instruction Sets: Assembly basics, Instruction list and description, useful instructions, Memory Systems, Memory maps, Cortex M3 implementation overview, pipeline and bus interface (Text 2: Ch-4, 5, 6)

L1, L2, L3

Module -5

Exceptions, Nested Vector interrupt controller design, Systick Timer, Cortex-M3 Programming using assembly and C language, CMSIS (Text 2: Ch-7, 8, 10)

L1, L2, L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Understand the basic hardware components and their selection method based on the

characteristics and attributes of an embedded system.

• Explain the hardware software co-design and firmware design approaches.

• Acquire the knowledge of the architectural features of ARM CORTEX M3, a 32 bit

microcontroller including memory map, interrupts and exceptions.

• Apply the knowledge gained for Programming ARM CORTEX M3 for different

applications.

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks. · Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the

module · The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from

each module.

Text Books: 1. K. V. Shibu, "Introduction to embedded systems", TMH education Pvt. Ltd. 2009. 2. Joseph Yiu, “The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3”, 2ndedn, Newnes,

(Elsevier), 2010.

Reference Book: James K. Peckol, "Embedded systems- A contemporary design tool", John Wiley, 2008.

12

ADVANCED DIGITAL COMMUNICATION [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16ECS14 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50(10 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Analyze the operation of different modulation techniques and analyze the error

performance of digital modulation techniques in presence of AWGN noise.

• Explain and demonstrate the model of discrete time channel with ISI.

• Explain the model of discrete time channel by equalizer.

• Explain various types of equalizers used for channel modeling and adjusting the filter coefficients

• Understand the concept of spread spectrum communication system and analyze the error performance.

. Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Digital Modulation Schemes: Representation of Digitally Modulated Signals, Memoryless Modulation Methods-PAM, Phase Modulation, QAM, Multidimensional Signalling, Signalling Schemes with memory: CPFSK, CPM, MSK, OQPSK. Transmit PSD for Modulation Schemes (Chapter 3: 3.1,3.2,3.3, 3.4.1 and 3.4.2 of Text).

L1,L2,L3

Module -2

Optimum Receivers for AWGN channels: Waveform and Vector channel models, Waveform and Vector AWGN channels- Optimal detection,

Implementation, Optimal Detection and Error Probability for Band limited signaling, Optimal detection and error probability for power limited signaling. Non Coherent Detection (without derivations) (Chapter 4: 4.1, 4.2 - 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5.1, 4.5.2, eqn 4.5.45 to 4.5.47, 4.5.5 up to eqn 4.5.62 of Text).

L1,L2,L3

Module -3

13

Multichannel and Multicarrier Signalling: Multichannel Communications in an AWGN channel, Multicarrier Communications in AWGN channel (Chapter 11- 11.1, 11.2-1 to 11.2-5 of Text).

Synchronization: Signal Parameter estimation, Carrier Phase Estimation, Symbol Timing Recovery (Chapter 5- 5.1 to 5.3 of Text).

L1,L2,L3

Module -4

Digital Communication through band-limited channels: Characterization of Band-limited channels, Optimum Receiver for channels with ISI and AWGN, Linear equalization, Decision feedback equalization (Chapter 9: 9.1,9.3- 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.4- 9.4.1, 9.4.2, 9.4.4, 9.4.5, 9.5- 9.5.1, 9.5.3 of Text). Adaptive equalization: Adaptive linear equalizer, adaptive decision feedback equalizer, Adaptive equalization of Trellis - coded signals (Chapter 10: 10.1, 10.2, 10.3 of Text).

L1,L2,L3

Module -5

Spread spectrum signals for digital communication: Model of spread spectrum digital communication system, Direct sequence spread spectrum signals, Frequency hopped spread spectrum signals, CDMA, Time hopping SS, Synchronization of SS systems (Chapter 12 of Text).

L1,L2

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to: • Acquire knowledge of application and practical implementation of various Digital

Modulation techniques. • Explain Inter symbol interference (ISI ) and its channel modeling and different

filtering algorithms for the ISI elimination. • Explain different types spread spectrum system • Identify the effect of signal characteristics on the choice of a channel model. • Analyse the performance of Digital Modulation techniques, Different filtering

algorithms and Spread spectrum communication system

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks. · Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the

module · The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from

each module.

Text Book: John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi, "Digital Communications", McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2008.

Reference: Book:

Bernard Sklar, "Digital Communication - Fundamental and applications", Pearson education (Asia), Pvt. Ltd., 2nd edition, 2001.

14

ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORKS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER –I

Subject Code 16ECS151 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

40 (08 Hours Per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Develop an awareness towards basic networking principles • Learn various aspects involved in multiple access and multiplexing • Develop an awareness regarding the LAN architectures and the various data

switching techniques • Learn the scheduling techniques of networks • Learn protocols operating in at different layers of computer networks • Develop an awareness towards the network control and traffic management

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Introduction to networks: Computer network, Telephone networks, Networking principles (Text 1), Protocol layering (Text 2), Multiplexing- TDM, FDM, SM, WDM (Text 1). Multiple Access: Introduction, Choices and constraints, base technologies, centralized and distributed access schemes (Text 2).

L1, L2, L3

Module -2

Local Area Networks: Ethernet - Physical layer, MAC, LLC, LAN interconnection, Token ring- Physical layer, MAC, LLC, FDDI (Text 1). Switching- introduction, circuit switching, packet switching, multicasting (Text 2). Scheduling: Introduction, requirements, choices, performance bounds, best- effort techniques. Naming and addressing (Text 2).

L1, L2, L3

15

Module -3

SONET, SDH (Text 2), ATM Networks- features, signaling and routing, header and adaptation layers (Text 1), virtual circuits, SSCOP, Internet- addressing, routing, end point control (Text 2). Internet protocols- IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, HTTP (Text 2).

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

Traffic Management: Introduction, framework for traffic management, traffic models, traffic classes, traffic scheduling (Text 2). Control of Networks: Objectives and methods of control, routing optimization in circuit and datagram networks, Markov chains, Queuing models in circuit and datagram networks (Text 1).

L1, L2, L3

Module -5

Congestion and flow control: Window congestion control, rate congestion control, control in ATM Networks (Text 1), flow control model, open loop flow control, closed loop flow control (Text 2).

L1, L2, L3, L4

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Choose appropriate multiple access and multiplexing techniques as per the requirement.

• Choose standards for establishing a computer network • Identify switching techniques based on the applications of the network • Identify IP configuration for the network with suitable routing, scheduling, error

control and flow control • Analyze and develop various network traffic management and control techniques

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

• Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions.

• There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

• The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. J. Walrand and P. Varaya, "High performance communication networks", Harcourt Asia (Morgan Kaufmann), 2000.

2. S. Keshav, "An Engineering approach to Computer Networking", Pearson Education, 1997.

Reference Books:

1. Leon-Garcia, and I. Widjaja, "Communication network: Fundamental concepts and key architectures", TMH, 2000.

2. J. F. Kurose, and K. W. Ross, "Computer networking: A top down approach featuring the Internet", Pearson Education, 2001.

16

NANOELECTRONICS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)

scheme] SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16EVE152 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

03 Exam Marks

80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

40 (08 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Enhance basic engineering science and technological knowledge of nanoelectronics.

• Explain basics of top-down and bottom-up fabrication process, devices and systems.

• Describe technologies involved in modern day electronic devices. • Appreciate the complexities in scaling down the electronic devices in the

future.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Introduction: Overview of nanoscience and engineering. Development milestones in microfabrication and electronic industry. Moores’ law and continued miniaturization, Classification of Nanostructures, Electronic properties of atoms and solids: Isolated atom, Bonding between atoms, Giant molecular solids, Free electron models and energy bands, crystalline solids, Periodicity of crystal lattices, Electronic conduction, effects of nanometer length scale, Fabrication methods: Top down processes, Bottom up processes methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials, ordering of nanosystems (Text1).

L1, L2

Module -2

Characterization: Classification, Microscopic techniques, Field ion microscopy, scanning probe techniques, diffraction techniques: bulk and surface diffraction techniques (Text1).

L1-L3

Module -3

17

Characterization: spectroscopy techniques: photon, radiofrequency, electron, surface analysis and dept profiling: electron, mass, Ion beam, Reflectrometry, Techniques for property measurement: mechanical, electron, magnetic, thermal properties. Inorganic semiconductor nanostructures: overview of semiconductor physics. Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures: quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots, super-lattices, band offsets, electronic density of states (Text1).

L1-L3

Module -4

Fabrication techniques: requirements of ideal semiconductor, epitaxial growth of quantum wells, lithography and etching, cleaved-edge over growth, growth of vicinal substrates, strain induced dots and wires, electrostatically induced dots and wires, Quantum well width fluctuations, thermally annealed quantum wells, semiconductor nanocrystals, collidal quantum dots, self-assembly techniques. Physical processes: modulation doping, quantum hall effect, resonant tunneling, charging effects, ballistic carrier transport, Inter band absorption, intraband absorption, Light emission processes, phonon bottleneck, quantum confined stark effect, nonlinear effects, coherence and dephasing, characterization of semiconductor nanostructures: optical electrical and structural (Text1).

L1-L3

Module -5

Methods of measuring properties: atomic, crystollography, microscopy, spectroscopy (Text 2). Applications: Injection lasers, quantum cascade lasers, single-photon sources, biological tagging, optical memories, coulomb blockade devices, photonic structures, QWIP’s, NEMS, MEMS (Text 1).

L1-L3

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Know the principles behind Nanoscience engineering and Nanoelectronics.

• Apply the knowledge to prepare and characterize nanomaterials.

• Know the effect of particles size on mechanical, thermal, optical and electrical properties of nanomaterials.

• Design the process flow required to fabricate state of the art transistor technology.

• Analyze the requirements for new materials and device structure in the future technologies.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

• Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions.

• There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

• The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

18

Text Books: 1. Ed Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, “Nanoscale Science

and Technology”, John Wiley, 2007. 2. Charles P Poole, Jr, Frank J Owens, “Introduction to Nanotechnology”,

John Wiley, Copyright 2006, Reprint 2011. Reference Book: Ed William A Goddard III, Donald W Brenner, Sergey E. Lyshevski, Gerald J Iafrate, “Hand Book of Nanoscience Engineering and Technology”, CRC press, 2003.

19

OPTICAL COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER –I

Subject Code 16ECS153 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week

03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

40 (08 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Mathematically analyze and conceptualize basics of optical networking and its associated nonlinear artifacts and effects.

• Develop awareness regarding optical devices and their working strategies • Develop awareness of WDM principles, and that of power penalty issues existent in

optical Networks • Get insight into the design of various types of Lasers and understand the

techniques of coherent transmission. • Develop an awareness towards the backbone architectures of optical networking

with the present trends in access networks • Design second generation optical networks using various existent & devices like

OADM, OLT and OXC and to mathematically model the problems in the design of WDM networks

Modules

Revised Bloom’s Taxonomy (RBT) Level

Module -1 Introduction to optical networking: Propagation of signals in optical fiber, Different losses, Nonlinear effects, Solutions, Optical sources, Detectors. Optical Components (Part-1): Couplers, Isolators, Circulators and Multiplexers.

L1, L2, L3

Module -2

Optical Components (Part-2): Filters, Gratings, Interferometers, Amplifiers. Modulation - Demodulation: Formats, Ideal receivers, Practical detection receivers, Optical preamplifiers, Noise considerations, Bit error rates, Coherent detection.

L1, L2, L3

20

Module -3

Transmission System Engineering: System model, Power penalty, Transmitter, Receiver, Different optical amplifiers Client Layers: Client layers of optical layer, SONET/SDH, Multiplexing, layers, Frame structure, ATM functions, Adaptation layers, Quality of Service (QoS) and flow control, ESCON, HIPPI.

L1, L2, L3

Module -4

WDM network elements: Optical line terminal, Optical line amplifiers, Optical Add/ Drop Multiplexors, Optical cross connectors. WDM Network Design: WDM network design, Cost tradeoffs, LTD and RWA problems, Routing and wavelength assignment, Wavelength conversion.

L1, L2, L3

Module -5

Control and Management (Part-1): Network management functions, management framework, Information model, management protocols, Layers within optical layer. Control and Management (Part-2): Performance and fault management, Impact of transparency, BER measurement, Optical trace, Alarm management, Configuration management.

L1, L2, L3

Course outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to: • Recognize and select various optical networking components according to the

prescribed design specifications • Learn the aspects of data transmission, loss hindrances and other artifacts affecting

the network operation • Learn the issues involved in setting up and maintenance of access part of optical

network with the latest trends in the data communication • Design a WDM network and study the component and network management

aspects Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks.

• Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions.

• There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module

• The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Book: Rajiv Ramswami and K. N. Sivarajan, "Optical Networks", Morgon Kauffman Publishers, 3rd edition, 2010.

Reference Books: 1. John M. Senior, "Optical fiber communication", Pearson edition, 2000. 2. Gerd Kaiser, "Optical fiber Communication Systems", John Wiley, New York, 1997. 3. P. E. Green, "Optical Networks", Prentice Hall, 1994.

21

SIMULATION, MODELLING AND ANALYSIS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16ECS154 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 (08 Hours per Module)

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to:

• Understand the process of simulation and modeling

• Learn simulation of deterministic and probabilistic models, with a focus of statistical

data analysis and simulation data.

Modules

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy (RBT) Level Module -1

Basic Simulation Modeling: Nature of simulation, Systems, Models and Simulation, Discrete-Event Simulation, Simulation of Single Server Queuing System, Simulation of inventory system, Parallel and distributed simulation and the high level architecture, Steps in sound simulation study, and Other types of simulation, Advantages and disadvantages. (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.4.1, 1.4.2, 1.4.3, 1.5, 1.5.1, 1.5.2, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9 of Text)

L1,L2

Module -2

Review of Basic Probability and Statistics Random Variables and their properties, Simulation Output Data and Stochastic Processes, Estimation of Means, Variances and Correlations, Confidence Intervals and Hypothesis tests for the Mean Building valid, credible and appropriately detailed simulation models: Introduction and definitions, Guidelines for determining the level of models detail, Management’s Role in the Simulation Process, Techniques for increasing model validity and credibility, Statistical

procedure for comparing the real world observations and simulation output data. (4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.6.1, 5.6.2 of Text)

L1,L2, L3

Module -3

22

Selecting Input Probability Distributions: Useful probability distributions, activity I, II and III. Shifted and truncated distributions; Specifying multivariate distribution, correlations, and stochastic processes; Selecting the distribution in the absence of data, Models of arrival process. (6.2, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.8, 6.10, 6.11, 6.12 of Text).

L1,L2, l3

Module -4

Random Number Generators: Linear congruential Generators, Other kinds, Testing number generators, Generating the Random Variates: General approaches, Generating continuous random variates, Generating discrete random variates, Generating random vectors, and correlated random variants, Generating arrival processes (7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6 of Text).

L1,L2, L3

Module -5

Output data analysis for a single system: Transient and steady state behavior of a stochastic process; Types of simulations with regard to analysis; Statistical analysis for terminating simulation; Statistical analysis for steady state parameters; Statistical analysis for steady state cycle parameters; Multiple measures of performance, Time plots of important variables. (9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.4.1, 9.4.3, 9.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.5.3, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8 of Text)

L1,L2,L3

Course Outcomes: After studying this course, students will be able to:

• Define the need of simulation and modeling.

• Describe various simulation models.

• Discuss the process of selecting of probability distributions.

• Perform output data analysis.

Question paper pattern: · The question paper will have 10 full questions carrying equal marks. · Each full question consists of 16 marks with a maximum of four sub questions. · There will be 2 full questions from each module covering all the topics of the module · The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from

each module.

Text Book: Averill Law, "Simulation modeling and analysis", McGraw Hill 4th edition, 2007.

Reference Books: 1. Tayfur Altiok and Benjamin Melamed, “Simulation modeling and analysis with

ARENA”, Elsevier, Academic press, 2007. 2. Jerry Banks, "Discrete event system Simulation", Pearson, 2009 3. Seila Ceric and Tadikamalla, "Applied simulation modeling", Cengage, 2009. 4. George. S. Fishman, "Discrete event simulation", Springer, 2001. 5. Frank L. Severance, "System modeling and simulation", Wiley, 2009.

23

ADVANCED COMMUNICATION LAB [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Laboratory

Code

16ECSL16 IA Marks 20

Number of

Lecture

Hours/Week

01Hr Tutorial (Instructions) + 02 Hours Laboratory

Exam Marks 80

Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02

Course objectives: This laboratory course enables students to get practical

experience in

• Radiation pattern of antennas.

• Determining gain and directivity of a given antenna.

• Working of Klystron source.

• S-parameters of some microwave passive devices.

Laboratory Experiments:

NOTE: Experiments can be done using Hardware tools such as Spectrum analyzers, Signal sources, Power Supplies, Oscilloscopes, High frequency signal sources, Fiber optic kits, Microwave measurement benches, DSP processor kit, FPGA kit, Logic analyzers, PC setups, etc. Software tools based experiments can be done using, FEKO or equivalent open source simulator, MATLAB etc.

Revised

Bloom’s Taxonomy

(RBT) Level

1. Matlab/C implementation to obtain the radiation pattern of an antenna.

L3,L4

2. Study of radiation pattern of different antennas. L2, L3

3. Determine the directivity and gains of Horn/ Yagi/ dipole/ Parabolic antennas.

L3,L4

4. Impedance measurements of Horn/Yagi/dipole/Parabolic antennas.

L3,L4

5. Study of radiation pattern of E & H plane horns. L2, L3

6. Significance of Pocklington's integral equation. L1,L2

7. Study of digital modulation techniques using CD4051 IC. L2, L3

8. Conduct an experiment for Voice and data multiplexing using optical fiber.

L3,L4

9. Determination of the modes transit time, electronic timing range and sensitivity of Klystron source.

L3, L4

10. Determination of VI characteristics of GUNN diode, and measurement of guide wave length, frequency, and VSWR.

L3,L4

24

11. Determination of coupling coefficient and insertion loss of directional couplers and Magic tree.

L3,L4

12. Build a hardware pseudo-random signal source and determine statistics of the generated signal source.

L1,L2,L3,L4

Course outcomes: On the completion of this laboratory course, the students will be able to:

• Plot the radiation pattern of some antennas using Matlab and wave guide setup

• Obtain the S-parameters of Magic tee and directional couplers.

• Test the IC CD4051 for modulation techniques.

• Study multiplexing techniques using OFC kit.

Conduct of Practical Examination:

1. All laboratory experiments are to be included for practical examination. 2. Students are allowed to pick one experiment from the lot. 3. Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for

breakup of marks. 4. Change of experiment is allowed only once and Marks allotted to the procedure

part to be made zero.

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

BELAGAVI

Scheme of Teaching and Examination and Syllabus M.Tech POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

Eligibility: Bachelor’s degree in Engineering or Technology in (a)Electrical and Electronics (b) AMIE in appropriate branch (c) GATE: EE

(Effective from Academic year 2016-17)

BOARD OF STUDIES IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

December 2016

2

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2016-17

M.Tech POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) (Total number of credits prescribed for the programme - 85)

I SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cre

dit

s

Theory

Practical/

Field work/

Assignment

Duration

in hours

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16EEE11 Applied Mathematics 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

2 16EPS12 Modelling and Analysis of

Electrical Machines 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

3 16EPS13 Power system Dynamics

(Stability and Control) 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

4 16EPS14 Computer Relaying for Power

Systems 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

5 16EPS15X Elective -1 03 -- 03 20 80 100 3

6 16EPSL16 Power System Laboratory - I - 3 03 20 80 100 2

7 16EPS17 Seminar - 3 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 19 06 18 220 480 700 22

Number of credits completed at the end of I semester: 22

Elective -1

Courses under Code 16EPS15X Title

16EPS151 EHV AC Transmission

16EPS152 Power System Harmonics

16EPS153 Linear and Nonlinear Optimization

16EPS154 Power System Voltage Stability

3

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2016-17

M.Tech POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) (Total number of credits prescribed for the programme - 85)

II SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cre

dit

s

Theory

Practical/

Field work/

Assignment

Duration

in hours

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16EPS21 Power Electronic

Converters 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

2 16EPS22 Insulators for Power

System 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

3 16EPS23 Switching in Power

Systems 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

4 16EPS24 FACTS Controllers 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

5 16EPS25X Elective - 2 03 -- 03 20 80 100 3

6 16EPSL26 Power System

Laboratory - II - 3 03 20 80 100 2

7 16EPS27 Seminar - 3 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 19 06 18 220 480 700 22

Number of credits completed at the end of II semester: 22+ 22 = 44

Elective - 2

Courses under Code 16EPS25X Title

16EPS251 Restructured Power Systems

16EPS252 Smart Grid

16EPS253 Power Quality Problems and Mitigation

16EPS254 Substation Automation Systems

Note: Project Phase-1: 6-week duration shall be carried out between 2nd and 3rd Semester vacation. Candidates in consultation

with the guide shall carry out literature survey/ visit industries to finalize the topic of Project.

4

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2016-17

M.Tech POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) (Total number of credits prescribed for the programme - 85)

III SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cre

dit

s

Theory

Practical/

Field work/

Assignment

Duration

in hours

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16EPS31

Seminar / Presentation on

Internship.

(After 8 weeks from the date

of commencement)

-- -- -- 25

--

25

20

2 16EPS32 Report on Internship -- -- -- 25 -- 25

3 16EPS33 Evaluation and Viva-Voce of

Internship

-- --

-- -- 50 50

4 16EPS34 Evaluation of Project phase -1 -- -- -- 50 -- 50 1

TOTAL -- -- -- 100 50 150 21

Number of credits completed at the end of III semester: 22+ 22 + 21 = 65

Note: Internship of 16 weeks shall be carried out during III semester.

Major part of the Project work shall also be carried out during the III semester in consultation with the Guide/s.

5

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2016-17

M.Tech POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) (Total number of credits prescribed for the programme - 85)

IV SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cre

dit

s

Theory

Practical/

Field work/

Assignment

Duration

in hours

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16EPS41 HVDC Power Transmission 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

2 16EPS42X Elective - 3 03 -- 03 20 80 100 3

3 16EPS43 Evaluation of Project phase -

2 -- -- -- 50 - 50 3

4 16EPS44 Evaluation of Project and

Viva-Voce -- -- -- -- 100 + 100 200 10

TOTAL 07 -- 06 90 360 450 20

Number of credits completed at the end of IV semester: 22+ 22 + 21 + 20 = 85

Elective - 3

Courses under Code 16EPS42X Title

16EPS421 Power System Reliability

16EPS422 Wide Area Measurements and their Applications

16EPS423 Multi-Terminal DC Grids

16EPS424 Integration of Renewable Energy

Note: 1. Project Phase-1: 6-week duration shall be carried out between 2nd and 3rd Semester vacation. Candidates in consultation

with the guide shall carry out literature survey/ visit industries to finalize the topic of Project.

2. Project Phase-2: 16-week duration during 4th semester. Evaluation shall be done by the committee comprising of HoD as

Chairman, Guide and Senior faculty of the department.

3. Project Evaluation: Evaluation shall be taken up at the end of 4th semester. Project work evaluation and Viva-Voce

examination shall conducted

4. Project evaluation:

a. Internal Examiner shall carry out the evaluation for 100 marks.

b. External Examiner shall carry out the evaluation for 100 marks.

c .The average of marks allotted by the internal and external examiner shall be the final marks of the project evaluation.

d. Viva-Voce examination of Project work shall be conducted jointly by Internal and External examiner for 100 marks.

6

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

APPLIED MATHAMATICS (Core Course)

Course Code 16EEE11 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: The objectives of this course is to acquaint the students with principles of advanced mathematics

through linear algebra, transform methods for differential equations, calculus of variations and linear and

non-linear programming, that serve as an essential tool for applications of electrical engineering sciences. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Numerical Methods: Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations- iterative methods based on

second degree equation – Muller method(no derivation), Chebyshev method. Fixed point iteration

method (first order), acceleration of convergence- 2 - Aitken’s method. System of non-linear

equations – Newton-Raphson method. Complex roots by Bairstow’s method.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying

Module-2

Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations: Classification of second order equations,

parabolic equations-solution of one dimensional heat equation, explicit method, Crank-Nicolson

method. Hyperbolic equations- solution of one dimensional wave equation and two-dimensional

Laplace equation by explicit method. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying

Module-3 Linear Algebra: Vector spaces, linear dependent, independence, basis and dimension, elementary

properties, examples.

Linear Transformations: Definition, properties, range and null space, rank and nullity, algebra of

linear transformations-invertible, singular and non-singular transformations, representation of

transformations by matrices.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding

Module-4

System of linear algebraic equations and Eigen value problems: Iterative methods - Gauss-Seidal

method, SOR method, Eigen value problems – Gerschgorian circle theorem, Eigen values and Eigen

vectors of real symmetric matrices -Jacobi method. Interpolation: Hermite interpolation, spline interpolation, numerical solution of differential

equations – Numerov method. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying

Module-5

Optimization: Linear programming- formulation of the problem, general linear programming

problem, simplex method, artificial variable technique, Big M-method. Graph Theory: Basic terminologies, types of graphs, sub graphs, graphs isomorphism, connected

graphs-walks, paths, circuits, connected and disconnected graphs, operations on graphs, Eulerian paths

and circuits, Hamiltonian paths and circuits, applications to electrical circuits. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

7

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EEE11 APPLIED MATHAMATICS (Core Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

1. Employ numerical techniques in order to achieve more accurate values in the computation of roots of

algebraic and non-linear equations.

2. Utilize analytical and numerical schemes to solve partial differential equations applicable to engineering

problems.

3. Understand vector spaces, basis, linear transformations and the process of obtaining matrix of linear

transformations arising in magnification and rotation of images.

4. Apply standard iterative methods to compute Eigen values and solve ordinary differential equations.

5. Employ linear and non-linear programming techniques in simulation of network systems and

optimization of electrical circuits. ∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Critical Thinking Problem Solving, Research Skill, Usage of Modern Tools.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten full questions carrying equal marks.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be two full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions) from each module.

Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

The students will have to answer five full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Linear Algebra and its Applications David C.Lay et al Pearson 5th Edition,2015

2 Numerical methods in Engineering and

Science (with C, C++ & MATLAB)

B.S.Grewal Khanna

Publishers

2014

3 Graph Theory with Applications to

Engineering and Computer Science

Narsingh Deo PHI 2012

4 Numerical Methods for Scientific and

Engineering Computation

M. K. Jain et al New Age

International

9th Edition, 2014

5 Higher Engineering Mathematics B.S. Grewal Khanna

Publishers

43rd Edition,2015

6 Linear Algebra K.Hoffman et al PHI 2011

7 Web links:1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses.php?disciplineId=111

2. http://www.class-central.com/Course/math(MOOCs)

3.www.wolfram.com

8

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

MODELLING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES (Core Course)

Subject Code 16EPS12 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives:

To provide basic concepts of modelling of dc and ac machines.

To provide knowledge of theory of transformation of three phase variable to two phase variable.

To analyze the steady state and dynamic state operation of three-phase induction machines using

transformation theory based mathematical modelling.

To provide modeling concepts of single phase and three phase transformers.

To analyze the steady state and dynamic state operation of three-phase synchronous machines using

transformation theory based mathematical modelling. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Basic Concepts of Modelling: Basic two pole machine representation of commutator machines, 3-

phase synchronous machine with and without damper bar and 3-phase induction machine, Kron’s

primitive machine-voltage, current and torque equations.

DC Machine Modelling: Mathematical model of separately excited DC motor-steady state and

transient state analysis, sudden application of inertia load, transfer function of separately excited DC

motor, mathematical model of dc series motor, shunt motor, linearization techniques for small

perturbations.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-2

Reference Frame Theory: Real time model of a two phase induction machine, transformation to

obtain constant matrices, three phase to two phase transformation, power equivalence.

Dynamic Modelling of Three Phase Induction Machine: Generalized model in arbitrary frame,

electromagnetic torque, deviation of commonly used induction motor models-stator reference frames

model, rotor reference frames model, synchronously rotating reference frames model, equations in flux

linkages, per unit model, dynamic simulation. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Small Signal Equations of the Induction Machine: Derivation of small signal equations of induction

machine, space phasor model, DQ flux linkages model derivation, control principle of the induction

motor.

Transformer Modelling: Introduction, single phase transformer model, three phase transformer

connections, per phase analysis, normal systems, per unit normalization, per unit three phase quantities,

change of base, per unit analysis of normal system, regulating transformers for voltage and phase angle

control, auto transformers, transmission line and transformers. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing, L5 – Evaluating.

Module-4

Modelling of Synchronous Machines: Introduction, voltage equations and torque equation in

machine variables, stator voltage equations in arbitrary and rotor reference frame variables, Park’s equations, torque equations in substitute variables, rotor angle and angle between rotors, per unit

system, analysis of steady state operation. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

9

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EPS12 MODELLING AND ANALYSIS OF ELECTRICAL MACHINES (Core Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) Module-5 Teaching

Hours Dynamic Analysis of Synchronous Machines: Dynamic performance during sudden change in

input torque and during a 3-phase fault at the machine terminals, approximate transient torque versus

rotor angle characteristics, comparison of actual and approximate transient torque-angle

characteristics during a sudden change in input torque; first swing transient stability limit,

comparison of actual and approximate transient torque-angle characteristics during a 3-phase fault at

the machine terminals, critical clearing time, equal area criterion, computer simulation. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the basic concepts of modeling.

Develop mathematical models for DC motors for transient state analysis.

Use reference frame theory to transform three phase to two phase.

Develop dynamic model for three phase induction motor in stator ad rotor reference frames.

Develop mathematical model of single phase transformers.

Model synchronous machine using Park’s transformation for the analysis of steady state operation. Model synchronous machine to perform dynamic analysis under different conditions.∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Design / development of solutions, Conduct investigations of

complex Problems, Modern Tool Usage, Ethics,

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Generalized Theory of Electrical

Machines

P.S.Bimbra Khanna

Publications

5th Edition,1995

2 Electric Motor Drives - Modelling,

Analysis & Control

R. Krishnan PHI Learning

Private Ltd

Indian Edition,

2009

3 Analysis of Electrical Machinery and

Drive Systems

P.C.Krause, et al Wiley 2nd Edition,2010

4 Power System Analysis Arthur R Bergen and

Vijay Vittal

Pearson 2nd Edition,2009

5 Power System Stability and Control Prabha Kundur Mc Graw Hill 1st Edition,1994

6 Dynamic Simulation of Electric

Machinery using Matlab / Simulink

Chee-Mun Ong Prentice Hall 1998

10

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS (STABILITY AND CONTROL) (Core Course)

Subject Code 16EPS13 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: To impart knowledge on dynamic modeling of a synchronous machine excitation and prime mover

controllers.

To describe the modeling of transmission lines, SVC and loads.

To explain the dynamics of single machine connected to infinite bus.

To describe the analysis of single and multi-machine systems and evaluation of transient stability. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Basic Concepts of Power System: Introduction, Power System Stability, States of Operation and

System Security, System Dynamic Problems.

Analysis of system stability: System Model, Mathematical Preliminaries, Analysis of Steady State

Stability and Transient Stability, Excitation Control.

Modelling of Synchronous Machine: Introduction, Synchronous Machine, Park's Transformation,

Analysis of Steady State Performance, Per Unit Quantities. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-2

Modelling of Synchronous Machine (continued): Equivalent Circuits of Synchronous Machine,

Determination of Parameters of Equivalent Circuits, Measurements for obtaining Data, Saturation

Models, Transient Analysis of a Synchronous Machine, Power System Dynamics - Stability and

Control.

Excitation and Prime Mover Controllers: Excitation System, Excitation System Modelling,

Excitation Systems- Standard Block Diagram, System Representation by State Equations, Prime-

Mover Control System. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Transmission Lines, SVC and Loads: Transmission Lines, D-Q Transformation using alpha and

beta Variables), Static Var compensators, Loads.

Dynamics of a Synchronous Generator Connected to Infinite Bus: System Model, Synchronous

Machine Model, Application of Model 1.1, Calculation of Initial Conditions, System Simulation,

Consideration of other Machine Models. Inclusion of SVC Model. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

L5 – Evaluating, L6 – Creating.

Module-4

Analysis of Single Machine System: Small Signal Analysis with Block Diagram Representation,

Characteristic Equation and Application of Routh-Hurwitz Criterion, Synchronizing and Damping

Torques Analysis, Small Signal Model: State Equations, Nonlinear Oscillations - Hopf Bifurcation.

Application of Power System Stabilizers: Introduction, Basic concepts in applying PSS,

Control Signals, Structure and tuning of PSS, Field implementation and operating experience,

Examples of PSS Design and Application. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

11

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EPS13 POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS (STABILITY AND CONTROL) (Core Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) Module-5 Teaching

Hours Analysis of Multimachine System: A Simplified System Model, Detailed Models: Case I and Case

II, Inclusion of Load and SVC Dynamics, Modal Analysis of Large Power Systems, Case Studies.

Simulation for Transient Stability Evaluation: Mathematical Formulation, Solution Methods,

Formulation of System Equations, Solution of System Equations, Simultaneous Solution, Case

Studies, Dynamic Equivalents and Model Reduction. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain states of operation, system security and dynamic problems

Use model of power system to assess system stability

Model synchronous machine transmission line and loads.

Model excitation and prime movers systems and static var systems.

Use model to study the dynamics of a synchronous generator connected to infinite bus.

Use models to analyze the single machine system connected to infinite bus.

Discuss the use of power system stabilizers

Use models of the multi machine system for the transient stability analysis.∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Design / development of solutions, Conduct investigations of

complex Problems, Modern Tool Usage.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Power System Dynamics Stability

and Control

K.R. Padiyar B.S. Publications 2nd Edition,2008

2 Power system control and stability P.M. Anderson et al B.S. Publications 2nd Edition,2003

3 Power System Dynamics and

Stability

Peter W. Sauer et al PHI 1st Edition, 1998

12

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

COMPUTER RELAYING FOR POWER SYSTEMS (Core Course)

Subject Code 16EPS14 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 04

Course objectives: To explain the importance of computer relaying in power systems and different relaying practices.

Provide mathematical basis for protective relaying algorithm and digital filters.

To explain protection algorithm for transformers transmission lines.

To explain relying applications of travelling waves in single and three phase lines. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Introduction to computer relaying: Development of computer relaying, historical background ,

expected benefits of computer relaying, computer relay architecture, analog to digital converters, anti-aliasing filters, substation computer hierarchy. Relaying practices: Introduction to protection systems, functions of a protection system, protection

of transmission lines, transformer, reactor and generator protection, bus protection, performance of

current and voltage transformers.∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

Module-2

Mathematical basis for protective relaying algorithms: Introduction, Fourier series, other

orthogonal expansions, Fourier transforms, use of Fourier transforms, discrete Fourier transform,

introduction to probability and random process, random processes, Kalman filtering. Digital filters: Introduction, discrete time systems, discrete time systems, Z Transforms, digital

filters, windows and windowing, linear phase, Approximation – filter synthesis, wavelets, elements of artificial intelligence. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

Module-3 Transmission line relaying: Introduction, sources of error, relaying as parameter estimation, beyond

parameter estimation, symmetrical component distance relay, newer analytic techniques, protection

of series compensated .

Protection of transformers, machines and buses: Introduction, power transformer algorithms,

generator protection, motor protection, digital bus protection. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

Module-4

Hardware organization in integrated systems: The nature of hardware issues, computers for

relaying, the substation environment, industry environmental standards, countermeasures against

EMI, supplementary equipment, redundancy and backup, servicing, training and maintenance.

System relaying and control: Introduction, measurement of frequency and phase, sampling clock

synchronization, application of phasor measurements to state estimation, phasor measurements in

dynamic state estimation, monitoring, control applications. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

13

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EPS14 COMPUTER RELAYING FOR POWER SYSTEMS (Core Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) Module-5 Teaching

Hours Relaying applications of traveling waves: Introduction, traveling waves on single-phase lines,

traveling waves on three-phase lines, directional wave relay, traveling wave distance relay,

differential relaying with phasors, traveling wave differential relays, fault location, other recent

developments.

Wide area measurement applications: Adaptive relaying, examples of adaptive relaying, wide area

measurement systems (WAMS), WAMS architecture, WAMS based protection concepts. ∎

10

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying.

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain advantages of computer relaying, its architecture and relaying practices used in power system.

Provide mathematical basis for protective relaying algorithms.

Explain digital filters used in computer relaying.

Discuss transmission line relaying.

Explain protection transformers, machines and buses.

Explain hardware organization for computer relaying, system relaying.

Explain relaying applications for travelling waves.

Explain adaptive relaying and WAMS based protection.∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Design / development of solutions, Ethics,

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text Book

1 Computer Relaying for Power

Systems

Arun G. Phadke, James

S. Thorp

Wiley 2nd Edition,2009

14

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

EHV AC TRANSMISSION (Elective Course)

Subject Code 16EPS151 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 03

Course objectives: To introduce recent trends in electrical power transmission and to evaluate line parameters.

To explain the voltage gradients on conductor, corona and its effects.

To explain the theory of travelling and standing waves on the power transmission lines.

To explain protection of transmission lines from lightning and switching over voltages.

To explain power frequency voltage control and design of EHV lines. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Transmission Line Trends and Preliminaries: Role of EHV AC Transmission, Standard

Transmission Voltages, Average Values of Line Parameters, Power-Handling Capacity and Line

Loss, Examples of Giant Power Pools and Number of Lines, Costs of Transmission Lines and

Equipment, Mechanical Considerations in Line Performance.

Calculation of Line and Ground Parameters: Resistance of Conductors, Temperature Rise of

Conductors and Current-Carrying Capacity, Properties of Bundled Conductors, Inductance of EHV

Line Configurations, Line Capacitance Calculation, Sequence Inductances and Capacitances, Line

Parameters for Modes of Propagation, Resistance and Inductance of Ground Return. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing,

L5 – Evaluating.

Module-2

Voltage Gradients of Conductors: Electrostatics, Field of Sphere Gap, Field of Line Charges and

Their Properties, Charge-Potential Relations for Multi-Conductor lines, Surface Voltage Gradient on

Conductors, Examples of Conductors and Maximum Gradients on Actual Lines, Gradient Factors

and Their Use, Distribution of Voltage Gradient on Sub-conductors of Bundle, Design of Cylindrical

Cages for Corona Experiments, Voltage Gradients on Conductors in the Presence of Ground Wires

on Towers. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing,

L5 – Evaluating.

Module-3 Corona: I2R Loss and Corona Loss, Corona-Loss formulae, Attenuation of Travelling Waves due to

Corona Loss, Audible Noise: Generation and Characteristics, Limits for Audible Noise. Generation

of Corona Pulses and their Properties, Properties of Pulse Trains and Filter Response, Limits for

Radio Interference Fields.

Theory of Travelling Waves and Standing Waves: Travelling Waves and Standing Waves at

Power Frequency, Differential Equations and Solutions for General Case, Standing Waves and

Natural Frequencies, Open-Ended Line: Double-Exponential Response, Open-Ended Line: Response

to Sinusoidal Excitation, Line Energization with Trapped-Charge Voltage, Corona Loss and

Effective Shunt Conductance, The Method of Fourier Transforms, Reflection and Refraction of

Travelling Waves, Transient Response of Systems with Series and Shunt Lumped Parameters and

Distributed Lines, Principles of Travelling-Wave Protection of EHV Lines.∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing,

L5 – Evaluating.

15

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EPS151 EHV AC TRANSMISSION (Elective Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

Module-4 Teaching

Hours

Lightning and Lightning Protection: Lightning Strokes to Lines, Lightning-Stroke Mechanism,

General Principles of the Lightning-Protection Problem, Tower-Footing Resistance, Insulator

Flashover and Withstand Voltage, Probability of Occurrence of Lightning-Stroke Currents, Lightning

Arresters and Protective Characteristics, Dynamic Voltage Rise and Arrester Rating, Operating

Characteristics of Lightning Arresters, Insulation Coordination Based on Lightning.

Over voltages in EHV Systems Caused by Switching Operations: Origin of Overvoltages and

Their Types, Short-Circuit Current and the Circuit Breaker, Recovery Voltage and the Circuit

Breaker, Overvoltages Caused by Interruption of Low Inductive Current, Interruption of Capacitive

Currents, Ferro-Resonance Overvoltages, Calculation of Switching Surges—Single Phase

Equivalents, Distributed-Parameter Line Energized by Source, Generalized Equations for Single-

Phase Representation, Generalized Equations for Three-Phase Systems, Inverse Fourier Transform

for the General Case, Reduction of Switching Surges on EHV Systems, Experimental and Calculated

Results of Switching-Surge Studies. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing,

L5 – Evaluating.

Module-5

Power-Frequency Voltage Control and Over voltages: Problems at Power Frequency, Generalized

Constants, No-Load Voltage Conditions and Charging Current, The Power Circle Diagram and Its

Use, Voltage Control Using Synchronous Condensers, Cascade Connection of Components—Shunt

and Series Compensation, Sub-Synchronous Resonance in Series-Capacitor Compensated Lines,

Static Reactive Compensating Systems (Static VAR), High Phase Order Transmission.

Design of EHV Lines Based upon Steady-State Limits and Transient Overvoltages:

Introduction, Design Factors Under Steady State, Design Examples: Steady-State Limits, Design

Examples I to IV, Line Insulation Design Based Upon Transient Overvoltages.∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing,

L5 – Evaluating.

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain power transmission at extra high voltages.

Calculate Line and Ground Parameters of transmission lines.

Estimate the voltage gradients on conductor.

Explain corona phenomenon on transmission line.

Explain the propagation of travelling waves and formation of standing waves on transmission lines.

Explain protection methods for lightening and switching surges on transmission lines.

Explain power frequency voltage control over voltage on transmission line.

Design of EHV Lines Based upon Steady-State Limits and Transient Overvoltages.∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge Problem Analysis, Design / development of solutions, Environment and sustainability,

Ethics, Individual and Team work.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text Book

1 Extra High Voltage AC

Transmission Engineering

Rakosh Das Begamudre New Age International

Publishers.

4th Edition,2011

16

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS (Elective Course)

Subject Code 16EPS152 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 03

Course objectives: To explain about different sources of harmonics in power system.

To explain effects of harmonics and mitigation of harmonics.

To explain modeling of power system components for harmonic studies.

Introducing different methods of harmonic studies. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Fundamentals of Harmonics: Introduction, Examples of harmonic waveforms, characteristics of

harmonics in power systems, measurement of harmonic distortion, power in passive elements,

calculation of passive elements, resonance, capacitor banks and reactive power supply, capacitor

banks and power factor correction, bus voltage rise and resonance, harmonics in transformers.

Harmonics in Power system: Introduction, sources of harmonics, transformers, rotating machines,

fluorescent lights, static var compensators, cycloconverters. Single phase controlled rectifiers, three

phase converters. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding.

Module-2

Effects of Harmonic Distortion on Power System: Introduction, thermal losses in a harmonic

environment, harmonic effects on power system equipment, capacitor banks, transformers, rotating

machines, protection, communication and electronic equipment.

Mitigation of Power system Harmonics: Introduction, harmonic filters, power converters,

transformers, rotating machines, capacitor banks, harmonic filter design, active filters. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Limits of Harmonic Distortion: Introduction, voltage harmonic distortion limits, current harmonic

distortion limits.

Harmonic studies – Modelling of System Components: Introduction, impedance in the presence

of harmonics, skin effect, modelling of the high voltage grid, generator modelling, modelling of

shunt capacitor banks, series capacitor banks, load models, induction motor modelling.

Transformer Modelling: Introduction, modelling of two winding transformers, phase sequence

admittance matrices, transmission of voltage and current across two winding transformers,

transmission matrices and phase admittance matrix, modelling of three and four winding

transformers.∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

17

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EPS152 POWER SYSTEM HARMONICS (Elective Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

Module-4 Teaching

Hours

Modelling of Transmission lines/Cables: Introduction, skin effect, modelling of power lines, Line’s series impedance, mutual coupling between conductors, mutually coupled lines, line’s shunt capacitance, surge impedance and velocity of propagation, line’s series impedance and shunt capacitance – single phase equivalents, the transmission (ABCD) matrix, the admittance matrix,

conversion between the transmission and admittance matrices, the nominal pi model – single phase

equivalent, the equivalent pi model – voltage and current the line, line losses, the equivalent pi model

– single phase equivalent, variations in the network’s short circuit capacity, examples – the nominal

and equivalent models. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-5

Power System Harmonic Studies: Introduction, harmonic analysis using a computer program,

harmonic analysis using spread sheet, harmonic distortion limits, harmonic filter rating, and practical

considerations. Harmonic study of simple system, 300 -22 kV power system and low voltage system. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Explain the fundamental of harmonics.

Discuss the sources of harmonics in the power system.

Explain the effects of harmonic distortion on power system.

Explain the mitigation of harmonics in power system and the limits of harmonic distortion.

Model generator and transformers for harmonic studies.

Model transmission system; transmission lines and cables for harmonic studies.∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Design / development of solutions, Modern Tool Usage, Ethics.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Power System Harmonics George J Wakileh Springer Reprint, 2014

2 Power System Harmonic Analysis Jos Arrillaga et al Wiley Reprint, 2014

3 Power System Harmonic J. Arrillaga, N.R. Watson Wiley 2nd Edition, 2003

4 Harmonics and Power Systems Francisco C. DE LA

Rosa

CRC Press 1st Edition, 2006

18

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

LINEAR AND NONLINEAR OPTIMIZATION (Elective Course)

Subject Code 16EPS153 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 03

Course objectives: Provide introduction to optimization.

Explanation to classification of optimization problems.

Explanation for linear programming and solution of LPP problem.

Explanation for nonlinear programming and solution of nonlinear programming problem by one

dimensional minimization method. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Optimization: Introduction, historical development, engineering applications of optimization,

statement of an optimization problem, design vector, design constraints, constraint surface, objective

function, objective function surfaces, classification of optimization problems based on existence of

constraints, nature of the design variables, physical structure of the problem, nature of the equations

involved, nonlinear and linear programming problem(NLP and LPP), permissible values of the design

variables, deterministic nature of the functions, number of objective functions, optimization

techniques. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-2

Classification of Optimization Problems: Introduction, single variable optimization, multivariable

optimization with no constraints, semi-definite case, saddle point, multivariable optimization with

equality constraints, solution by direct substitution, by the method of constrained variation and by the

method of Lagrange multipliers, multivariable optimization with inequality constraints, Kuhn-Tucker

conditions, constraint qualification, Convex programming problem. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-3 Linear Programming-I: Introduction, applications of linear programming, standard form of a LPP,

geometry of LPP, definitions and theorems, solution of a system of linear simultaneous equations,

pivotal reduction of a general system of equations, motivation of the simplex method, simplex

algorithm, identifying an optimal point, improving a non-optimal basic feasible solution, two phases

of the simplex method. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Module-4

Linear Programming-II: Revised simplex method, duality in linear programming; symmetric and

primal-dual relations, primal-dual relations when the primal is in standard form, duality theorems,

dual simplex method, decomposition principle, sensitivity or post- optimality analysis, changes in

right-hand-side constants bi, changes in the cost coefficients Cj, addition of new variables, changes in

the constraint coefficients aij, addition of constraints. Transportation problem, Karmarkar’s method, statement of the problem, conversion of an LPP into required form, algorithm, quadratic

programming. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

19

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EPS153 LINEAR AND NONLINEAR OPTIMIZATION (Elective Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) Module-5 Teaching

Hours Non-Linear Programming - One Dimensional Minimization Methods: Introduction, Unimodal

function, Unrestricted search with fixed step size and accelerated step size, exhaustive search,

dichotomous search, interval halving method, Fibonacci method, golden section method, comparison

of elimination methods, interpolation methods, quadratic and cubic, direct root methods, Newton,

Quasi-Newton and Secant methods, practical considerations. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Course outcomes: At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Understand engineering applications of optimization

State the optimization problem, constraints, and objective function.

Classify optimization problem.

Solve an optimization problem by direct substitution, by the method of constrained variation and by the

method of Lagrange multipliers.

Use Kuhn-Tucker conditions to solve multivariable optimization problem with inequality constraints.

Use simplex method for the solving optimization problem represented by linear set of equations.

Solve linear transportation problem.

Explain Non-Linear Programming - One Dimensional Minimization Methods of solving optimization

problems.∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem analysis.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Engineering Optimization Singiresu S Rao (S S Rao) Wiley 1996

2 Applied Nonlinear Programming David Mautner Himmelblau Mc Graw Hill 1972

20

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

POWER SYSTEM VOLTAGE STABILITY (Elective Course)

Subject Code 16EPS154 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 03

Course objectives: Explain the importance of reactive power transmission, voltage stability in power system and reactive

power compensation and control.

To explain static and dynamic characteristics of loads and generation characteristics.

To explain voltage stability improvement of large power systems by different methods.

To explain voltage stability of systems with HVDC links and setting different operating guidelines for

generation and transmission systems. ∎

Module-1 Teaching

Hours Electric Power Systems: Introduction to Power System Analysis and Operation, Active and

Reactive Power Transmission, Difficulties with Reactive Power Transmission, Short Circuit

Capacity, Short Circuit Ratio, and Voltage, Regulation.

Voltage Stability: Voltage Stability, Voltage Collapse, and Voltage Security, Time Frames for

Voltage Instability, Mechanisms, Relation of Voltage Stability to Rotor Angle Stability, Voltage

Instability in Mature Power Systems, P-V and V – Q Curves, Graphical Explanation of Longer-Term

Voltage Stability.

Reactive Power Compensation and Control: Transmission System Characteristics, Series

Capacitors, Shunt Capacitor Banks and Shunt Reactors, Static Var Systems, Comparisons between

Series and Shunt Compensation, Synchronous Condensers, Transmission Network LTC

Transformers.∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding.

Module-2

Power System Loads: Overview of Subtransmission and Distribution Networks, Static and Dynamic

Characteristics of Load Components, Reactive Compensation of Loads, LTC Transformers and

Distribution Voltage Regulators. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding.

Module-3 Generation Characteristics: Generator Reactive Power Capability, Generator Control and

Protection, System Response to Power Impacts, Power Plant Response, Automatic Generation

Control (AGC). ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding.

Module-4

Voltage Stability of a Large System: System Description, Load Modelling and Testing, Power

Flow Analysis, 7.4 Dynamic Performance Including Undervoltage Load Shedding, Automatic

Control of Mechanically Switched Capacitors. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

21

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

16EPS154 POWER SYSTEM VOLTAGE STABILITY (Elective Course) (continued)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) Module-5 Teaching

Hours Voltage Stability with HVDC Links: Basic Equations for HVDC, HVDC Operation, Voltage

Collapse, Voltage Stability Concepts Based on Short Circuit Ratio, Power System Dynamic

Performance,

Power System Planning and Operating Guidelines: Solutions: Generation System, Solutions:

Transmission System, Distribution and Load Systems, Power System Operation, Voltage Stability

Challenge. ∎

08

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing.

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to: Explain in detail the voltage stability problem.

Explain reactive power compensation and control to minimize the voltage stability problem.

Explain the dynamic characteristics of load components and generators in the systems.

Suggest suitable method for voltage stability improvement of large power system.

Provide a solution for the voltage stability problem of system with HVDC links.

Explain operating guidelines for transmission and generation system. ∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem analysis.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions.

Each full question is for 16 marks.

There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions in one full question) from each module.

Each full question with sub questions will cover the contents under a module.

Students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module. ∎

Text/Reference Books

1 Power System Voltage Stability Carson W. Taylor McGraw-Hill 1994

2 Voltage Stability of Electric Power

Systems

Van Cutsem, Thierry et al Springer 1998

3 Power System Stability and Control P.Kundur McGraw-Hill 1994

22

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

POWER SYSTEMS LABORATORY-I

Subject Code 16EPSL16 IA Marks 20

Number of Practical Hours/Week 03 Exam Hours 03

Total Number of Practical Hours 40 Exam Marks 80

Credits - 02

Course objectives: Conduct of experiment for operator request power flow analysis, contingency analysis and ranking for a

interconnected power system.

Conduct of experiment for ATC computation, open access feasibility study, reactive power optimization

and loss minimization studies.

Conduct of experiments for economic dispatch problem, observability analysis, state estimation and bad

data detection.

Conduction of experiments for relay coordination and harmonic analysis. ∎

Sl.NO

Experiments

1 Operator request load flow using voltage and frequency dependent load modelling and generator droop

characteristic.

2 Contingency analysis and Ranking for a given inter connected power system having minimum ten buses and

ten series elements.

3 Obtaining of PV & PQ curve for a given power system with load buses and Voltage instability analysis.

4 ATC computation and open access feasibility studies for the given power system network.

5 Reactive power optimization and loss minimization studies for a given power system.

6 Economic dispatch problem taking into account the network loading constraints and computation of bus

incremental cost.

7 Observability analysis, state estimation and bad data detection for a given power system using measurement

data.

8 Sequence impedance diagram development and distribution of earth fault current computation in a practical

power system having auto transformers with tertiary delta winding, star-delta and delta-star configurations.

9 Over current relay co-ordination with and without instantaneous setting for a given network with NI relay

characteristic curves.

10 Harmonic analysis and voltage and current harmonic distortion computation for a given power system.

Tuned filter design to eliminate the harmonic currents.

Revised Bloom’s

Taxonomy Level L1 – Remembering, L2 – Understanding, L3 – Applying, L4 – Analysing, L5 – Evaluating.

Course outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

Apply the knowledge of electrical engineering in conducting different experiment in the laboratory.

Use suitable simulation software package for the conduction of experiments and analyze the results.∎

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Conduct investigations of complex Problems, Modern Tool Usage,

Individual and Team work, Communication.

23

M.TECH POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

SEMESTER - I

SEMINAR

Course Code 16EPS17 IA Marks 100

No. of Lecture Hours/Week -- Exam Hours --

Number of contact Hours/week 03 Number of Tutorial Hours/week -- Total No. of contact Hours -- Exam Marks --

Credits - 01

The objective of the seminar is to inculcate self-learning, face audience confidently, enhance communication

skill, involve in group discussion and present and exchange ideas.

Each student, under the guidance of a Faculty, is required to

Choose, preferably, a recent topic of his/her interest relevant to the Course of Specialization.

Carryout literature survey, organize the Course topics in a systematic order.

Prepare the report with own sentences.

Type the matter to acquaint with the use of Micro-soft equation and drawing tools or any such

facilities.

Present the seminar topic orally and/or through power point slides.

Answer the queries and involve in debate/discussion.

Submit two copies of the typed report with a list of references.

The participants shall take part in discussion to foster friendly and stimulating environment in which the

students are motivated to reach high standards and become self-confident.

The Internal Assessment marks for the seminar shall be awarded (based on the relevance of the topic,

presentation skill, participation in the question and answer session and quality of report) by the committee

constituted for the purpose by the Head of the Department. The committee shall consist of three faculties from

the department with the senior most acting as the Chairman. ∎

Marks distribution for internal assessment of the course 16EPS17 seminar: Seminar Report: 30 marks

Presentation skill:50 marks

Question and Answer:20 marks

Graduate Attributes (As per NBA): Engineering Knowledge, Problem Analysis, Design / development of solutions, Conduct investigations of

complex Problems, Modern Tool Usage, Engineers and society, Environment and sustainability, Ethics,

Individual and Team work, Communication.

*** END ***

24

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELAGAVI

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION - 2016-17

M.Tech POWER SYSTEM ENGINEERING (EPS)

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) (Total number of credits prescribed for the programme - 85)

II SEMESTER

Sl.

No

Subject

Code

Title

Teaching Hours /Week Examination

Cre

dit

s

Theory

Practical/

Field work/

Assignment

Duration

in hours

I.A.

Marks

Theory/

Practical

Marks

Total

Marks

1 16EPS21 Power Electronic

Converters 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

2 16EPS22 Insulators for Power

System 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

3 16EPS23 Switching in Power

Systems 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

4 16EPS24 FACTS Controllers 04 -- 03 20 80 100 4

5 16EPS25X Elective - 2 03 -- 03 20 80 100 3

6 16EPSL26 Power System

Laboratory - II - 3 03 20 80 100 2

7 16EPS 27 Seminar - 3 - 100 - 100 1

TOTAL 19 06 18 220 480 700 22

Number of credits completed at the end of II semester: 22+ 22 = 44

Elective - 2

Courses under Code 16EPS25X Title

16EPS251 Restructured Power Systems

16EPS252 Smart Grid

16EPS253 Power Quality Problems and Mitigation

16EPS254 Substation Automation Systems

Note: Project Phase-1: 6-week duration shall be carried out between 2nd and 3rd Semester vacation. Candidates in consultation

with the guide shall carry out literature survey/ visit industries to finalize the topic of Project.

ADVANCES IN OPERATING SYSTEMS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCS11 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Define the fundamentals of Operating Systems. Explain distributed operating system concepts that includes architecture, Mutual exclusion

algorithms, Deadlock detection algorithms and agreement protocols

Illustrate distributed resource management components viz. the algorithms forimplementation of distributed shared memory, recovery and commit protocols

Identify the components and management aspects of Real time, Mobile operating Systems

Module 1 Teaching Hours

Operating System Overview, Process description & Control: Operating System Objectives and Functions, The Evolution of Operating Systems, Major Achievements, Developments Leading to Modern Operating Systems, Microsoft Windows Overview, Traditional UNIX Systems, Modern UNIX Systems, What is a Process?, Process States, Process Description, Process Control, Execution of the Operating System, Security Issues.

10 Hours

Module 2 Threads, SMP, and Microkernel, Virtual Memory: Processes and Threads, Symmetric Multiprocessing (SMP), Micro Kernels, Windows Vista Thread and SMP Hours Management, Linux Process and Thread Management. Hardware and Control Structures, Operating System Software, UNIX Memory Management, Windows Vista Memory Management, Summary

10 Hours

Module 3 Multiprocessor and Real-Time Scheduling: Multiprocessor Scheduling, Real-Time Scheduling, Linux Scheduling, UNIX PreclsSl) Scheduling, Windows Vista Hours Scheduling, Process Migration, Distributed Global States, Distributed Mutual Exclusion, Distributed Deadlock

10 Hours

Module 4 Embedded Operating Systems: Embedded Systems, Characteristics of Embedded Operating Systems, eCOS, TinyOS, Computer Security Concepts, Threats, Attacks, and Assets, Intruders, Malicious Software Overview, Viruses, Worms, and Bots, Rootkits.

10 Hours

Module 5 Kernel Organization: Using Kernel Services, Daemons, Starting the Kernel, Control in the Machine , Modules and Device Management, MODULE Organization, MODULE Installation and Removal, Process and Resource Management,Running Process Manager, Creating a new Task , IPC and Synchronization, The Scheduler , Memory Manager , The Virtual Address Space, The Page Fault Handler , File Management. The windows NT/2000/XP kernel: Introduction, The NT kernel, Objects , Threads, Multiplication Synchronization,Traps,Interrupts and Exceptions, The NT executive , Object Manager, Process and Thread Manager , Virtual Memory Manager, I/o Manager, The cache Manager Kernel local procedure calls and IPC, The native API, subsystems.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Demonstrate the Mutual exclusion, Deadlock detection and agreement protocols ofDistributed operating system

Learn the various resource management techniques for distributed systems

1

Identify the different features of real time and mobile operating system Modify existing open source kernels in terms of functionality or features used

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. William Stallings: Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, 6th Edition,

Prentice Hall, 2013. 2. Gary Nutt: Operating Systems, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2014.

Reference Books: 1. Silberschatz, Galvin, Gagne: Operating System Concepts, 8th Edition, Wiley, 2008

2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Albert S. Woodhull: Operating Systems, Design and Implementation, 3

rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006.

3. Pradeep K Sinha: Distribute Operating Systems, Concept and Design, PHI, 2007

CLOUD COMPUTING

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCS12/16SCE12

16SIT22/16SSE254 16SCN22/16LNI151

IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80 Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Define and Cloud, models and Services.

Compare and contrast programming for cloud and their applications Explain virtuaization, Task Scheduling algorithms.

Apply ZooKeeper, Map-Reduce concept to applications.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours Introduction, Cloud Infrastructure: Cloud computing, Cloud computing delivery models and services, Ethical issues, Cloud vulnerabilities, Cloud computing at Amazon, Cloud computing the Google perspective, Microsoft Windows Azure and online services, Open-source software platforms for private clouds, Cloud storage diversity and vendor lock-in, Energy use and ecological impact, Service level agreements, User experience and software licensing. Exercises and problems.

10 Hours

Module 2 Cloud Computing: Application Paradigms.: Challenges of cloud computing, Architectural styles of cloud computing, Workflows: Coordination of multiple activities, Coordination based on a state machine model: The Zookeeper, The Map Reduce programming model, A case study: The Gre The Web application, Cloud for science and engineering, High-performance computing on a cloud, Cloud computing for Biology research, Social computing, digital content and cloud computing.

10 Hours

Module 3 Cloud Resource Virtualization: Virtualization, Layering and virtualization, Virtual machine monitors, Virtual Machines, Performance and Security Isolation, Full virtualization and paravirtualization, Hardware support for virtualization, Case Study:

10 Hours

2

Xen a VMM based paravirtualization, Optimization of network virtualization, vBlades, Performance comparison of virtual machines, The dark side of virtualization, Exercises and problems

Module 4 Cloud Resource Management and Scheduling: Policies and mechanisms for resource management, Application of control theory to task scheduling on a cloud, Stability of a two-level resource allocation architecture, Feedback control based on dynamic thresholds, Coordination of specialized autonomic performance managers, A utility-based model for cloud-based Web services, Resourcing bundling: Combinatorial auctions for cloud resources, Scheduling algorithms for computing clouds, Fair queuing, Start-time fair queuing, Borrowed virtual time, Cloud scheduling subject to deadlines, Scheduling MapReduce applications subject to deadlines, Resource management and dynamic scaling, Exercises and problems.

10 Hours

Module 5 Cloud Security, Cloud Application Development: Cloud security risks, Security: The top concern for cloud users, Privacy and privacy impact assessment, Trust, Operating system security, Virtual machine Security, Security of virtualization, Security risks posed by shared images, Security risks posed by a management OS, A trusted virtual machine monitor, Amazon web services: EC2 instances, Connecting clients to cloud instances through firewalls, Security rules for application and transport layer protocols in EC2, How to launch an EC2 Linux instance and connect to it, How to use S3 in java, Cloud-based simulation of a distributed trust algorithm, A trust management service, A cloud service for adaptive data streaming, Cloud based optimal FPGA synthesis .Exercises and problems.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Compare the strengths and limitations of cloud computing

Identify the architecture, infrastructure and delivery models of cloud computing

Apply suitable virtualization concept.

Choose the appropriate cloud player

Address the core issues of cloud computing such as security, privacy and interoperability

Design Cloud Services

Set a private cloud

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Dan C Marinescu: Cloud Computing Theory and Practice. Elsevier(MK) 2013.

Reference Books: 1. Rajkumar Buyya , James Broberg, Andrzej Goscinski: Cloud Computing Principles and

Paradigms, Willey 2014. 2. John W Rittinghouse, James F Ransome:Cloud Computing Implementation, Management

and Security, CRC Press 2013.

3

ADVANCES IN DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] (Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SSE151/ 16SIT13/

16SCS13 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Define parallel and distributed databases and its applications.

Show applications of Object Oriented database

Explain basic concepts, principles of intelligent databases.

Utilize the advanced topics of data warehousing and mining .

Infer emerging and advanced data models

Extend knowledge in research topics of databases.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Review of Relational Data Model and Relational Database Constraints: Relational model concepts; Relational model constraints and relational database schemas; Update operations, anomalies, dealing with constraint violations, Types and violations. Overview of Object-Oriented Concepts – Objects, Basic properties. Advantages, examples, Abstract data types, Encapsulation, class hierarchies, polymorphism, examples.

10 Hours

Module 2 Object and Object-Relational Databases: Overview of OOP; Complex objects; Identity, structure etc. Object model of ODMG, Object definition Language ODL; Object Query Language OQL; Conceptual design of Object database. Overview of object relational features of SQL; Object-relational features of Oracle; Implementation and related issues for extended type systems; syntax and demo examples, The nested relational model. Overview of C++ language binding;

10 Hours

Module 3 Parallel and Distributed Databases: Architectures for parallel databases; Parallel query evaluation; Parallelizing individual operations; Parallel query optimizations; Introduction to distributed databases; Distributed DBMS architectures; Storing data in a Distributed DBMS; Distributed catalog management; Distributed Query processing; Updating distributed data; Distributed transactions; Distributed Concurrency control and Recovery.

10 Hours

Module 4 Data Warehousing, Decision Support and Data Mining: Introduction to decision support; OLAP, multidimensional model; Window queries in SQL; Finding answers quickly; Implementation techniques for OLAP; Data Warehousing; Views and Decision support, View materialization, Maintaining materialized views. Introduction to Data Mining; Counting co-occurrences; Mining for rules; Tree-structured rules; ROC and CMC Curves; Clustering; Similarity search over sequences; Incremental mining and data streams; Additional data mining tasks.

10 Hours

Module 5 Enhanced Data Models for Some Advanced Applications: Active database concepts and triggers; Temporal, Spatial, and Deductive Databases – Basic concepts. More Recent Applications: Mobile databases; Multimedia databases; Geographical Information Systems; Genome data management.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

4

Select the appropriate high performance database like parallel and distributed database

Infer and represent the real world data using object oriented database

Interpret rule set in the database to implement data warehousing of mining Discover and design database for recent applications database for better interoperability

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Elmasri and Navathe: Fundamentals of Database Systems, Pearson Education, 2013. 2. Raghu Ramakrishnan and Johannes Gehrke: Database Management Systems, 3rd Edition,

McGraw-Hill, 2013.

Reference Books: 1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudarshan: Database System Concepts, 6th

Edition, McGraw Hill, 2010.

PROBABILITY STATISTICS AND QUEUING THEORY [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16LNI14 /

16SCN14/16SCS14/ 16SSE14 / 16SIT14

/16SCE14 / 16SFC14

IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80 Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Develop analytical capability and to impart knowledge of Probability, Statistics and Queuing.

Apply above concepts in Engineering and Technology. Acquire knowledge of Hypothesis testing and Queuing methods and their applications so as to

enable them to apply them for solving real world problems

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Axioms of probability, Conditional probability, Total probability, Baye’s theorem, Discrete Random variable, Probability mass function, Continuous Random variable. Probability density function, Cumulative Distribution Function, and its properties, Two-dimensional Random variables, Joint pdf / cdf and their properties

10 Hours

Module 2 Probability Distributions / Discrete distributions: Binomial, Poisson Geometric and Hyper-geometric distributions and their properties. Continuous distributions: Uniform, Normal, exponential distributions and their properties.

10 Hours

Module 3 Random Processes: Classification, Methods of description, Special classes, Average values of Random Processes, Analytical representation of Random Process, Autocorrelation Function, Cross-correlation function and their properties, Ergodicity, Poisson process, Markov Process, Markov chain.

10 Hours

Module 4 Testing Hypothesis: Testing of Hypothesis: Formulation of Null hypothesis, critical 10 Hours

5

region, level of significance, errors in testing, Tests of significance for Large and Small Samples, t-distribution, its properties and uses, F-distribution, its properties and uses, Chi-square distribution, its properties and uses, χ2 – test for goodness of fit, χ2 test for Independence

Module 5 Symbolic Representation of a Queuing Model, Poisson Queue system, Little Law, Types of Stochastic Processes, Birth-Death Process, The M/M/1 Queuing System, The M/M/s Queuing System, The M/M/s Queuing with Finite buffers.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Demonstrate use of probability and characterize probability models using probability mass (density) functions & cumulative distribution functions.

Explain the techniques of developing discrete & continuous probability distributions and its applications.

Describe a random process in terms of its mean and correlation functions.

Outline methods of Hypothesis testing for goodness of fit.

Define the terminology &nomenclature appropriate queuing theory and also distinguish various queuing models.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Probability, Statistics and Queuing Theory, V. Sundarapandian, Eastern Economy Edition,

PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2009.

Reference Books: 1. Probability & Statistics with Reliability, Queuing and Computer Applications, 2

nd Edition

by Kishor. S. Trivedi , Prentice Hall of India ,2004. 2. Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, 1

st Edition by P Kausalya, Pearson

Education, 2013.

ADVANCES IN DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCS151 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Explain image fundamentals and mathematical transforms necessary for image processing

and to study the image enhancement techniques. Demonstrate the image segmentation and representation techniques. How image are analyzed to extract features of interest. Introduce the concepts of image registration and image fusion. Analyze the constraints in image processing when dealing with 3D data sets.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction: What is Digital Image Processing, Origins of Digital Image Processing, Examples of fields that use DIP, Fundamental Steps in Digital Image Processing,

8 Hours

6

Components of an Image Processing System. Digital Image Fundamentals: Elements of Visual Perception, A Simple Image Formation Model, Basic Concepts in Sampling and Quantization, Representing Digital Images, Spatial and Gray-level Resolution, Zooming and Shrinking Digital Images, Some Basic Relationships Between Pixels, Linear and Nonlinear Operations.

Module 2 Image Enhancement in the Spatial Domain: Some Basic Gray Level Transformations, Histogram Processing, Enhancement Using Arithmetic/Logic Operations, Basics of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing Spatial Filters, Sharpening Spatial Filters, Combining Spatial Enhancement Methods. Image Enhancement in the Frequency Domain: Introduction to the Fourier Transform and the Frequency Domain, Smoothing frequency-Domain Filters, Sharpening Frequency-Domain Filters, Homomorphic Filtering.

8 Hours

Module 3 Image Restoration: A Model of the Image degradation/Restoration process, Noise Models, Restoration in the Presence of Noise Only– Spatial Filtering, Periodic Noise Reduction by Frequency Domain Filtering, Linear, Position-Invariant Degradations, Estimating the Degradation Function, Inverse Filtering ,Minimum Mean Square Error (Wiener) Filtering, Constrained Least Square Filtering, Geometric Mean Filter.

8 Hours

Module 4 Color Fundamentals: Color Models, Pseudocolor Image Processing, Basics of Full-Color Image Processing, Color Transformations, Smoothing and Sharpening, Color Segmentation, Noise in Color Images, Color Image Compression. Wavelets and Multiresolution Processing: Image Pyramids, Subband coding, The Haar Transform, Multiresolution Expansions, Wavelet Transforms in one Dimension, Fast Wavelet Transform, Wavelet Transforms in Two Dimensions, Wavelet Packets. Image Compression: Fundamentals, Image Compression Models, Error-free (Lossless) compression, Lossy Compression

8 Hours

Module 5 Morphological Image Processing: Preliminaries, Dilation and Erosion, Opening and Closing, The Hit-or-Miss Transformation, Some Basic Morphological Algorithms. Image Segmentation: Detection of Discontinuities, Edge Linking and Boundary Detection, Thresholding, Region-Based Segmentation.

8 Hours

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

Explain image formation and the role human visual system plays in perception of gray and color image data.

Apply image processing techniques in both the spatial and frequency (Fourier) domains.

Design image analysis techniques in the form of image segmentation and to evaluate the Methodologies for segmentation.

Conduct independent study and analysis of feature extraction techniques.

Explain the concepts of image registration and image fusion.

Analyze the constraints in image processing when dealing with 3D data sets and to apply image

Apply algorithms in practical applications.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods: Digital Image Processing, PHI 2

nd Edition

2005.

Reference Books:

7

1. S. Sridhar, Digital Image Processing, Oxford University Press India, 2011. 2. A. K. Jain: Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, Pearson, 2004. 3. Scott E. Umbaugh: Digital Image Processing and Analysis, CRC Press, 2014. 4. S. Jayaraman, S. Esakkirajan, T. Veerakumar: Digital Image Processing, McGraw Hill Ed.

(India) Pvt. Ltd., 2013. 5. Anthony Scime, “Web Mining Applications and Techniques”, Idea Group Publishing,2005.

EMBEDDED COMPUTING SYSTEMS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] (Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCE13

/16SCS152 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Explain a general overview of Embedded Systems

Show current statistics of Embedded Systems

Examine a complete microprocessor-based hardware system

Design, code, compile, and test real-time software

Integrate a fully functional system including hardware and software

Make intelligent choices between hardware/software tradeoffs

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction to embedded systems: Embedded systems, Processor embedded into a system, Embedded hardware units and device in a system, Embedded software in a system, Examples of embedded systems, Design process in embedded system, Formalization of system design, Design process and design examples, Classification of embedded systems, skills required for an embedded system designer.

8 Hours

Module 2

Devices and communication buses for devices network: IO types and example, Serial communication devices, Parallel device ports, Sophisticated interfacing features in device ports, Wireless devices, Timer and counting devices, Watchdog timer, Real time clock, Networked embedded systems, Serial bus communication protocols, Parallel bus device protocols-parallel communication internet using ISA, PCI, PCI-X and advanced buses, Internet enabled systems-network protocols, Wireless and mobile system protocols.

8 Hours

Module 3

Device drivers and interrupts and service mechanism: Programming-I/O busy-wait approach without interrupt service mechanism, ISR concept, Interrupt sources, Interrupt servicing (Handling) Mechanism, Multiple interrupts, Context and the periods for context switching, interrupt latency and deadline, Classification of processors interrupt service mechanism from Context-saving angle, Direct memory access, Device driver programming.

8 Hours

Module 4

Inter process communication and synchronization of processes, Threads and tasks: Multiple process in an application, Multiple threads in an application, Tasks, Task states, Task and Data, Clear-cut distinction between functions. ISRS and tasks by their characteristics, concept and semaphores, Shared data, Inter-process communication,

8 Hours

8

Signal function, Semaphore functions, Message Queue functions, Mailbox functions, Pipe functions, Socket functions, RPC functions.

Module 5

Real-time operating systems: OS Services, Process management, Timer functions, Event functions, Memory management, Device, file and IO subsystems management, Interrupt routines in RTOS environment and handling of interrupt source calls, Real-time operating systems, Basic design using an RTOS, RTOS task scheduling models, interrupt latency and response of the tasks as performance metrics, OS security issues. Introduction to embedded software development process and tools, Host and target machines, Linking and location software.

8 Hours

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

Distinguish the characteristics of embedded computer systems.

Examine the various vulnerabilities of embedded computer systems.

Design an embedded system. Design and develop modules using RTOS.

Implement RPC, threads and tasks

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming, and Design” 2nd

edition , Tata McGraw hill-2013.

Reference Books: 1. Marilyn Wolf, “Computer as Components, Principles of Embedded Computing System

Design” 3rd edition, Elsevier-2014.

ADVANCES IN STORAGE AREA NETWORKS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SSE153 / 16LNI254 /

16SCS153 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Define and contrast storage centric and server centric systems

Define metrics used for Designing storage area networks

Illustrate RAID concepts

Demonstrate, how data centers maintain the data with the concepts of backup mainly remote mirroring concepts for both simple and complex systems.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction: Server Centric IT Architecture and its Limitations; Storage – Centric IT Architecture and its advantages. Case study: Replacing a server with Storage Networks The Data Storage and Data Access problem; The Battle for size and access. Intelligent Disk Subsystems: Architecture of Intelligent Disk Subsystems; Hard disks and Internal

8 Hours

9

I/O Channels; JBOD, Storage virtualization using RAID and different RAID levels; Caching: Acceleration of Hard Disk Access; Intelligent disk subsystems, Availability of disk subsystems.

Module 2 I/O Techniques : The Physical I/O path from the CPU to the Storage System; SCSI; Fibre Channel Protocol Stack; Fibre Channel SAN; IP Storage. Network Attached Storage: The NAS Architecture, The NAS hardware Architecture, The NAS Software Architecture, Network connectivity, NAS as a storage system. File System and NAS: Local File Systems; Network file Systems and file servers; Shared Disk file systems; Comparison of fibre Channel and NAS.

8 Hours

Module 3 Storage Virtualization: Definition of Storage virtualization; Implementation Considerations; Storage virtualization on Block or file level; Storage virtualization on various levels of the storage Network; Symmetric and Asymmetric storage virtualization in the Network.

8 Hours

Module 4 SAN Architecture and Hardware devices : Overview, Creating a Network for storage; SAN Hardware devices; The fibre channel switch; Host Bus Adaptors; Putting the storage in SAN; Fabric operation from a Hardware perspective. Software Components of SAN: The switch’s Operating system; Device Drivers; Supporting the switch’s components; Configuration options for SANs.

8 Hours

Module 5 Management of Storage Network: System Management, Requirement of management System, Support by Management System, Management Interface, Standardized Mechanisms, Property Mechanisms, In-band Management, Use of SNMP, CIM and WBEM, Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S), CMIP and DMI, Optional Aspects of the Management of Storage Networks, Summary

8 Hours

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Identify the need for performance evaluation and the metrics used for it

Apply the techniques used for data maintenance.

Realize strong virtualization concepts

Develop techniques for evaluating policies for LUN masking, file systems

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Ulf Troppens, Rainer Erkens and Wolfgang Muller: Storage Networks Explained, Wiley

India,2013.

Reference Books: 1. Robert Spalding: “Storage Networks The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011. 2. Marc Farley: Storage Networking Fundamentals – An Introduction to Storage Devices,

Subsystems, Applications, Management, and File Systems, Cisco Press, 2005. 3. Richard Barker and Paul Massiglia: “Storage Area Network Essentials A Complete Guide to

understanding and Implementing SANs”, Wiley India, 2006.

10

ADVANCES IN COMPUTER GRAPHICS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCS154 /16SIT422 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Explain basic and fundamental computer graphics techniques. Compare and contrast image synthesis techniques.

Examine applications of modeling, design and visualization.

Discuss different color modeling and computer animation.

Explain hierarchical modeling and graphing file formats.

Module 1 Teaching Hours

Three-Dimensional Object Representations: Polyhedra, OpenGL Polyhedron Functions, Curved Surfaces, Quadric Surfaces, Super quadrics, OpenGL Quadric-Surface and Cubic-Surface Functions, Blobby Objects, Spline Representations, Cubic-Spline Interpolation Methods, Bezier Spline Curves, Bazier Surfaces B-Spline Curves, B-Spline Surfaces, Beta- Splines, Retional Splines, Conversion Between Spline Representations, Displaying Spline Curves and rfaces, OpenGL Approximation-Spline Functions, Sweep Representations, Constructive Solid –Geometry Method, Octrees, BSP T rees, Fractal-Geometry Methods, Shape Grammars and Others Procedural Methods, Particle Systems, Physically Based Modeling, Visualization Of Data Sets.

8 Hours

Module 2 Visible-Surface Detection Methods: Classification Of Visible –Surface Detection Algorithms, Back-Face Method, Depth-Buffer Method, A-Buffer Method, Scan-Line Method, BSP-Tree Method, Area-Subdivision Method, Octree Methods, Ray-Casting Method, Comparison of Visibility –Detection Methods, Curved Surfaces, Wire-Frame Visibility –De tection Functions

8 Hours

Module 3 Illumination Models and Surface- Rendering Methods: Light Sources, Surface Lighting Effects, Basic Illumination Models, Transparent Surfaces, Atmospheric Effects, Shadows, Camera parameters, Displaying light intensities, Halftone patterns anddithering techniques, polygon rendering methods, ray-tracing methods, Radiosity lighting model, Environment mapping, Photon mapping, Adding surface details, Modeling surface details with polygons, Texture mapping, Bump mapping, OpenGL Illumination and surface-rendering functions, openGL texture functions.

8 Hours

Module 4 Color models, color applications and Computer animation: Properties of light, Color models, Standard primaries and the chromaticity diagram, The RGB color model, The YIQ and related color models, The CMY and CMYK color models, The HSV color model, The HLS color model, Color Selection and applications. Raster methods for computer animation, Design of animations sequences, Traditional animation techniques, General computer-animation functions, Computer-animation languages, Key-frame systems, Motion specification, Articulated figure animation, Periodic motions, OpenGL animation procedures.

8 Hours

Module 5 Hierarchical modeling and Graphics file formats: Basic modeling concepts, Modeling packages, General hierarchical modeling methods, Hierarchical modeling using openGL display list, Image-File configurations, Color-reduction methods, File-compression techniques, Composition of the major file formats.

8 Hours

11

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Discuss and implement images and objects using 3D representation and openGL methodologies.

Design and develop surface detection using various detection methods.

Choose various illumination models for provides effective standards of objects.

Design of develop effective computer animations.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Computer Graphics with openGL-Hearn Baker 4

rd edition, Pearson publication.2010.

2. James D Foley,Andries van dam,Steven K Feiner,John F Hughes, Computer graphics, Pearson Education 3

rd edition, 2013.

Reference Books:

1. Edward Angel: Interactive Computer graphics a top-down approach with

openGL, Addison Wesley, 6th edition 2012. 2. Advanced graphics programming using openGL: Tom Mc Reynolds-David

Blythe. Elesvier.MK, 2005.

OPERATING SYSTEMS AND ADBMS LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCS16 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01+03 Exam Marks 80 Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

To provide students with contemporary knowledge in Data Compression and Coding.

To equip students with skills to analyze and evaluate different Data Compression and Coding methods

To be instrumental to handle multi dimension data compression

To acquire practical knowledge on advanced databases and its applications.

To analyze and work on areas like Storage, Retrieval, Multi valued attributes, Triggers and other complex objects, Algorithms etc related to ADBMS.

To design and implement recent applications database for better interoperability

PART – A OS LABORATORY WORK:

1. Design and Develop a UNIX/LINUX shell program that should support at least 10 commands(Assume suitable application). OR Design a front-end application upon click of a button corresponding shell command should be executed.

2. 3. 2.Design and develop a program to implement lazy buddy system algorithm. 4. 5. 3.Write a multi-class multithreaded program that simulates multiple sleeping barbers, all in

one barbershop that has a finite number of chairs in the waiting room. Each customer is instantiated from a single customer class; each barber is instantiated from a single Barber

12

class. 6. 7. 4.Create two process and demonstrate the usage of Shared segment by the above

processes(use shmget, signal, fork etc. to simulate the working environment of the program).

8. 9. 5.Design and develop a program to realize the virus classification, such as boot sector

infector, file infector and macro

PART – B ADBMS LABORATORY WORK

Note: The following experiments may be implemented on MySQL/ORACLE or any other suitable RDBMS with support for Object features

1. Develop a database application to demonstrate storing and retrieving of BLOB and

CLOB objects. a. Write a binary large object (BLOB) to a database as either binary or character (CLOB)

data, depending on the type of the field in your data source. To write a BLOB value to the database, issue the appropriate INSERT or UPDATE statement and pass the BLOB value as an input parameter. If your BLOB is stored as text, such as a SQL Server text field, pass the BLOB as a string parameter. If the BLOB is stored in binary format, such as a SQL Server image field, pass an array of type byte as a binary parameter.

b. Once storing of BLOB and CLOB objects is done, retrieve them and display the results accordingly.

2. Develop a database application to demonstrate the represe ntation of multi valued

attributes, and the use of nested tables to represent complex objects. Write suitable queries to demonstrate their use. Consider Purchase Order Example: This example is based on a typical business activity: managing customer orders. Need to demonstrate how the application might evolve from relational to object-relational, and how you could write it from scratch using a pure object-oriented approach. a. Show how to implement the schema -- Implementing the Application under the Relational

Model -- using only Oracle's built-in data types. Build an object-oriented application on top of this relational schema using object views

3. Design and develop a suitable Student Database application by considering appropriate

attributes. Couple of attributes to be maintained is the Attendance of a student in each

subject for which he/she has enrolled and Internal Assessment Using TRIGGERS, write

active rules to do the following: a. Whenever the attendance is updated, check if the attendance is less than 85%; if so, notify

the Head of the Department concerned. b. Whenever, the marks in an Internal Assessment Test are entered, check if the marks are

less than 40%; if so, notify the Head of the Department concerned.

Use the following guidelines when designing triggers:

Use triggers to guarantee that when a specific operation is performed, related actions are performed.

Use database triggers only for centralized, global operations that should be fired for the triggering statement, regardless of which user or database application issues the statement.

Do not define triggers that duplicate the functionality already built into Oracle. For example, do not define triggers to enforce data integrity rules that can be easily enforced using declarative integrity constraints.

Limit the size of triggers (60 lines or fewer is a good guideline). If the logic for your trigger requires much more than 60 lines of PL/SQL code, it is better to include most of the code in

13

a stored procedure, and call the procedure from the trigger.

Be careful not to create recursive triggers. For example, creating an AFTER UPDATE statement trigger on the EMP table that itself issues an UPDATE statement on EMP causes the trigger to fire recursively until it has run out of memory.

1. Design, develop, and execute a program to implement specific Apriori algorithm for

mining association rules. Run the program against any large database available in the

public domain and discuss the results. Association rules are if/then statements that help uncover relationships between seemingly unrelated data in a relational database or other information repository. An example of an association rule would be "If a customer buys a dozen eggs, he is 80% likely to also purchase milk.”

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Work on the concepts of Software Testing and ADBMS at the practical level

Compare and pick out the right type of software testing process for any given real world problem

Carry out the software testing process in efficient way

Establish a quality environment as specified in standards for developing quality software

Model and represent the real world data using object oriented database Embed the rules set in the database to implement various features of ADBMS

Choose, design and implement recent applications database for better interoperability

Conduction of Practical Examination: 1 . All laboratory experiments ( nos ) are to be included for practical examination. 2 . Students are allowed to pick one experiment from each part and execute both 3 . Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for breakup of

marks 4 . PART –A: Procedure + Conduction + Viva: 10 + 20 +10 (40) 5 . PART –B: Procedure + Conduction + Viva: 10 + 20 +10 (40)

6 . Change of experiment is allowed only once and marks allotted to the procedure part to

be made zero.

SEMINAR

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] (Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCE17 / 16SCN17 /

16LNI17 / 16SIT17 / 16SSE17 / 16SCS17 /

16SFC17

IA Marks 100

Number of Lecture Hours/Week ---- Exam Marks - Total Number of Lecture Hours ---- Exam Hours -

CREDITS – 01 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Motivate the students to read technical article

Discover recent technology developments

Descriptions The students should read a recent technical article (try to narrow down the topic as much as possible) from any of the leading reputed and refereed journals like:

1. IEEE Transactions, journals, magazines, etc. 2. ACM Transactions, journals, magazines, SIG series, etc.

14

3. Springer 4. Elsevier publications etc

In the area of (to name few and not limited to)

Web Technology

Cloud Computing

Artificial Intelligent

Networking

Security

Data mining

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

Conduct survey on recent technologies

Infer and interpret the information from the survey conducted

Motivated towards research

Conduction: The students have to present at least ONE technical seminar on the selected topic and submit a report for internal evaluation.

Marks Distribution: Literature Survey + Presentation (PPT) + Report + Question & Answer

+ Paper: 20 + 30 + 30 + 20 (100).

15

WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORKS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme] (Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16LNI251 / 16SCE421 / 16SCN11 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Explain fundamental principles of Ad-hoc Networks

Discuss a comprehensive understanding of Ad-hoc network protocols

Outline current and emerging trends in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks.

Analyze energy management in ad-hoc wireless networks.

Module -1 Teaching

Hours

Ad-hoc Wireless Networks Introduction, Issues in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks, Ad-hoc Wireless Internet; MAC Protocols for Ad-hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction, Issues in Designing a MAC Protocol, Design Goals of MAC Protocols, Classification of MAC protocols, Contention-Based Protocols, Contention-Based Protocols with Reservation Mechanisms, Contention-Based Protocols with Scheduling Mechanisms, MAC Protocols that Use Directional Antennas.

10Hours

Module -2

Routing Protocols for Ad-hoc Wireless Networks Introduction, Issues in Designing a Routing Protocol for Ad-hoc Wireless Networks; Classification of Routing Protocols; Table Driven Routing Protocols; On-Demand Routing Protocols, Hybrid Routing Protocols, Hierarchical Routing Protocols and Power-Aware Routing Protocols.

10 Hours

Module – 3

Multicast Routing in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks Introduction, Issues in Designing a Multicast Routing Protocol, Operation of Multicast Routing Protocols, An Architecture Reference Model for Multicast Routing Protocols, Classifications of Multicast Routing Protocols, Tree-Based Multicast Routing Protocols and Mesh-Based Multicast Routing Protocols.

10 Hours

Module-4

Transport Layer and Security Protocols for Ad-hoc Networks: Introduction, Issues in Designing a Transport Layer Protocol; Design Goals of a Transport Layer Protocol; Classification of Transport Layer Solutions; TCP over Transport Layer Solutions; Other Transport Layer Protocols for Ad-hoc Networks; Security in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks, Issues and Challenges in Security Provisioning, Network Security Attacks, Key Management and Secure Touting Ad-hoc Wireless Networks.

10 Hours

Module-5

Quality of Service and Energy Management in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction, Issues and Challenges in Providing QoS in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks, Classification of QoS Solutions, MAC Layer Solutions, Network Layer Solutions; Energy Management in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks: Introduction, Need for Energy Management in Ad-hoc Wireless Networks, Classification of Energy Management Schemes, Battery Management Schemes, Transmission Management Schemes, System Power Management Schemes.

10

Hours

Course outcomes:

The students shall able to:

Design their own wireless network

Evaluate the existing network and improve its quality of service

Choose appropriate protocol for various applications

Examine security measures present at different level

1

Analyze energy consumption and management

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. C. Siva Ram Murthy & B. S. Manoj: Ad-hoc Wireless Networks, 2

nd Edition, Pearson Education,

2011

Reference Books: 1. Ozan K. Tonguz and Gianguigi Ferrari: Ad-hoc Wireless Networks, John Wiley, 2007. 2. Xiuzhen Cheng, Xiao Hung, Ding-Zhu Du: Ad-hoc Wireless Networking, Kluwer Academic

Publishers, 2004. 3. C.K. Toh: Ad-hoc Mobile Wireless Networks- Protocols and Systems, Pearson Education, 2002

2

ADVANCES IN COMPUTER NETWORKS

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCN12/16SCS22 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80 Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Discuss with the basics of Computer Networks.

Compare various Network architectures.

Discuss fundamental protocols.

Define and analyze network traffic, congestion, controlling and resource allocation.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Foundation: Building a Network, Requirements, Perspectives, Scalable Connectivity, Cost-Effective Resource sharing, Support for Common Services, Manageability, Protocol layering, Performance, Bandwidth and Latency, Delay X Bandwidth Product, Perspectives on Connecting, Classes of Links, Reliable Transmission, Stop-and-Wait , Sliding Window, Concurrent Logical Channels. T1: Chapter 1.1, 1.2, 1.5.1, 1.5.2., 2.1, 2.5 T2: Chapter 4

10 Hours

Module 2 Internetworking I: Switching and Bridging, Datagram’s, Virtual Circuit Switching, Source Routing, Bridges and LAN Switches, Basic Internetworking (IP), What is an Internetwork?, Service Model, Global Addresses, Datagram Forwarding in IP, sub netting and classless addressing, Address Translation (ARP), Host Configuration (DHCP), Error Reporting (ICMP), Virtual Networks and Tunnels. T1: Chapter 3.1, 3.2,

10 Hours

Module 3 Internetworking- II: Network as a Graph, Distance Vector (RIP), Link State (OSPF), Metrics, The Global Internet, Routing Areas, Routing among Autonomous systems (BGP), IP Version 6 (IPv6), Mobility and Mobile IP T1: Chapter 3.3, 4.1.1,4.1.3 T2:Chapter 13.1 to 13.18 , Ch 18.

10 Hours

Module 4 End-to-End Protocols: Simple Demultiplexer (UDP), Reliable Byte Stream(TCP), End-to-End Issues, Segment Format, Connecting Establishment and Termination, Sliding Window Revisited, Triggering Transmission, Adaptive Retransmission, Record Boundaries, TCP Extensions, Queuing Disciplines, FIFO, Fair Queuing, TCP Congestion Control, Additive Increase/ Multiplicative Decrease, Slow Start, Fast Retransmit and Fast Recovery T1: Chapter 5.1, 5.2.1 to 5.2.8, 6.2, 6.3

10 Hours

Module 5 Congestion Control and Resource Allocation Congestion-Avoidance Mechanisms, DEC bit, Random Early Detection (RED), Source-Based Congestion Avoidance. The Domain Name System (DNS), Electronic Mail (SMTP,POP,IMAP,MIME), World Wide Web (HTTP), Network Management (SNMP) T1: Chapter 6.4 T2: Chapter 23.1 to 23.16, Chapter 24, Chapter 25, Chapter 27.1 to 27.8

10 Hours

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

3

List and classify network services, protocols and architectures, explain why they are layered.

Choose key Internet applications and their protocols, and apply to develop their own applications (e.g. Client Server applications, Web Services) using the sockets API.

Explain develop effective communication mechanisms using techniques like connection establishment, queuing theory, recovery Etc.

Explain various congestion control techniques.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Larry Peterson and Bruce S Davis “Computer Networks :A System Approach” 5th

Edition , Elsevier -2014.

2. Douglas E Comer, “Internetworking with TCP/IP, Principles, Protocols and Architecture” 6th Edition, PHI – 2014.

Reference Books: 1. Uyless Black, “Computer Networks, Protocols , Standards and Inte rfaces” 2 nd Edition -

PHI. 2. Behrouz A Forouzan, “TCP /IP Protocol Suite” 4 th Edition – Tata McGraw-Hill.

4

INFORMATION AND NETWORK SECURITY [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16LNI12/16SCN13/16SCS253 IA Marks 20 Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Explain standard algorithms used to provide confidentiality, integrity and authenticity.

Distinguish key distribution and management schemes.

Deploy encryption techniques to secure data in transit across data networks

Implement security applications in the field of Information technology

Module 1 Teaching

Hours Classical Encryption Techniques Symmetric Cipher Model, Cryptography, Cryptanalysis and Brute-Force Attack, Substitution Techniques, Caesar Cipher, Mono-alphabetic Cipher, Playfair Cipher, Hill Cipher, Poly alphabetic Cipher, One Time Pad. Block Ciphers and the data encryption standard: Traditional block Cipher structure, stream Ciphers and block Ciphers, Motivation for the feistel Cipher structure, the feistel Cipher, The data encryption standard, DES encryption, DES decryption, A DES example, results, the avalanche effect, the strength of DES, the use of 56-Bit Keys, the nature of the DES algorithm, timing attacks, Block cipher design principles, number of rounds, design of function F, key schedule algorithm

10 Hours

Module 2 Public-Key Cryptography and RSA: Principles of public-key cryptosystems. Public-key cryptosystems. Applications for public-key cryptosystems, requirements for public-key cryptosystems. Public-key cryptanalysis. The RSA algorithm, description of the algorithm, computational aspects, the security of RSA. Other Public-Key

Cryptosystems: Diffie-hellman key exchange, The algorithm, key exchange protocols, man in the middle attack, Elgamal Cryptographic systems, Elliptic curve arithmetic, abelian groups, elliptic curves over real numbers, elliptic curves over Zp, elliptic curves overGF(2m), Elliptic curve cryptography, Analog of Diffie-hellman key exchange, Elliptic curve encryption/ decryption, security of Elliptic curve cryptography, Pseudorandom number generation based on an asymmetric cipher, PRNG based on RSA.

10 Hours

Module 3 Key Management and Distribution: Symmetric key distribution using Symmetric encryption, A key distribution scenario, Hierarchical key control, session key lifetime, a transparent key control scheme, Decentralized key control, controlling key usage, Symmetric key distribution using asymmetric encryption, simple secret key distribution, secret key distribution with confidentiality and authentication, A hybrid scheme, distribution of public keys, public announcement of public keys, publicly available directory, public key authority, public keys certificates, X-509 certificates. Certificates, X-509 version 3, public key infrastructure. User Authentication: Remote user Authentication principles, Mutual Authentication, one way Authentication, remote user Authentication using Symmetric encryption, Mutual Authentication, one way Authentication, Kerberos, Motivation , Kerberos version 4, Kerberos version 5, Remote user Authentication using Asymmetric encryption, Mutual Authentication, one way Authentication, federated identity management, identity management, identity federation, personal identity verification.

10 Hours

Module 4 Wireless network security: Wireless security, Wireless network threats, Wireless 10 Hours

5

network measures, mobile device security, security threats, mobile device security strategy, IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN overview, the Wi-Fi alliance, IEEE 802 protocol architecture. Security, IEEE 802.11i services, IEEE 802.11i phases of operation, discovery phase, Authentication phase, key management phase, protected data transfer phase, the IEEE 802.11i pseudorandom function. Web Security Considerations: Web Security Threats, Web Traffic Security Approaches. Secure Sockets Layer: SSL Architecture, SSL Record Protocol, Change Cipher Spec Protocol, Alert Protocol, and shake Protocol, Cryptographic Computations. Transport Layer Security: Version Number, Message Authentication Code, Pseudorandom Functions, Alert Codes, Cipher Suites, Client Certificate Types, Certificate Verify and Finished Messages, Cryptographic Computations, and Padding. HTTPS Connection Initiation, Connection Closure. Secure

Shell(SSH) Transport Layer Protocol, User Authentication Protocol, Connection Protocol

Module 5 Electronic Mail Security: Pretty good privacy, notation, operational; description, S/MIME, RFC5322, Multipurpose internet mail extensions, S/MIME functionality, S/MIME messages, S/MIME certificate processing, enhanced security services, Domain keys identified mail, internet mail architecture, E-Mail threats, DKIM strategy, DKIM functional flow. IP Security: IP Security overview, applications of IPsec, benefits of IPsec, Routing applications, IPsec documents, IPsec services, transport and tunnel modes, IP Security policy, Security associations, Security associations database, Security policy database, IP traffic processing, Encapsulating Security payload, ESP format, encryption and authentication algorithms, Padding, Anti replay service, transport and tunnel modes, combining security associations, authentication plus confidentiality, basic combinations of security associations, internet key exchange, key determinations protocol, header and payload formats, cryptographic suits.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

Analyze the vulnerabilities in any computing system and hence be able to design a security solution.

Identify the security issues in the network and resolve it.

Evaluate security mechanisms using rigorous approaches, including theoretical.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security, Pearson 6

th edition.

Reference Books: 1. V K Pachghare: Cryptography and Information Security.

6

PROBABILITY STATISTICS AND QUEUING THEORY [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16LNI14 /

16SCN14/16SCS14/ 16SSE14 / 16SIT14

/16SCE14 / 16SFC14

IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 Exam Marks 80 Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Develop analytical capability and to impart knowledge of Probability, Statistics and Queuing.

Apply above concepts in Engineering and Technology.

Acquire knowledge of Hypothesis testing and Queuing methods and their applications so as to enable them to apply them for solving real world problems

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Axioms of probability, Conditional probability, Total probability, Baye’s theorem, Discrete Random variable, Probability mass function, Continuous Random variable. Probability density function, Cumulative Distribution Function, and its properties, Two-dimensional Random variables, Joint pdf / cdf and their properties

10 Hours

Module 2 Probability Distributions / Discrete distributions: Binomial, Poisson Geometric and Hyper-geometric distributions and their properties. Continuous distributions: Uniform, Normal, exponential distributions and their properties.

10 Hours

Module 3 Random Processes: Classification, Methods of description, Special classes, Average values of Random Processes, Analytical representation of Random Process, Autocorrelation Function, Cross-correlation function and their properties, Ergodicity, Poisson process, Markov Process, Markov chain.

10 Hours

Module 4 Testing Hypothesis: Testing of Hypothesis: Formulation of Null hypothesis, critical region, level of significance, errors in testing, Tests of significance for Large and Small Samples, t-distribution, its properties and uses, F-distribution, its properties and uses, Chi-square distribution, its properties and uses, χ2 – test for goodness of fit, χ2 test for Independence

10 Hours

Module 5 Symbolic Representation of a Queuing Model, Poisson Queue system, Little Law, Types of Stochastic Processes, Birth-Death Process, The M/M/1 Queuing System, The M/M/s Queuing System, The M/M/s Queuing with Finite buffers.

10 Hours

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

Demonstrate use of probability and characterize probability models using probability mass (density) functions & cumulative distribution functions.

Explain the techniques of developing discrete & continuous probability distributions and its applications.

Describe a random process in terms of its mean and correlation functions.

Outline methods of Hypothesis testing for goodness of fit.

Define the terminology &nomenclature appropriate queuing theory and also distinguish various queuing models.

Question paper pattern:

7

The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Probability, Statistics and Queuing Theory, V. Sundarapandian, Eastern Economy Edition,

PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2009.

Reference Books: 1. Probability & Statistics with Reliability, Queuing and Computer Applications, 2

nd Edition

by Kishor. S. Trivedi , Prentice Hall of India ,2004. 2. Probability, Statistics and Random Processes, 1

st Edition by P Kausalya, Pearson

Education, 2013.

8

INTERNET OF THINGS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16LNI253 /16SCE253 /16SCN151

/16SCS24 /16SIT251 /16SSE421 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Define and explain basic issues, policy and challenges in the IoT Illustrate Mechanism and Key Technologies in IoT

Explain the Standard of the IoT

Explain resources in the IoT and deploy of resources into business

Demonstrate data analytics for IoT

Module -1 Teaching

Hours What is The Internet of Things? Overview and Motivations, Examples of Apllications, IPV6 Role, Areas of Development and Standardization, Scope of the Present Investigation.Internet of Things Definitions and frameworks-IoT Definitions, IoT Frameworks, Basic Nodal Capabilities. Internet of Things Apjplication Examples-Overview, Smart Metering/Advanced Metering Infrastructure-Health/Body Area Networks, City Automation, Automotive Applications, Home Automation, Smart Cards, Tracking, Over-The-Air-Passive Surveillance/Ring of Steel, Control Application Examples, Myriad Other Applications.

8 Hours

Module -2

Fundamental IoT Mechanism and Key Technologies-Identification of IoT Object and Services, Structural Aspects of the IoT, Key IoT Technologies. Evolving IoT Standards-Overview and Approaches,IETF IPV6 Routing Protocol for RPL Roll, Constrained Application Protocol,Representational State Transfer, ETSI M2M,Third Generation Partnership Project Service Requirements for Machine-Type Communications, CENELEC, IETF IPv6 Over Lowpower WPAN, Zigbee IP(ZIP),IPSO

8 Hours

Module – 3

Layer ½ Connectivity: Wireless Technologies for the IoT-WPAN Technologies for IoT/M2M, Cellular and Mobile Network Technologies for IoT/M2M,Layer 3 Connectivity :IPv6 Technologies for the IoT:Overview and Motivations.Address Capabilities,IPv6 Protocol Overview, IPv6 Tunneling, IPsec in IPv6,Header Compression Schemes,Quality of Service in IPv6, Migration Strategies to IPv6.

8 Hours

Module-4

Case Studies illustrating IoT Design-Introduction, Home Automation, Cities, Environment, Agriculture, Productivity Applications.

8 Hours

Module-5

Data Analytics for IoT – Introduction, Apache Hadoop, Using Hadoop MapReduce for Batch Data Analysis, Apache Oozie, Apache Spark, Apache Storm, Using Apache Storm for Real-time Data Analysis, Structural Health Monitoring Case Study.

8 Hours

Course outcomes:

At the end of this course the students will be able to:

Develop schemes for the applications of IOT in real time scenarios

Manage the Internet resources

Model the Internet of things to business

9

Understand the practical knowledge through different case studies

Understand data sets received through IoT devices and tools used for analysis

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Daniel Minoli, ”Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6:The Evolving World of

M2M Communications”, Wiley, 2013. 2. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, ”Internet of Things: A Hands on Approach” Universities

Press., 2015

Reference Books: 1. Michael Miller,” The Internet of Things”, First Edition, Pearson, 2015. 2. Claire Rowland,Elizabeth Goodman et.al.,” Designing Connected Products”, First

Edition,O’Reilly, 2015.

10

SOCIAL NETWORK ANALYSIS [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCN152 /

16SIT252/ IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

The learning objective of the course Social Network Analysis is to discuss essential knowledge of network analysis applicable to real world data, with examples from today’s most popular social networks.

Module 1 Teaching

Hours

Introduction to social network analysis and Descriptive network analysis: Introduction to new science of networks. Networks examples. Graph theory basics. Statistical network properties. Degree distribution, clustering coefficient. Frequent patterns. Network motifs. Cliques and k-cores.

8 Hours

Module 2 Network structure, Node centralities and ranking on network: Nodes and edges, network diameter and average path length. Node centrality metrics: degree, closeness and betweenness centrality. Eigenvector centrality and PageRank. Algorithm HITS.

8 Hours

Module 3 Network communities and Affiliation networks: Networks communities. Graph partitioning and cut metrics. Edge betweenness. Modularity clustering. Affiliation network and bipartite graphs. 1-mode projections. Recommendation systems.

8 Hours

Module 4

Information and influence propagation on networks and Network visualization: Social Diffusion. Basic cascade model. Influence maximization. Most influential nodes in network. Network visualization and graph layouts. Graph sampling. Low -dimensional projections

8 Hours

Module 5 Social media mining and SNA in real world: FB/VK and Twitter analysis: Natural language processing and sentiment mining. Properties of large social networks: friends, connections, likes, re-tweets.

8 Hours

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Define notation and terminology used in network science.

Demonstrate, summarize and compare networks.

Explain basic principles behind network analysis algorithms.

Analyzing real world network.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. David Easley and John Kleinberg. "Networks, Crowds, and Markets: Reasoning About a

Highly Connected World." Cambridge University Press 2010. 2. Eric Kolaczyk, Gabor Csardi. “Statistical Analysis of Network Data with R (Use R!)”.

Springer, 2014.

11

3. Stanley Wasserman and Katherine Faust. "Social Network Analysis. Methods and Applications." Cambridge University Press, 1994.

Reference Books:

1. NIL

12

MULTI-CORE ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER - I

Subject Code 16SCE24 / 16SCN153 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS - 03

Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Define technologies of multicore architecture and performance measures

Demonstrate problems related to multiprocessing

Illustrate windows threading, posix threads, openmp programming Analyze the common problems in parallel programming

Module -1 Teaching

Hours Introduction to Multi-core Architecture Motivation for Concurrency in software, Parallel Computing Platforms, Parallel Computing in Microprocessors, Differentiating Multi-core Architectures from Hyper- Threading Technology, Multi-threading on Single-Core versus Multi-Core Platforms Understanding Performance, Amdahl’s Law, Growing Returns: Gustafson’s Law. System Overview of Threading : Defining Threads, System View of Threads, Threading above the Operating System, Threads inside the OS, Threads inside the Hardware, What Happens When a Thread Is Created, Application Programming Models and Threading, Virtual Environment: VMs and Platforms, Runtime Virtualization, System Virtualization.

8 Hours

Module -2

Fundamental Concepts of Parallel Programming :Designing for Threads, Task Decomposition, Data Decomposition, Data Flow Decomposition, Implications of Different Decompositions, Challenges You’ll Face, Parallel Programming Patterns, A Motivating Problem: Error Diffusion, Analysis of the Error Diffusion Algorithm, An Alternate Approach: Parallel Error Diffusion, Other Alternatives. Threading and Parallel Programming Constructs: Synchronization, Critical Sections, Deadlock, Synchronization Primitives, Semaphores, Locks, Condition Variables, Messages, Flow Control- based Concepts, Fence, Barrier, Implementation-dependent Threading Features

8 Hours

Module – 3

Threading APIs :Threading APls for Microsoft Windows, Win32/MFC Thread APls, Threading APls for Microsoft. NET Framework, Creating Threads, Managing Threads, Thread Pools, Thread Synchronization, POSIX Threads, Creating Threads, Managing Threads, Thread Synchronization, Signaling, Compilation and Linking.

8 Hours

Module-4

OpenMP: A Portable Solution for Threading : Challenges in Threading a Loop, Loop-carried Dependence, Data-race Conditions, Managing Shared and Private Data, Loop Scheduling and Portioning, Effective Use of Reductions, Minimizing Threading Overhead, Work-sharing Sections, Performance-oriented Programming, Using Barrier and No wait, Interleaving Single-thread and Multi-thread Execution, Data Copy-in and Copy-out, Protecting Updates of Shared Variables, Intel Task queuing Extension to OpenMP, OpenMP Library Functions, OpenMP Environment Variables, Compilation, Debugging, performance

8 Hours

Module-5

Solutions to Common Parallel Programming Problems : Too Many Threads, Data Races, Deadlocks, and Live Locks, Deadlock, Heavily Contended Locks, Priority Inversion, Solutions for Heavily Contended Locks, Non-blocking Algorithms, ABA Problem, Cache

8 Hours

13

Line Ping-ponging, Memory Reclamation Problem, Recommendations, Thread-safe Functions and Libraries, Memory Issues, Bandwidth, Working in the Cache, Memory Contention, Cache-related Issues, False Sharing, Memory Consistency, Current IA-32 Architecture, Itanium Architecture, High-level Languages, Avoiding Pipeline Stalls on IA-32,Data Organization for High Performance.

Course outcomes:

The students shall able to:

Identify the limitations of ILP and the need for multicore architectures

Define fundamental concepts of parallel programming and its design issues

Solve the issues related to multiprocessing and suggest solutions

Make out the salient features of different multicore architectures and how they exploit parallelism

Demonstrate the role of OpenMP and programming concept

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Multicore Programming , Increased Performance through Software Multi-threading by

Shameem Akhter and Jason Roberts , Intel Press , 2006 Reference Books: NIL

14

SOFT COMPUTING [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SSE41 / 16SCS254 /

16SCN154 IA Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 40 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 03 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Explain key aspects of soft computing.

Identify the components and building block hypothesis of Genetic algorithm.

Analyze Neuro Fuzzy modeling and control.

Evaluate machine learning through Support vector machines.

Module 1 Teaching Hours

Introduction to Soft computing: Neural networks, Fuzzy logic, Genetic algorithms, Hybrid systems and its applications. Fundamental concept of ANN, Evolution, basic Model of ANN, Terminologies used in ANN, MP model, Hebb model.

8 Hours

Module 2 Perceptron Network: Adaptive linear neuron, Multiple adaptive linear neurons, Back propagation Network (Theory, Architecture, Algorithm for training, learning factors, testing and applications of all the above NN models).

8 Hours

Module 3 Introduction to classical sets and fuzzy sets: Classical relations and fuzzy relations, Membership functions.

8 Hours

Module 4 Defuzzification: Fuzzy decision making, and applications. 8 Hours

Module 5 Genetic algorithms : Introduction, Basic operations, Traditional algorithms, Simple GA General genetic algorithms, The schema theorem, Genetic programming, applications.

8 Hours

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

Implement machine learning through neural networks.

Design Genetic Algorithm to solve the optimization problem.

Develop a Fuzzy expert system. Model Neuro Fuzzy system for clustering and classification.

Question paper pattern: The question paper will have ten questions. There will be 2 questions from each module. Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module. The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books: 1. Principles of Soft computing, Shivanandam, Deepa S. N, Wiley India, ISBN 13:

788126527410, 2011

Reference Books: 1. Neuro-fuzzy and soft computing, J.S.R. JANG, C.T. SUN, E. MIZUTANI, Phi (EEE

edition), 2012.

15

COMPUTER NETWORKS AND INFORMATION SECURITY LABORATORY

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCN16 IA Marks 20 Number of Lecture Hours/Week 01+03 Exam Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 Exam Hours 03

CREDITS – 02 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Demonste Concepts of fundamental protocols.

Illustrate internetworking concepts.

Implement concepts in congestion control and error detections.

Evaluate fundamentals of Cryptography through practical implementation.

Implement standard algorithms used to provide confidentiality, integrity and authenticity.

Design security applications in the field of Information technology.

PART – A Computer Network LABORATORY WORK

Note: Implement the following using C/C++ or equivalent with LINUX/Windows environment: 1. Write a program to transfer the contents of a requested file from server to the client using TCP/IP Sockets (using TCP/IP Socket programming). 2. Write a program to archive Traffic management at Flow level by implementing Closed Loop Control technique. (Leaky Bucket Algorithm) 3. Write a program to implement dynamic routing strategy in finding optimal path for data transmission. (Bellman ford algorithm). 4. Write a program to implement Link State Routing (Dijkstra Algorithm). 5. Write a program for implementing the error detection technique while data transfer in unreliable network code using CRC (16-bits) Technique. 6. Write a program for providing security for transfer of data in the network. (RSA Algorithm) 7. Write a program for encrypting 64 bit playing text using DES algorithm.

Simulation Programs using OPNET /NS2/NS3 or any other equivalent software

8. Simulate a 3 node point to point network with duplex links between them. Set the Queue size and vary the bandwidth and find the number of packets dropped. 9. Simulate a four-node point-to-point network, and connect the links as follows: n0->n2, n1->n2 and n2->n3. Apply TCP agent changing the parameters and determine the number of packets sent/received by TCP/UDP

PART – B INS LABORATORY WORK

2. Consider a file with composite data, substitute the content and transpose the ciphers. 3. Consider an alphanumeric data, encrypt and Decrypt the data using advanced encryption

standards and verify for the correctness. 4. Apply the RSA algorithm on a text file to produce cipher text file. 5. Develop a mechanism to setup a security channel using Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange

between client and server 6. Implementation of Message Authentication Code using cryptography VMAC function. 7. Implement secure hash algorithm for Data Integrity. Implement MD5 and SHA-1

algorithm, which accepts a string input, and produce a fixed size number - 128 bits for MD5; 160 bits for SHA-1, this number is a hash of the input. Show that a small change

16

in the input results in a substantial change in the output 8. Using any simulation tool: demonstrate packet filtering firewalls, create the ACL, create

VLAN (Sub-netting).

Course Outcomes The students should be able to:

Apply key Internet applications and their protocols, and ability to develop their own applications (e.g. Client Server applications, Web Services) using the sockets API.

Design and evaluate application layer protocol

Analyze the vulnerabilities in any computing system and hence be able to design a security solution.

Identify the security issues in the network and resolve it.

Evaluate security mechanisms using rigorous approaches, including theoretical.

Conduction of Practical Examination: 1 . All laboratory experiments ( nos ) are to be included for practical examination. 2 . Students are allowed to pick one experiment from each part and execute both 3 . Strictly follow the instructions as printed on the cover page of answer script for breakup of

marks 4 . PART –A: Procedure + Conduction + Viva: 10 + 20 +10 (40) 5 . PART –B: Procedure + Conduction + Viva: 10 + 20 +10 (40) 6 . Change of experiment is allowed only once and marks allotted to the procedure part to

be made zero.

17

SEMINAR [As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

(Effective from the academic year 2016 -2017)

SEMESTER – I Subject Code 16SCE17 / 16SCN17 /

16LNI17 / 16SIT17 / 16SSE17 / 16SCS17 /

16SFC17

IA Marks 100

Number of Lecture Hours/Week ---- Exam Marks - Total Number of Lecture Hours ---- Exam Hours -

CREDITS – 01 Course objectives: This course will enable students to

Motivate the students to read technical article

Discover recent technology developments

Descriptions The students should read a recent technical article (try to narrow down the topic as much as possible) from any of the leading reputed and refereed journals like:

1. IEEE Transactions, journals, magazines, etc. 2. ACM Transactions, journals, magazines, SIG series, etc. 3. Springer 4. Elsevier publications etc

In the area of (to name few and not limited to)

Web Technology

Cloud Computing

Artificial Intelligent

Networking

Security

Data mining

Course Outcomes

The students should be able to:

Conduct survey on recent technologies

Infer and interpret the information from the survey conducted Motivated towards research

Conduction: The students have to present at least ONE technical seminar on the selected topic and submit a report for internal evaluation.

Marks Distribution: Literature Survey + Presentation (PPT) + Report + Question & Answer

+ Paper: 20 + 30 + 30 + 20 (100).

18

Common to Design Engineering (MDE), Engineering Analysis & Design

(MEA),Machine Design (MMD)

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELGAUM

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION FOR

M.TECH. Machine Design

I SEMESTER CREDIT BASED

Subject Code

Name of the Subject

Teaching hours/week

Duration of

Exam in Hours

Marks for

Total

Marks

CREDITS

Lecture

Practical / Field

Work /

Assignment/

Tutorials

I.A.

Exam

16 MDE11 Applied Mathematics 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16 MDE12 Finite Element Method 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16CAE13 Continuum Mechanics 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16CAE16 Experimental Mechanics 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

Elective – I 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16MDE16 Design Engineering Lab I -- 3 3 20 80 100 2

16MMD17 SEMINAR -- - -- 100 -- 100 1

Total 20 13 18 220 480 700 23

ELECTIVE-I

16MDE 151

16MDE 152

16MEA155

Computer Graphics

Computer Applications in Design

Advanced Fluid Dynamics

16 MDE 153

16MDE 154

Mechatronics System Design

Design for Manufacture

APPLIED MATHEMATICS

(Common to MDE,MMD,MEA,CAE,MCM,MAR,IAE,MTP,MTH,MTE,MST,MTR)

Sub Code : 16MDE11 IA Marks :20

Hrs/ Week : 04 Exam Hours : 03

Total Hrs: 50 Exam Marks :80

Course Objectives:

The main objectives of the course are to enhance the knowledge of various methods in finding the roots of an algebraic, transcendental

or simultaneous system of equations and also to evaluate integrals numerically and differentiation of complex functions with a greater

accuracy. These concepts occur frequently in their subjects like finite element method and other design application oriented subjects.

Course Content:

1. Approximations and round off errors: Significant figures, accuracy and precision, error definitions, round off errors and truncation errors.

Mathematical modeling and Engineering problem solving: Simple mathematical model, Conservation Laws ofEngineering.06 Hours

2. Roots of Equations: Bracketing methods-Graphical method, Bisection method, False position method, Newton- Raphson method, Secant

Method. Multiple roots, Simple fixed point iteration.

Roots of polynomial-Polynomials in Engineering and Science, Muller’s method, Bairstow’s Method Graeffe’s Roots Squaring Method.12

Hours

3. Numerical Differentiation and Numerical Integration: Newton –Cotes and Guass Quadrature Integration formulae, Integration of

Equations, Romberg integration, Numerical Differentiation Applied to Engineering problems, High Accuracy differentiation formulae06

Hours

4. System of Linear Algebraic Equations And Eigen Value Problems: Introduction, Direct methods, Cramer’s Rule, Gauss Elimination

Method, Gauss-Jordan Elimination Method, Triangularization method, Cholesky Method, Partition method, error Analysis for direct

methods, Iteration Methods.

Eigen values and Eigen Vectors: Bounds on Eigen Values, Jacobi method for symmetric matrices, Givens method for symmetric

matrices, Householder’s method for symmetric matrices, Rutishauser method for arbitrary matrices, Power method, Inverse power

method .16 Hours

5. Linear Transformation: Introduction to Linear Transformation, The matrix of Linear Transformation, Linear Models in Science and

Engineering

Orthogonality and Least Squares: Inner product, length and orthogonality, orthogonal sets, Orthogonal projections, The Gram-schmidt

process, Least Square problems, Inner product spaces. 12 Hours

Text Books:

1. S.S.Sastry, Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, PHI, 2005.

2. Steven C. Chapra, Raymond P.Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 4th

Ed, 2002.

3. M K Jain, S.R.K Iyengar, R K. Jain, Numerical methods for Scientific and engg computation, New Age International, 2003.

Reference Books:

1. Pervez Moin, Fundamentals of Engineering Numerical Analysis, Cambridge, 2010.

2. David. C. Lay, Linear Algebra and its applications, 3rd

edition, Pearson Education, 2002.

Course Outcomes:

The Student will be able to

1. Model some simple mathematical models of physical Applications.

2. Find the roots of polynomials in Science and Engineering problems.

3. Differentiate and integrate a function for a given set of tabulated data, forEngineering Applications

FINITE ELEMENT METHOD

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE,MTR)

Sub Code : 16MDE12

Hrs/ Week : 04

Total Hrs: 50

Course Objectives

IA Marks :20

Exam Hours : 03

Exam Marks :80

1. To present the Finite element method (FEM) as a numerical method for engineering analysis of continua and structures

2. To present Finite element formulation using variational and weighted residual approaches

3. To present Finite elements for the analysis of bars & trusses, beams & frames, plane stress & plane strain problems and 3-D solids, for

thermal and dynamics problems.

Course Content:

1. Introduction to Finite Element Method: Basic Steps in Finite Element Method to solve mechanical engineering (Solid, Fluid and Heat

Transfer) problems: Functional approach and Galerkin approach, Displacement Approach: Admissible Functions, Convergence Criteria:

Conforming and Non Conforming elements, Co C1 and Cn Continuity Elements. Basic Equations, Element Characteristic Equations,

Assembly Procedure, Boundary and Constraint Conditions.

10 Hours.

2. Solid Mechanics : One-Dimensional Finite Element Formulations and Analysis – Bars- uniform, varying and stepped cross section-

Basic(Linear) and Higher Order Elements Formulations for Axial, Torsional and Temperature Loads with problems. Beams- Basic (Linear)

Element Formulation-for uniform, varying and stepped cross section- for different loading and boundary conditions with problems.

Trusses, Plane Frames and Space Frame Basic(Linear) Elements Formulations for different boundary condition -Axial, Bending, Torsional,

and Temperature Loads with problems.

10 Hours.

3. Two Dimensional Finite Element Formulations for Solid Mechanics Problems: Triangular Membrane (TRIA 3, TRIA 6, TRIA 10)

Element, Four-Noded Quadrilateral Membrane (QUAD 4, QUAD 8) Element Formulations for in-plane loading with sample problems.

Triangular and Quadrilateral Axi-symmetric basic and higher order Elements formulation for axi-symmetric loading only with sample problems

Three Dimensional Finite Element Formulations for Solid Mechanics Problems: Finite Element Formulation of Tetrahedral Element (TET 4,

TET 10), Hexahedral Element (HEXA 8, HEXA 20), for different loading conditions. Serendipity and Lagrange family Elements

10 Hours.

4. Finite Element Formulations for Structural Mechanics Problems: Basics of plates and shell theories: Classical thin plate Theory, Shear

deformation Theory and Thick Plate theory. Finite Element Formulations for triangular and quadrilateral Plate elements. Finite element

formulation of flat, curved, cylindrical and conical Shell elements

5. Dynamic Analysis: Finite Element Formulation for point/lumped mass and distributed masses system, Finite Element Formulation of one

dimensional dynamic analysis: bar, truss, frame and beam element. Finite Element Formulation of Two dimensional dynamic analysis:

triangular membrane and axisymmetric element, quadrilatateral membrane and axisymmetric element. Evaluation of eigen values and

eigen vectors applicable to bars, shaft, beams, plane and space frame.

10 Hours.

Text Books:

1. T. R. Chandrupatla and A. D. Belegundu, Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Prentice Hall, 3rd

Ed, 2002.

2. Lakshminarayana H. V., Finite Elements Analysis– Procedures in Engineering, Universities Press, 2004.

Reference Books:

1. Rao S. S. , Finite Elements Method in Engineering- 4th

Edition, Elsevier, 2006

2. P.Seshu, Textbook of Finite Element Analysis, PHI, 2004.

3. J.N.Reddy, Introduction to Finite Element Method, McGraw -Hill, 2006.

4. Bathe K. J., Finite Element Procedures, Prentice-Hall, 2006..

5. Cook R. D., Finite Element Modeling for Stress Analysis, Wiley,1995.

Course Outcome:

On completion of the course the student will be

1. Knowledgeable about the FEM as a numerical method for the solution of solid mechanics, structural mechanics and thermal problems

2. Developing skills required to use a commercial FEA software

Sub Code: 14CAE13

Hrs/ Week: 04

Total Hrs: 50

CONTINUUM MECHANICS

(Common to MDE, MEA, MMD, CAE)

IA Marks: 20

E x a m H o u r s: 0 3

Exam Marks: 80

Course Objective:

The course Continuum Mechanics aims at a comprehensive study of Mechanics of Solids and Mechanics of Fluids. The topics covered are:

Analysis of Stress, Deformation and Strain, Generalized Hooke’s law, Formulation of Two Dimensional Electrostatic problems, Basic equations

of Viscoelasticity.

Course Content:

1. Analysis of Stress: Definition and Notation for forces and stresses. body force, surface force Components of stresses, equations of

Equilibrium, Specification of stress at a point. Principal stresses, maximum and minimum shear stress, Mohr’s diagram in three dimensions.

Boundary conditions .Stress components on an arbitrary plane, Stress invariants, Octahedral stresses, Decomposition of state of stress,

deviator and spherical stress tensors, Stress transformation. 10 Hours

2. Deformation and Strain: Deformation, Strain Displacement relations, Strain components, The state of strain at a point, , Principal strain,

strain invariants, Strain transformation, Compatibility equations, Cubical dilatation, spherical and deviator strains, plane strain, Mohr’s circle,

and compatibility equation

Relations and the General Equations of Elasticity: Generalized Hooke's; law in terms of engineering constants. Formulation of elasticity

Problems. 12 Hours

3. Two Dimensional Problems in Cartesian Co-Ordinates: Airy's stress function, investigation of simple beam problems. Bending of a narrow

cantilever beam under end load, simply supported beam with uniform load, Use of Fourier series to solve two dimensional problems.

Existence and uniqueness of solution, Saint -Venant's principle, Principle of super position and reciprocal theorem. 9 Hours.

4. Two Dimensional Problems in Polar Co-Ordinates: General equations, stress distribution symmetrical about an axis, Strain components in

polar co-ordinates, Rotating disk and cylinder, Concentrated force on semi-infinite plane, Stress concentration around a circular hole in an

infinite plate.

Thermal Stresses: Introduction, Thermo-elastic stress -strain relations, thin circular disc, long circular cylinder. 9 Hours

5 Torsion of Prismatic Bars: Introduction, Torsion of Circular cross section bars, Torsion of elliptical cross section bars, Soap film analogy,

Membrane analogy, Torsion of thin walled open tubes.

Elastic Stability: Axial compression of prismatic bars, Elastic stability, buckling load for column with constant cross section. Viscoelasticity:

Linear viscoelastic behavior. Simple viscoelastic models-generalized models, linear differential operator equation. Creep and Relaxation- creep

function, relaxation function, hereditary integrals. Complex moduli and compliances. (Note: No numerical) 10 Hours

Text Books:

1 Timoshenko and Goodier, "Theory of Elasticity"-'Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,3rd

edition , 1970

2. L S Srinath “Advanced Mechanics of Solids”- Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd

edition, 2010

3 G. Thomas Mase, Ronald E. Smelser, George. E. Mase, Continuum Mechanics for Engineers, 3rd

Edition, CRC Press,Boca Raton, 2010

References:

1. Batra, R. C., Elements of Continuum Mechanics, Reston, 2006.

2. George E. Mase, Schaum's Outline of Continuum Mechanics, McGraw-Hill, 1970

3. Dill, Ellis Harold, Continuum Mechanics: Elasticity, Plasticity, Viscoelasticity, CRC Press , 2006.

4. Sadhu Singh," Theory of Elasticity"- Khanna publisher, 4th

edition, 2013

Course Outcome:

Continuum Mechanics background essential to mathematically model physical problems in Solid Mechanics

EXPERIMENTAL MECHANICS

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE)

Sub Code : 16CAE16 IA Marks :20

Hrs/ Week : 04 Exam Hours : 03

Total Hrs: 50 Exam Marks :80

Course Objective:

This course aims at a comprehensive study of mechanics of solids. The topics covered are

The objective of this course is to familiarize the student with state of the art experimental techniques namely strain gauges, photo elasticity,

moiré interoferometry, brittle coating, moiré fringes and holography.

Course Content:

1. Introduction: Definition of terms, calibration, standards, dimension and units, generalized measurement system, Basic concepts in dynamic

measurements, system response, distortion, impedance matching, experiment planning.

Analysis of Experimental Data: Cause and types of experimental errors, error analysis. Statistical analysis of experimental data- Probability

distribution, gaussian, normal distribution. Chi-square test, Method of least square, correlation coefficient, multivariable regression,

standard deviation of mean, graphical analysis and curve fitting, general consideration in data analysis.

10 Hours

2. Data Acquisition and Processing: General data acquisition system, signal conditioning revisited, data transmission, Analog-to-Digital and

Digital-to- Analog conversion, Basic components (storage and display) of data acquisition system. Computer program as a substitute for

wired logic.

Force, Torque and Strain Measurement: Mass balance measurement, Elastic Element for force measurement, torque measurement. Strain

Gages -Strain sensitivity of gage metals, Gage construction, Gage sensitivity and gage factor, Performance characteristics, Environmental

effects Strain, gage circuits, Potentiometer, Wheat Stone's bridges, Constant current circuits. Strain Analysis Methods-Two element and

three element, rectangular and delta rosettes, Correction for transverse strains effects, stress gage - plane shear gage, Stress intensity factor

gage.

10 Hours

3. Stress Analysis: Two Dimensional Photo elasticity - Nature of light, - wave theory of light,- optical interference - Polariscopes stress optic law

- effect of stressed model in plane and circular Polariscopes, IsoclinicsIso chromatics fringe order determination - Fringe multiplication

techniques - Calibration Photoelastic model materials. Separation methods shear difference method, Analytical separation methods, Model

to prototype scaling.

10 Hours

4. Three Dimensional Photo elasticity: Stress freezing method, General slice, Effective stresses, Stresses separation, Shear deference method,

Oblique incidence method Secondary principals stresses, Scattered light photo elasticity, Principals, Polari scope and stress data analyses.

10 Hours

5. Coating Methods: a) Photoelastic Coating Method-Birefringence coating techniques Sensitivity Reinforcing and thickness effects - data

reduction - Stress separation techniques Photoelastic strain gauges. b) Brittle Coatings Method:Brittle coating technique Principles data

analysis - coating materials, Coating techniques. c) Moire Technique - Geometrical approach, Displacement approach- sensitivity of Moire

data data reduction, In plane and out plane Moire methods, Moire photography, Moire grid production.

Holography: Introduction, Equation for plane waves and spherical waves, Intensity, Coherence, Spherical radiator as an object (record

process), Hurter, Driffeld curves, Reconstruction process, Holograpicinterferomerty, Realtime. and double exposure methods, Displacement

measurement, Isopachics.

10 Hours

Text Books:

1. Holman,“Experimental Methods for Engineers” 7th

Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc, New York, 2007.

2. R. S. Sirohi, H. C. Radha Krishna, “Mechanical measurements” New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2004

3. Experimental Stress Analysis - Srinath, Lingaiah, Raghavan, Gargesa, Ramachandra and Pant, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984.

4. Instrumentation, Measurement And Analysis -Nakra&Chaudhry, B C Nakra K KChaudhry, Tata McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc, New York,

Seventh Edition, 2006.

Reference Books:

1. Measurement Systems Application and Design - Doeblin E. A., 4th (S.I.) Edition, McGraw Hill, New York. 1989

2. Design and Analysis of Experiments - Montgomery D.C., John Wiley & Sons, 1997.

3. Experimental Stress Analysis - Dally and Riley, McGraw Hill, 1991.

4. Experimental Stress Analysis - Sadhu Singh, Khanna publisher, 1990.

5. PhotoelasticityVol I and Vol II - M.M.Frocht,. John Wiley and sons, 1969.

6. Strain Gauge Primer - Perry and Lissner, McGraw Hill, 1962.

Course Outcome:It helps the students to

1. Undertake experimental investigations to verify predictions by other methods.

2. To acquire skills for experimental investigations an accompanying laboratory course is desirable.

Elective-I

Course Objective:

This course will help the student to

graphics

COMPUTER GRAPHICS

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE)

Sub Code : 16MDE151 IA Marks :20

Hrs/ Week : 04 Exam Hours : 03

Total Hrs: 50 Exam Marks :80

be knowledgeable of concepts, principles, processes and techniques essential to all areas of computer

Course Content:

1. Transformations : Representation of points, Transformations: Rotation, Reflection, Scaling, Shearing, Combined

Transformations, Translations and Homogeneous Coordinates, A geometric interpretation of homogeneous coordinates, Over all

scaling, Points at infinity, Rotation about an arbitrary point, Reflection through an arbitrary line, Rotation about an axis parallel to

coordinate axis, Rotation about an arbitrary axis in space, Reflection through an arbitrary plane.

10 Hours

2. Types and Mathematical Representation of Curves: Curve representation, Explicit, Implicit and parametric representation.

Nonparametric and parametric representation of Lines, Circles, Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, Conics. Parametric representation of

synthetic curve, Hermite cubic splines, , Bezier curves: Blending function, Properties, generation, B-spline curves- Cox-deBoor

recursive formula, Properties, Open uniform basis functions, Non-uniform basis functions, Periodic B-spline curve.

Types and Mathematical Representation of Surfaces Surface entities and parametric representation- Plane, Ruled, surface of

revolution, Offset surface, Coons patch, Bezier surface, B-spline surface

10Hours

3. Types and Mathematical Representation of Solids

Solid entities: Block, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Wedge, Torus, Solid representation, Fundamentals of solid modeling, Set theory,

Regularized set operations, Set membership classification, Half spaces, Basic elements, Building operations, Boundary

representation and Constructive solid geometry, Basic elements, Building operations.

Scan Conversion and Clipping: Representation of points, lines, Drawing Algorithms: DDA algorithm, Bresenham's integer

line algorithm, Bresenham's circle algorithm, Polygon filling algorithms: Scan conversion, Seed filling, Scan line algorithm.

Viewing transformation, Clipping - Points, lines, Text, Polygon, Cohen-Sutherland line clipping, Sutherland-Hodgmen algorithm.

10Hours

4. Visual Realism: Introduction, Hidden line removal, Visibility of object views, Visibility techniques: Minimax test,

Containment test, Surface test, Silhouttes, Homogeneity test, Sorting, Coherence, Hidden surface removal- Z-buffer algorithm,

Warnock's algorithm, Hidden solid removal - ray tracing algorithm, Shading, Shading models, Diffuse reflection, Specular reflection,

Ambient light, Shading of surfaces: Constant shading, Gourand shading, Phong shading, Shading enhancements, Shading Solids,

Ray tracing for CSG, Z-buffer algorithm for B-rep and CSG

10 Hours

5.Applications: Colouring- RGB, CMY, HSV, HSL colour models, Data Exchange: Evolution of Data exchange, IGES, PDES, Animation:

Conventional animation-key frame, Inbetweening, Line testing, Painting, Filming, Computer animation, Entertainment and

Engineering Animation, Animation system hardware, Software architecture, Animation types, Frame buffer, Colour table, Zoom-

pan-scroll, Cross bar, Real time play back, Animation techniques- key frame, Skelton. Path of motion and p-curves.

10 Hours

TextBooks:

1. IbrahamZeid, CAD/CAM-Theory and Practice-McGraw Hill, 2006.

2. David Rogers & Alan Adams, Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics-Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.

ReferenceBooks:

1. Xiang Z, Plastock, R. A, Computer Graphics- Schaum's Outline, McGraw Hill, 2007.

2. Foley, van Dam, Feiner and Hughes, Computer Graphics- Principles and Practice-Addison Wesley, 1996.

3. Sinha A N., Udai A D., Computer Graphics- Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

Course Outcome:

This course will enable students to:

1. Recognize how a visual image can be an effective means of communication

2. Acquire and develop the skills needed to creatively solve visual communication problems.

3. Understand, develop and employ visual hierarchy using images and text

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN DESIGN

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE)

Sub Code : 16MDE152 IA Marks :20

Hrs/ Week : 04 Exam Hours : 03

Total Hrs: 50 Exam Marks :80

Course Objective

It helps the students to learn the principles of CAD/CAM/CAE Systems, Graphics Programming, Geometric Modeling Systems, CAD, CAM and

CAE Integration, Standards for Communicating between Systems

Course Content:

1. Introduction To CAD/CAM/CAE Systems

Overview, Definitions of CAD. CAM and CAE, Integrating the Design and Manufacturing Processes through a Common Database-A

Scenario, Using CAD/CAM/CAE Systems for Product Development-A Practical Example.

Components of CAD/CAM/CAE Systems: Hardware Components ,Vector-Refresh(Stroke-Refresh) Graphics Devices, Raster Graphics

Devices, Hardware Configuration, Software Components, Windows-Based CAD Systems.10 Hours

2. Basic Concepts of Graphics Programming:

Graphics Libraries, Coordinate Systems, Window and Viewport, Output Primitives - Line, Polygon, Marker Text, Graphics Input, Display

List, Transformation Matrix, Translation, Rotation, Mapping, Other Transformation Matrices, Hidden-Line and Hidden-Surface Removal,

Back-Face Removal Algorithm, Depth-Sorting, or Painters, Algorithm, Hidden-Line Removal Algorithm, z-Buffer Method, Rendering,

Shading, Ray Tracing, Graphical User Interface, X Window System.

Standards

Standards for Communicating Between Systems: Exchange Methods of Product Definition Data, Initial Graphics Exchange Specification,

Drawing Interchange Format, Standard for the Exchange of Product Data. Tutorials, Computational exercises involving Geometric

Modeling of components and their assemblies

10 Hours

3. Geometric Modeling Systems

: Wireframe Modeling Systems, Surface Modeling Systems, Solid Modeling Systems, Modeling Functions, Data Structure, Euler

Operators, Boolean Operations, Calculation of Volumetric Properties, Non manifold Modeling Systems, Assembly Modeling Capabilities,

Basic Functions of Assembly Modeling, Browsing an Assembly, Features of Concurrent Design, Use of Assembly models, Simplification of

Assemblies, Web-Based Modeling.

Representation and Manipulation of Curves: Types of Curve Equations, Conic Sections, Circle or Circular Arc, Ellipse or Elliptic Arc,

Hyperbola, Parabola, Hermite Curves, Bezier Curve, Differentiation of a Bezier Curve Equation, Evaluation of a Bezier Curve

10 Hours

4. B-Spline Curve, Evaluation of a B-Spline Curve, Composition of B-Spline Curves, Differentiation of a B-Spline Curve, Non uniform

Rational B-Spline (NURBS) Curve, Evaluation of a NURBS Curve, Differentiation of a NURBS Curve, Interpolation Curves, Interpolation

Using a Hermite Curve, Interpolation Using a B-Spline Curve, Intersection of Curves.

Representation and Manipulation of Surfaces: Types of Surface Equations, Bilinear Surface, Coon's Patch, Bicubic Patch, Bezier Surface,

Evaluation of a Bezier Surface, Differentiation of a Bezier Surface, B-Spline Surface, Evaluation of a-B-Spline Surface, Differentiation of a

B-Spline Surface, NURBS Surface, Interpolation Surface, Intersection of Surfaces.

10 Hours

5. CAD and CAM Integration

Overview of the Discrete Part Production Cycle, Process Planning, Manual Approach, Variant Approach, Generative Approach,

Computer-Aided Process Planning Systems, CAM-I CAPP, MIPLAN and Multi CAPP, Met CAPP,ICEM-PART, Group Technology,

Classification and Coding, Existing Coding Systems, Product Data Management (PDM) Systems.

10 Hours

Text Books:

1. Kunwoo Lee, “Principles of CAD/CAM/CAE systems”-Addison Wesley, 1999

2. RadhakrishnanP.,etal.,“CAD/CAM/CIM”-New Age International, 2008

Reference Books:

1. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM – Theory & Practice”, McGraw Hill, 1998

2. Bedworth, Mark Henderson & Philip Wolfe, “Computer Integrated Design and

Manufacturing” -McGraw hill inc., 1991.

3. Pro-Engineer, Part modeling Users Guide, 1998

Course Outcome:

Students develop expertise in generation of various curves, surfaces and volumes used in geometric modeling systems.

MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE)

Sub Code : 16MDE153

Hrs/ Week : 04

Total Hrs: 50

Course Objective

IA Marks :20

Exam Hours : 03

Exam Marks :80

1. To educate the student regarding integration of mechanical, electronics, electrical and computer systems in the design of CNC machine

tools, Robots etc.

2. To provide students with an understanding of the Mechatronic Design Process,

actuators, Sensors, transducers, Signal Conditioning, MEMS and Microsystems and also the Advanced Applications in Mechatronics.

Course Content:

1. Introduction: Definition and Introduction to Mechatronic Systems. Modeling &Simulation of Physical systems Overview of Mechatronic

Products and their functioning, measurement systems. Control Systems, simple Controllers. Study of Sensors and Transducers:

Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems, Mechanical Actuation System, Electrical Actual Systems, Real time interfacing and Hardware

components for Mechatronics. 10 Hours

2. Electrical Actuation Systems: Electrical systems, Mechanical switches, Solid state switches, solenoids, DC & AC motors, Stepper motors.

System Models: Mathematical models:- mechanical system building blocks, electrical system building blocks, thermal system building

blocks, electromechanical systems, hydro-mechanical systems, pneumatic systems. 11 Hours

3. Signal Conditioning: Signal conditioning, the operational amplifier, Protection, Filtering, Wheatstone Bridge, Digital signals , Multiplexers,

Data Acquisition, Introduction to digital system processing, pulse-modulation.

MEMS and Microsystems: Introduction, Working Principle, Materials for MEMS and Microsystems, Micro System fabrication process,

Overview of Micro Manufacturing, Micro system Design, and Micro system Packaging. 13 Hours

4. Data Presentation Systems: Basic System Models, System Models, Dynamic Responses of System.

8 Hours

5. Advanced Applications in Mechatronics: Fault Finding, Design, Arrangements and Practical Case Studies, Design for manufacturing, User-

friendly design. 8 Hours

Text Books:

1. W. Bolton, “Mechatronics” - Addison Wesley Longman Publication, 1999

2. HSU “MEMS and Microsystems design and manufacture”- Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2002

Reference Books:

1. Kamm, “Understanding Electro-Mechanical Engineering an Introduction to Mechatronics”- IEEE Press, 1 edition ,1996

2. Shetty and Kolk “Mechatronics System Design”- Cengage Learning, 2010

3. Mahalik “Mechatronics”- Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2003

4. HMT “Mechatronics”- Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1998

5. Michel .B. Histand& David. Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics & Measurement Systems”–. Mc Grew Hill, 2002

6. “Fine Mechanics and Precision Instruments”- Pergamon Press, 1971.

Course Outcome:

This course makes the student to appreciate multi disciplinary nature of modern engineering systems. Specifically mechanical engineering

students to collaborate with Electrical, Electronics, Instrumentation and Computer Engineering disciplines.

DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURE

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE)

Sub Code : 16MDE154

Hrs/ Week : 04

Total Hrs: 50

IA Marks :20

Exam Hours : 03

Exam Marks :80

Course Objective:

To educate students a clear understanding of factors to be considered in designing parts and components with focus on manufacturability

Course Content:

1. Effect of Materials And Manufacturing Process On Design: Major phases of design. Effect of material properties on design Effect of

manufacturing processes on design. Material selection process- cost per unit property, Weighted properties and limits on properties

methods.

Tolerence Analysis: Process capability, mean, varience, skewness, kurtosis, Process capability metrics, Cp, Cpk, Cost aspects, Feature

tolerances, Geometries tolerances, Geometric tolerances, Surface finish, Review of relationship between attainable tolerance grades and

different machining process. Cumulative effect of tolerance- Sure fit law and truncated normal law. 12

Hours

2. Selective Assembly: Interchangeable part manufacture and selective assembly, Deciding the number of groups -Model-1 : Group

tolerance of mating parts equal, Model total and group tolerances of shaft equal. Control of axial play-Introducing secondary machining

operations, Laminated shims, examples.

Datum Features : Functional datum, Datum for manufacturing, Changing the datum. Examples.12 Hours

3. Design Considerations: Design of components with casting consideration. Pattern,Mould, and Parting line. Cored holes and Machined

holes. Identifying the possibleand probable parting line. Casting requiring special sand cores. Designing to obviatesand cores.

Component Design: Component design with machining considerations link design for turning components-milling, Drilling and other

related processes including finish- machining operations. 13 Hours

4. True positional theory : Comparison between co-ordinate and convention method offeature location. Tolerance and true

position tolerancing virtual size concept, Floating and fixed fasteners. Projected tolerance zone. Assembly with gasket, zero position

tolerance. Functional gauges, Paper layout gauging. 7 Hours

5. Design of Gauges: Design of gauges for checking components in assemble with emphasis on various types of limit gauges for both hole

and shaft. 6 Hours

Text Books:

1. Harry Peck , “Designing for Manufacturing”, Pitman Publications, 1983.

2. Dieter , “Machine Design” - McGraw-Hill Higher Education, -2008

3. R.K. Jain, "Engineering Metrology", Khanna Publishers, 1986

4. Product design for manufacture and assembly - Geoffrey Boothroyd, Peter dewhurst, Winston Knight, Merceldekker. Inc. CRC Press,

Third Edition

5. Material selection and Design, Vol. 20 - ASM Hand book.

Course Outcome:

Students will have added capability to include manufacturability in mechanical engineering design of parts and their assemblies.

ADVANCED FLUID DYNAMICS

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE)

Sub Code : 16MEA155 IA Marks :20

Hrs/ Week : 04 Exam Hours : 03

Total Hrs: 50 Exam Marks :80

Course Objective:

The student will gain knowledge of dynamics of fluid flow under different conditions.

1. Review of undergraduate Fluid Mechanics : Differential Flow analysis- Continuity equation (3D Cartesian, Cylindrical and spherical

coordinates) Navier Stokes equations (3D- Cartesian, coordinates) Elementary inviscid flows; superposition (2D). 8 Hours

2. Integral Flow Analysis: Reynolds transport theorem, Continuity, momentum, moment of momentum, energy equations with applications

such as turbo machines, jet propulsion &propellors;

Exact solution of viscous flow equations: Steady flow: Hagen Poiseuille problem, plane Poiseuille problem, Unsteady flow: Impulsively

started plate

12 Hours

3. Low Reynolds number flows:Lubrication theory (Reynolds equation), flow past rigid sphere, flow past cylinder

Boundary Layer Theory:Definitions, Blasius solution, Von-Karman integral, Separation, 10 Hours

4. Thermal Boundary layer and heat transfer, (Laminar & turbulent flows);

Experiments in fluids: Wind tunnel, Pressure Probes, Anemometers and flow meters

10 Hours

5. Special Topics:Stability theory; Natural and forced convection; Rayleigh Benardproblem;Transition to turbulence; Introduction to turbulent

flows

10 Hours

Text Books:

1. “Foundations of fluid mechanics” - S. W. Yuan,SI Unit edition, 1988.

2. “Advanced Engineering Fluid Mechanics”- K. Muralidhar& G. Biswas, Narosa Publishers, 1999.

Reference Books:

1. “Physical Fluid Dynamics” 2nd

edition – D.J. Tritton, Oxford Science Publications, 1988.

2. “Boundary Layer Theory”8th

edition, H. Schlichting, McGraw Hill, New York., 1999.

Course Outcome:

The student will be able to apply concepts of fluid dynamics in solving real time problems.

Design Engineering Laboratory – Lab 1

(Common to MDE,MEA,MMD,CAE,MCS)

Sub Code : 16MDE16

Hrs/ Week : 3

Total Hrs:42

IA Marks :20

Exam Hours : 03

Exam Marks : 80

Note:

1) These are independent laboratory exercises

2) A student may be given one or two problems stated herein

3) Student must submit a comprehensive report on the problem solved and give a

Presentation on the same for Internal Evaluation

4) Any one of the exercises done from the following list has to be asked in the Examination for evaluation.

Course Content:

Experiment #1

Numerically Calculation and MATLAB Simulation

Part A:Invariants, Principal stresses and strains with directions

Part A: Maximum shear stresses and strains and planes,Von-Mises stress

Part C: Calculate and Plot Stresses in Thick-Walled Cylinder

Experiment #2

Stress analysis in Curved beam in 2D

Part A : Experimental studies using Strain Gauge Instrumentation.

Part B : 2D Photo elastic Investigation.

Part C :Modelling and Numerical Analysis using FEM.

Experiment #3

Stress analysis of rectangular plate with circular hole under i. Uniform Tension and ii. shear

Part A: Matlab simulation for Calculation and Plot of normalized hoop Stress at hole boundary in Infinite Plate

Part B: Modelling of plate geometry under chosen load conditions and study the effect of plate geometry.

Part C: Numerical Analysis using FEA package.

2

Experiment #4

Single edge notched beam in four point bending.

Part A: Modeling of single edge notched beam in four point bending. Part B:

Numerical Studies using FEA.

Part C: Correlation Studies.

Experimental #5

Torsion of Prismatic bar with Rectangular cross-section. Part A: Elastic

solutions, MATLAB Simulation

Part B: Finite Element Analysis of any chosen geometry. Part C:

Correlation studies.

Experiment #6

Contact Stress Analysis of Circular Disc under diametrical compression

Part A: 3-D Modeling of Circular Discs with valid literature background, supported with experimental results on contact stress. Part B:

Numerical Analysis using any FEA package.

Part C: 2D Photo Elastic Investigation.

Experiment #7

Vibration Characteristics of a Spring Mass Damper System. Part A:

Analytical Solutions.

Part B: MATLAB Simulation. Part C:

Correlation Studies.

Experiment #8

Modelling and Simulation of Control Systems using MATLAB.

2

Common to Design Engineering (MDE), Engineering Analysis & Design (MEA),

Machine Design (MMD), Computer Aided Engineering (CAE)

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY, BELGAUM

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION FOR

M.TECH. Machine Design

II SEMESTER CREDIT BASED

Subject Code

Name of the Subject

Teaching hours/week Duration

of Exam

in Hours

Marks for Total

Marks

CREDITS

Lecture Practical / Field Work /

Assignment/ Tutorials

I.A.

Exam

16MST 21 Composite Materials Technology 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16MDE 22 Advanced Machine Design 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16MDE 23 Dynamics & Mechanism Design 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16MDE 24 Advanced Theory of Vibrations 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16XXXXXX Elective – II 4 2 3 20 80 100 4

16MDE 26 Design Engineering Lab II -- 3 3 20 80 100 2

16MMD 27 SEMINAR -- -- -- 100 -- 100 1

**PROJECT WORK PHASE-I

COMMENCEMENT (6 WEEKS DURATION)

--

--

--

--

--

--

-

Total 20 13 18 220 480 700 23

ELECTIVE-II

16CAE 251 Design Optimization 16CAE 253 Advanced Manufacturing Process Simulation

16MDE252 Theory of Plasticity 16MDE 254 Rotor Dynamics

16MEA255 Automobile System Design

** Between the II Semester and III Semester, after availing a vacation of 2 weeks.

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

September - 2018

Jnana Sangama, Belagavi – 590 018, Karnataka

Phone: 0831 -2498100/2405468 Fax;2405467

E–Mail:[email protected], Web: www.vtu.ac.in

REGULATIONS SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS, AND SILLABUS GOVERNING

THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION (MBA)

UNDER OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION (OBE)

AND

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS) SCHEME

Effective from academic year 2018 -19

MBA(Master of Business

Administration)

Price : Rs.100/-

For copies Contact :

“Jnana Sangama”, BELAGAVI-590 018.

REGISTRARVisvesvaraya Technological University

Published by :

“Jnana Sangama”, BELAGAVI-590 018.

© Copyright 2018-19

REGISTRARVisvesvaraya Technological University

CONTENTS

Regulation

Clause

Title Page

Number

-- Definitions of Keywords 04

18OMB1.0 Title, Duration and Credits of the Programme of Study

07

18OMB2.0 Eligibility for Admission (As per the Government orders issued from

time to time)

07

18OMB3.0 Courses

09

18OMB4.0 Internship

10

18OMB5.0 Project

12

18OMB6.0 Computation of SGPA and CGPA

16

18OMB7.0 Conversions of Grades into Percentage and Class

equivalence

18

18OMB8.0 Continuous Internal Evaluation and Semester End Evaluation

18

18OMB9.0 Eligibility for Passing and Award of Degree

20

18OMB10.0 Attendance Requirement

22

18OMB11.0 Promotion and Eligibility

23

18OMB12.0 Temporary Discontinuation/Break in the Program

23

18OMB13.0 Award of Prizes, Medals and Ranks

24

18OMB14.0 Applicability and Power to Modify

25

VISVESVARAYA TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

Jnana Sangama, Belagavi – 590 018, Karnataka

Phone: 0831 -2498100/2405468 Fax;2405467

E–Mail:[email protected], Web: www.vtu.ac.in

32

MBA Program Structure and Credits

Scheme of subjects and Teaching

Syllabus

26

27

32

Definitions of Keywords

1. Programme:

2. Branch:

3. Semester:

4. Academic Year:

5. Course:

6. Credit:

7. Audit Courses:

8. Choice Based Credit System (CBCS):

The following are the definitions/descriptions that have been followed for the different terms used in the Regulations of Master of Business Administration (MBA) Programme:

Is an educational programme in Business Administration leading to award of Degree. It involves events/activities, comprising of lectures/ tutorials/ laboratory work/ field work, outreach activities/ project work/ vocational training/ viva/ seminars/ internship/ assignments/ presentations/ self-study/ quiz etc, or a combination of some of these.

Meansspecialization or discipline of MBA.

Refers to one of the two sessions of an academic year (vide: serial number 4), each session being of sixteen weeks duration (with working days greater than or equal to ninety).The odd semester may be scheduled from August and even semester from February of the year.

Refers to the sessions of two consecutive semesters (odd followed by an even) including periods of vacation.

Refers to usually referred to as ‘papers’ and is a component of a programme. All Courses need not carry the same weight. The Courses should define learning objectives and learning outcomes. A Course may be designed to comprise lectures/ tutorials/ laboratory work/ field work/ outreach activities/project work/ vocational training/ viva/ seminars/ term papers/assignments/ presentations/ self-study/quiz etc. or a combination of some of these.

Refers to a unit by which the Course work is measured. It determines the number of hours of instructions required per week. One credit is equivalent to one hour of lecture or two hours of laboratory/practical Courses/ tutorials/ fieldwork per week etc.

Means Knowledge/ Skill enhancing Courses without the benefit of a grade or credit for a Course.

Refers to customizing the Course work, through Core, Elective and soft skill Courses, to provide necessary support for the students to achieve their goals.

9. Course Registration:

10. Course Evaluation:

11. Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE):

12. Semester end examinations (SEE):

13. First Attempt:

14. Credit Based System (CBS):

15. Credit Representation:

Refers to formal registration for the Courses of a semester (Credits) by every student under the supervision of a Faculty Advisor (also called Mentor, Counselor etc.) in each Semester for the Institution to maintain proper record.

Means Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) and Semester End Examinations (SEE) to constitute the major evaluations prescribed for each Course. CIE and SEEto carry 40 % and 60 % respectively, to enable each Course to be evaluated for 100 marks, irrespective of its Credits.

Refers to evaluation of students achievement in the learning process. CIE shall be by the course instructor and includes tests, homework, problem solving, oral examination, group discussion, quiz, mini-project, outreach activities and seminar throughout the semester, with weightage for the different components being fixed at the University level.

Refers to examination conducted at the University level covering the entire course syllabus. SEE is also termed as university examination.

Refers to a student who has completed all formalities and has become eligible to attend the SEE and has attended at least one head of passing, such attempt shall be considered as first attempt.

Refers to quantification of course work, after a student completes teaching – learning process, followed by passing in both CIE and SEE. Under CBS, the requirement for awarding degree is prescribed in terms of total number of credits to be earned by the students.

Refers to Credit Values for different academic activities considered, as per the Table.1. Credits for seminar, project phases, project viva–voce and internship shall be as specified in the Scheme of Teaching and Examination.

Table 1: Credit Values

Theory/Lectures (L)

(hours/week/Semester) Tutorials (T)

(hours/week/Semester)

Laboratory/Practical (P)

(hours/week/Semester) Credits

(L:T:P)

Total

Credits

4 0 0 4:0:0 4

3 0

0

3:0:0 3

2 2

0

2:1:0 3

2 0

2

2:0:1 3

2 2 2 2:1:1 4

0 0 6 0:0:3 3

54

16. Letter Grade:

17. Grading:

18. Grade Point (GP):

19. Passing Standards:

20. Credit Point:

21. Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA):

22. Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA):

23. Grade Card:

24. University:

It is an index of the performance of students in a said Course. Grades are denoted by letters S, A, B, C, D, E and F.

Grade refers to qualitative measure of achievement of a student in each Course, based on the percentage of marks secured in (CIE plus SEE). Grading is done by Absolute Grading [Refer: 18OMB6.0]. The rubic attached to letter grades are as follows:

S – Outstanding, A – Excellent, B – Very Good, C – Good, D – Above Average, E – Average and F – Fail.

Refers to a numerical weightage allotted to each letter grade on a 10-point scale as under.

Refers to passing a Course only when getting GP greater than or equal to 04 (as per serial number 18).

Is the product of Grade Point (GP) and number of credits for a Course i.e.

Credt points (CrP)=GP×Credits for the Course.

Refers to a measure of academic performance of student/s in a semester. It is the ratio of total credit points secured by a student in various Courses of a semester and the total Course credits taken during that semester. [Refer:18OMB6.0]

Is a measure of overall cumulative performance of a student over all semesters. The CGPA is the ratio of total credit points earned by a student in various Courses in all semesters and the sum of the total credits of all Courses in all the semesters. It is expressed up to two decimal places. [Refer: 18OMB6.0]

Refers to the certificate showing the grades earned by a student. A grade card shall be issued to all the registered students after every semester end examination. The grade card will display the Programme details (Course code, title, number of credits, grades secured) along with SGPA of that semester and CGPA earned till that semester.

Visvesvaraya Technological University (VTU), Belagavi.

Letter Grade and corresponding Grade Points on a typical 10 – Point scale

Letter Grade S A B C D E F

Grade Point 10

09

08

07

06

04 00

18OMB1.0 Title, Duration and Credits of the Programme of Study

18OMB1.1

18OMB1.2

18OMB1.3 Maximum Duration for Programme Completion:

18OMB1.4 Prescribed Number of Credits for the Programme:

18OMB1.5

18OMB2.0 Eligibility for Admission (As per the Government orders issued from time to time)

18OMB2.1

The Programme shall be called Master of Business Administration (Subject of Specialization) abbreviated as MBA (Subject of Specialization).

The Programme shall be a full time programme extended over a period of two academic year duration divided into four semesters and each semester shall be of 16 weeks duration.

A candidate shall be allowed a maximum duration of 4 years from the first semester of admission to become eligible for the award of the Degree, failing which he/she may discontinue the program or register once again as a fresh candidate to I semester.

The number of credits to be completed for the award of degree shall be 100.

The Calendar of events in respect of the Programme shall be notified by the University in advance.

Admission to MBA Program shall be open to the candidates who have passed recognized Bachelor’s Degree of minimum of 3 years duration or equivalent examination and obtained an aggregate minimum of 50% marks taken together in all the subjects including languages in all the years of the Degree Examination and 45% of marks in case of SC, ST and Category-I of Karnataka candidates. (Reservation is applicable only for Karnataka Candidates).

76

98

18OMB2.2 For admissions under PGCET qualification and Roaster system of Government of Karnataka:

For admissions under Management Quota:

18OMB2.3

18OMB2.4

There shall be an Entrance Examination (PGCET) for admission to the MBA programme. A candidate seeking admission to MBA Programme offered in any of the Engineering Colleges affiliated to VTU shall appear for this Examination. For admission under Government quota, ranks obtained in PGCET entrance examination, conducted by Karnataka Examination Authority (KEA), shall be considered.

The candidates should have appeared for theEntrance E x a m i n a t i o n c o n d u c t e d b y K E A (PGCET)/Karnataka Management Aptitude Test (KMAT) or appeared and qualified under any approved entrance examination conducted by the authori ty recognized by Government of Karnataka/VTU /any other University of Karnataka state.

Further, there shall be an Admissions Committee for the MBA Program consisting of the Principal of the College as the Chairman, Head of the concerned Department and one senior staff member of the concerned Department. The Admissions Committee conducts the interview and selects the candidates for admission.

(i) The candidates from Universities other than the Universities of Karnataka shall have to obtain Eligibility Certificate from the VTU to seek admission to MBA program in any of the college affiliated to VTU.

(ii) The candidates from foreign countries shall have to obtain Eligibility Certificate from the VTU to seek admission to MBA program in any of the college affiliated to VTU. Further, they have to produce equivalence certificate from the Association of Indian Universities.

The intake under various categories (regular, SC/ST and category I) shall be as sanctioned by the AICTE, State Government and VTU, from time to time.

18OMB2.5 Admission to vacant seats:

18OMB3.0 Courses

18OMB3.1

Seats remaining vacant (unfilled), after the completion of PG admission process by Karnataka Examination Authority, shall be filled by the Institution by inviting applications through Press notification. The seats shall be filled by Candidates preferably who have PGCET score. In the absence of such Candidates, admission shall be based on merit in the entrance test conducted at the Institution level. An Admissions Committee, consisting of the Principal of the College, Head of the concerned Department and the subject experts, shall be in charge of admissions.

The curriculum of the Programme shall be any combination of following type of courses:

i) Professional Core Courses (PC) - relevant to the chosen specialization/ branch [May be split into Hard (no choice) and Soft (with choice), if required]. The core course is to be compulsorily studied by a student and is mandatory to complete the requirements of a programme in a said discipline of study.

ii) Professional Electives Courses (PE) - relevant to the chosen specialization/ branch: these are the courses, which can be chosen from the pool of papers. It shall be supportive to the discipline/ providing extended scope/enabling an exposure to some other discipline / domain / nurturing student skills.

iii) Open Electives Courses (OE) - from other technical and/ or emerging specialization areas.

iv) Project Work, Seminar.

v) Audit Courses (AC):

(a) The Audit course can be any credit course offered by the program to which the Candidate is admitted (other than the courses considered for completing the prescribed program credits).

(b) The students interested in audit courses can register for one audit course at a time during II to IV semester.

2. The Department/college shall nominate a faculty to facilitate, guide and supervise students under internship.

3. The students shall report the progress of the internship to the internal guide in regular intervals and seek his/her advise.

4. The Internship shall be completed during the period specified in Scheme of Teaching and Examination.

5. After completion of Internship, students shall submit a report to the Head of the Department with the approval of both internal and external guides.

6. There will be 40 marks for CIE (Seminar: 20, Internship/ Organization study report: 20) and 60 marks for Viva – Voce conducted during SEE. [To be read along with 18OMB 8.1 and 9.3]

7. The internal guide shall award the CIE marks for seminar and internship report after evaluation. He/she will also be the internal examiner for Viva – Voce conducted during SEE.

8. The external guide from the industry shall be an examiner for the viva voce on Internship. Viva-Voce on internship shall be conducted at the college and the date of Viva-Voce shall be fixed in consultation with the external Guide. The Examiners shall jointly award the Viva - Voce marks.

9. (i) In case the external Guide is not available or expresses his inability to conduct viva voce, the Chief Superintendent shall be permitted to make alternate arrangement. The examiner, in the order of preference, shall be an industry person or a faculty of another institution chosen from the list of University examiners. The same shall be intimated to the concerned BOE Chairperson.

(ii) In case the external Guide accepts to conduct viva-voce examination from his/her workplace, it shall be arranged via Video/web conferencing/ Webinar. The external Examiner shall send the signed marks list, soon after the examination, via email/any electronic media.

Students who have registered to audit courses, considered on par with students registered to the same course for credit, have to satisfy attendance and CIE requirements. However, they need not have to appear for SEE.

(c) Registration for any audit course, in writing, shall be completed at the beginning of each semester. The Institution should intimate the Registrar (Evaluation) about the registration at the beginning of the semester and obtain a formal approval for inclusion of the audit course/s in the Grade cards/ Transcripts issued to the students.

vi) Professional training/Internship (referred to as Internship): Preferably at an industry/

R and D organization/IT company/ Government organization/Business organization of significant repute for a specified period mentioned in Scheme of Teaching and Examination.

A candidate shall exercise his /her option in respect of the electives and register for the same before the beginning of the concerned semester. The candidate may be permitted to opt for change of elective subject within 10 days from the date of commencement of the semester as per the calendar of the University.

The minimum number of students to be registered for an Elective to be offered shall not be less than ten.

However, the above condition shall not be applicable when the class strength is less than ten.

The student shall undergo Internship/Organization study as per the Scheme of Teaching and Examination.

1. The internship shall be carried out in any i n d u s t r y / R & D O r g a n i z a t i o n / R e s e a r c h Institute/Institute of national and international repute Business organization/ recognized national and international Professional Bodies, Societies or Organizations.

18OMB3.2

18OMB3.3

18OMB4.0 Internship

18OMB4.1 Internship:

1110

10. The students are permitted to carry out the internship anywhere in India or abroad. The University will not provide any kind of Financial Assistance to any student for internship.

Internship is one of the head of passing. Completion of Internship is mandatory. If any student fails to undergo/complete the Internship, he/she shall be considered as fail in that Course and the prescribed credits shall not be awarded in that Course. The student, however, can submit the project dissertation and appear for viva voce.

The student shall be eligible for the internship credits only after satisfying the conditions prescribed for the same during the subsequent academic year. The reappearance shall be considered as an attempt.

Each candidate shall carry out the project work independently as per Scheme of Teaching and Examinations under the guidance of one of the faculty members of the Department in the Institution of study. If the project is of inter-disciplinary nature, a co-guide shall be taken from the other concerned department.

The topic and title of the dissertation shall be chosen by the candidate in consultation with the guide and co-guide, if any, during the III semester itself.

The subject and topic of the dissertation shall be from the major field of studies of the candidate. Modification of only the title but not the field of work may be permitted at the time of final submission of dissertation report during IV semester. If dissertation has to be carried out in any industry/R&D labs/business organizations, outside the campus, permission shall be taken from the Principal to that effect.

The Principal, shall submit a list showing the name of the student, University Seat Number, title of the

18OMB4.2 Failing to undergo Internship:

18OMB5.0 Project

18OMB5.1 Project work and Dissertation:

project, name/s of the guide/co-guide at the time of submission of project report to the University.

Project is one of the head of passing.

The candidate shall submit a soft copy (CD) of the dissertation work to the University. The CD should contain the entire Dissertation in monolithic form as a PDF file (not separate chapters).

The Guide, after checking the report for completeness shall upload the Dissertation along with name, University Seat Number, address, mobile number of the candidate, etc., as prescribed in form available on online Dissertation evaluation portal.

Once the Guide uploads the dissertation, the same shall be linked for plagiarism check. The allowable plagiarism index is less than or equal to 25%.

If the check indicates a plagiarism index greater than 25%:

* For the first time, the candidate has to resubmit the dissertation, to the Registrar (Evaluation), Regional Center/Head Office, VTU along with the penal fees of Rs. 2000/- (RupeesTwo thousand only).

* For the second time, the candidate has to resubmit the dissertation along with the penal fees of Rs. 4000/- (Rupees four thousand only).

* If the dissertation is rejected again during second resubmission with reference to plagiarism index, the candidate shall redo the project and submit after a semester’s time subject to provisions of 18OMB1.5.

The dissertation shall be sent through email for evaluation to two examiners - one internal examiner (guide/co-guide) and one external examiner (first) appointed by the University. The evaluation of the dissertation shall be made independently by each examiner.

Examiners shall evaluate the dissertation normally within a period of not more than two weeks from the

18OMB5.2

18OMB5.3 Plagiarism Check

18OMB5.4

18OMB5.5

1312

date of receipt of dissertation through email.

The examiners shall independently submit the marks through the specified link.

Average of the marks awarded by the two Examiners shall be the final evaluation marks for the Dissertation.

(a) Viva-voce examination of the candidate shall be conducted as per 18OMB5.10, if the dissertation work and the reports are accepted by the external examiner (first).

(b) If the external examiner (first) finds that the dissertation work and the report are not up to the expected standard and the minimum passing marks cannot be awarded, the dissertation shall not be accepted for SEE.

The external examiner (first) can recommend for modifications/suggestions of dissertation or totally reject the dissertation. The examiner shall offer suggestions for improvement of the dissertation for resubmission or list the reasons for rejection of the dissertation.

(c) The resubmitted Dissertation incorporating the modifications/suggestions [as per 18OMB5.8 (b)] of the external examiner (first) and satisfying the provision 18OMB5.3 shall be sent again to the external examiner (first) for evaluation. If the dissertation and the report are accepted by the external examiner (first), Viva-voce examination of the candidate shall be conducted as per 18OMB5.10.

(d) In case of rejection of Dissertation by the external examiner (first), the same will be sent to a Second Examiner (external) approved by the University. The decision oftheSecond Examiner (external) is final. If the dissertation and the report are accepted by the Second Examiner (external), Viva-voce examination of the candidate shall be conducted as per 18OMB5.10. If the Second Examiner (external) rejects the dissertation and the report, the candidate shall have to carry out the

18OMB5.6

18OMB5.7

18OMB5.8

dissertation work once again and submit the dissertation subject to provisions of 18OMB1.5. In such cases of rejection, the candidate shall redo the entire procedure starting from the submission of Dissertation in soft copy.

(e) In case of rejection of Dissertation, with reasons, by the external examiner (first) [as per 18OMB5.8 (b)], the same will be sent to a Second Examiner (external) [not necessarily the same examiner considered under 18OMB5.8 (d)] approved by the University. The decision of the Second Examiner (external) is final. If the dissertation and the report are accepted by the Second Examiner (external), Viva-voce examination of the candidate shall be conducted as per 18OMB5.10. If the Second Examiner (external) rejects the dissertation and the report, the candidate shall have to carry out the dissertation work once again and submit the dissertation subject to provisions of 18OMB1.5. In such cases of rejection, the candidate shall redo the entire procedure starting from the submission of Dissertation in soft copy.

The candidate, whose Dissertation is rejected, can rework on the same topic or choose another topic of dissertation under the same Guide or new Guide if necessary. In such an event, the report shall be submitted within four years from the date of admission to the Programme.

Viva-voce examination of the candidate shall be conducted by the external examiner and internal examiner/ guide.

Internal examiner as per the direction of the University shall have to arrive at a mutually convenient date for the conduct of viva-voce examination of the concerned candidate with an intimation to the Registrar (Evaluation). In case one of the examiners expresses his/her inability to attend the viva-voce, the Registrar (Evaluation) shall appoint a substitute examiner in his/her place.

The relative weights for the evaluation of dissertation

18OMB5.9

18OMB5.10

18OMB5.11

1514

(a) SGPA and CGPA Calculations: An Illustrative Example for one academic year

Semester

(Odd :I,

Even: II)

Course

Number

Cre

dit

s

Gra

de

Gra

de

Po

ints

Cre

dit

Po

ints

SGPA, CGPA

I XX101 5:0:0 = 5 B 8 5 × 8 = 40

=117

25

=

I XX102 3:2:0 = 5 Absent(F) 0 5 × 0 = 00I XX103

3:0:0 = 3

A

9

3 × 9 = 27

I XX104

0:1:1 = 2

F

0

2 × 0 = 00

I XX105

4:1:0 = 5

D

6

5 × 6 = 30

I XX106

5:0:0 = 5

E

4

5 × 4 = 20

Total

25 (18*)

Total

117

(18*): Total credits of the semester

excluding the credits of the courses under F grade. Considered for

the calculation of CGPA of the two consecutive semesters under consideration.

II XX107

3:1:1 = 5

C

7

5 × 7 = 35

=157

25

II XX108

4:0:0 = 4

B

8

4 × 8 = 32

II XX109

3:0:0 = 3

D

6

3 × 6 = 18

II XX110

4:1:0 = 5

E

4

5 × 4 = 20

II XX111

2:1:1 = 4

A

9

4 × 9 = 36

=(117 + 157)

18 + 23= 274/41 =

II XX112

2:0:0 = 2

F

0

2 × 0 = 00

II XX113

0:2:0 = 2

B

8

2 × 8 = 16

Total

25 (23*)

Total

157

(23*): Total credits of the semester excluding the credits of the courses under F grade. Considered for

the calculation of CGPA of the two consecutive semesters under consideration.

If the Student secures letter grades as detailed below after reappearance to SEE, then the SGPA and

CGPA shall be calculated as indicated below.

I XX102

3:2:0 = 5

D

6

5 × 6 = 30

=117 + 30 + 14

25= 161/25 =

I XX104

0:1:1 = 2

C

7

2 × 7 = 14

II XX112

2:0:0 = 2

D

6

2 × 6

= 12= (157 + 12)/25

= 169/25 =

CGPA at the end of the academic year after passing all the Courses of the two

consecutive semesters under consideration =6.44 × 25 + 6.76 × 25

50= ?6.60

4.68

= 4.68

6.68

SGPA

CGPA

6.44

6.76

SGPA (I Semester)

SGPA (I Semester)

18OMB6.2 Computation of SGPA and CGPA

The following expressions shall be used to compute the Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) respectively:

SGPA= (? [CourseCredits Grade Points] for all the Courses in that Semester)

(? [Course Credits] for all the Courses in that Semester)

CGPA= ( ∑[ CourseCredits × Grade Points] for all Courses excluding @ those with F grades until that Semester)∑[ Course Credits] for all Courses excluding those with F grades until that semester

and the performance at the viva voce shall be as per the scheme of teaching & examination.

The marks awarded by both the Examiners at the viva voce Examination shall be sent jointly to the University immediately after the examination.

Examination fee as fixed from time to time by the University for evaluation of dissertation report and conduct of viva voce shall be remitted through the Head of the Institution as per the instructions of Registrar (Evaluation) from time to time.

The candidates who fail to submit the dissertation work within the stipulated time have to submit the same at the time of next ensuing examination.

(i) The University adopts absolute grading system wherein the marks are converted to grades, and every semester results will be declared with semester grade point average (SGPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). The CGPA will be calculated for every semester, except for the first semester.

(ii) The grading system with the letter grades and the assigned range of marks under

absolute grading system are as given below:

(iii) A student obtaining Grade F in a Course shall be considered fail and is required to reappear in subsequent SEE. Whatever the letter grade secured by the student during his /her reappearance shall be retained. However the number of attempts taken to clear a Course shall be indicated in the grade cards/ transcripts.

18OMB5.12

18OMB5.13

18OMB5.14

18OMB6.0 Computation of SGPA and CGPA

18OMB6.1

Level Outstanding Excellent Very Good Good

Above

Average

Average Fail

Letter Grade S A

B

C

D

E F

Grade Points 10 9

8

7

6

4 00

Percentage of

Marks Scored

in a Course

≥ 90 <90

≥80

< 80

≥70

< 70

≥60

< 60

≥ 55

< 55

≥50

< 50

(90 -100) (80 - 89) (70 - 79) (60 - 69) (55 - 59) (50- 54) (0 - 49)

1716

SGPA

(b) CGPA Calculation of the Programme:An Illustrative Example

Semester I II III IV

Credits of the semester 24 24 28 24

SGPA 7.00 8.50 9.20 6.86

=(24 × 7.00 + 24 × 8.50 + 28 × 9.20 + 24 × 6.86)

100= ?7.94CGPA

Based on the secured letter grades, grade points, SGPA and CGPA, a grade card for each semester and a consolidated grade card indicating the

performance in all semesters shall be issued. ?

Conversion formula for the conversion of CGPA into percentage is given below:

Percentage of marks secured,

P = [CGPA Earned - 0.75] × 10

Illustration for a CGPA of 8.20:

P = [CGPA Earned 8.2 - 0.75]× 10 = 74.5 %

After the conversion of final CGPA into percentage of marks (P), a graduating student is reckoned to have passed in

(i) First Class with Distinction (FCD) if P = 70%

(ii) First Class (FC) if P = 60% but <70% and

(iii) Second Class (SC) if P < 60%.

There shall be a maximum of 40 CIE Marks in each theory.

A candidate shall obtain not less than 50% of the maximum marks prescribed for the CIE of each Theory course/ Internship /Project/Dissertation. [To be read along with 18OMB8.8]

18OMB6.3 Grade Card:

18OMB7.0 Conversions of Grades into Percentage and Class Equivalence

18OMB7.1 Conversions of Grades into Percentage

18OMB7.2 Class Equivalence:

18OMB8.0 Continuous Internal Evaluation and Semester End Evaluation

18OMB8.1

18OMB8.2

18OMB8.3

18OMB8.4

18OMB8.5

18OMB8.6

18OMB8.7

18OMB8.8

CIE Marks shall be based on

a) Tests (for 25Marks) and

b) Assignments, Quiz, Simulation, Experimentation, Mini project, oral examination, field work etc., (for 15 Marks)conducted in respective courses.

The CIE marks in a theory course, for 25 marks, shall be based on two tests covering the entire syllabus. An additional test may be conducted for the needy students to provide an opportunity to improve their CIE Marks before the end of the semester. The CIE marks shall be the average of the marks scored in at least two of the above tests.

The candidates shall write the Tests in Blue Book/s. The Blue book/s and other documents relating to award of CIE marks under 18OMB8.2 (b) shall be preserved by the Principal / Head of the Department for at least six months from the date of announcement of University results and made available for verification at the directions of the Registrar (Evaluation).

Every page of the CIE marks list shall bear the signatures of the concerned Teacher, Head of the Department and the Principal.

The CIE marks list shall be displayed on the Notice Board and corrections, if any, shall be incorporated before submitting to the University.

The CIE marks shall be sent to the university by the Pr inc ipa ls wel l in advance before the commencement of Semester End Examinations. No corrections of the CIE marks shall be entertained after the submission of marks list to the University.

Candidates obtaining less than 50% of the CIE marks in any course (Theory/Internship/Project) shall not be eligible to appear for the University examination in that course/s. In such cases, the Head of the Department shall arrange for the improvement of CIE marks in the course when offered in the subsequent semester subject to the provision of 18OMB1.5.

1918

18OMB8.9 Semester End Evaluation :

18OMB8.10

18OMB8.11

18OMB8.12

18OMB9.0 Eligibility for Passing and Award of Degree

18OMB9.1

There shall be a University examination at the end of each semester.

` Setting Theory Question Papers and Evaluation: Question papers in theory courses shall be set by the Examiners appointed by the University.

There shall be double valuation of theory papers. The theory Answer booklets shall be valued independently by two examiners appointed by the University.

If the difference between the marks awarded by the two Examiners is not more than 15 per cent of the maximum marks, the marks awarded to the candidate shall be the average of two evaluations.

If the difference between the marks awarded by the two Examiners is more than 15 per cent of the maximum marks, the answer booklet shall be evaluated by a third Examiner appointed by the University. The average of the marks of nearest two valuations shall be considered as the marks secured by the candidate. In case, if one of the three marks falls exactly midway between the other two, then the highest two marks shall be taken for averaging.

(1) A student who obtains any grade S to E shall be considered as pass and if a student secures F grade in any of the head of passing he/she has to reappear in that head for the SEE.

(2) A student shall be declared successful at the end of the Programme for the award of Degree only on obtaining CGPA = 5.00, with none of the Coursesremaining with F Grade.

(3) In case, the CGPA fall below 5.00, the student shall be permitted to appear again for SEE for required number of courses and times, subjectto the provision of 18OMB1.5, to make up CGPA = 5.0. The student should reject the SEE results of the previous attempt and obtain written permission from The Registrar (Evaluation) to reappear in the subsequent SEE.

18OMB9.2

18OMB9.3

18OMB9.4

18OMB9.5

18OMB9.6

18OMB9.7

18OMB9.8

For a pass in a theory course, the student shall secure minimum of 40 % of the maximum marks prescribed in the Semester End Examination and 50 % of marks in CIE and 50 % in the aggregate of CIE and SEE marks. The Minimum Passing Grade in a course is E.

To a pass in Internship/ Project/Dissertation/Viva-voce examination, a student shall secure

a minimum of 50 % of the maximum marks prescribed for the SEE in Internship/

Project/Dissertation/Viva-voce. The Minimum Passing Grade in a course is E.

IV semester students having backlog courses are permitted to upload the dissertation report and to appear for SEE. The IV semester grade card shall be released only when the student completes all the backlog courses and become eligible for the award of degree. [To be read along with 18OMB11.2].

A candidate may at his/her desire reject his/her latest semester, except the IV semester, results of University examination in respect to all courses of that semester. Rejection shall be permitted only once during the entire Programme. The CIE marks of the rejected semester shall remain the same.

Rejection of results of the University examination including CIE marks is not permitted.

If the rejection of the University examination results of the semester happens to be of an odd semester, the candidate can take admission to the immediate next even semester. However, if the rejection of the University result is of even semester, the candidate cannot take admission to the next odd semester.

Application for rejection shall be submitted to the Registrar (Evaluation) through the Principal of the college, within thirty days from the date of announcement of results.A candidate, who opts for rejection of results of a semester shall be eligible for the award of class and distinction, but shall not be eligible for the award of rank.

2120

2322

18OMB10.5

18OMB10.6

18OMB10.7

18OMB11.0 Promotion and Eligibility

18OMB11.1 Promotion:

18OMB11.2

18OMB11.3

18OMB12.0 Temporary Discontinuation/Break in the Program

18OMB12.1

A candidate, who does not satisfy the attendance requirement (in one or more Courses) as mentioned in 18OMB10.3 shall not be eligible to appear for the SEE of that semester and shall not be permitted to take admission to next higher semester. The candidate shall be required to repeat that semester during the subsequent year.

Principals of the concerned colleges shall notify regularly, the list of candidates who fall short of attendance.

The list of the candidates falling short of attendance shall be sent to the University at least one week prior to the commencement of the examination.

There shall be no restriction for promotion from an odd semester to the next even semester, provided the student has fulfilled the attendance requirement.

(a) Candidates, with a maximum of four backlog courses of first year shall be eligible for taking admission to second year (III semester) .(b) Each credit course shall be treated as a head of passing.

The Mandatory non – credit courses, if any, shall not be considered for the Eligibility criterion prescribed for promotion, award of Class, calculation of SGPA and CGPA. However, a pass in the above courses is mandatory before the completion of Degree.

(a) If a candidate, for any reason, temporarily discontinues the Programme or take a break from programme during any semester, he/she may be permitted to continue in the programme by registering to the same semester of the prevailing scheme. The candidate shall complete all the remaining course work subject to the provision 18OMB1.5. Also the Candidates may have to complete additional course/s, if any, as per the decision of concerned Board of Studies and

18OMB9.9 Eligibility for Award of Degree:

18OMB10.0 Attendance Requirement

18OMB10.1 Registration and Enrolment:

18OMB10.2

18OMB 10.3

18OMB10.4

A student shall be declared to have completed the degree of MBA, provided the student has undergone the stipulated course work as per the regulations and has earned the prescribed Credits, as per the Scheme of Teaching and Examination, of the programme.

i) Except for the first semester, registration for a semester will be done during a specified week before the semester end examination of the previous semester.

ii) The registration sheet shall have the Candidate details, course name and code, number of credits and category (core/elective/audit) for each course of that semester.

iii) The Faculty Adviser, assigned by the Head of the Department, will counsel the students in planning their courses of study and provide guidance, motivation, emotional support, and enable the mentees to reach the desired professional and career goals.

Courses of each semester shall be treated as a separate unit for calculation of the attendance.

The candidate has to put in a minimum attendance of 85% in each course with a provision to condone 10 % of the attendance by the Vice-Chancellor on the specific recommendation of the Principal of the college where the candidate is studying, based on medical grounds, participation in University/ State/ National/ International level sports and cultural activities, seminars, workshops, paper presentation etc., of significant value. The necessary documents in support are to be submitted along with recommendations to condone the shortage.

In case of late admission, approved by competent authority (Karnataka Examination Authority/VTU), to I semester of the programme the attendance shall be reckoned from the date of admission to the programme.

approval of Dean, Faculty of Engineering, on establishing equivalence between two schemes. A Grade card shall be issued to that effect. Additional course/s shall not be considered for the eligibility criterion prescribed for promotion. However, based on the individual cases, it is considered to decide the SGPA and CGPA to admit the student for the award of degree.Such candidate shall not be eligible for the award of rank.

(b) Candidates who takes admission to any semester of the existing scheme from another scheme, as a repeater/fresher because of various reasons have to complete additional course/s, if any, as per the decision of concerned Board of Studies and approval of Dean, Faculty of Engineering, on establishing equivalence between two schemes. A Grade card shall be issued to that effect. Additional course/s shall not be considered for the eligibility criterion prescribed for promotion. However, based on the individual cases, it is considered to decide the SGPA and CGPA to admit the student for the award of degree. Such candidate shall not be eligible for the award of rank.

For the award of Prizes and Medals, the conditions stipulated by the Donor shall be considered subject to the provisions of the statutes framed by the University for such awards.

(1) For award of rank in a Specialization of MBA, the CGPA secured by the student on completion of the programme is considered.

(2) A student shall be eligible for a rank at the time of award of MBA, provided the student

i) Is not a repeater in any semester

ii) Has not rejected the results of any semester.

iii) Has passed I to IV semester in all the courses in first attempt only

(3) The total number of ranks awarded shall be 10 % of total number of students appeared in IV semester

18OMB13.0 Award of Prizes, Medals and Ranks

18OMB13.1

18OMB13.2

of the programmesubject to a maximum of 10 ranks.

a) If 150 students appeared for the IV semester, the number of ranks to be declared will be 10.

b) If 84 students appeared for the IV semester, the number of ranks to be declared will be 08.

(c) In case of fractional number of ranks, it is rounded to higher integer only when the first decimal place value is greater than or equal to 5.

Ranks are awarded based on the merit of the students as determined by CGPA. If two or more students get the same CGPA, the tie shall be resolved by considering the number of times a student has obtained higher SGPA. If it is not resolved even at this stage, the number of times a student has obtained higher grades like S, A, B etc., shall be taken into account to decide the order of the rank.

The regulations governing the Degree of MBA of Visvesvaraya Technological University shall be binding on all concerned.

i) Notwithstanding anything contained in the foregoing, the University shall have the power to issue directions/ orders to address any difficulty.

ii) Nothing in the foregoing may be construed as limiting the power of the University to ammed, modify or repeal any or all of the above. Programme shall be called Master Of Business Administration (Subject of Specialization), abbreviated as MBA. (Subject of Specialization) Programme.

Illustration:

18OMB13.3

18OMB14.0 Applicability and Power to Modify

18OMB14.1

18OMB14.2

2524

MBA Program Structure and Credits

Year Particulars

Credits

Total Credits

I I Semester

24

48

II Semester 24 II III Semester 24

52Internship (III Semester)

4

IV Semester

18

Project Work(IV Semester) 6

Total 100 100

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES STUDENT WILL BE ABLE CO (POS)

PO1.

PO2.

PO3.

PO4.

PO5.

Acquire Sufficient theoretical knowledge and are enabled to apply them to solve practical problems in business and other organizations / institutions of importance.

Apply Effective communication skills with a high degree of lateral and critical thinking that enhances learn ability, developed for being continuously employable.

Demonstrate leadership qualities, ethically sound, enabled with decision making skills that reflect a high degree of social consciousness

Recognise the need for sustained research orientation to comprehend a growingly complex, economic, legal and ethical environment

Possess self-sustaining entrepreneurship qualities that encourages calculated risk taking.

2726

SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

I Semester

Subject

CodeTitle of the Subject

Course

Category

Teaching hours per

weekMarks for

Total

Marks

Cred

its

Lectu

re

Pra

cti

ca

l

Co

mp

on

en

t

Total

Hours

CIE

SEE

18MBA11Management & Organizational

BehaviorCore

4

-

4

3

40

60 100 4

18MBA12 Managerial Economics Core

4

-

4

3

40

60 100 4

18MBA13 Accounting for Managers Core 4

-

4

3

40

60 100 4

18MBA14 Business Statistics & Analytics Core 4

- 4 3 40 60 100 4

18MBA15 Marketing Management Core4

- 4 3 40 60 100 4

18MBA16 Managerial Communications Core4

- 4 3 40 60 100 4

Total 24 - 24 - 240 360 600 24

Du

rati

on

of

Exam

hou

rs

II Semester

Subject

CodeTitle of the Subject

Course

Category

Teaching hours

per week

Marks for

Total

Marks

Cred

its

Lectu

re

Pra

cti

ca

l

Co

mp

on

en

t

Total

CIE SEE

18MBA21 Human Resource Management

Core

4

-

4

3

40 60 100 4

18MBA22Financial Management

Core

4

-

4

3

40 60 100 4

18MBA23Research Methodology

Core

4

-

4

3

40 60 100 4

18MBA24Legal and Business Environment

Core

4

-

4

3

40 60 100 4

18MBA25Strategic Management

Core

4

-

4

3

40 60 100 4

18MBA26Entrepreneurship Development

Core

4

-

4

3

40 60 100 4

Total 24 - 24 - 240 360 600 24

Note:

1.Each course content has indicative case studies which can be dealt in the class by the course instructor. In addition to this the

course instructor may use an extra casefrom Harvard/Case Centre. The student cannot assume the same cases will be part of the

question paper.

2.One Industrial Visit per Semester is Mandatory. The Department shall insist on report submi ssion by each student and shall

maintain this as a documentary proof. Theformat of the report shall be prescribed by the department.

3. Course instructors are free to set the Course outcome and map with the Programme Outcome, subsequently attainment level may

be calculated.

Du

ra

tio

n o

fE

xa

min

atio

nH

ou

rs

Note:

1.Each course content has indicative case studies which can be dealt in the class by the course instructor. In addition to this the

course instructor may use an extra casefrom Harvard/Case Centre. The student cannot assume the same cases will be part of the

question paper.

2.One Industrial Visit per Semester is Mandatory. The Department shall insist on report submi ssion by each student and shall

maintain this as a documentary proof. Theformat of the report shall be prescribed by the department.

3. Course instructors are free to set the Course outcome and map with the Programme Outcome, subsequently attainment level may

be calculated.

2928

III Semester (Dual Specialization)

Subject Code

Teaching hours

per week

Du

rati

on

of

Exam

inati

on

hou

rs

Marks for

Total

Marks

Lectu

re

Practi

cal

Com

pon

en

t

Tota

l

SE

E

Cre

dit

s

Marketing &

Finance

Finance & HR HR & Marketing

18MBAMM301

Consumer

Behavior

18MBAFM301

Banking and

FinancialServices

18MBAHR301

Recruitment &

Selection

Elective 3 2 5 3 40 60 100 4

18MBAMM302

Retail

Management

18MBAFM302

Investment

Management

18MBAHR302

HR Analytics Elective 3 2 5 3 40 60 1004

18MBAMM303

Services

Marketing

18MBAFM303

Direct Taxation

18MBAHR303

Compensation &

Reward System

Elective

3

2

5

3

40 60 1004

18MBAFM301

Banking and

FinancialServices

18MBAHR301

Recruitment &

Selection

18MBAMM301

Consumer

Behavior

Elective

3

2

5

3

40 60 1004

18MBAFM302

Investment

Management

18MBAHR302

HR Analytics

18MBAMM302

Retail

Management

Elective

3

2

5

3

40 60 1004

18MBAFM303

Direct Taxation

18MBAHR303

Compensation &

Reward System

18MBAMM303

Services

Marketing

Elective 3 2 5 3 40 60 1004

18MBAOS307 Organization study Core -- 8 8 -- 40 60 100 4

Industrial Visit Core -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Total 18 20 38 - 280 420 700 28

Cou

rse C

ate

gory

CIE

III Semester (Core Specialization)

Subject Code

Cou

rse C

ategory

Teaching hours

per week

Du

ra

tio

n o

f

Ex

am

ina

tio

n

ho

urs

Marks for

Total

Mark

s Cred

its

Lectu

re

Pra

cti

ca

l

Co

mp

on

en

t

To

tal

CIE

SE

E

Marketing Finance Human Resource

18MBAMM301

Consumer

Behavior

18MBAFM301 Banking and

Financial

Services

18MBAHR301

Recruitment &

Selection

Elective

3

2

5 3 40 60 100 4

18MBAMM302

Retail

Management

18MBAFM302

Investment

Management

18MBAHR302

HR Analytics

Elective

3

2

5 3 40 60 1004

18MBAMM303

Services

Marketing

18MBAFM303

Direct Taxation

18MBAHR303

Compensation &

Reward System

Elective

3

2

5 3 40 60 1004

18MBAMM304

Marketing

Research&

Analytics

18MBAFM304

Advanced

Financial

Management

18MBAHR304

Learning &

Development

Elective

3

2

5 3 40 60 1004

18MBAMM305

Business

Marketing

18MBAFM305

Cost

Management

18MBAHR305

Industrial

Relations &

Legislations

Elective

3 2 5 3 40 60 1004

18MBAMM306

Supply Chain

Management

18MBAFM306

Project Appraisal

Planning &

Control

18MBAHR306

Conflict &

Negotiation

Management

Elective 3 2 5 3 40 60 100

4

18MBAOS307 OrganizationStudy Core 0 8 8 -- 40 60 100 4

Industrial Visit Core -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Total 18 20 38 -- 280 420 700 28

Note:

1.Each Course has a theory component of 3hrs (3credits) and a Practical component of 2hrs (1credit). The Time -Table allotment

for each course should be (3+2)

= 5hours.

2.For the practical component,

it is mandatory to maintain a practical record.

3. 20% of marks should be allocated for application oriented questions in the SEE

Question Paper, based on practical component.

4.Organization Study (Four Weeks) will be carried out by students after second semester during vacation and the report submitte d

by the students will be assessed internally during the third semester.

5.One Industrial Visit per Semester is Mandatory. The Department shall insist on report submission by each student and shall

maintain this as a documentary proof. Theformat of the report shall be prescribed by the department.

6.Course instructors are free to set the

Course outcome and map with the Programme Outcome, subsequently attainment level may

be calculated.

Rubrics for Organization Study Rubrics for Viva voce Examination

Particulars Marks Aspects Marks

CIE Assessment by the Guide- Interaction with the student 20 Communication skill 5

Report Evaluation by the Guide 20 Understanding the Industry 5

SEE Viva-Voce Examination to be conducted by the Guide

and an External examiner from the Industry/Institute60 Understanding the Corporate Functions/Company

profile10

Total 100 10

SWOT analysis 10

Financial statement analysis 10

Learning experience 5

Overall presentation 5

Total 60

Mckensy’s 7S framework and Porter's Five Force Model

Note:

1.Each Course has a theory component of 3hrs (3credits) and a Practical component of 2hrs (1credit). The Time -Table allotment

for each course should be (3+2)

= 5hours.

2.For the practical component,

it is mandatory to maintain a practical record.

3. 20% of marks should be allocated for application oriented questions in the SEE

Question Paper, based on practical component.

4.Organization Study (Four Weeks) will be carried out by students after second semester during vacation and the report submitte d

by the students will be assessed internally during the third semester.

5.One Industrial Visit per Semester is Mandatory. The Department shall insist on report submission by each student and shall

maintain this as a documentary proof. Theformat of the report shall be prescribed by the department.

6.Course instructors are free to set the

Course outcome and map with the Programme Outcome, subsequently attainment level may

be calculated.

Rubrics for Organization Study Rubrics for Viva voce Examination

Particulars Marks Aspects Marks

CIE Assessment by the Guide- Interaction with the student 20 Communication skill 5

Report Evaluation by the Guide 20 Understanding the Industry 5

SEE Viva-Voce Examination to be conducted by the Guide

and an External examiner from the Industry/Institute60 Understanding the Corporate Functions/Company

profile10

Total 100 10

SWOT analysis 10

Financial statement analysis 10

Learning experience 5

Overall presentation 5

Total 60

Mckensy’s 7S framework and Porter's Five Force Model

3130

IV Semester (Dual Specialization)

Subject Code

Co

urse C

ateg

ory Teaching hours

per week

Du

ratio

n o

f

Ex

am

ina

tio

n

ho

urs

Marks for

Total

Marks

Lectu

re

Pra

ctic

al

Co

mp

on

en

t

To

ta

l

CIE

SE

E

Cred

its

Marketing &

Finance

Finance & HR HR & Marketing

18MBAMM401

Sales

Management

18MBAFM401

Mergers,

Acquisitions&

Corporate

Restructuring

18MBAHR401

Public Relations

Elective 3 --3

3 40 60 1003

18MBAMM402

Integrated

Marketing

Communication

18MBAFM402

Risk Management

and Insurance

18MBAHR402

Organizational

LeadershipElective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAMM403

Digital and Social

Media Marketing

18MBAFM403

Indirect Taxation

18MBAHR403

International

Human Resource

Management

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAFM401

Mergers,

Acquisitions &

Corporate

Restructuring

18MBAHR401

Public Relations

18MBAMM401

Sales

Management

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAFM402

Risk Management

and Insurance

18MBAHR402

Organizational

Leadership

18MBAMM402

Integrated

Marketing

Communication

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAFM403

Indirect Taxation

18MBAHR403

International

Human Resource

Management

18MBAMM403

Digital and Social

Media MarketingElective 3

-- 33 40 60 100

3

18MBAPR407Project Work Core -- 12 12 -- 40 60 100 6

Industrial Visit Core -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Total 18 12 30 - 280 420 700 24

Note:

1.Course instructors are free to set the Course outcome and map with the Programme Outcome, subsequently attainment level may

be calculated.

2. Project work(Six Weeks) will be carried out after third semester and shall be evaluated during fourth semester.

IV Semester (Core Specialization)

Subject Code

Cou

rse C

ategory

Teaching hours

per week

Du

ratio

n o

f

Exam

inatio

n

hou

rs

Marks for

Total

Marks

Cred

its

Lectu

re

Practic

al

Com

pon

en

t

Total

CIE

SE

E

Marketing Finance Human Resource

18MBAMM401

Sales

Management

18MBAFM401

Mergers,

Acquisitions &

Corporate

Restructuring

18MBAHR401

Public Relations Elective

3-- 3

3 40 60 1003

18MBAMM402

Integrated

Marketing

Communication

18MBAFM402

Risk

Management and

Insurance

18MBAHR402

Organizational

Leadership

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAMM403

Digital and

Social Media

Marketing

18MBAFM403

Indirect Taxation

18MBAHR403

International

Human Resource

Management

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAMM404

Strategic Brand

Management

18MBAFM404

International

Financial

Management

18MBAHR404

Organization

Change and

Development

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAMM405

Rural Marketing18MBAFM405

Financial

Derivatives

18MBAHR405

Strategic Talent

Management

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAMM406

International

Marketing

Management

18MBAFM406

Corporate

Valuation

18MBAHR406

Personal Growth

& Interpersonal

Effectiveness

Elective

3

--

3

3

40

60 1003

18MBAPR407 Project Work Core 0 12 12 -- 40 60 100 6

Industrial Visit Core -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Total 18 12 30 -- 280 420 700 24

Note:

1.Course instructors are free to set the Course outcome and map with the Programme Outcome, subsequently attainment level may

be calculated.

2. Project work(Six Weeks) will be carried out after third semester and shall be evaluated during fourth semester.

MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIGATIONAL BEHAVIOR

Semester

Course Code

Teaching Hours / week (L:T:P)

I

18MBA11

4-0-0

Credits : 04

CIE Marks

SEE Marks

Exam Hours

: 40

: 60

: 03

I SEMESTER

3332

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

PART A - PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Unit 1:

Unit 2:

Planning and Organizing:

Planning:

Organizing:

Case Study:

Unit 3:

Controlling:

1. To make students understand fundamental concepts and principles of management, including the basic roles, skills, and functions of management

2. To make students knowledgeable of historical development, theoretical aspects and practice applications of managerial process

3. To understand the basic concepts and theories underlying individual behavior besides developing better insights into one’s own self.

4. To make students aware of Individual behavior in groups, dynamics of groups, team building and interpersonal effectiveness besides developing a better awareness of how they can be better facilitators for building effective teams as leaders themselves

Introduction: Management: Introduction, Definition of management, Nature, Purpose and Functions, Levels and types of managers, managerial roles, skills for managers, evolution of management thought, Fayol’s fourteen principles of management, Recent trends in management.

Meaning, Nature of Planning, Planning Process, Objectives, MBO, Strategies, level of strategies, policies, methods and programs, Planning Premises, Decision-making, Process of decision-making, Types of decisions, Techniques in decision-making.

Organization structure, Formal and informal organizations, Functional, divisional, geographical, customer based and matrix organizations, tram based structures, virtual organizations, boundary less organizations. Principles of organizations-chain of command, span of control, delegation, decentralization, and empowerment.

Principles of Management, Cengagelearning , William , Manjunath , Sandhya

Meaning, importance of controlling, controlling process, types of control, factors influencing control effectiveness.

RECOMMENDED BOOKS

REFERENCE BOOKS:

PART B - ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Unit 4:

Introduction:

Case study:

Unit 5:

Foundations of Individual Behaviour :

Personality:

Perception:

Attitude:

Unit 6:

Motivation:

Leadership:

Case Study:

PRACTICAL COMPONENTS:

• Management and Organizational Behaviors, Chuck Williams, James Cambell, Manjunath &Sandhya Cengage Publications, 2018

• Essentials of Management-Koontz, 8/e, McGraw Hill

• Management: Text and Cases-VSP Rao, Excel Books

• Masters of Management Thought – Mahanand Charati & M M Munshi, Sapna Book House, Bangalore, 2015.

• Principles and practices of Management, KiranNerkar, Vilas Chopde, Dreamtech Press, 2011

• Management Theory & practice – Chandan J. S, Vikas Publishing House.

Organizational Behaviour: Introduction, definition, fundamental principles of OB, contributing disciplines, challenges and opportunities. Evolution & Organizational Behavior in India.

Organizational Behavior by Steven L McShane, Mary Ann Von Glinow and Radha R Sharma, TaTa McGraw Hill companies, Fouth Edition, Pg-6.

Individual behaviour: Foundations of individual behaviour. Ability: Intellectual abilities, Physical ability, the role of disabilities.

Meaning, formation, determinants, traits of personality, big five and MBTI, personality attributes influencing OB.

Meaning,Process of perception, factors influencing perception, link between perception and individual decision-making.

Meaning,Formation, components of attitudes, relation between attitude and behaviour.

Meaning, theories of motivation-needs theory, two factor theory, Theory X and Y, application of motivational theories.

Meaning, styles of leadership, leadership theories, trait theory, behavioural theories, managerial grid, situational theories.

“Nuts and Bolts”, Principles of Management, Cengagelearning , William , Manjunath , Sandhya Page no 531-532.

• Studying organizational structures of any 10 companies and classifying them into different types of organizations which are

CO PO

PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

CO1 X

CO2

X

CO3 X X CO4

X

CO5 X

CO-PO MAPPING

3534

studied in Unit 2 and justifying why such structures are chosen by those organizations.

• Preparing the leadership profiles of any 5 business leaders and studying their leadership qualities and behaviors with respects to the trait, behavioural and contingency theories studied.

• Identifying any five job profiles and listing the various types, abilities required for those jobs and also the personality traits/attributes required for the jobs identified.

Faculty can either identify the organizations/ leaders/job profile or students can be allowed to choose the same.

1. Comprehend & correlate all the management functions which are happening around with fundamental concepts and principles of management.

2. Understand the overview of management, theory of management and practical applications of the same.

3. Effectively use their skills for self-grooming, working in groups and to achieve organizational goals .

4. Demonstrate their acumen in applying managerial and behavioral concept in real world/situation.

5. Understand and demonstrate their exposure on recent trends in management.

• Organizational behaviour, Stephen P Robbins, Timothy A. Judge, NeharikaVohra, 14th Edition, Pearson, 2012.

• Introduction to OrganisationalBehaviour – Michael Butler, Jaico Publishing House.

• Organizational Behaviour - Anada Das Gupta, Biztantra, 2011.

• Organizational Behaviour - Fred Luthans, 12/e, McGraw Hill International, 2011.

• Management and Organizational Behaviour - Laurie J Mullins, Pearson education.

• Organizational Behaviour, Aquinas P. G, Excel Books.

Note:

COURSE OUTCOMES:

RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

REFERENCE BOOKS:

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS

Semester

Course Code

Teaching Hours / week (L:T:P)

I

18MBA12

4-0-0

Credits : 04

CIE Marks

SEE Marks

Exam Hours

: 40

: 60

: 03

Course Objectives:

Unit 1:

Managerial Economics:

Unit 2:

Case Study:

Source:

Unit 3:

1. To introduce the fundamentals, tools and theories of managerial economics.

2. To provide an understanding of the application of Economics in Business.

3. To learn the basic economic concepts.

4. To have an understanding of Demand, Production, Cost, Profit and Market competitions with reference to a firm and industry.

Meaning, Nature, Scope, & Significance, Uses of Managerial Economics, Role and Responsibilities of Managerial Economist, Relationship of Managerial Economics with Statistics, Accounting and Operations Research, The Basic process of decision making.

Opportunity Costs, Incremental Principle, Time perspective, Discounting and Equi-Marginal principles, Theory of the Firm: Firm and Industry, Forms of Ownership, Objectives of the firm, alternate objectives of firm. Managerial theories: Baumol’s Model, Marris’s Hypothesis, Williamson’s Model. Behavioral theories: Simon’s Satisficing Model, Cyert and March Model, Agency theory.

Dabur India Limited: Growing Big and Global.

Managerial Economics – Geethika, Ghosh & Choudhury, 2/e, McGraw Hill. 2011. Pp 64-65.

Law of Demand, Exceptions to the Law of Demand, Elasticity of Demand –Classification of Price, Income & Cross elasticity, Advertising and promotional elasticity of demand. Uses of elasticity of demand for Managerial decision making, Measurement of elasticity of demand. Law of supply, Elasticity of supply, Demand forecasting: Meaning & Significance, Methods of demand forecasting. (No problems)

Introduction to Economics

Fundamental Concepts of Managerial Economic

Demand analysis

3736

Cost Analysis & Production analysis

Market structure and pricing practices

Unit 4:

Case Study:

Source:

Unit 5:

Descriptive Pricing Approaches:

Case Study:

Source:

Unit 6: Profits

Profits:

PRACTICAL COMPONENTS:

COURSE OUTCOMES:

Concepts, Types of cost, Cost curves, Cost – Output Relationship in the short run and in the long run, LAC curve. Concepts, production function with one variable input - Law of Variable Proportions. Production function with 2 variable inputs and Laws of returns to scale, Indifference Curves, ISO-Quants & ISO-Cost line, Least cost combination factor, Economies of scale, Diseconomies of scale. Technological progress and production function

Automobile Industry in India: New Production paradigm.

Managerial Economics – Geethika, Ghosh&Choudhury, 2/e, McGraw Hill. 2011. Pp 234-236.

Perfect Competition, Features, Determination of price under perfect competition, Monopoly: Features, Pricing under monopoly, Price Discrimination. Monopolistic Competition: Features, Pricing Under monopolistic competition, Product differentiation. Oligopoly: Features, Kinked demand Curve, Cartels, Price leadership.

Full cost pricing, Product line pricing, Product life cycle pricing, Pricing Strategies: Price Skimming, Penetration Pricing, Loss leader pricing, Peak Load pricing.

David Fights Goliath: The Nirma Story.

Managerial Economics – Geethika, Ghosh & Choudhury, 2/e, McGraw Hill. 2011. Pp 349-351.

Determinants of Short-Term & Long Term Profits, Measurement of Profit.

Break Even Analysis – Meaning, Assumptions, Determination of BEA, Limitations, Uses of BEA in Managerial decisions.

• Assessment of Demand Elasticity – Price, Income, Cross, Advertising.

• Demand Forecasting

• Preparing a Project proposal for a Business Venture.

1. The student will understand the application of Economic Principles in Management decision making.

2. The student will learn the micro economic concepts and apply them for effective functioning of a Firm and Industry.

3. The Student will be able to understand, assess and forecast Demand.

4. The student will apply the concepts of production and cost for optimization of production.

PO

PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4 PO5

CO1 X

CO2 X X CO3 X X

CO4

X

CO5

X CO6 X

CO-PO MAPPING

CO

5. The student will design Competitive strategies like pricing, product differentiation etc. and marketing according to the market structure.

6. The student will be able to identify, assess profits and apply BEP for decision making.

• Managerial Economics – Geethika, Ghosh & Choudhury, 2/e, McGraw Hill. 2011

• Managerial Economics – Dominick Salvotore, 7/e, Oxford Publishers, 2010.

• Managerial Economics – R. Panneerselvam, P. Sivasankaran, P. Senthilkumar, Cengage,2018.

• Managerial Economics – Samuelson & Marks, 5/e, Wiley, 2009.

• Managerial Economics – Hirschey, 2/e, Cengage Learning, 2010.

• Managerial Economics: Case Study solutions – Kaushal H, 1/e, Macmillan, 2011.

RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

REFERENCE BOOKS:

3938

ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERS

Semester

Course Code

Teaching Hours / week (L:T:P)

I

18MBA13

4-0-0

Credits : 04

CIE Marks

SEE Marks

Exam Hours

: 40

: 60

: 03

Course Objectives:

Unit 1:

Introduction to Accounting:

Case study:

Unit 2:

Preparation of books of Accounts:

Unit 3:

Preparation of Financial Statements:

Unit 4:

Analysis of Financial Statements:

1. Explain fundamental accounting concepts, the elements of financial statements, and basic accounting vocabulary.

2. Explain and use the accounting equation in basic financial analysis and explain how the equation is related to the financial statements.

3. Prepare basic entries for business transactions and present the data in an accurate and meaningful manner.

4. Prepare basic financial statements and explain the articulation between the basic statements.

5. To analyze a company’s financial statements and come to a reasoned conclusion about the financial situation of the company.

Need and Types of Accounting, Users of Accounting, concepts and conventions of Accounting, Relation of Accounting with other disciplines, Capital and Revenue Expenditure and Receipt, Accounting Equation.

Problem on Accounting Equation .

Journals, ledgers 3 column cash book and trial balance, Depreciation- Straight line and Written down Value Methods.

Case Study on Change of Method of Depreciation.

Preparation of final accounts of sole traders in horizontal form, Preparation of final accounts of companies in vertical form as per Companies Act of 2013 (Basic problems of Final Accounts), Window dressing.

Case Study problem on Final Accounts of Company and Firm.

Ratio Analysis, Preparation of financial statements using ratios, Preparation of Cash flow Statement (only indirect method).

Case Study on Ratio analysis.

Human Resource Accounting, Forensic Accounting, Sustainability Reporting. Accounting Standards and IFRS: Nature and significance.

Basic concepts of Direct & Indirect Tax. Heads of Income, Deductions u/s 80C, Rate of Income Tax of current assessment Year for Individuals only (only theory) .

• Collecting Annual reports of the companies and analyzing the financial statements using different techniques and presenting the same in the class.

• Analyzing the companies’ cash flow statements and presenting the same in the class.

• Exposing the students to usage of accounting software’s (Preferably Tally).

• Filling up of ITR forms.

• Identify the sustainability report of a company and study the contents.

1. Demonstrate theoretical knowledge and its application in real time accounting.

2. Demonstrate knowledge regarding accounting principles and its application.

3. Capable of preparing financial statement of sole trading concerns and companies.

4. Independently undertake financial statement analysis and take decisions.

5. Comprehend emerging trends in accounting and taxation.

• Financial Accounting: A Managerial Perspective, Narayanaswamy R, 5/e , PHI, 2014.

• A Text book of Accounting For Management, Maheswari S. N,Maheswari Sharad K. Maheswari , 2/e, Vikas Publishing house (P) Ltd.

• Financial Accounting, Tulsian P. C, 1/e, Pearson Education.

• Financial Accounting for Management: An Analytical Perspective,

Unit 5:

Emerging issues in Accounting:

Unit 6:

Fundamentals of Taxation:

PRACTICAL COMPONENTS:

COURSE OUTCOME:

RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

REFERENCE BOOKS:

4140

Ambrish Gupta, 4/e, Pearson Education.

• Introduction to Financial Statement Analysis, Ashish K Bhattacharya, Elsevier India.

• Financial Accounting – Raman B. S,Vol I & Vol II, 1/e, United Publishers, 2009.

PO

PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

CO1 X

CO2 X CO3 X CO4

X

CO5 X X

CO-PO MAPPING

CO

BUSINESS STATISTICS & ANALYTICS

Semester

Course Code

Teaching Hours / week (L:T:P)

I

18MBA14

4-0-0

Credits : 04

CIE Marks

SEE Marks

Exam Hours

: 40

: 60

: 03

Course Objectives:

Unit 1:

Introduction to Statistics:

Measures of dispersion:

Unit 2:

Correlation and Regression:

Unit 3:

Probability Distribution:

Unit 4:

Time Series Analysis:

1. To make the students learn about the applications of statistical tools and techniques in decision making.

2. To emphasize the need for statistics and decision models in solving business problems.

3. To enhance the knowledge on descriptive and inferential statistics.

4. To familiarize the students with analytical package MS Excel.

5. To develop analytical skills in students in order to comprehend and practice data analysis at different levels.

Meaning and Definition, functions, scope and limitations, Collection and presentation of data, frequency distribution, measures of central tendency - Mean, Median, Mode, Geometric mean, Harmonic mean.

Range – Quartile Deviation – Mean Deviation - Standard Deviation – Variance-Coefficient of Variance - Comparison of various measures of Dispersion.

Scatter Diagram, Karl Pearson correlation, Spearman’s Rank correlation(one way table only), simple and multiple regression(problems on simple regression only).

Concept and definition - Rules of probability – Random variables – Concept of probability distribution – Theoretical probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Normal and Exponential – Baye’s theorem (No derivation) (Problems only on Binomial, Poisson and Normal).

Introduction - Objectives Of Studying Time Series Analysis - Variations In Time Series - Methods Of Estimating Trend: Freehand Method - Moving Average Method - Semi-Average Method -

4342

Least Square Method. Methods of Estimating Seasonal Index: Method Of Simple Averages - Ratio To Trend Method - Ratio To Moving Average Method.

structure, advantages, disadvantages, formulation of LPP, solution using Graphical method. Transportation problem: basic feasible solution using NWCM, LCM, and VAM unbalanced, restricted and maximization problems.

Introduction – Basic difference between PERT & CPM – Network components and precedence relationships – Critical path analysis – Project scheduling – Project time-cost trade off – Resource allocation, Concept of project crashing.

• Students are expected to have a basic excel classes.

• Students should be able to relate the concepts which can highly enhance an application scenario in your profession.

• Student should demonstrate the application of the techniques covered in this course.

1. Facilitate objective solutions in business decision making under subjective conditions.

2. Demonstrate different statistical techniques in business/real-life situations.

3. Understand the importance of probability in decision making.

4. Understand the need and application of analytics.

5. Understand and apply various data analysis functions for business problems.

• Business Statistics and Analytics – Pannerselvam, Nagesh, Senthilkumar, Cengage Learning, 2018.

• BStat: A South Asian Perspective with Course Mate – Keller & Arora Cengage Learning, 2016.

• Quantitative Methods for Business, Anderson, Sweeney and Williams, Thomson, 2005 ISBN 981-240-641-7.

Unit 5:

Linear Programming:

Unit 6:

Project Management:

PRACTICAL COMPONENT :( Student-Centered Learning)

COURSE OUTCOMES:

RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

REFERENCE BOOKS:

• Statistical Method s – Dr S. P Gupta, Sulthan Chand & sons, fourth Edition, ISBN 81-8054298-X.

• Fundamentals of Statistics, S.C Gupta, 6th edition, Himalaya Publishing House, 2007, ISBN, 978-81-8318-755-8.

• Analyzing Multivariate Data, James Lattin, Douglas Carroll and Paul Green, Thomson Learning, 2003, ISBN 0-534-34974-9.

PO

PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

CO1 X

X X

CO2 X X X

CO3 X X XCO4 X CO5 X

CO-PO MAPPING

CO

4544

MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Semester

Course Code

Teaching Hours / week (L:T:P)

I

18MBA15

4-0-0

Credits : 04

CIE Marks

SEE Marks

Exam Hours

: 40

: 60

: 03

Course Objectives:

Unit 1:

Introduction to Marketing:

Unit 2 :

Buyer Behavior Analysis:

Unit 3 :

Market Segmentation, Targeting & Positioning (STP):

1. Make students have an understanding of the fundamental concepts of marketing & the environment in which marketing system operates.

2. To analyze the motives influencing buying behaviour & Describe major bases for segment marketing, target marketing, and market positioning.

3. Identify a Conceptual framework, covering basic elements of the marketing mix.

4. To understand fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies.

Introduction, Definitions of market and marketing, Selling Vs marketing, The Exchange Process, Elements of Marketing Concept, Functions of Marketing, Old Concept or Product- oriented Concept, New or Modern or Customer- oriented Concept, Marketing Myopia, Marketing Environment analysis, (Micro and Macro), Marketing in the 21st century opportunities, challenges & Ethics.

Meaning and Characteristics, Importance, Factors Influencing Consumer Behaviour, Consumer Purchase Decision Process, Buying Roles, Buying Motives. The black box model of consumer behaviour. B2B marketing Vs Consumer Marketing.

Case Study on “ Barista Lavazza”, Marketing Management, Arun Kumar & Meenakshi N, 2/e, Vikas, 2012.Pg 33-34.

Concept of Market Segmentation, Benefits, Requisites of Effective Segmentation, Bases for Segmenting Consumer Markets, Market Segmentation Strategies.

Targeting - Bases for identifying target Customer target Marketing strategies, Positioning - Meaning, Product Differentiation Strategies, Tasks involved in Positioning. Branding - Concept of Branding, Types, Brand Equity, Branding strategies.

Case Study on “ Marketing of Tata’s Nano in India ”, Marketing in India: Text and Cases- Neelamegham S, 4/e, Vikas. Pg 335-354.

Unit 4:

Managing the Product:

Unit-5:

Pricing decisions:

Marketing Channels:

Unit 6:

Promotion Strategy:

Sales Promotion:

Marketing Planning:

Case Study on “ Facebook ”, Marketing Management:

PRACTICAL COMPONENTS:

Concept, product hierarchy, product line, product mix, product mix strategies, Product life cycle and its strategies, New Product Development, packing as a marketing tool, Role of labeling in packing. Services Marketing & its Characteristics.

Case Study on “ American Express ”, Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective–Kotler, Keller, Koshy & Jha, 14/e, Pearson Education, 2012. Pg 257-259 .

Significance of pricing, factor influencing pricing (Internal factor and External factor), objectives, Pricing Strategies-Value based, Cost based, Market based, Competitor based, Pricing Procedure.

Meaning, Purpose, Factors Affecting Channel Choice, Channel Design, Channel Management Decision, Channel Conflict, Designing a physical Distribution System, Network Marketing.

Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC)- communication objectives, steps in developing effective communication, Stages in designing message. Advertising: Advertising Objectives, Advertising Budget, Advertising Copy, AIDA model, Traditional Vs Modern Media- Online and Mobile Advertising, Social Media for Advertising.

Tools and Techniques of sales promotion, Push-pull strategies of promotion. Personal selling: Steps/process involved in Personal Selling. Publicity/Public Relation-word of mouth, sponsorships. Database marketing: Basic concepts of e-commerce, e-marketing, m-Commerce, m-marketing, e-networking, CRM, MkIS.

Meaning, Steps involved in Marketing planning. Marketing Audit- Meaning, components of Marketing Audit. Marketing Strategic Planning Process.

A South Asian Perspective–Kotler, Keller, Koshy & Jha, 14/e, Pearson Education, 2012. Pg 503-504.

• Marketing Games and quiz for Students.

• Analyze Product Life Cycle of few Products like-Electronic goods, Computers etc.

• Study Packaging strategies used by FMCG companies.

• Understand Marketing strategies, plans used by automobile, cosmetic, FMCG companies etc.

4746

CO-PO MAPPING

PO

PO1

PO2

PO 3

PO4

PO5

1

X

X

2 X X

3

X

4

X

5 X

CO

COURSE OUTCOME:

RECOMMENDED BOOKS

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Develop an ability to assess the impact of the environment on marketing function.

2. To formulate marketing strategies that incorporate psychological and sociological factors which influence buying.

3. Explain how companies identify attractive market segments, differentiate and position their products for maximum competitive advantage in the market place.

4. Build marketing strategies based on product, price, place and promotion objectives.

5. Synthesize ideas into a viable marketing plan.

• Marketing Management: A South Asian Perspective–Kotler, Keller, Koshy & Jha, 14/e, Pearson Education, 2012.

• Marketing- Lamb, Hair, Mc Danniel, 7/e, Cengage Learning 2012.

• Marketing Management, Tapan Panda, 2/e, Excel Publication.

• Marketing Management, Arun Kumar & Meenakshi N, 2/e, Vikas, 2012.

• Marketing in India: Text and Cases- Neelamegham S, 4/e, Vikas.

• Fundamentals of Marketing Management, Etzel M.J BJ Walker & William J. Stanton, 14/e, TMH, 2012.

MANAGERIAL COMMUNICATION

Semester

Course Code

Teaching Hours / week (L:T:P)

I

18MBA16

4-0-0

Credits : 04

CIE Marks

SEE Marks

Exam Hours

: 40

: 60

: 03

Course Objective:

Unit 1:

Introduction:

Unit 2:

Oral Communication:

Unit 3:

Written Communication:

Unit 4:

Business Letters and Reports:

1. To enable the students to become aware of their communication skills and sensitize them to their potential to become successful managers.

2. To enable learners with the mechanics of writing and also help them to draft business letters in English precisely and effectively.

3. To introduce the students to some of the practices in managerial communication those are in vogue.

4. To prepare students to develop the art of business communication with emphasis on analysing business situations.

5. To train Students towards drafting business proposals.

Meaning & Definition, Role, Classification – Purpose of communication – Communication Process – Characteristics of successful communication – Importance of communication in management – Communication structure in organization – Communication in conflict resolution – Communication in crisis. Communication and negotiation –Communication in a cross-cultural setting.

Meaning – Principles of successful oral communication – Barriers to communication – Conversation control –Reflection and Empathy: two sides of effective oral communication. Modes of Oral Communication – Listening as a Communication Skill, Non-verbal communication.

Purpose of writing – Clarity in writing – Principles of effective writing – Approaching the writing process systematically: The 3X3 writing process for business communication: Pre writing – Writing – Revising – Specific writing features – Coherence – Electronic writing process.

Introduction to business letters – Types of Business Letters – Writing routine and persuasive letters – Positive and Negative messages Writing Reports: Purpose, Kinds and Objectives of reports – Organization & Preparing reports, short and long reports Writing

4948

Proposals: Structure & preparation – Writing memos Media Management: The press release – Press conference – Media interviews

Meetings – Planning meetings – objectives – participants – timing – venue of meetings.

Notice, Agenda, and Resolution & Minutes

What is a presentation – Elements of presentation – Designing & Delivering Business Presentations – Advanced Visual Support for managers.

Understanding the case method of learning.

What is negotiation – Nature and need for negotiation – Factors affecting negotiation – Stages of negotiation process – Negotiation strategies.

Introduction – Composing Application Messages – Writing CVs – Group discussions – Interview skills

Impact of Technological Advancement on Business Communication– Technology-enabled Communication-Communication networks– Intranet–Internet–E-mails–SMS– teleconferencing – videoconferencing.

Course Instructors are free to set their own cases or use cases from Harvard /Case centre.

• Make students enact and analyze the non-verbal cues.

• Demonstrating using Communication Equipments like Fax, Telex, Intercoms, etc.

• Demonstrating Video conferencing & teleconferencing in the class.

• Conduct a mock meeting of students in the class identifying an issue of their concern. The students should prepare notice, agenda and minutes of the meeting.

• Each student to give presentation of 5 minutes (this can be spread throughout the semester) and to be evaluated by the faculty.

• Organize a mock press conference addressing to the launch of new product by an organization.

• Students should be given an assignment to draft a proposal to undertake research project.

1. The students will be aware of their communication skills and know their potential to become successful managers.

Group Communication:

Meeting Documentation:

Unit 5:

Presentation skills:

Case Methods of learning:

Negotiation skills:

Unit 6:

Employment communication:

Note:

PRACTICAL COMPONENTS:

COURSE OUTCOMES:

2. The students will get enabled with the mechanics of writing and can compose the business letters in English precisely and effectively.

3. The students will be introduced to the managerial communication practices in business those are in vogue.

4. Students will get trained in the art of business communication with emphasis on analysing business situations.

5. Students will get exposure in drafting business proposals to meet the challenges of competitive environment.

• Business Communication: Concepts, Cases And Applications – Chaturvedi P. D, & Mukesh Chaturvedi ,2/e.

• Pearson Education,2011.

• Business Communication: Process and Product – Mary Ellen Guffey, 3/e, Cengage Learning, 2002.

• *Communicating in Business with CourseMate- Ober/Newman-Latest Edition-2018.

• Business Communication – Lesikar, Flatley, Rentz & Pande, 11/e, TMH, 2010.

• Effective Technical Communication – Ashraf Rizvi M, TMH, 2005.

• Business Communication – Sehgal M. K & Khetrapal V, Excel Books.

• Business Communication – Krizan, Merrier, Jones, 8/e, Cengage Learning, 2012.

RECOMMENDED BOOKS:

REFERENCE BOOKS:

COPO

PO1

PO2

PO3

PO4

PO5

CO1 X

CO2 X X CO3

X

X CO4

CO5 X

CO-PO MAPPING

I Semester

Subject

Code Name of the Subje

16MCA1

1

16MCA1

2

16MCA1

3

16MCA1

4

16MCA1

5

16MCA1

6

16MCA1

7

16MCA1

8

Master of Computer Applications (MCA)

ubject

Teaching

hours/week Duratio

n of

Exam in

Hours

Marks

for

Lectur

e

Practical /

Assignmen

t CIE

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

--

3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3 20

--

3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3

20

--

3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3

20

Total 20 09 24 16

0

CREDIT BASED

Marks

for Total

Mark

s

CREDIT

S SEE

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 2

80 100 2

80 100 2

64

0 800

26

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

1

II Semester

Subject

Code Name of the Subject

16MCA21

16MCA22 !!

16MCA23

16MCA24

16MCA25 "#

16MCA26

16MCA27

!!

16MCA28

$

Tota

Master of Computer Applications (MCA)

CREDIT BASED

ject

Teaching hours/week Duration

of Exam

in Hours

Marks

for

Lecture Practical /

Assignment CIE

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

-- 3(2 hrs lab+ 1

hr instruction) 3 20

--

3(2 hrs lab+ 1

hr

instruction)

3

20

--

3(2 hrs lab+ 1

hr

instruction)

3

20

otal 20 09 24 160

arks

for Total

Marks CREDITS

SEE

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 2

80 100 2

80 100 2

640 800 26

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

2

III Semester CREDIT B

Subject

Code

Name of the

Subject

16MCA31 %#&

16MCA32 '(

16MCA33 ) ")

16MCA34 "#*

16MCA35 *(+

16MCA36 %#&

16MCA37 '(

16MCA38

) ")

Total

16MCA351 ,

16MCA352 *

16MCA353 ,0*

16MCA354

Master of Computer Applications (MCA)

IT BASED

Teaching hours/week Duration

of Exam in

Hours

Marks f

Lecture Practical /

Assignment

CIE

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

4 -- 3 20

3 -- 3 20

-- 3(2 hrs lab+ 1

hr instruction) 3 20

-- 3(2 hrs lab+ 1

hr instruction)

3 20

-- 3(2 hrs lab+ 1

hr instruction)

3

20

19 09 24 160

-

-.*-/

*1

rks for Total

Marks CREDITS

SEE

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 3

80 100 2

80 100 2

80 100 2

640 800 25

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

3

IV Semester

Subject

Code Name of the Subject

16MCA4

1

) ( '(

16MCA4

2

) (

16MCA4

3

"#

16MCA4

4

*(12

16MCA4

5

*(13

16MCA4

6

) ( '(

16MCA4

7

) (

16MCA4

8

"#

16MCA4

9

Tota

+4 )55+ ) (%#

+4 )552

+4 )553 "#

Master of Computer Applications (MCA)

ject

Teaching hours/week Duratio

n of

Exam in

Hours

Marks

Lecture

Practical /

Assignmen

t

CIE

4

-- 3 20

4

-- 3 20

4

-- 3 20

3

-- 3 20

3

-- 3 20

-- 3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3 20

--

3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3

20

-- 3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3

20

--

2 --

50

Total 18 11 24 21

0

#&

+4 )56+

+4 )562 $

#) +4 )563 "

CREDIT BASED

arks for

Total

Mark

s

CREDIT

S SEE

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 4

80 100 3

80 100 3

80 100

2

80 100

2

80 100

2

-- 50 1

640 850 25

$)

"#7

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

4

16MCA49 and 16MCA59: Semina

• Students should present th

the field of Computer Scie

+4 )555

V Semester

Subject

Code Name of the Subje

16MCA51 1

16MCA52 809%*

16MCA53 )

16MCA54 *(15

16MCA55 *(16

16MCA56

"#

16MCA57

9%

16MCA58

:)() ;; 9

16MCA59

16MCA541 29< -,

16MCA542

16MCA543 )",

16MCA544 )%#

Master of Computer Applications (MCA)

inar

sent the seminar on cutting edge/emerging/state of th

Science and Applications.

%#&

+4 )565

CREDIT

ubject

Teaching hours/week Duration

of Exam

in Hours Lecture Practical /

Assignment

4 -- 3

4 -- 3

4 -- 3

3 -- 3

3 -- 3

--

3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3

--

3(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction)

3

#

--

4(2 hrs lab+

1 hr

instruction+

1 hr contact)

3

-- 2 --

Total 18 12 24

,) 16MCA551 "#

16MCA552 ,

16MCA553 (

#& 16MCA554 "#

of the art technologies in

","

DIT BASED

Marks

for Total

Marks CREDITS

CIE SEE

20 80 100 4

20 80 100 4

20 80 100 4

20 80 100 3

20 80 100 3

20 80 100 2

20 80 100 2

20 80 100

3

50 -- 50 1

210 640 850 26

#" %#&

".,/

( )

#

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

5

• Duration of the seminar sh

• Student should submit the

Master of Computer Applications (MCA)

nar should be approximately 45 minutes.

it the write up on seminar topic containing at least 1

st 10 pages.

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

6

VI Semester

Subject

Code

Name of the

Subject Pr

16MCA61

,

16MCA62

&

Total

Grand Tot

16MCA61:

• 9

• • ,

"16MCA62:

• "• "

/ "/ "/

• ,"; "2<

!•

• ,

/ >

/ >• .

• ,

& ( 9"&"

• "+<

• "

Master of Computer Applications (MCA)

Evaluation

Internal External

Presentation Report

Evaluation

Dissertation

Evaluation

50 50 -

75 125

175 125

Total (I to VI Semesters): 4500 Marks : 150 Credits

"4#& (

;-09 # "4#&6<&9

" "" : (9= " ( +69 ("2<&9

;-0 );"( ; "66("#&"+<&9.3+<"( "26.? #2/ (""("("("& (9 @(1(( +<<&9

;;";9

CREDIT BASED

Total Credits

Viva

- 100 02

100 300 20

100 400 22

dits

"6

& (

"4

"9

0 "# "+4#&96&9

; #+<&A3</&9 "9"+26

"

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

7

Data Structures Using C

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16MCA11 CIE Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 SEE Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours

50 SEE Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course Outcome (CO): At the end of this course, the students will be able to

CO1: Understand basics of C programming language

CO2: Acquire knowledge of

- Various types of data structures, operations and algorithms

- Sorting and searching operations

CO3: Analyze the performance of

- Stack, Queue, Lists, Trees, Hashing, Searching and Sorting techniques

CO4: Implement all the applications of Data structures in a high-level language

CO5: Design and apply appropriate data structures for solving computing problems.

Modules Teaching Hours

Module -1 10 Hours

Overview of C

Input and output statements – scanf, getchar, gets, printf, putchar, puts; Control

Statements – if, else-if, switch, Control Structures – while, for, do-while, break and

continue, goto.Functions: Categories of functions, Call by Value, Call by reference.

Arrays: Definition, Representation, Single dimension, Two dimensional, Multi-

dimensional Arrays, Passing arrays to functions, passing strings to functions

Module -2 10 Hours

Pointers, Pointer Expression, Pointer as function arguments, Functions returning

pointers, Pointers to functions, Structures: Declaring and using structure types.

Classification of Data Structures:Primitive and Non- Primitive, Linear and Nonlinear;

Data structure Operations, ADT, Array as ADT, Operations - Insert, Delete, Search,

Sort, String Definition, Representation, String as ADT, Operations – Insert, Delete,

Concatenate, Comparing, Substring.

Module -3 10 Hours

Stack: Definition, Representation, Stack as ADT, Operations and Applications: Polish

and reverse polish expressions, Infix to postfix conversion, evaluation of postfix

expression, infix to prefix, postfix to infix conversion; Recursion - Factorial, GCD,

Fibonacci Sequence, Tower of Hanoi Queue: Definition, Representation, Queue as

ADT, Operations, Queue Variants: Circular Queue, Priority Queue, Double Ended

Queue; Applications of Queues. Programming Examples.

Module -4 10 Hours

Linked List:Limitations of array implementation, Memory Management: Static (Stack)

and Dynamic (Heap) Memory Allocation, Memory management functions. Definition,

Representation, Operations: getnode() and Freenode() operations, Types: Singly

Linked List. Linked list as a data Structure, Inserting and removing nodes from a list,

Linked implementations of stacks, Example of list operations such as insert and

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

8

delete an element before a key element, Header nodes, Array implementation of

lists.: Circular Linked List: Inserting, deleting and searching elements in a lists,

Double Linked List: Inserting and Deleting Nodes, Queue as doubly linked lists, such

as insert into position, Delete an specified element. Application of Linked Lists:

Stacks, Queues, Double-ended Queues, Priority Queues, Sparse Matrix and

Polynomials using Lists, Trees, BST.

Module -5 10 Hours

Trees: Definitions, Terminologies, Array and linked Representation of Binary Trees,

Types- Complete/full, Almost Complete, Strictly, Skewed; Traversal methods -

Inorder, postorder, preorder; Binary Search Trees - Creation, Insertion, Deletion,

Traversal, Searching. Sorting & Searching: Bubble sort, Insertion Sort, Selection sort,

Quick sort, Linear Search, Binary Search and BST. Hashing: The Hash Table

organizations, Hashing Functions, Static and Dynamic Hashing, Collision-Resolution

Techniques, Programming Examples.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have ten questions.

• Each full question consists of 16 marks.

• There will be 2 questions from each module.

• Each question will have questions covering all the topics under a module.

• The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Programming in ANSI C, Balaguruswamy, McGraw Hill Education

2. Data Structures Using C and C++ by YedidyahLangsam and Moshe J. Augenstein and Aaron M

Tenanbanum, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2002.

3. Introduction to Data Structure and Algorithms with C++ by Glenn W. Rowe

Reference Books:

1. Principles of Data Structures using C & C++ by Vinu V. Das, New Age International, 2006

2. Data Structures Using C , Balaguruswamy:, McGraw Hill Education

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

9

UNIX Programming

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16MCA12 CIE Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 SEE Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 SEE Hours 03

CREDITS – 04

Course Outcome (CO): At the end of this course, the students will be able to

CO1: Understand and experience the UNIX environment, File system and hierarchy.

CO2: Demonstrate commands to extract, interpret data for further processing.

CO3: Apply commands to perform different tasks on various applications

CO4: Analyze the usage of different shell commands, variables and AWK filtering.

CO5: Evaluate different commands with sample shell scripts

Modules Teaching Hours

Module -1 10 Hours

Introductionof UNIX and Shell:

Introduction, History, Architecture, Experience the Unix environment, Basic

commands ls, cat, cal, date, calendar, who, printf, tty, sty, uname, passwd, echo,

tput, bc, script, spell and ispell, Introduction to Shell Scripting, Shell Scripts, read,

Command Line Arguments, Exit Status of a Command, The Logical Operators &&

and ||, exit, if, and case conditions, expr, sleep and wait, while, until, for, $, @,

redirection. The here document, set, trap, Sample Validation and Data Entry

Scripts.

Module -2 10 Hours

UNIX File System:

The file, what’s in a filename? The parent-child relationship, pwd, the Home

directory, absolute pathnames, using absolute pathnames for a command, cd,

mkdir, rmdir, Relative pathnames, The UNIX file system. Basic File Attributes: Is –

l, the –d option, File Permissions, chmod, Security and File Permission, users and

groups, security level, changing permission, user masks, changing ownership and

group, File Attributes, More file attributes: hard link, symbolic link, umask, find.

Module -3

10 Hours

Simple Filters:

Pr, head, tail, cut, paste, sort, uniq, tr commands, Filters using Regular Expression :

grep&sedgrep, Regular Expression, egrep, fgrep, sed instruction, Line Addressing,

Inserting and Changing Text, Context addressing, writing selected lines to a file, the –

f option, Substitution, Prosperities of Regular Expressions Context addressing, writing

selected lines to a file, the –f option, Substitution, Properties of Regular Expressions.

Module -4 10 Hours

Awk and Advanced Shell Programming:

Awk-Advanced Filters: Simple awk Filtering, Splitting a Line into Fields, printf, the

Logical and Relational Operators, Number Processing, Variables, The –f option,

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

10

BEGIN and END positional Parameters, get line, Built-in variables, Arrays, Functions,

Interface with the Shell, Control Flow. The sh command, export, cd, the Command,

expr, Conditional Parameter Substitution, Merging Streams, Shell Functions, eval,

Exec Statement and Examples

Module -5 10 Hours

Process and System Administration:

Process basics, PS, internal and external commands, running jobs in background,

nice, at and batch, cron, time commands, Essential System Administration root,

administrator’s privileges, startup & shutdown, managing disk space, cpio, tar,

Customizing the Environment : System Variables, profile, sty, PWD, Aliases,

Command History, On-line Command Editing. Advanced System Administration: Case

Study: emacs editor and any one distribution of Linux.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have ten questions.

• Each full question consists of 16 marks.

• There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions) from each module.

• Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

• The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Your UNIX-The Ultimate Guide, Sumitabha Das, Tata McGrawHill,

Reference Books:

1. “Unix Shell Programming”, YashwantKanetkar,

2. “Beginning Shell Scripting”, Eric Foster-Johnson, JohnCWelch,

MicahAnderson, Wroxpublication.

3. UNIX: Concepts and Applications, Sumitabha Das, Tata McGrawHill,

4. “Introduction to UNIX” by M.G.Venkatesh Murthy.

Web Technologies

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

11

[As per Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) scheme]

SEMESTER – I

Subject Code 16MCA13 CIE Marks 20

Number of Lecture Hours/Week 04 SEE Marks 80

Total Number of Lecture Hours 50 SEE Hours 03

CREDITS – 04 Course Outcome (CO): At the end of this course, the students will be able to

CO1: Understand the fundamentals of web and thereby develop web applications using various

development languages and tools.

CO2:Build the ability to select the essential technology needed to develop and implement web

applications

CO3: Use Scripting language utilities for static and dynamic environment

CO4: Design XML document with presentation using CSS and XSLT.

CO5: Develop CGI applications using PERL.

Modules Teaching Hours

Module -1 10 Hours

Web Fundamentals

Internet, WWW, Web Browsers and Web Servers, URLs, MIME,

HTTP, Security, the Web Programmers Toolbox. Evolution of the Web, Peak into

the History of the Web, Internet

Applications, Networks, TCP/IP, Higher Level Protocols,

Important Components of the Web, Web Search Engines, Application Servers

Module -2 10 Hours

Introduction to XHTML and CSS

Basic syntax, Standard structure, Basic text markup, Images, Hypertext Links. Lists,

Tables, Forms, Frames, syntactic differences between HTML and XHTML.

Cascading Style Sheets: Introduction, Levels of style sheets, Style specification

formats, Selector forms, Property value forms, Font properties, List properties, Color,

Alignment of text, The box model, Background images, The <span> and <div> tags,

Conflict resolution.

Module -3 10 Hours

The basics of JavaScript

Overview of JavaScript, Object orientation and JavaScript, general Syntactic

characteristics, Primitives, operations, and expressions, Screen output and keyboard

input, Control statements, Object creation and modification, Arrays, Functions,

Constructors, Pattern matching using regular expressions, Errors in scripts,

JavaScript and XHTML Documents

The JavaScript Execution Environment, The Document Object Model, Elements

Access in Java Script, Events and Event Handling, Handling Events from Body

Elements, Handling Events from Text Box and password Elements, The DOM2

Model, The navigator Object, Dom Tree Traversal and Modification.

Module -4 10 Hours

Dynamic Documents with JavaScript: Introduction, Positioning Elements, Moving

Elements, Element Visibility, Changing Colors and Fonts, Dynamic Content, Stacking

Elements, Locating the Mouse Cursor, Reacting to a Mouse Click, Slow Movement of

Elements, Dragging and Dropping Elements

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

12

Introduction to XML

Introduction, Syntax of XML, XML Document Structure, Document type definitions,

Namespaces, XML schemas, displaying raw XML documents, Displaying XML

documents with CSS, XSLT style sheets, XML processors, Web services.

Module -5 10 Hours

Perl and CGI Programming

Origins and uses of Perl, Scalars and their operations, Assignment statements and

simple input and output, Control statements, Fundamentals of arrays, Hashes,

References, Functions, Pattern matching, File input and output; Examples.

Using Perl for CGI Programming: The Common Gateway Interface; CGI linkage;

Query string format; CGI.pm module; A survey example; Cookies.

Question paper pattern:

• The question paper will have ten questions.

• Each full question consists of 16 marks.

• There will be 2 full questions (with a maximum of four sub questions) from each module.

• Each full question will have sub questions covering all the topics under a module.

• The students will have to answer 5 full questions, selecting one full question from each module.

Text Books:

1. Robert W.Sebesta : Programming the World Wide Web, 4thEdition, Pearson education, 2012.

(Chapters 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)

2. M.Srinivasan: Web Programming Building Internet Applications, 3rdEdition, WileyIndia, 2009.

(Chapter 1)

Reference Books:

1. Jeffrey C.Jackson: Web Technologies-A Computer Science Perspective, Pearson Education, 7th

Impression, 2012.

2. Chris Bates: Web Technology Theory and Practice, Pearson Education, 2012.

3. Internet Technology and Web Design, Instructional Software Research and Development(ISRD)

Group, TataMcGrawHill,2011 Raj Kamal : Internet and Web Technologies, McGraw Hill

Education

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

www.android.universityupdates.in | www.universityupdates.in | www.ios.universityupdates.in

13